THE DEMOCRATIC SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF SRI LANKA

MINISTRY OF TRANSPORT & HIGHWAYS

ROAD DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY

KANDY MULTIMODAL TRANSPORT TERMINAL

DEVELOPMENT PROJECT
FUNDED BY

WORLD BANK

REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL

(Single Stage Two Envelope)

For

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF KANDY MULTIMODAL

TRANSPORT TERMINAL

RFP NO.: RDA/WB/KMTT /ICB/W/01

Volume 1 Part 1 Request for Proposal Procedures

Section I Instructions to Proposer (ITP)
Section II Proposal Data Sheet (PDS)
Section III Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
Section IV Proposal Forms
Section V Eligible Countries
Section VI Fraud and Corruption

Volume 2 Section VII Part 2 Employer’s Requirements

Employer’s Requirements

Volume 3 Section VII Part 2 Employer’s Requirements(Continued)

Annex to Employer’s Requirements

Volume 4 Section VII Part 2 Employer’s Requirements(Continued)

Drawings

Volume 5 Part 3 Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms

Section VIII General Conditions (GC)
Section IX Particular Conditions (PC)
Section X Contract Forms

October 2022
 Request for Proposals
Works
Design and Build
(Single-Stage Two Envelope)

Procurement of a Contractor for

Design and Construction of Kandy Multimodal
Transport Terminal
RFP NO.: RDA/WB/KMTT /ICB/W/01

Volume 02 of 05

Employer : Road Development Authority

Project : Kandy Multimodal Transport Terminal Development Project
Contract Title : Design and Construction of Kandy Multimodal Transport Terminal
Country : Sri Lanka
Credit No. : 6623-LK(CONCESSIONAL CREDIT) & 6624-
LK(NON CONCESSIONAL CREDIT)
RFP NO. : RDA/WB/KMTT /ICB/W/01
Issued on : 01.10. 2022
 Part 1 Request for Proposal Procedures
-
Section I Instructions to Proposers (ITP)
-
Section II Proposal Data Sheet (PDS)
- Volume 01 of
Section III Evaluations and Qualification Criteria 05
-
Section IV Proposal Forms
-
Section V Eligible Countries
-
Section VI Fraud and Corruption

Part 2 Employer’s Requirements

Employer’s Requirements Volume 02 of 05

--
Volume 03 of 05
Section VII Annexes to Employer’s Requirement
-
Volume 04 of 05
- Drawings

Part 3 Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms

-
Section VIII General conditions
-
Section IX Particular Conditions Volume 05 of 05
-
Section VII Contract Forms
Section VII

SECTION II - EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENT

A. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL (ES) REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 1

A.1. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 2

A.2. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL COMMITMENT PLAN ........................................... 2

B.SCOPE OF WORK............................................................................................................... 12

B.1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 13

B.2. PROJECT LAYOUT .......................................................................................................... 14

B.3. BACKGROUND STUDY .................................................................................................. 15

B.4. OBJECTIVES ..................................................................................................................... 17

B.5. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................. 18

B.6. PROJECT BRIEF ................................................................................................................ 19

B.6.1 MAIN FEATURES ....................................................................................................... 20

B.6.2. FUNCTIONALITY BRIEF .......................................................................................... 21

B.6.3 TERMINAL BUILDING .............................................................................................. 21

B.6.4. PARKING BUILDING ................................................................................................ 24

B.6.5 ARCADE BUILDING .................................................................................................. 28

B.6.6. VERTICAL CORES..................................................................................................... 28

B.6.7. UNDERPASS ............................................................................................................... 29

B.6.8. SKY WALK ................................................................................................................. 29

B.6.9. RENOVATION OF GOODS SHED 1 AND GOODS SHED 3 BUILDINGS ........... 30

B.7. SPECIAL FEATURES ...................................................................................................... 30

B.8. CONSTRAINTS TO THE DESIGN ................................................................................... 32

B.9. GUIDELINE PRINCIPLES FOR DESIGN DEVELOPMENT ......................................... 33

C.SITE INFORMATION ........................................................................................................ 36

i
Section VII

C.1. KANDY CITY PROFILE................................................................................................... 37

C.1.1. SITE LOCATION ........................................................................................................ 37

C.1.2. ADJACENT LAND AND FEATURES....................................................................... 40

C.2. TOPOGRAPHY SURVEY ................................................................................................. 40

C.3. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL BASELINE DATA ................................................. 40

C.3.1. ENVIRONMENT DATA ............................................................................................ 40

C.3.2. SOCIAL DATA ......................................................................................................... 47

C.4. GROUND INVESTIGATION DATA ................................................................................ 48

C.5.UTILITY RECORDS ........................................................................................................... 48

C.5.1. KMC WATER PUMPING MAIN LINE ..................................................................... 49

C.5.2. TELECOMMUNICATION AND ELECTRICITY LINES ......................................... 49

C.5.3. SEWERAGE LINE ...................................................................................................... 49

C.6. LAND OWNERSHIP INFORMATION ............................................................................ 49

C.7. GROUND WATER, SURFACE WATER AND HYDROLOGICAL

INFORMATION......................................................................................................................... 49

C.8. STATUARY PLANNING AND ZONING CONSTRAINTS............................................ 50

C.9. ORDERS CONSENTS PERMITS, LICENSES AND COMPLIANCE

REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 50

C.10. DEMOLITION OF EXISTING BUILDINGS ................................................................. 50

C.11. CONSTRAINTS TO BE CONSIDERED IN THE DESIGN .......................................... 50

C.12. ANY OTHER PHYSICAL CONSTRAINTS .................................................................. 51

D. CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE AND KEY PERSONNEL ............................ 52

D.1 CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE AND KEY PERSONNEL................................. 53

D.2 KEY STAFF REQUIRED: .................................................................................................. 54

D.3 OTHER STAFF REQUIRED: ............................................................................................. 55

D.3.1 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION .............................................................................. 55

D.3.2. ARCHITECTURAL WORKS ..................................................................................... 56

D.3.3 STRUCTURAL & CIVIL WORKS.............................................................................. 57

ii
Section VII

D.3.4. ELECTRICAL WORKS .............................................................................................. 58

D.3.5. WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE WORKS ......................................................... 59

D.3.6. MECHANICAL WORKS ............................................................................................ 60

D.3.7. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY WORK ................... 62

D.3.8. ROADS AND PAVEMENTS WORKS ...................................................................... 63

E.SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................................... 65

E.1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................... 66

E.1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................... 66

E.1.2. EMPLOYER'S CONCEPTUAL DRAWINGS ............................................................ 66

E.1.3. GEOTECHNICAL AND OTHER INFORMATION................................................... 66

E.1.4. DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY ....................................................................................... 67

E.1.5. TEMPORARY FACILITIES ....................................................................................... 78

E.2. ARCHITECTURAL ............................................................................................................ 85

E.2.1. FINISHES AND ALTERNATIVES: ........................................................................... 85

E.2.2. CONSTRUCTION STAGE ........................................................................................ 115

E.2.3. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 117

E.2.4. STANDARDS, REGULATIONS, GUIDELINES AND SPECIFICATIONS TO BE

FOLLOWED ......................................................................................................................... 118

E.3. STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL WORK .............................................................................. 120

E.3.1 STRUCTURAL ........................................................................................................... 120

E.3.2 CIVIL WORK.............................................................................................................. 123

E.3.3 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING ........................................................... 123

E.3.4 OPEN EXCAVATION ................................................................................................ 124

E.3.5. CONCRETE WORKS ................................................................................................ 126

E.3.6. REINFORCEMENT ................................................................................................... 146

E.3.7. DESIGN, SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS ...... 157

E.3.8. STRUCTURAL STEEL ............................................................................................. 173

E.3.9. MASONRY WORKS ................................................................................................. 180

iii
Section VII

E.3.10. PAINTING................................................................................................................ 182

E.3.11.WATERPROOFING ................................................................................................. 185

E.3.12. PLASTERING .......................................................................................................... 192

E.4. ELECTRICAL WORK...................................................................................................... 194

E.4.1. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT ................................................................................ 194

E.4.2 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................... 197

E.4.3 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 199

E.4.4 MEDIUM VOLTAGE (MV) DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ......................................... 200

E.4.5 LOW VOLTAGE (LV) DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.................................................. 204

E.4.6 STANDBY POWER SYSTEM ................................................................................... 218

E.4.7 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY.............................................................................. 225

E.4.8 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (LPS) .......................................................... 226

E.4.9 SOLAR PHOTO VOLTAIC (PV) SYSTEM .............................................................. 227

E.4.10 GREEN ASPECTS .................................................................................................... 230

E.4.11 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROLLING ................................................. 231

E.4.12 PREFERRED LIST OF MANUFACTURERS / MAKES ........................................ 231

E.4.13 TRAINING OF EMPLOYER’S STAFF ................................................................... 231

E.4.14 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS AND CONSUMABLES .................................................. 231

E.4.15 MAINTENANCE STRATEGY ................................................................................ 232

E.4.16. MINIMUM QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS OF EXECUTION OF

SPECIALIZED ELECTRIC WORK .................................................................................... 232

E.4.17. LIST OF PREFERRED MANUFACTURES – ELECTRICAL WORKS ............... 233

E.5. WATER SUPPLY, DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE WORKS ............................................ 235

E.5.1. SCOPE OF WORKS .................................................................................................. 235

E.5.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 236

E.5.3. BUILDING WATER SUPPLY .................................................................................. 239

E.5.4. BUILDING DRAINAGE WORKS ............................................................................ 245

E.5.5. RAINWATER HARVESTING .................................................................................. 246

iv
Section VII

E.5.6. STORM WATER DISPOSAL SYSTEM................................................................... 248

E.5.7. SANITARY INSTALLATIONS ................................................................................ 250

E.5.8. SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT ............................................................................ 252

E.6. MECHANICAL WORKS ................................................................................................. 254

E.6.1. GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 254

E.6.2. SCOPE OF WORKS .................................................................................................. 254

E.6.3. APPLICABLE STANDARDS ................................................................................... 255

E.6.4. SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT ................................................................................ 260

E.6.5. GREEN ASPECTS ..................................................................................................... 261

E.6.6. PRODUCT REVIEW AND FACTORY INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURE’S

FACILITIES.......................................................................................................................... 261

E.6.7. WARRANTY ............................................................................................................. 264

E.6.8. MAINTENANCE STRATEGY ................................................................................. 264

E.6.9. SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................. 265

E.7. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY WORK ........................ 293

E.7.1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION................................................................................... 293

E.7.2. DATA NETWORK AND TELEPHONE NETWORK SYSTEMS........................... 294

E.7.3. CCTV / IP SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM ................................................................... 296

E.7.4. PUBLIC ADDRESS AND PIPE MUSIC SYSTEM (PAPMS) ................................. 300

E.7.5. PARKING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .................................................................... 302

E.7.6. DOOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (DACS) ...................................................... 303

E.7.7. VEHICLE (BUS) TRACKING SYSTEM ................................................................. 307

E.7.8. PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM ................................................................ 316

E.7.9. ELECTRONIC TICKETING SYSTEM .................................................................... 319

E.7.10. COMPUTERS FOR TERMINAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ............................. 322

E.7.11. LED WALL DISPLAYS FOR TERMINAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ............. 323

E.7.12. PRINTERS FOR TERMINAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .................................. 324

E.8. INTERNAL ROADS AND PARKING AREA ................................................................ 325

v
Section VII

E.8.1. GENERAL R E Q U I R E M E N T S............................................................................... 325

E.8.2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 331

E.8.3. WORK REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 333

F. DOCUMENTS AND DETAILS EXPECTED WITH THE PROPOSAL AND AFTER

AWARDING OF THE CONTRACT .............................................................................. 339

F.1. ARCHITECTURAL .......................................................................................................... 340

F.1.1. SUBMISSION OF CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL (BEFORE AWARD OF

CONTRACT) ........................................................................................................................ 340

F.1.2.CONTRACTOR’S DOCUMENTS (AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT) ............... 341

F.2. STRUCTURAL ................................................................................................................. 343

F.2.1.DOCUMENTS TO BE INCORPORATED IN THE PROPOSAL AT THE BIDDING

STAGE (DESIGN APPROACH)\ ........................................................................................ 343

F.2.2. STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA ....................................................................... 344

F.3. ELECTRICAL ................................................................................................................... 344

F.3.1. SUBMISSION OF CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL (ALONG WITH THE ..... 344

F.3.2. SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS AFTER THE AWARD OF THE CONTRACT 346

F.4. WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE .............................................................................. 348

F.4.1. SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS ALONG WITH THE PROPOSAL ................... 348

F.4.2.SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS AFTER THE AWARD OF THE CONTRACT . 349

F.5. MECHANICAL ................................................................................................................. 351

F.5.1. SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS ALONG WITH THE PROPOSAL .................... 351

F.5.2. SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS & DRAWINGS AFTER THE AWARD OF THE

CONTRACT ......................................................................................................................... 355

F.5.3. SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS & DRAWINGS DURING THE HANDING

OVER – HANDING OVER DOCUMENT .......................................................................... 357

F.6. ROADS .............................................................................................................................. 358

F.6.1.SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS AFTER THE AWARD OF THE

CONTRACT ......................................................................................................................... 358

vi
Section VII
G. ANNEXURES TO EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENT.......….….……VOLUME 03 OF 05

H. DRAWINGS……………………………………………………..………VOLUME 04 OF 05

List of Tables

Table A.1: Material Measures and Actions ...................................................................................... 4

Table B.1: Functionality Brief ........................................................................................................ 21
Table B.2: Passenger Amenities in KMTT .................................................................................... 25
Table B.3: Operational and Management Amenities in KMTT ..................................................... 25
........................................................................................................................................................ 25
Table B.4: Vertical Cores ............................................................................................................... 29
Table C.1: Water Quality of the Main Waterbodies Located near the Project Sites ...................... 43
Table C.2: Quality of Ground water Located near Project Sites .................................................... 44
Table D.1: Contract Administration Staff ...................................................................................... 55
Table D.2: Architectural Design Team........................................................................................... 56
Table D.3: Architectural Construction Team ................................................................................. 57
Table D.4: Structural Design Team ................................................................................................ 57
Table D.5: Structural Construction Team....................................................................................... 57
Table D.6: Electrical Design Team ................................................................................................ 58
Table D.7: Electrical Construction Team ....................................................................................... 58
Table D.8: Water Supply and Drainage Design Team ................................................................... 59
Table D.9: Water Supply and Drainage Construction Team .......................................................... 59
Table D.10: Mechanical Design Team ........................................................................................... 60
Table D.11: Mechanical Construction Team .................................................................................. 61
Table D.12: ICT Design Team ....................................................................................................... 62
Table D.13: ICT Construction Team .............................................................................................. 62
Table D.14: Road and Pavements Design Team ............................................................................ 63
Table D.15: Road and Pavement Construction Team .................................................................... 63
Table E.1: Employer/ Engineer’s Facility....................................................................................... 78
Table E.2: Finishes and Alternatives .............................................................................................. 85
Table E.3: Tolerances for concrete structures .............................................................................. 131
Table E.4: Chemical composition of bullets ................................................................................ 149
Table E.5: Carbon equivalent ....................................................................................................... 149
Table E.6: Mechanical properties of reinforcement bars ............................................................. 151

vii
Section VII

Table E.7: Chemical properties of reinforcement bars ................................................................. 151

Table E.9: Quality assurance plan ................................................................................................ 154
Table E.10: Grading of sand for Plastering .................................................................................. 192
Table E.11: Mix Proportions for Plastering.................................................................................. 193
Table E.12: Design Illumination Levels ....................................................................................... 212
Table E.13: List of Preferred Manufactures ................................................................................. 233
Table E.14: Target performance of fixtures ................................................................................. 251
Table E.15: Recommended Products, Materials and Equipment ................................................. 253
Table E.16: Site Environmental Conditions ................................................................................. 254
Table E.17: Air Conditioning and Ventilation System................................................................. 260
Table E.18: Elevators and Escalators ........................................................................................... 260
Table E.19: Fire Detection and Protection System ....................................................................... 261
Table E.20: Major Equipment for Mechanical System ................................................................ 264
Table E.21: Type of Sprinklers..................................................................................................... 272
Table E.22: Types of portable extinguishers ................................................................................ 273
Table E.23: Average Outdoor conditions ..................................................................................... 276
Table E.24: Indoor conditions ...................................................................................................... 276
Table E.25: Occupancy Density ................................................................................................... 276
Table E.26: Performance data of glasses ...................................................................................... 276
Table E.27: Air changes per hour (ACH) ..................................................................................... 277
Table E.28: Infiltration rate .......................................................................................................... 277
Table E.29: Acoustic criteria ....................................................................................................... 277
Table E.30: Design Margins ......................................................................................................... 278
Table E.31: Areas need to be air-conditioned .............................................................................. 278
Table E.32: Schedule of Elevators ............................................................................................... 287
Table E.33: Parameters of dispensing units/pumps ...................................................................... 289
Table E.34: Design Criteria .......................................................................................................... 327
Table F.1: Documents and Details Expected With the Proposal .................................................. 353

List of Figures
Figure B.1. Location of KMTT ..................................................................................................... 14
Figure B.2: Foot Print of KMTT .................................................................................................... 15
Figure C.1: Map of Project Site ...................................................................................................... 38
Figure C.2.: Areas Affected During Construction Period .............................................................. 39

viii
Section VII

Figure C.3: Topography map of the Project area ........................................................................... 41

Figure C.4: Hydrological network in the project area .................................................................... 43
Figure C.5: Air Pollutant concentrations in the KMC area ............................................................ 45

ix
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

A. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL (ES)

REQUIREMENTS

1
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

A.1. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL REQUIREMENTS

The Environmental and Social requirements have been based on The World Bank
Environmental and Social Framework. Accordingly, project has completed the Environmental
and Social Impact Assessment and resettlement action Plan for all resettlement activities of the
project. Both reports have already been published in Ministry web site. Accordingly,
Environmental and Social Commitment Plan has been prepared on which all parties involved in
the project have to commit and adhere in implementation of the project. Environmental Safeguard
Measures are given below.

A.2. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL COMMITMENT PLAN

1. The Government of Sri Lanka will be implementing the Kandy Multimodal Transport
Terminal Project (the Project), with the involvement of the following
Ministries/agencies/units: Ministry of Transport & Highways/ Road Development
Authority. The International Development Association (hereinafter the Bank/the
Association) has agreed to provide financing for the Project.

2. The Government of Sri Lanka will implement material measures and actions so that the
Project is implemented in accordance with the Environmental and Social Standards
(ESSs). This Environmental and Social Commitment Plan (ESCP) sets out the material
measures and actions, any specific documents or plans, as well as the timing for each of
these.

3. The Government of Sri Lanka will also comply with the provisions of any other E&S
documents required under the ESF and referred to in this ESCP, such as Environmental
and Social Management Plans (ESMP), Resettlement Action Plans (RAP), and
Stakeholder Engagement Plans (SEP), and the timelines specified in those E&S
documents.

4. The Government of Sri Lanka is responsible for compliance with all requirements of the
ESCP even when implementation of specific measures and actions is conducted by the
Ministry, referenced in 1. above.

5. Implementation of the material measures and actions set out in this ESCP will be
monitored and reported to the Bank by the Government of Sri Lanka as required by the
ESCP and the conditions of the legal agreement, and the Bank will monitor and assess

2
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

progress and completion of the material measures and actions throughout implementation
of the Project.

6. As agreed by the Bank and the Government of Sri Lanka, this ESCP may be revised from
time to time during Project implementation, to reflect adaptive management of Project
changes and unforeseen circumstances or in response to assessment of Project performance
conducted under the ESCP itself. In such circumstances, the Ministry of Transport &
Highways/ Road Development Authority will agree to the changes with the Bank and
will update the ESCP to reflect such changes. Agreement on changes to the ESCP will be
documented through the exchange of letters signed between the Bank and the Ministry of
Transport & Highways/ Road Development Authority. The Ministry of Transport &
Highways/ Road Development Authority will promptly disclose the updated ESCP.

7. Where Project changes, unforeseen circumstances, or Project performance result

in changes to the risks and impacts during Project implementation, the Government of Sri
Lanka shall provide additional funds, if needed, to implement actions and measures to
address such risks and impacts.

3
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

Material Measures and actions to be committed by the proposer are given in Table A.1.

Table A.1: Material Measures and Actions

Responsible
No. Material Measures and Actions Timeframe
Entity/Authority
MONITORING AND REPORTING
A REGULAR REPORTING
 Prepare & submit to the Bank regular monitoring reports
on the environmental, social, health and safety issues & Every six months, within Supervision Consultant,
performance of the Project, including but not limited to the 15 days of the end of the
implementation of the ESCP, status of preparation and six-month period
implementation of E&S documents required under the
ESCP, stakeholder engagement activities, functioning of
the grievance mechanism(s).
 Engage stakeholders and third parties (independent experts, Every quarter, within 15 Supervision consultant
local communities, and NGOs) to complement or verify days of the quarter
PMU’s own monitoring activities.
 Collaborate with other agencies and third parties who are Throughout project Supervision consultant
responsible for managing specific risks and impacts and implementation
implementing mitigation measures to establish such
mitigation measures.
B INCIDENTS AND ACCIDENTS
 Promptly notify the Bank through PMU of any incident, Within 24 hours of the Supervision consultant,
including GBV, or accident related to the Project which incident taking place
has, or is likely to have, a significant adverse effect on the
environment, the affected communities, the public or
workers.

4
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

Responsible
No. Material Measures and Actions Timeframe
Entity/Authority
 Provide sufficient detail regarding the incident or accident, Within 3 days of the Supervision consultant/
indicating immediate measures taken or that are planned to incident/accident taking Contractor
be taken to address it, and any information provided by any place
contractor and supervising entity, as appropriate.

 Prepare a report on the incident or accident and propose any Within 7 days of the Supervision consultant/
measures to prevent its recurrence. incident/accident taking Contractor
place
C CONTRACTOR’S MONTHLY REPORTS
 Ensure that contractors submit their monthly performance Monthly, within 5 days of Supervision Consultant
reports, including implementation of the ESMP, to the end of the month
PMU.
ESS1: ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL RISKS AND IMPACTS
1.1 ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL ASSESSMENT
 Support the PMU to update, adopt, and implement, the At finalization of civil Supervision Consultant
Environmental and Social Management Plan that has been works designs, and
prepared for the Project in line with the finalized design, in implement through civil
a manner acceptable to the Bank. works
 Incorporate climate and disaster risks-related Finalization of detailed Supervision Consultant,
elements/measures into the project design. project design Contractor, PMU
 Ensure carryout a crack survey to establish the baseline Prior to commencement Supervision Consultant
condition of structures in the buffer zone (100m radius of civil works
from project boundary) prior to commencement of
construction.

5
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

Responsible
No. Material Measures and Actions Timeframe
Entity/Authority

1.3 MANAGEMENT TOOLS AND INSTRUMENTS

 Implement ESMP to manage project’s environmental and Throughout the Supervision Consultant
social risks and impacts in accordance with the timeframes construction period
specified and review the status of implementation of ESCP
as part of ESF monitoring and reporting.
 Monitor and evaluate the implementation of the ESMP, Monthly, within 5 days of Supervision Consultant
including Contractor’s ESMP. end of month

1.4 MANAGEMENT OF CONTRACTORS

 Include relevant sections of the ESMP, SEP, LMP (that will Prior to tender publishing PMU E&S Staff, Supervision
fall under the purview of the contractor) in the bidding Consultant
documents.
 Ensure the contractor submits to the PMU the following At finalization of detail Supervision Consultant
plans, in a form that is acceptable to the client and in line designs prior to the
with the client’s ESIA/ESMP contractor being
mobilized at site and
o Contractor’s ESMP
before commencement of
o Waste Management and Disposal Plan
any civil works
o Health and Safety Plan
o Road safety monitoring plan
o Traffic management plan

 Carry out regular monitoring to ensure that all contractors Throughout the Supervision Consultant
engaged on the project operate in a manner consistent with construction period
the requirements of the ESSs, including the specific
requirements set out in the ESCP.

6
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

Responsible
No. Material Measures and Actions Timeframe
Entity/Authority
ESS2: LABOR AND WORKING CONDITIONS

2.1 LABOR MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

 Implement the labor management procedures (LMP) Throughout the project Supervision Consultant and
prepared in accordance with the requirements of national period Contractor
law and ESS2, which clearly spells out the (i) terms and
conditions of employment; (ii) measures to ensure
nondiscrimination and equal opportunity; (iii) provisions to
form workers’ organizations; and (iv) prevention of child
and forced labor
2.2 GRIEVANCE MECHANISM FOR PROJECT WORKERS
 Ensure establishment, maintain, and operate a grievance Information relating to Supervision Consultant
redress mechanism for Project workers to raise workplace GRM to be disseminated
concerns, as described in the LMP and consistent with to project workers prior to
ESS2. commencement of any
works
Effective GRM for
workers maintained
throughout project
implementation.
2.3 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (OHS) MEASURES

 Ensure Prepare, adopt, and implement a Health and Safety Prior to commencement Supervision Consultant
Plan as specified in the ESMP including emergency of civil works and
prevention and preparedness specified in 1.2 above. throughout project
implementation

7
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

Responsible
No. Material Measures and Actions Timeframe
Entity/Authority
ESS3: RESOURCE EFFICIENCY AND POLLUTION PREVENTION AND MANAGEMENT
 Ensure preparation of GHG emission assessment and Prior to the Supervision Consultant
3.1 mitigation plan for the construction phase. commencement of the
civil works contract
 Develop measures to ensure KMTT is designed, Design & construction Supervision Consultant and
3.2 constructed and operated with environmentally sound stage Contractor
systems for solid/wastewater collection and disposal

 Adopt and implement resource efficiency measures in Throughout final design PMU E&S Staff, Supervision
design, construction and operation of the KMTT, as per preparation and Consultant and Contractor.
green design criteria and measures outlined in the ESMP. implementation
3.3  Obtain the Green Building Accreditation for KMTT from
UDA. Ensure that final building designs and construction
methods are aligned with accreditation criteria and that
application for accreditation be filed at the end of project
closure
ESS4: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
4.1 COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY
 Recruit a health and safety expert to the contractor’s team With the commencement Contractor, Supervision
to obtain specialist guidance on managing anticipated of the civil works contract Consultant and PMU
safety risks throughout the construction and operational
phases through appropriate designs, construction methods
and operational mechanisms.
 Evaluate the risks and impacts of the project on the health Prior to the PMU E&S Staff, Supervision
and safety of communities, and incorporate mitigation commencement of the Consultant and contractor
measures into the project specific Health and Safety Plan civil works contract
to avoid (i) safety risks causing from structural elements of

8
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

Responsible
No. Material Measures and Actions Timeframe
Entity/Authority
the project and; (ii) incremental risks of public’s potential
exposure to operational accidents or natural hazards,
including extreme weather events;
 Ensure preparation and implementation of an emergency Prior to commencement Supervision Consultant
response plan during construction and operation phases of of civil works /Contractor
the project.
 Conduct independent reviews throughout the stages of During construction stage Supervision Consultant and
project design, construction, operation, and Contractor
decommissioning particularly when structural elements or
components of a project area are situated in high-risk
locations, including those with risk of extreme weather or
slow onset events, and their failure or malfunction may
threaten the safety of communities.
 Establish and implement appropriate quality management Throughout the project Supervision Consultant and
systems to anticipate and minimize risks and impacts of period contractor
services provided by project on community health and
safety.
 Incorporate sufficient mitigation measures in the final Prior to the Supervision Consultant and
ESMP to avoid health and safety risks on communities, commencement of the contractor
including GBV risks, that may be caused from behavior of civil works
project workers, labor influx, and emergency situations.
 Incorporate adequate mitigation measures into the ESMP Prior to the Supervision Consultant and
to avoid or minimize the potential for community exposure commencement of the contractor
to water-borne, water based, water-related, and vector- civil works
borne diseases and communicable and non-communicable
diseases, that could result from project activities, taking
into consideration the higher sensitivity of vulnerable

9
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

Responsible
No. Material Measures and Actions Timeframe
Entity/Authority
groups.
4.2 TRAFFIC AND ROAD SAFETY
 Ensure Development and implementation a traffic Prior to commencement Supervision Consultant
management plan including technically and financially of civil works
feasible road safety measures throughout project life cycle
to avoid potential traffic and road safety risks to workers,
communities, and road users.
4.3 GENDER BASED VIOLENCE (GBV) AND SEXUAL EXPLOITATION AND ABUSE (SEA)
 Incorporate appropriate measures, based on GBV risk Prior to commencement Supervision Consultant
assessment as recommended in World Bank’s Good of civil works
Practice Note, to both Contractor’s ESMP and the
contractual agreements.
ESS5: LAND ACQUISTION, RESTRICTIONS ON LAND USE AND INVOLUNTARY RESETTLEMENT
5.1 RESETTLEMENT PLAN
5.2 COMMUNITY ENGAGEMENT
5.3 COMPENSATION AND BENEFITS FOR AFFECTED PERSONS
5.4 GRIEVANCE REDRESS MECHANISM (see under ESS10)
ESS6: BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION AND SUSTAINABLE MANAGEMENT OF LIVING NATURAL RESOURCES
 Develop and adopt appropriate measures in the ESMP to Prior to commencement Supervision Consultant,
prevent contamination of the Meda Ela from the of civil works Contractor
construction of the proposed infrastructure.
ESS7: INDIGENOUS PEOPLES/SUB-SAHARAN AFRICAN HISTORICALLY UNDERSERVED TRADITIONAL LOCAL
COMMUNITIES

10
Section VII A. Environmental and Social (ES) Requirements

Responsible
No. Material Measures and Actions Timeframe
Entity/Authority
Not applicable to KMTT
ESS8: CULTURAL HERITAGE
 Implement the chance find procedures in the ESMP for During construction Supervision Consultant,
chance find archaeological objects encountered during period Contractor
construction with expert recommendations from the
Department of Archaeology as necessary.
ESS9: FINANCIAL INTERMEDIARIES
Not applicable to KMTT
ESS10: STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT AND INFORMATION DISCLOSURE
10.1 STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT PLAN (SEP) PREPARATION AND IMPLEMENTATION
10.2 GRIEVANCE REDRESS MECHANISM
CAPACITY SUPPORT (TRAINING)
 Provide training to contractors and project workers on (i) At contract mobilization Supervision Consultant,
occupational health and safety (OHS); (ii) labor and repeated during Contractor
management procedures (LMP); (iii) emergency project implementation as
prevention and preparedness and response arrangements to needed.
emergency situations; and (iv) prevention of gender-based
violence and sexual exploitation and abuse (v) Chance find
procedures for archaeological assets

11
Section VII B. Scope of Work

B. SCOPE OF WORK

12
Section VII B. Scope of Work

B.1. INTRODUCTION

Kandy Multi-modal Transport Terminal (KMTT) is planned to be located in a place that is

predominantly surrounded by a number of colonial style buildings (Railways stores, Post office
building, Bogambara Prison and Railway Station and Building Structures). It will also be located
in the urban context of Kandy city, which has traditional Kandyan Architecture (characterized by
temple architecture). Another key feature of KMTT would be its geographical positioning which
will be in the valley of Hantana and Bahirawa Kanda.

The conceptual design of KMTT, a transport terminal with modern facilities, and its form has
been determined by its functional requirements. The architectural style does not aim to
“mimic” heritage, rather integrate into the existing site conditions and surrounding landscape.
Instead the KMTT is juxtaposition of the old and new in unified way. The KMTT design
philosophy is such that the built form and architectural design, must remain true to its
functional aspect, and not imitate or copy heritage designs, but to “fit in”. Therefore, the
iconic status of this building, is not through a literal interpretation of a heritage building, but rather,
derived from the modern reiteration and interpretation of traditional design philosophies
within a modern functional setting.

Similarly, the interior of the building has been conceptualized to integrate the modern functional
requirements of the Terminal facility, with that of the traditional.

13
Section VII B. Scope of Work

B.2. PROJECT LAYOUT

Sri Lanka Kandy District

Location Obtained from Google Maps

Figure B.1. Location of KMTT

14
Section VII B. Scope of Work

Figure B.2: Foot Print of KMTT

B.3. BACKGROUND STUDY

The Ministry of Highways with the financial and technical assistance of the World Bank, is
expecting to develop transport facilities in the Kandy, city. It has been recognized that
significant improvement in its transport function is vital for resurgence of Kandy as a heritage city
with modern amenities. The Kandy Transport Improvement Project (KTIP) has examined
requirements for public transport and traffic management in Kandy and recommended an
integrated package of investment and organizational measures. These form one of the core
activities of the Kandy City intervention of the Client.

The core strategy of the KTIP is to improve the quality of public transport in Kandy so that it
would be able to retain its current 60% share of the road passenger transport market in the future
even when per capita incomes increase. It also envisages that the current share of railway passenger
transport be increased to around 10%. Thus, creation of modern infrastructure, improving service

15
Section VII B. Scope of Work

delivery, integration between transport modes and their respective organization and ensuring
sustainability of both the infrastructure and the transport services in the future becomes specific
long-term development objectives for Kandy. A comprehensive set of traffic management
measures also forms a central part of KTIP and the Client. These will enhance the functionality
and quality of the city, and will significantly improve the operating environment for public
transport in Kandy.

Taking recommendations of KTIP forward, Ministry of Defence and Urban Development

commissioned a study to suggest improvements in Public Transport system and prepare a Traffic
Management Plan (PTTM) to improve the traffic circulation in Kandy. As a summary, extracted
from PTTM report - 2015/16, [1] the following major issues were identified. Approximately
330,000 passengers were boarding and alighting per day at all three spatially scattered bus
terminals namely (1) Good-shed, (2) Clock-tower and (3) Torrington. These scattered terminals
forced to transfer a high rate of the passengers between terminals and it created high pedestrian
movements adversely contributing to the traffic congestion in the city roads. The lack of the
pedestrian walking facilities, poor passenger services, lack of accessibility and infrastructure
further increased the discomfort not only for transferring passengers but also to the passengers
who ends their trip in Kandy.

There are a total of 294 bus routes (215 intra-provincial and 79 inter-provincial routes)
serving the City of Kandy provided by both private as well as government owned (Sri Lanka
Transport Board -SLTB) bus operators. Schedule bus arrivals under the current service plan (inter
and intra provincial services) at the time of study stands at 7039 trips per day (24 hours) on a total
294 routes. A similar number of departures are also planned aggregating of over 14,000
scheduled bus movements per day. Nevertheless only 71% of the schedules are operated on
an average day, resulting in around 4,968 bus arrivals an equal number of departures making a
total of approximately 10,000 bus movements per 24 hours. It is expected to handle 330,000
passengers per day with over 5000 bus trips from 193 bus routes mainly from 3 bus corridors.

Out of 5000 bus trips around 2100 bus trips will be terminated at the KMTT at boarding and
alighting bays. All other bus trips will be converted to touch and go trips where they will have
bays to unload and pick passengers and continue the trip to other destination of the trip or
back to the origin. By this rearrangement, demand for bus parking within city will be reduced and
the bus parking will be provided within KMTT only for the routes terminated at KMTT. Out of
5000 bus-trips, only 3% of bus-trips were by-passing the Kandy City and the rest of 97%
(including both intra and inter) were terminating at those three terminals.

16
Section VII B. Scope of Work

Out of terminating bus-trips, 69% terminated at Goods shed terminal, 22.5% at Clock Tower and
the balance 5.5% terminated at Torrington bus terminal. Out of 333,000 passengers, almost 43%
of these passengers were through passengers who require transfers from one bus to another bus to
complete their journey while the balance 57% ended their journey in the Kandy city area. Based
on above facts, the study has emerged with the conceptual plan of Kandy Multimodal Transit
Terminal (KMTT) that is likely to reduce the negative impacts of bus operations on the city
traffic. It has been conceived to capture synergies of integrated

interventions in public transport and traffic management with a view to improve the overall
operating environment for bus services in Kandy. Moreover, the new terminal building
should be a modern and iconic piece of infrastructure for Kandy City while aligning to its
architectural heritage. The detail design of KMTT would consider the below mentioned
improvement/features of KMTT and the design brief annexed to this RFP as the
supplementary document.

B.4. OBJECTIVES
Major improvements targeted by this KMTT development are:

 Bringing all three existing bus terminal scattered around Kandy city under one roof at
Good-shed area (also referred to as KMTT) of nearly three acres of land adjacent to Kandy
railway station eliminate unnecessary walking along city roads for transfers.

 Bus route operational changes through infrastructure modification within the terminal by
providing four different types of bus bays for „Touch and Go‟, „Boarding and
Alighting‟, „Layover Parking‟, „Operation & Maintenance‟ with different bays.

 Provision of easy access for passengers both from Peradeniya road and William
Gopallawa Mw by connecting those two roads with a skywalk which connect the KMTT,
the railway station and the Kandy Hospital with vertical access.

 Provision of „Kiss-and-Ride‟ facility at ends of skywalk along both Peradeniya road and
William Gopallawa Mw.

 Direct access for people from Kandy hospital to both bus and railway terminals and to
Peradeniya road via „Kiss-and-Ride‟ facility along William Gopallawa Mw, which
would be then connected via an extended skywalk on hospital side along William
Gopallawa to convert movement of passengers from „valley‟ to straight path.

 Necessary provisions for an elevated pedestrian connection shall be provided to the

17
Section VII B. Scope of Work

skywalk at Vertical Core 9 location, in order to provide access to the Bogambara Ground
along the William Gopallawa Mawatha as per a pending proposal in future. (Refer Section
G - Drawings)

 Additional provision to be provided at the Terminal Building for an elevated bridge

over the railway track for bus movement connecting the Terminal Building and
Baladaksha Mawatha (Refer Figure B.1)

 Parking facility for para-transit modes like three-wheel, taxi, and also limited parking for
private vehicle as well.

 Avoiding at-grade crossing between passengers and buses as much as possible

through elevated and/or underpass accesses, limiting through movement of other vehicles
through KMTT facility.

 Provision of long layover parking area for buses, fuelling facility for buses, ticketing
facilities, passenger waiting areas, passenger information system through full-fledged
Terminal Operating System (TOS), loading bays for long layover buses, Touch-and- Go
bays for short layover buses, infrastructure facility provision for future integration of bus
operation with railway with seamless access and payment gates by proving a common
platform between both bus and railway terminal, commercial vendors for passenger
convenience, rest area for bus drivers, office space for regulators and terminal control
staffs, ATM facilities, etc.

The design of the KMTT shall also fulfill the operational requirements identified in PTTM project
consultants' reports. The Design & Build Contractor shall prepare a matrix of design requirements
and features of the design and report in design reports how those are satisfied by the design.

B.5. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

In order to accomplish the construction of a modern bus terminus at KMTT whose design
integrates easy passenger movement to abutting railway station and contains all the bus operations
and passenger-centric facilities, amenities with the look and feel of a world class terminus and also
to allow for future volume growth and commuting habits and its impact on the termini and
surrounding areas, roads etc. for the next 20 years the expected design should comprise of main
features described below.

Along with the Employer‟s Requirement the Employer also provides a Concept Design based on
the demand required for bus operation and the space available at the proposed location. As per the

18
Section VII B. Scope of Work

Concept Design, and the main objectives following features should be incorporated in the design.

 Bus Bays for dropping and picking passengers

 Parking spaces of buses inside KMTT

 Intermediate transport mode facility such as auto rickshaw, taxi, car, etc. for accessing
KMTT

 Safe and separate entry for buses and passengers

 Measuring station for environment quality management

 Passenger movement integration with different modes between bus, railway and
intermediate transport.

 Ease of transfer between different modes

 Efficient bus and passenger movement and circulation plan

 Modern passenger amenities and concourse

 Technology assisted fare pre-payment system

 Passenger information system

 Environmental concerns - reductions in energy use, pollution, noise and visual

intrusion as well as environmentally sensitive urban design.

 Physical infrastructure such as rooms for Operation Control Centre, Electronic

Ticketing Machine downloading, Rest rooms for Crew etc. for installation of technology
assisted TOS (Terminal Operating System) for efficient bays, parking and layover control
and management at KMTT

 Compatibility with heritage architecture flavor of Kandy city

B.6. PROJECT BRIEF

19
Section VII B. Scope of Work

B.6.1 MAIN FEATURES

KMTT Concept Designs provided by the Employer have been developed around two key
design arrangements.

 Building Arrangement

 Circulation Arrangement

Building Arrangement

The building arrangement consists of three buildings.

 Terminal B u i l d i n g which provides terminal facility spanning over three levels,

connected through an underground passageway and an overhead skywalk.

 Parking Building for Bus Bays and Parking areas spanning over the two floors-
ground and first floor level of KMTT.

 Arcade Building houses vendors‟ shops and other commercial facilities in the Ground floor
and rest room facilities for Railway Staff in the upper floor.

Circulation Arrangement

This arrangement also consists of two main segments namely

 Vehicle circulation is expected to be provided through ramps and road network within
KMTT premises

 Pedestrian / Passenger circulation to be provided via vertical cores (stairs, ramps,

elevators and escalators) skywalk, underpass connections.

Pedestrian access to KMTT shall be provided along the Skywalk through the following access
points:

1) Entrance 01 from Peradeniya Road (North Western side)

2) Entrance 02 From William Gopallawa Mawatha (South Eastern side)

3) Entrance 03 from Railway Track

4) Entrance 04 from Post office side and High school side of SWRD Bandaranayake Mw

Each arrangement will be elaborated below. The Proposer shall integrate the two
arrangements effectively along with the guidance provided in the Concept Design. Special features

20
Section VII B. Scope of Work

explained in Section B.7 shall also be incorporated in the final design.

B.6.2. FUNCTIONALITY BRIEF

Table B.1: Functionality Brief

SN Attribute Mention Annotations
(1) Terminal Typology Inter-provincial and intra-provincial including local routes
(2) Terminal Size Approximately 12 acres
(3) Land owning State Owned Land
Agency
(4) Terminal Central Province Passenger Transport Services Authority (CP-
PTSA)
Management
(5) Passengers flow Estimated footfall of 3,30,000 persons Growth Projections:
per day
(during 24 hours)
KMTT’s Main Complex 2% in passenger
volumes over the next
Nearly 65,000 passengers will terminate
5 years
their journeys at KMTT and equal number
of passengers will wait inside KMTT
terminal area for boarding the long route
buses
Touch-n-Go Area in KMTT
Nearly 100,000 passengers will alight
from touch-n-go buses who will dwell
around briefly around the KMTT complex
and equal number of passengers will wait
in this area on the designated platforms
to board the T-n-G buses.
(6) Bus flow a) About 2089 bus departures with Figures estimated
equal number of arrivals. Both intra have factored in
(during 24 hours)
and inter provincial route buses will enhanced operation
commence their trips from KMTT and ratio of 80% (from
shall require regular fixed bay area for current 71 %.)
dropping/picking passengers. (B & A
Bays)
b) About 3381 intra-provincial bus
departures with equal number of arrivals.
Both will be pass through from KMTT in
separate Touch-n-Go bays

B.6.3 TERMINAL BUILDING

21
Section VII B. Scope of Work

The main terminal building of the KMTT will be a three-story building. The majority of the
passenger movement will be confined to this building. The bus operation; Touch and Go and
Boarding and Alighting bays will be located within the terminal building. The functional
requirement of the building has been specified as below.

B.6.3.1 FACILITY REQUIREMENT

There shall be facilities for bus operation, monitoring, and administration. Stair cases, ramps,
elevators and escalators for passenger movement including facility for disabled persons shall also
be provided. Facilities required by passengers as washrooms & toilets, rest rooms, seating
area, ticketing area, public information displays and centers, food and shopping outlets shall
be also provided within the terminal as specified below.

Features expected in Ground Floor Level

 22 Bus Parking bays, 5 Boarding & Alighting bays and 13 Touch & Go bays

 Provision for 2 dedicated Operation and Management Bay for buses

 Emergency vehicle bay

 Vertical circulation cores- elevators, staircases

 Connections to the both underground pedestrian walkways

 Driveways around the building

 Circulation ramps for buses

 Min of 30 nos. shops for commercial activities (6‟X6‟)

 Adequate seating arrangement for the passengers

 Area for operations and administration

 Fast foods & Takeaway shops area Refer Table B.2 & B.3 for
Passenger & operational
 Public Toilet facilities (Male /female /disable)
Amenities
 Enquiries & police post

 Public utilities such as ATM machines & cloak room

Features expected in First Floor Level

22
Section VII B. Scope of Work

 18 „Bus Parking‟ bays, 27 „Boarding and Alighting‟ bays

 Emergency vehicle bay

 Vertical circulation cores – elevators, staircases and public utilities

 Circulation ramps for busses

 Special provision to be designed for a proposed elevated road for bus movement
towards Baladakha Mawatha. (Refer.Figure B.1)

 Area for operations and administration Refer Table B.2 & B.3 for
 Public Toilet facilities (Male /female /disable) Passenger & operational
Amenities
Features expected in Second Floor Level

 Arrival Plaza & Public Concourse

 Vendors‟ Square (Min 30 numbers of 2400mm x 2400mm of shops and stores)
 Other commercial area (Min 08 numbers of 4800mm x 4800mm shops)
 Pedestrian connection towards Peradeniya Road through the Vendors‟ Square
 Pedestrian connection towards William Gopallawa Mawatha along sky walk through
Core 8
 Pedestrian connection towards S.W.R.D Bandaranayake Mawatha through Core 4
 Passenger ticketing (12 counters) and waiting areas (600 seats)
 Lounge and food court (Min 6 Nos food stalls. size 24 Sq.m)
Refer Table
 Passenger utilities (2 mini banks, 08 Nos of ATM/CDM , Public Toilet
B.2 & B.3 for
facilities (Male /female /disable), drinking water, Baby care room,
pharmacy, first aid room, Cloak room Passenger &
operational
 Area for administration and operations of terminal
Amenities
 Staff utilities & amenity area with toilet facility
 Police post
Note: Parking buses in reversed direction (facing the road side) is considered much safer
to the passengers and more convenient for traffic movement. This may be considered in the
design. Bay directions indicated in the concept design may be altered to accommodate the
above requirement.

23
Section VII B. Scope of Work

B.6.4. PARKING BUILDING

The parking building of the KMTT will be mainly used for parking of bus and private
vehicles. The level of passenger circulation within this building will be limited. Within the Ground
Floor of the Parking Building provisions for private vehicle and taxi parking will be provided
while first floor will allocate for bus parking only. However, the private vehicle circulation will
be strictly confined to the Parking building in order avoid any interference with the bus
operation.

Features expected in Ground Floor Level

 Parking area for 40 cars & 60 Three wheelers

 Service connections to first floor Bus Parking

 Circulation ramps

 Drive ways

 Vertical circulation core

 Rest areas for 150(min) nos of bus drivers


Refer Table B.2 & B.3
Food Court of Min
for Passenger &
 Public Toilet facilities (Male /female/Disable) operational Amenities

 Area for administration

Features expected in First Floor Level

 56 „Bus Parking‟ bays

Refer Table B.2 & B.3
 Circulation ramps for busses for Passenger &
operational Amenities
 Public Toilet facilities (Male/Female, Disable)

Note: Features shown in Italic form shall be cross referred with Table B.2 & B.3.

24
Section VII B. Scope of Work

DETAILED MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES TO BE INCORPORATED IN THE TERMINAL

AND PARKING BUILDINGS

a) Common & operational Amenities for Terminal, Operational, Management and

Passenger Comfort

Apart from the specific requirements inside the Terminal and Parking Buildings, following
amenities shall also be provided inside the KMTT premises in order to ensure smooth flow of
operational, management and passenger comfort. Even though preferred locations for the
amenities have been recorded in the table below, the Proposer may decide the most
appropriate location considering a more efficient operational sequence. The Proposer could also
suggest additional floors or Mezzanine floors in order to cater to the given requirement.

Table B.2: Passenger Amenities in KMTT

Preferred Approx.
Building Preferred min.
SN Amenity Qty. T- Terminal Floor floor Remarks
1 Ticketing counters 12 T
P- Parking 2nd F 90
area
2 Mini banks 2 T 2nd F 60
(Sq.M)
6 T 2nd F & GF 60
3 ATM/CDM 2 P GF 20
4 Cloak room 1 T 2nd F 60
6 Stalls in
Eateries and food 24 Sq.M T 2nd F 550
5 court 1 P GF 400
6 (withfoods
Fast seating)
& 1 T GF 30
Takeaway
7 Drinking water T&P All floors
As per the
Toilets(Male, T All floors
standards
8 Female, Disable) P GF
9 Baby care room T 2nd F 15
10 Pharmacy T 2nd F 20
nd
11 First aid room T 2 F 15

Table B.3: Operational and Management Amenities in KMTT

25
Section VII B. Scope of Work

Preferred
Approx. min.
Building Preferred
floor area
SN Amenity Qty T- Terminal Floor Remarks
(Sq.M)
. P- Parking
1 Office Space T or P Any floor Total -715 Total
SLTB - 400 715 Sq.m
CP-PTSA-230 For 3
NTC 85 institutes

2 Enquiry room (3 Counters) 1 T GF 24

3 Defect Reporting Room and 1 T GF 24
Repair room
4 Rest Room (dormitory- 1 P Any floor 550
Bunker beds for 150 crew
members)
5 Locker Room ( for crew and 1 P Any floor 25 Min. 100 no.
staff) of lockers
6 Cash Room 1 P or T Any floor 25
7 Training/conference 1 P or T Any floor 60
Room
Toilet (Crew) with 1 P Any floor As per the
standards
8 shower facilities
(Male and Female)
9 Toilet (Staff) 1 P or T Same as As per the
office standards
(Male and Female)
floors
10 Control Centre for Terminal 1 T GF 150
Operation System

ETM Room for down loading & 1 T GF 35

11 ETM charging racks (Pigeon
hole charging)

12 Data storage- secured room for 1 T GF 15

tapes and data, (near the
control center)
13 Security Posts (portable cabins P and T Gates, Varies at
as well as masonry) GF,1st F,2nd designated
F places
14 Environmental Quality 1 T GF 10
Management Room

b) IT Based Terminal Operating System (TOS)

26
Section VII B. Scope of Work

There will be an IT based Terminal Operating System to control bus operation as well as to provide
information to passengers with respect to time of departure and location of respective bus bay.
The system has already been developed. All hardware requirements along with below listed
facilities for the system need to be included in the construction contract as per the requirement
of the system and information display.

 Space for Workstations (Bus Operation Control Center)

 Space for Display Walls x 4 nos

 Space for key equipment and personnel

Hardware shall be provided to cater to the functions of the Terminal Operating System (Bus
operating Control Centre) mentioned below;

 Live monitoring of Bus Operations and Schedules

 Bus Handling System (instructions to buses, tracking buses to parking,

communicating with operator offices and personnel at platforms, timekeepers etc)

 Bus entry and exit control with barrier operations at selected locations

 Bus identification and number plate recognition facility

 Communications with Time Keepers (at platforms and outside KMTT)

 Bus Crew Communication (through mobile)

 GPS data receipts

 ETM data receipts

 Handling Passenger Complaints (through phones, mobile and passenger app, website)

 Communication with Internal Police post

 Passenger Information Systems

 Communications with external offices

 Connection with rail station and taxi stand

 Passenger Announcements

 Emergency Handling

 Handling Bus Breakdowns, Accidents

27
Section VII B. Scope of Work

 Handling Public Incidents (There should be a separate office for this)

 Tracking of Authorized personnel

 Maintaining the Passenger apps

 Updating schedules

 Maintaining the web portal

 Managing Traffic in and around KMTT and outside

 SMS gateway

 Data Analytics and MIS functions

 Connection with Ticketing and reservation areas

 Entrances Monitoring and Terminal Waiting Areas monitoring

 Bus Loading Gates handling

 Corridors/Walkways (at key locations) monitoring

B.6.5 ARCADE BUILDING

The Arcade building will mainly comprise of;

 Commercial Area with 16 Numbers of 3600mm x 3600mm shops at floor level with
adequate common toilet facility

 16 Numbers of Guest rooms at First and Second floor levels with adequate common

 toilet facility (male, female separate)

 3m wide Pedestrian Arcade

 Access from William Goppallawa Mawatha to sky walk through the Arcade Building

 Access path towards the nine storied accommodation building / rail track through the

 Ground floor of Arcade building.

Note: Please refer “B.8 Constraints to the design” in this section to estimate the impact on
the Arcade building due to the widening of the William Gopallawa road as per the new
proposal submitted by Road Development Authority of Sri Lanka.

B.6.6. VERTICAL CORES

28
Section VII B. Scope of Work

The vertical movement of commuters within the KMTT shall be mainly through lifts, escalators,
ramps and staircases with dedicated facilities for the disabled. There shall be minimum ten vertical
cores. Four main cores will be located inside the KMTT premises while the rest shall be located
outside as indicated in the Concept Design. Cores have been marked as “Vertical Core 1 to 10”

Table B.4: Vertical Cores

Elements Terminal Railway Track Parking Building

Building Area area
Elevators 14
Area 5 0
Escalators 2 6 0
Staircases 5 3 1
Ramps 0 1 1

Note: Number of vertical cores may be increased as per the detailed design with the
passenger flow, standards and building regulations. The Proposer is anticipated to take
necessary actions.

B.6.7. UNDERPASS

The connection that runs in the basement level through the terminal building has been specified
as the Underpass in the Concept Drawing (Refer the mentioned revised areas annexed in
Volume 04 of Drawings). Features required are listed below.

 20 ft. (min) wide pedestrian underpass connection between the main terminal building
(Core 2) and main vertical circulation core (Core 1) which provides access to the skywalk.

 20 ft. (min) Pedestrian under pass connecting main terminal building (Core 3) and
„Goods Shed 01‟(Core 5) through the Pedestrian circulation core near S.W.R.D.
Bandaranayake Mawatha (Core 4)

 Minimum of 35 Numbers of shops (2400mm x 2400mm) for vendors around core 1 & 2.
Graffiti walls shall be include to the design.

 Minimum of 20 Numbers of shops (2400mm x 2400mm) for vendors around core 3, 4 &
Graffiti walls shall be include to the design.

B.6.8. SKY WALK

The skywalk shall be connected between Peradeniya Road and William Gopallawa Mawatha as
shown in Conceptual Architectural Drawings through the terminal building over the Railway

29
Section VII B. Scope of Work

premises with a connection to Railway station, extending towards the Kandy General Hospital
premises. This should provide easy and short distance movement between two roads, KMTT and
Railway station. This pedestrian sky walkway shall be connected to second floor level of the
terminal building where passenger concourse is located. Considering the new access and
connection points facilitated by the skywalk, it has been conceptualized as a large pedestrian
boulevard, with street like commercial and recreational activities.

The main features of the Sky Walk are listed below.

 Approximately 200m long walkway connecting Peradeniya road & William

Goppallawa Mawatha through KMTT

 Extension to the Kandy base hospital.

 Access to the both sides of William Goppallawa Mawatha via two vertical circulation
cores (Staircase and lift).

 Connection to the vertical circulation core (Core 5) providing access to Kandy railway
platform extended with wide lobby area shall be provided for future expansion of
Matale railway platform.

 Connection to the main circulation core (Core 1) providing access to the main
terminal building through an under pass.

B.6.9. RENOVATION OF GOODS SHED 1 AND GOODS SHED 3 BUILDINGS

Goods Shed 1 and Goods Shed 3 buildings shall be renovated for construction of shops. The
Proposer shall bear in mind that the two buildings have been classified as buildings with
archeological features thus special permission shall be obtained from the Department of
Archeology, Sri Lanka. The buildings shall be renovated with special adherence to converse

the prevailing features of the building.

B.7. SPECIAL FEATURES

 Re-fueling Station

30
Section VII B. Scope of Work

There is a need to construct a refuelling station within the KMTT premises. Refuelling station has
to be incorporated into the KMTT according to the guidelines provided by Ceylon Petroleum
Cooperation (CEPETCO). The refuelling station will only serve the private and Sri Lanka
Transport Board (SLTB) buses (not for private vehicles) and will operate as its own facility by the
KMTT operator. It can accommodate fuelling of 04 nos of vehicals at a time. It is anticipated that
02 will be dedicated for SLTB use and 02 for Pvt Buses. In addition to, the facility will have;

- 04 Numbers of Despenser with 02 Numbers hose nozzles in each

- 04 Numbers of 5000 gal underground disel tanks (02 for operation & 02 Nos for Bulk
storage)

- Airpump

- 25 kVA backup generator

- Operational office

 Electrical vehicle recharging facilities

Infrastructure facilities shall be provided at designated locations for Electric vehicle charging.

 Rainwater Harvesting system

Demand and Supply Calculation for the Rainwater harvesting system shall be carried out.
Percentage of total water demand to be fulfilled by Rainwater shall be estimated and provided to
the system accordingly.

 Landscape

The Proposer should carry out the landscape design. The landscape for the removal and reposition
of the old Crane belonging to the SLR at an appropriate location should be included in the
landscape design.

 Solar Panels

Solar Panels shall be introduced to the premises with the intention of fulfilling the electricity
requirement partially or fully. Location for panels shall be decided by the Proposer.

 Sump and Overhead Tank

Water Demand for the users of the building shall be provided within the premises.

31
Section VII B. Scope of Work

 CCTV

The facility will be required in Building Management and Bus Operation Control Room. Special
viewing will be required at Bus Entry Points, Bay areas, Parking areas etc.

 Passenger Information display

At least 3 size of display (Large, Medium and small) shall be located at appropriate locations.
There is no restriction to locate display units for displaying advertisements without interfering the
smooth flow of operations of the KMTT premises.

 Generator, Transformer, Electrical room, pump room

 Solid waste collection area/room with road access

The Proposer is expected to make use of the Concept Design provided by the Employer as a basic
guideline, to integrate the features and functions together and develop the ultimate design to
achieve the objectives at the optimal level. Especially the clear widths of the walkways / skywalk
to be compatible with the passenger flow. The mentioned cases on the concept drawings
(Addendum) should be addressed in the schemetic and detailed design. The Proposer shall also
prepare a new as built site survey (including available actual land area, existing levels, existing
services, etc.) prior to the finalization of the design.

B.8. CONSTRAINTS TO THE DESIGN

 Disruption at site due to Meda- Ela

The Meda Ela is the water body that drains the storm water from city area and over flow of Kandy
Lake. I t r u n s t h r o u g h t h e K M T T s i t e a s a covered underground section and exposes
itself as an open channel outside the boundary. The Proposer is expected to take the location of
the water body into the consideration during the design stage & diversion or refurbishment of the
Meda Ella should be plan out as per the prevailing conditions. (Refer Annexure C1)

 Kandy Municipal Council Water pumping line

The permanent location & level of the KMC water line within the KMTT premises should be
taken in to consideration during the design of underpass & foundations. (Refer Annexure C4)

 Telecommunication and Electricity lines

32
Section VII B. Scope of Work

Telecommunication and Electricity lines have been relocated temporarily to allow easy access and
acquirement of the site. The Proposer is expected to take these temporary locations into account
and carry out his work at site. The Proposer is also anticipated to locate the utility lines
permanently within the KMTT premises. (Refer Annexure C3)

 Sewerage lines

The permanent sewerage lines across the KMTT premises have not been completed. A by- pass
connection is currently in use within the site. The Proposer is expected to consider the future
connection and proper arrangement and permanent path for sewerage line with secondary
connection. (Refer Annexure C3)

 Widening of William Gopallawa Mawatha

As per the Concept Design provided by the Employer, William Goppallawa Mawatha has been
indicated as a two lane road. A new proposal forwarded by the Road Development Authority of
Sri Lanka has decided to widen the road into four lanes. The Proposer is expected to consider
this arrangement in his design. Refer Annex C8 for further clarifications..

 Location of Bo tree and Buddha Statue and Banyan Tree

A Bo tree & a Buddha statue worshiped by people for some time & a vastly spread out Banyan
tree are located within the KMTT premises. Proposer is expected to preserve these items by
incorporating those in to the design.

B.9. GUIDELINE PRINCIPLES FOR DESIGN DEVELOPMENT

With respect to the objectives, design requirements, main features and special features provided
in earlier sections, KMTT designs for architectural design and civil construction shall
need to incorporate and showcase the following guidelines as well;

33
Section VII B. Scope of Work

 Complying with prevailing building regulations, guidelines, planning, zoning and security
concerns of relevant local authorities, UDA and state organizations, Kandy City
Development plans.

 The design shall be substantially responsive to the Employer‟s requirements and the space
allocations indicated in this document.

 The Proposer shall follow international standards and trends applicable to multimodal
transport terminal buildings of this nature.

 The architectural design shall pose appropriate design concepts to endure climatic and
weather conditions prevailing throughout the year of Sri Lanka.

 Demonstrating modern and energy efficient, green building designs for quality
infrastructure that suitably incorporates various architectural facets of the heritage

 The designs shall manifest sensitivities of environment friendly, urban designs that aim to
reduce energy usage, carbon footprint, noise and air pollution level within and surround areas
of the terminal

 Providing appropriate designs that integrate passenger movement from within and around
the surrounding areas of the terminal to the abutting railway station and assimilate all bus-
operations and passenger-centric facilities within the terminal fluidly

 Designs shall account for future demographic & economic growth volumes,
commuting habits and its impact on the terminal, surrounding areas and connected
infrastructure i.e. roads, water supply, sewerage & drainage, power etc. for next 20 years.

 The designs shall ensure safe and easy passenger access to the terminal and include gate
restricted entry to adjoining railway station. It shall include all public safety as well as road
safety measures. Pedestrian walkways, sidewalks and crossings shall be designed for
adequate public safety and convenience. Access shall be provided to the railway area only
at the designated locations / entrances with necessary access control measures.

 Integration of various modes of transit- public as well as private transport such as buses,
railways, three wheelers, private cars and two wheel automobiles with other intermediate
transport within and the surrounding areas of KMTT. The designs shall ensure easy transfer
to various modes and transit points through efficient passenger and vehicular circulation and
safe pedestrian walkways.

34
Section VII B. Scope of Work

 Selection of materials, finishes, fittings and accessories suitable and compatible with the
usage, function, environment and aesthetics of the proposed project.

 The designs shall provide for well-defined and State of Art passenger facilities such as
passenger waiting areas, food courts, ticketing and enquiry counters, drinking water
facilities and rest rooms etc. in the terminal building, adjoining blocks and connected public
areas.

35
Section VII C. Site Information

C.SITE INFORMATION

36
Section VII C. Site Information

C.1. KANDY CITY PROFILE

Kandy city is located at N7 17 37 E80 38 25 at an elevation of 500 m above mean sea level and
115 km from Colombo, Sri Lanka‟s the commercial capital. The city is located on a
mountainous terrain surrounded by the Mahaweli River by 3 sides and the other side by the
Hantane range of hills all of which creates natural transport barriers to reach the city from outside.
Home to the Sri Dalada Maligawa – the beautiful temple that houses the tooth relic of Lord Buddha
– Kandy is also a popular stop during July/August when the annual Esala Perehera (holy festival)
takes to the streets of the city. The cool climate of the hills is a relief after the cloying heat of the
lowlands, and the lovely Kandy Lake and the drives around it are set amidst great scenic beauty.
Kandy is synonymous with arts and crafts of Sri Lanka than anywhere else in the country.

At present Kandy is the capital of the Central Province and has well developed commercial and
service industry considered second only to Colombo and is also a national transport node. The city
was declared as one of the 704 cultural heritage sites in the world by the UNESCO in 1988 and
is thus a popular destination for both foreign and local tourists. With its unique topography and
features, Kandy is a city where there are many constraints for any expansion of its transport
infrastructure.

C.1.1. SITE LOCATION

The proposed location is the present Good Shed busstand which is at the heart of the Kandy city.

The proposed project site will encompass the following lands;

 Current Good Shed bus stand

 Railway land adjacent the Good Shed Bus stand

 Railway lands adjacent to William Gopallawa Mw

 S.W R D Bandaranayake Mw. Which belongs to the Road Development Authority (RDA)
and a small portion of private lands.

The Proposed site is situated in a highly urbanized area of the Kandy City. Geographically it is
at a lower elevation surrounded by hilly areas. The total area of approx. 8 acres encompassing the
project site and 500m from the perimeter of the site can be defined as project affected area.
Map of project site and areas affected during construction period is provided in Figure C.1 &
Figure C.2.

37
Section VII C. Site Information

Figure C.1: Map of Project Site

38
Section VII C. Site Information

Figure C.2.: Areas Affected During Construction Period

39
Section VII C. Site Information

C.1.2. ADJACENT LAND AND FEATURES

The site is situated in a highly built up area of the city of Kandy adjacent to the Kandy Railway
Station, Kandy old and new Post Offices, Several Government offices and Commercial Buildings. The
site is situated in a lower elevation between Peradeniya road and William Gopallawa Mawatha. The
site borders a number of dilapidated and structurally unsound private buildings along its northern
boundary. In addition, there are number of utility structures located in the proposed project area, such
as electricity lines, water supply, storm water drains, telephone lines etc. Meda Ela, the main drainage
canal that runs through the city traverses underneath the site as a tunnel and opens up at the end of the
project site.

The lands where the KMTT is to be built belong to the Sri Lanka Railway Department (SLRD)
and the Regional Passenger Transport Authority (RPTA) and Road Development Authority (RDA).
The lands in which is the sky walk is to be built belong to the SLRD, the Road Development Authority
(RDA) and a small portion of private land will also be required, and it is under the land acquisition
process and will be cleared by the commencement of the work.

The Kandy Post Office, the Kandy Regional Mail Sorting Centre, the Kandy Postal Training Institute,
Sri Lanka Telecom Regional Office etc. are located adjacent to the KMTT site. Access to these
premises is via the SWRD Bandaranayake Mawatha and will not be interrupted during the construction
phase.

C.2. TOPOGRAPHY SURVEY

The land survey plan is given in the Plan No Maha/MHN/2-17/654R and the topographical plan is
given in Annex C.01.

C.3. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL BASELINE DATA

C.3.1. ENVIRONMENT DATA

The project area lies in the physiographic region of Highlands, and the topography range about
512 m - 515 m MSL. The topography in this area consists of an undulating terrain. The Topography
map of the proposed project area is shown in the following Figure C.3.

40
Section VII C. Site Information

Figure C.3: Topography map of the Project area

C.3.1.1. Soil (type and quality)

The main soil type is the Reddish Brown Latosolic (RBL) soils and Immature Brown Loams (IBL)
made from the weathering of underlying rocks and boulders and rock outcrops. The top soil of RBL
soil is reddish brown or brown, while the sub soil is red to dark reddish brown and the top soil color
of IBL soil is dark brown to dark gray brown with a dark yellowish brown to brown sub soil.

The texture of RBL soil is mostly clay loam and the distinct feature of this soil is well- developed
structure with friable consistence to tolerate wide range of moisture conditions. Hence, the RBL soil
is very productive.

The texture of IBL soil is loam and contains minerals such as mica and feldspar. Both soil types are
favorable for the deep-rooted trees, which already exists in the area.

The central province including the Kandy district is considered as Central Fragile Area due to the
vulnerability to landslides and hence the Soil Conservation Act No. 25 of 1951, as amended by Act
No.24 of 1996 has been declared as conservation areas. The proposed boundary of the “Conservation
Areas” coincides with the 300m contour line with a few exceptions.

41
Section VII C. Site Information

The National Building Research Organization (NBRO) has delineated such areas in relation to the
degree of the potential risk for development activities. As shown in the Landslide hazard zone
map (Annex 5) of sheet 54 for Kandy (which includes the project area) published by National Building
Research organization and the Survey Department (2000), shows that the proposed project area
denoting in “Yellow” color is considered as “Modest Level of Land slide Hazard” where slight danger
of landslides exists.

Bore hole investigations were done though twenty-five locations for geological survey for representing
the entire site. As per the results, Bedrock consists of Biotite Gneiss and weathered Marble rocks,
upper most layer is a filling which is lateritic filing mixed ungraded garbage and boulders. From the
filled layer to bedrock, dense sand layer is observed. Sand layer is softening closer to groundwater
table due to fluctuation of ground water table.

C.3.1.2. Surface water

The historic Kandy lake and the associated stream network is the most immediate surface water body
in the close proximity to the project site (Figure 5.2). The water floor is towards the Western reach of
the Kandy city, where Meda Ela empties to Mahaweli River at Gatambe junction in 2.4 km from the
site. The Meda Ela spill canal is the most immediate surface water way found at the close proximity
to the project site.

The key hydro morphological features of the Kandy Lake is given below;

The Kandy lake consists of a perimeter of 3.4 km (2.1 mi) and a maximum depth of 18 m (59ft). Spill
level above: 1,740 M.L.S., capacity: 704 acre-feet, catchment area: 1.045 Q.M.I. A decorative wall,
called the „walakulu wall‟, runs for 630 m (2,070 ft) alongside the banks of the Kandy lake. In the
middle of the lake is an island housing the Royal Summer House. The Sri Dalada Maligawa, or the
Temple of the Sacred Tooth Relic, is located besides the lake across the road. On the opposite side of
the road from the Temple of the Tooth Relic is the Royal Bathouse

The pollution levels of the Kandy lake is a serious problem. The Government Agencies and the
surrounding schools are trying to mitigate the problem by controlling polluting inputs into the lake,
monitoring the water quality, placing signs and operating environmental societies. Until 1960, the
Kandy Water Board used the lake to distribute water to the surrounding areas. They stopped
pumping water from the lake because of the increase in water pollution.

42
Section VII C. Site Information

Table C.1: Water Quality of the Main Waterbodies Located near the Project Sites

Waterbody TDS E Coli COD TSS BOD5 PO43- NO3-

(mg/L) (cfu/100 ml) (mg/L) (mg/L) (mg/L) (mg/L) (mg/L)
Kandy Lake 110 55 10 1600 2 34 32 98 2.4 11.9 0.05 0 .12 0.8 20
Meda Ela (UC) 32 184 230 1400 12 130 32 184 3 61 0.08 1.67 0.4 1.3
Mahaweli River 29 315 6 164 3 34 73 440 1.3 3.3 0.2 0.91 1.9 14

(source: http://wepa-db.net/activities/2014/20141127/pdf/2_3_WEPA%20Gemunu%20 Herath%

20Final%2028-11-14.pdf )

The water quality of the main waterbodies located near the project sites are provided in Table C.01.
The Meda Ela (urban canal) is mainly a stream with pollutants. The Kandy lake and the Meda Ela are
eutrophic. High coliform levels found in all sources indicate that surface water is contaminated by
fecal waste.

Figure C.4: Hydrological network in the project area

43
Section VII C. Site Information

The Water is not been used for any purposes due to heavy loads of solid and liquid wastes disposals
by the city dwellers. The excess rain water runoff in the railway land is naturally flowing to Meda
Ela but there is no any drainage network within the site. Flooding can be anticipated in the
downstream of Meda Ela due to the heavy flow of the existing Kandy lake spill way. That is being
controlled and due to rehabilitation of the canal by the SCDP flooding will not be expected.

C.3.1.3. Ground water

Groundwater in Kandy exists mostly in the form of semi-confined Aquifers in the first 100 m of the
bedrock. This groundwater exists both as small pockets of underground reservoirs and as fissure
groundwater. The yields of these aquifers are not very well known and are limited as they recharge
very slowly. In addition, there exist high-yielding groundwater resources along the alluvial flood
plains of Mahaweli River that are mostly recharged by the river water.

The amount of groundwater use by the piped water supply schemes within the Kandy region is
estimated at 8,567 m3/day (around 12 % of the total piped water supply). Further, the percentage of
the population relying on groundwater in the district is almost 52% and individual domestic
groundwater consumers are estimated to be using approximately 15 million m3 annually.

The project site is at a highly urbanized area and the pipe bone water is available for use.

Table C.2: Quality of Ground water Located near Project Sites

Waterbody TDS E Coli COD TSS BOD5 PO43- NO3-

(mg/L) (cfu/100 ml) (mg/L) (mg/L) (mg/L) (mg/L) (mg/L)
Groundwater 80-105 4-680 16-20 6-58 - 0.2-0.4 3.1-6.2
in the city
(source: http://wepa-db.net/activities/2014/20141127/pdf/2_3_WEPA%20Gemunu%20Herath%20
Final%2028-11-14.pdf)

The quality of groundwater located near the project sites are provided in Table C.02. High levels of
coliform found in the groundwater indicate that the groundwater is contaminated by fecal waste

C.3.1.4. Air quality

Air emissions by sources such as vehicular and commercial emissions are the major pollutant sources
that contribute baseline ambient air quality levels in the area. Measured ambient air quality levels by
NBRO with respect to SO2, NO2, CO, O3 and PM10 and PM25 were below the Ambient Air Quality
Standards stipulated by the Ministry of Environment & Natural Resources of Sri Lanka
(Extraordinary Gazette No. 1562/22 August 15, 2015 )

44
Section VII C. Site Information

Figure C.5: Air Pollutant concentrations in the KMC area

(Source: Monitoring of Baseline Ambient Air Quality Levels measured by National Building
Research Organization (NBRO)-2015 for the SCDP)

C.3.1.5. Ecological features – Eco-system components

a. Vegetation

Biogeographically, the proposed sub-project area lies within the wet zone, but it is closer to the
boundary of the intermediate zone. Floristically it is under the Kandy and upper Mahaweli floristic
zone. Tropical Wet Evergreen Forests and Humid Zone Dry Patana Grasslands are typical natural
vegetation formations in the Kandy and Upper Mahaweli Floristic Zone.

The land in and around the proposed sub-project area are within the Kandy city centre and as such
has been under human influence and cleared for human settlements and urban developments for
a long time. Therefore, the area is devoid of any significant natural floral and faunal habitats,
excepting a few large scattered trees which will be preserved and integrated to the proposed
development.

Overgrown grass and shrubbery will be cleared to make space for additional parking space

45
Section VII C. Site Information

b. Presence of wetlands

No wetlands are presence at the proposed site

c. Fish and fish habitats

Medaela runs through the KMTT site, however, no fish species have been recorded in the canal
due to high pollution levels of its water

d. Birds

No waterfowls and migratory bird species encountered within the sub-project area. Few terrestrial
bird species were identified in and surrounding area of the proposed project. Crows, Kingfisher
and Minas were observed at the area during the field visits.

e. Presence of special habitat areas

There are no special habitats around the area as the area surrounding the proposed site is highly
urbanized and built up area.

C.3.1.6. Other features

a. Residential / Sensitive Areas

Proposed project area is situated facing the Kandy Peradeniya road, which is one of the most
congested roads in Kandy during School and office hours. Kandy General Hospital is located
within 500m radius. Girls‟ High School and Swarnamali Girls‟ College are also situated very
close to the proposed site. In addition to these government schools, private educational
institutions, few residential places, commercial shopping complexes, hotels and private business
places are situated around the proposed project area.

b. Traditional economic and cultural activities

The sacred Temple of Tooth Relic and associated activities take place once a year during the
Kandy Esala Perahera Festival is the main cultural event happens in the area. The Kandyan art,
paintings and hand crafts and Kandyan cultural dancing, Brass and wooden carvings are the most
famous traditional economic activities found in and around the Kandy area

c. Archeological resources

The Department of Archaeology has investigated locations for artifacts of high historical and
archaeological interest in the surrounding but not within the project location.

Proposed sub project involves on the interventions related to improvement of existing

facilities in the site and hence, there will be no interference with the archeological objects.

46
Section VII C. Site Information

C.3.1.7. Climate

The area has an average minimum and maximum monthly wind velocities of 0.5m/s
(January) and 8.0m/s (May). The main prevailing wind directions are Westerly from January to
March, South Westerly from April to October and North Westerly from November to December

The maximum and minimum average air temperatures are 26 degrees Centigrade (in April) and
23 degrees Centigrade (in January). Humidity varies in range of 63% (in January) and 90% (in
September)

The annual average rainfall is 2000- 2300 mm. The barometric pressure in the area range
from 900 to 1000 mbar.

The Proposer shall take into account the risk of any operation of forces of nature including but not
limited to the 20 years maximum flood level, 10 years rain fall.

Contractor shall obtain relevant data from Meteorology Department of Sri Lanka, Disaster
Management Center.

C.3.2. SOCIAL DATA

KMTT is expected to require acquisition of 3.6742 hectares of land, out of which 99.5% is public
land under the ownership of various government agencies (i.e., SLR, SLTB and Kandy Teaching
Hospital). While private acquisition is expected to be minimal, economic displacement will be
significant with 841 businesses, mobile vendors, shop assistants, three- wheelers, etc., operating
in the existing bus station and/or its immediate buffer zone, being affected.

The land earmarked for the construction of the Kandy Multimodal Transport Terminal (KMTT)
is largely a crown land vested with a number of government agencies largely rail and bus
operators. The land is currently used for public and private bus operations is known as Goods
Shed Bus Stand (GSBS). Many business establishments catering to the needs of bus commuters
have been established on this land with or without the consent or mediation of government
agencies holding the land. In effect, the impacts of KMTT is not so much related to losses caused
by acquisition of land but due to livelihood disturbances and economic displacement caused by
clearance of the existing business enterprises from the site of KMTT and resulting loss of
livelihoods for business operators and their employees, intermediaries between government
agencies with land rights or rights over the buildings allocated to these intermediaries for business
operations and/or tenants and actual business operators and, finally, persons making a living
from mobile trade or three wheel taxi services catering to the commuters.

The social impact assessment (SIA) conducted as part of due diligence was based on preliminary

47
Section VII C. Site Information

engineering design of October 2017. The SIA included inventorizing the project impact area, a
census of all project affected persons, and preparation of an inventory of losses (IOL) for all APs.

The project will affect a total of 841 economic operators whom were operating in GSBS or its
immediate buffer zone. The total household population among these economic operators is

3,688 as established through the census of APs conducted as part of the SIA related to
KMTT. The project related economic damages include both permanent and temporary loss of
livelihoods due to permanent demolition of all commercial and other structures located inside the
technical boundary (ITB) of GSBS and temporary access difficulties and loss of their client
base during the construction of KMTT that will be experienced by many of the commercial
establishments in immediate buffer zone (IBZ). The largest number of APs were shop assistants
working in GSBS or nearby shops (245), followed by rentiers who draw rent incomes from the
business establishments in ITB or IBZ (213), business operators (161), mobile vendors (150) and
three wheel operators serving bus commuters (65). Of these various categories of APs, shop
assistants and mobile vendors may be considered as particularly vulnerable because they possess
limited assets, limited reserves and limited skills that could be applied for the purpose of
livelihood restoration. All these affected parties has been compensated and arranged for
alternative livelihood through a compensation package. A system has been developed for
monitoring and guiding them in the process of the livelihood restoration activity for a period of 3
years.

As such the site is clear from the occupant at present. However there are 5 families of Sri Lanka
railway staff occupying 2 buildings belongs to Sri Lanka railways whom to be provided
with temporary accommodation through Sri Lanka Railways by paying rental to Sri Lanka
Railways until they are provided with permanent accommodation. The permanent accommodation
is to be constructed by the project through separate contract which will be probably completed by
Mid-2023.

C.4. GROUND INVESTIGATION DATA

Soil investigation of the site has been carried out at selected location of the land area identified
for the construction. The soil investigation report is given in Annex C.2 for the reference of the
Proposer.

C.5.UTILITY RECORDS

Plan showing the utility lines are given in Annex C.3. All these lines have been diverted to these

48
Section VII C. Site Information

permanent or temporary locations to release the land for the construction of KMTT. These lines
also shown on the Annex C1 – Topographical survey plan.

C.5.1. KMC WATER PUMPING MAIN LINE

The Plan showing in Annex C.4 is the permanent location of Kandy Municipal Council water
main & DI pipes of this water main has been laid with a 1 m clearance from the ground level. This
shall be considered in the design & construction of foundation & under pass levels.

C.5.2. TELECOMMUNICATION AND ELECTRICITY LINES

The Telecommunication lines and Electrical lines that were existed at the site have been
relocated to temporary location mainly along the boundary of the site so that the construction of
main building can be carried out without disturbance to them. Plan showing new temporary
telecommunication and electricity line location are given in Annex C.3.

Permanent arrangement of these utility lines are to be included within the KMTT design as a
utility duct or corridor with provision for outside connection. It is required to discuss with utility
agencies for the location, arrangement, dimensions of these utility ducts

C.5.3. SEWERAGE LINE

Under the Kandy Waste Water Management Project, sewage lines have been laid recently
in the vicinity of Goods Shed area and one main line & some peripheral lines have been planned
through the KMTT site as well. The laying of that part within the site premises was delayed till
the completion of foundations of the KMTT & laying of this section has to be done under the
KMTT construction. (Refer Annexure C3)

C.6. LAND OWNERSHIP INFORMATION

KMTT is expected to require acquisition of 3.6742 hectares of land, out of which 99.5% is public
land under the ownership of various government agencies (i.e., SLR, SLTB and Kandy Teaching
Hospital). While private land acquisition is expected to be minimal, economic displacement will
be significant with 841 businesses, mobile vendors, shop assistants, three- wheelers, etc.,
operating in the existing bus station and/or its immediate buffer zone, being affected.

The KMTT is being constructed on land that belongs to the State entities as per the Tracing number
Maha/MHN/2017/654 Prepared by Survey General (Annex C.5). Only small private land of
2 Land lot (1.46Perchs) to be acquired.

C.7. GROUND WATER, SURFACE WATER AND

49
Section VII C. Site Information

HYDROLOGICAL INFORMATION

This information is given in Geotechnical Investigation Report given in Annex C.2

C.8. STATUARY PLANNING AND ZONING CONSTRAINTS

As per the UDA planning Zone classifications this area has been classified as commercial and
transport zones in the city. Planning approval as the development permit has already been obtained
from UDA.

C.9. ORDERS CONSENTS PERMITS, LICENSES AND

COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS

The Central Environmental Authority (CEA) clearance has already been obtained for the proposed
construction it is required to renew the clearance every year (Annex C.6). Urban Development
Authority (UDA) development permit has already been obtained with the approval of National
Building Research Organization (NBRO). All other permits licenses and compliance requirements
have been addressed in the environmental requirement component of Employer‟s Requirement.

C.10. DEMOLITION OF EXISTING BUILDINGS

Few buildings & structures in the premises need to be demolished to make space for the project
as given in Annexure C-7. Necessary actions shall be taken by the proposer.

C.11. CONSTRAINTS TO BE CONSIDERED IN THE DESIGN

• Disruption at site due to Meda- Ela

The Meda Ela is the water body that drains the storm water from city area and over flow of Kandy
Lake. After the spillway, this runs underground for a major section and becomes an open channel
from outfall and runs up to Goods Shed bus stand where the proposed KMTT will be constructed
and crosses the existing bus stand as a covered underground section and exposes itself again as an
open channel. When design and construction is carried out the Proposer is expected to take the
location of the water body into consideration and plan out his proposal.

It also needs to be considered that with the rapid urbanization of the city the canal has been
encroached at several places and poses a threat to flooding of the surrounding areas.

The section of the covered drain in the Project area is also in a poor state. Therefore, required

50
Section VII C. Site Information

improvements to the Meda Ela for its existing path; or diversion of the Meda Ela as per the
proposed design should be carried out by the Proposer. Further, canal improvement for 300m long
section along the Meda-El towards upstream of the stream shall also be carried out with a suitable
silt trap by the Proposer. (Refer Annexure C1)

• Widening of William Gopallawa Mawatha

There is a new proposal forwarded by the Road Development Authority of Sri Lanka to widen
the William Gopallawa Mawatha road into a four lanes road. But this road has been indicated as
a two lane road, as per the Conceptual drawings provided by the Employer. The Proposer is
expected to consider this broadening in his design. Refer Annex C8 for further clarifications.

• Location of Bo tree, Buddha Statue & Banyan Tree

The Bo-tree and the Buddha Statue in the premises, have been worshipped by the people for some
time. Further a vastly spread Banyan tree is also located within the proposed premises for a long
time. The proposer is expected to preserve these features by incorporating these attributes into
the design.

C.12. ANY OTHER PHYSICAL CONSTRAINTS

• Limitation of space:

As the construction site is located within the heart of the Kandy city, the land availability is very
much limited. The Proposer is expected to schedule and manage his works, machine yards,
material storage, labour camp, site office etc. within the limited space available.

• Constructions near Rail Track:

The construction activities of part of the Terminal & Parking building & the Sky walk have to be
carried out very close to the existing rail track and over the rail track. As the rail tracks are in
operation all the time, constructions near rail track have to be carried as per the guidelines issued
by the Sri Lanka railways. Proposer shall address these situations while preparation of his
construction methodologies.

51
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

D. CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE AND KEY

PERSONNEL

52
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

D.1 CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE AND KEY PERSONNEL

Only the minimum Key Personnel required executing the Contract, taking into account the nature,
scope, complexity and risks of the Contract have been specified here. If the Proposer/ Contractor
feels that there are additional requirement those shall be considered and included while preparing
the Proposal.

Key staff engaged shall meet the prevailing legal requirement and regulations of the Sri Lanka.

Chartered Engineer, Engineer, Chartered Architect, Chartered Quantity Surveyor shall have the
following minimum qualifications in addition to the other qualifications and experience specified
for respective key personnel.

Local Key Personnel

 Chartered Engineer referred in the RFP shall be registered under the Engineering Council
of Sri Lanka (ECSL) as a chartered Engineer.

 Engineer referred in the RFP shall be registered under the Engineering Council of Sri
Lanka (ECSL) as Associated Engineer.

 Chartered Architect referred in the RFP shall be an Associate Member of the Sri Lanka
Institute of Architects (SLIA) or shall have the qualification accredited by SLIA to enter
in to the class of Associate Member.

 Architect referred in the RFP shall be a Graduate Member of the Sri Lanka Institute of
Architects (SLIA) or shall have the qualification accredited by SLIA to enter in to the class
of Graduate Member.

 Chartered Quantity Surveyor referred in the RFP shall be an Associate Member of

Institute of Quantity Surveyors Sri Lanka

Foreign Key Personnel

 Foreign Key Personnel shall have the provisional registration before practicing

 Foreign Key Personnel shall have the equivalent qualification similar to the respective
local Key Personnel

53
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

D.2 KEY STAFF REQUIRED:

Position Qualification Total Working Specific No.

Experience Experience
Project Manager Chartered Engineer 20 years At least one 1
(Civil) or with an experience after previous project
equivalent graduation. involved in
internationally similar nature
recognized Professional & 15 years
Qualification. experience in
Building
projects

Team Leader- Chartered Architect or 15 years At least one 1

Design with an equivalent experience after previous
internationally graduation projects
recognized Professional involved in
Qualification. similar nature
& 10 years
experience in
building
projects.
Senior Passenger Chartered Engineer 15 years At least one 1
Terminal Design (Civil) or with an experience after previous
Engineer equivalent graduation projects
internationally involved in
recognized Professional similar nature.
Qualification & P o s t
Graduate qualification
in transport
engineering with
minimum of 05 years
of post- charter
experience
Chief Engineer Chartered Engineer 15 years 10 years in 1
(Civil) with post experience after Structural
(Structural
graduate qualification graduation designs in
Design)
in Structural building
Engineering and listed projects
in directory of
Structural Engineers
prepared by IESL for
middle rise buildings up
to 08 storied.

54
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

Position Qualification Total Working Specific No.

Experience Experience
Chief Engineer Chartered Engineer 15 years 10 years in 1
(Mechanical / experience after Electrical/
(Mechanical &
Electrical) with post graduation Mechanical
Electrical)
graduate qualifications designs in
and listed in the building
directory of building projects
services engineers
prepared by IESL

Planning & Chartered Engineer 15 years 10 years in 1

Project Control (Civil) experience after building
Engineer graduation projects
Senior Engineer Chartered Engineer 15 years 10 years in 1
(Building- (Civil) experience after building
Quality graduation projects
Assurance)
Senior Engineer Chartered Engineer 15 years 10 years in 1
(M & E- Quality (Mechanical/ experience after building
Assurance) Electrical) graduation projects
Senior Engineer Chartered Engineer 15 years 10 years in 1
(Materials) (Materials) experience after building
graduation projects

D.3 OTHER STAFF REQUIRED:

D.3.1 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION

Table D.1: Contract Administration Staff

Position Qualification Total Working Specific No.

Experience Experience
Deputy Project Chartered Engineer 10 years 8 years 2
Manager (Civil) experience after experience in (full time at
graduation. building site)
projects

Chartered Chartered Quantity Minimum 10 6 years 1

Quantity Surveyor years experience experience in (full time at
Surveyor after graduation building site)
projects

55
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

Position Qualification Total Working Specific No.

Experience Experience
Green Consultant Chartered Engineer More than 10 1
(Electrical/ Mechanical/ years experience (Throughout
Building services) in energy the project
efficiency and period)
green building
designs with
recently
completed
buildings locally/
internationally
Safety Officer/ National institute of 3 years relevant 1
HSE officer occupational safety and experience (full time at
health certificate or site)
diploma
QA/ QC Engineer Chartered Engineer 5 years 1
(Civil/ Materials) experience after
(full time at
graduation site)
Assistant Qualified with NCT 5 years 2
Quantity (QS) experience (full time at
Surveyor site)

D.3.2. ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

D.3.2.1. DESIGN TEAM

Table D.2: Architectural Design Team

Total
Required Minimum
Position Work Specific Experience No.
Qualification
Experience
Chartered Chartered Architect 10 years 8 years experience in 1
Architect experience the building projects.
after
graduation
Architect Architect 5 years 3 years in building 2
after projects
graduation

56
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

D.3.2.2 CONSTRUCTION TEAM

Table D.3: Architectural Construction Team

Required Minimum Total Work Specific

Position No.
Qualification Experience Experience
Chartered Chartered Architect 10 years after 8 years in building 1 (full time
Architect graduation projects at site)
Architect Architect 5 years after 3 years in building 2 (full time
graduation projects at site)

D.3.3 STRUCTURAL & CIVIL WORKS

D.3.3.1. DESIGN TEAM

Table D.4: Structural Design Team

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience

Senior Design Chartered Engineer 10 years 8 years in 2

Engineer (Civil) with experience Structural designs
(Structural Postgraduate after in building
Design) qualification in graduation projects
Structural Engineering.

Design Engineer Engineer 5 years after 3 year experience 2

graduation in structural
designs

D.3.3.2 CONSTRUCTION TEAM

Table D.5: Structural Construction Team

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience
Civil Engineer Chartered Engineer 10 years 8 years in building 2 (full time
experience projects at site)
after
graduation
Civil Engineer Engineer 8 years 5 years in building 2 (full time

57
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience
experience projects at site)
after
graduation
Technical Officer NCT (Civil) 5 years 3 years in building 4 (full time
projects at site)

D.3.4. ELECTRICAL WORKS

D.3.4.1. DESIGN TEAM

Table D.6: Electrical Design Team

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience
Senior Engineer Chartered Engineer 10 years 8 years in 1
(Electrical) after Electrical designs
(Electrical)
graduation in building
projects
Engineer Engineer 8 years after 5 years in 1
graduation Electrical designs
(Electrical)
in multi storied
building projects

D.3.4.2 CONSTRUCTION TEAM

Table D.7: Electrical Construction Team

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience

Senior Engineer Chartered Engineer 10 years 08 years in 1 (Part

(Electrical) (Electrical) after Electrical works of time)
graduation building
construction
projects
Electrical Engineer (Electrical) 5 years after 3 years in Electrical 1 (full
Engineer graduation works of building time at
construction site)

58
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience

projects
Engineer Assistant NVQ Level 6 (Higher 10 years 5 years in Electrical 1 (full
(Electrical) National Diploma in works of building time at
Electrical Engineering) construction site)
or equivalent projects
Technical Officers NVQ level 4 5 years 3 years in Electrical 2 (full
(Electrical) works of building time at
(NCT) or equivalent
construction site)
projects

D.3.5. WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE WORKS

D.3.5.1. DESIGN TEAM

Table D.8: Water Supply and Drainage Design Team

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience
Senior Engineer Chartered Engineer 10 years 08 years 1
(Water Supply and (Engineering Services) after experience in
graduation building plumbing
Drainage)
Design Engineer (Civil) 5 years after 3 years in in 1
graduation building services
Engineer
field.

D.3.5.2. CONSTRUCTION TEAM

Table D.9: Water Supply and Drainage Construction Team

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience
Senior Engineer Chartered Engineer 8 years after Minimum 5 years 1 (Part time
(Engineering graduation experience in
(Water Supply and at site)
Services/Mechanical) building
Drainage)
and listed in the plumbing
directory of building supervision and
services engineers coordination of

59
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience
prepared by IESL building
plumbing & canal
development
Technical NCT or equivalent 5 years Minimum 3 years 1 (full time
experience in
Officer (WSD) at site)
building services

D.3.6. MECHANICAL WORKS

D.3.6.1. DESIGN TEAM

Table D.10: Mechanical Design Team

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience
Mechanical Ventilation and Air conditioning (MVAC)
Senior Design Chartered Engineer 10 years 7 years experience 1
Engineer (Mechanical) and listed after in designing
(Building in the directory of graduation MVAC systems for
Services - building services high-rise buildings
Mechanical) engineers prepared by
IESL
Design Engineer Engineer (Mechanical) 5 years after 3 years experience 1
(Building graduation in designing
Services - MVAC systems for
Mechanical) high-rise buildings
Fire Protection, Detection and Suppression System
Senior Design Chartered Engineer 10 years 7 years experience 1
Engineer (Mechanical) &listed in after in designing Fire
(Building the directory of building graduation protection,
Services - services engineers Detection &
Mechanical) prepared by IESL Suppression
systems for high-
rise buildings
Design Engineer Engineer (Mechanical) 5 years after 3 years experience 1
(Building graduation in designing Fire
Services - protection,
Mechanical) Detection &
Suppression
systems for high-
rise buildings

60
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

Total
Required Minimum Specific
Position Work No.
Qualification Experience
Experience
Building Management System (BMS)
Senior Design Chartered Engineer 10 years 7 years experience 1
Engineer (Mechanical / Electrical) after in designing
(Building and listed in the graduation Building
Services - directory of building Management
Mechanical) services engineers System (BMS)
prepared by IESL
Design Engineer Engineer (Mechanical/ 5 years after 3 years experience 1
(Building Electrical) graduation in designing
Services - Building
Mechanical) Management
Systems (BMS)
Elevator and Escalator System
Senior Design Chartered Engineer 10 years 7 years experience 1
Engineer (Mechanical) &listed in after in designing
(Building the directory of building graduation Elevator and
Services - services engineers Escalator Systems
Mechanical) prepared by IESL
Design Engineer Engineer (Mechanical) 5 years after 3 years experience 1
(Building graduation in designing
Services - Elevator and
Mechanical) Escalator Systems

D.3.6.2. CONSTRUCTION TEAM

Table D.11: Mechanical Construction Team

Required Minimum Total Work Specific

Position No.
Qualification Experience Experience
Senior Mechanical Chartered Engineer 8 years after 5 years 1
Engineer (Mechanical) graduation experience in (Full time
Mechanical at Site)
designs and
installation
supervision in
multi storied
building projects
Mechanical Engineer (Mechanical) 5 years after 3 years 2

61
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

Required Minimum Total Work Specific

Position No.
Qualification Experience Experience
Engineer graduation experience in (Full time
Mechanical at Site)
designs and
installation
supervision in
multi storied
building projects
Technical Officers With NCT or equivalent 7 years 5 years 4
experience in (Full time
building services at Site)
field

D.3.7. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY WORK

D.3.7.1. DESIGN TEAM

Table D.12: ICT Design Team

Required Minimum Total Work Specific

Position No.
Qualification Experience Experience
Senior Engineer Chartered Engineer 10 years after 8 years 1
(Computer /Electronic/ graduation experience in ICT
(ICT)
Telecommunication) design/installation
/ supervision
work at least one
project in similar
nature.
Design Engineer Engineer(Computer/ 5 years after 3 years 1
Electronic graduation experience in ICT
/Telecommunication) design/installation
/ supervision
work.
Site Engineer BSc. in Computer or 5 years 3 years 1
relevant field/ experience in ICT
NDT/HNDE with works.
necessary certifications.

D.3.7.2. CONSTRUCTION TEAM

Table D.13: ICT Construction Team

62
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

Required Minimum Total Work Specific

Position No.
Qualification Experience Experience
Senior Engineer Chartered Engineer 10 years 8 years 1
(Computer /Electronic / after experience in
(ICT) (Part time
Telecommunication) and graduation ICT in high-rise at Site)
MSc or MBA or PMP/ buildings.
PRINCE2

ICT Engineer Engineer(Computer/ 5 years after 3 years 1

Electronic graduation experience in (Full time
/Telecommunication) ICT works
at Site)
Technical BSc. Computer or 2 years 2 years 2
Officers relevant field/ experience in (Full time
NDT/HNDE with ICT works at Site)
necessary certifications.

D.3.8. ROADS AND PAVEMENTS WORKS

D.3.8.1.DESIGN TEAM

Table D.14: Road and Pavements Design Team

Required Minimum Total Work Specific

Position No.
Qualification Experience Experience
Senior Engineer Chartered engineer 10 years after 08 years’ 1
(Civil) with post graduation experience in
(Roads and
graduate qualification in road designs
Pavement
Transport and Traffic including
Engineering pavement design
Design Engineer (Civil) 8 years after 6 years’ 1
graduation experience in
Engineer
Pavement &
Material designs

D.3.8.2. CONSTRUCTION TEAM

Table D.15: Road and Pavement Construction Team

Required Minimum Total Work Specific

Position No.
Qualification Experience Experience
Senior Engineer Chartered engineer 10 years after 8 years in road 1
(Civil) graduation projects
(Roads (Part time
Construction) at Site)

63
Section VII D. Contractor’s Representative & Key Personal

Required Minimum Total Work Specific

Position No.
Qualification Experience Experience

Quality Control Engineer (Civil) 10 years after 6 years in road 1

and pavement graduation projects (Full time
material Engineer at Site)
Technical Officer NDT or equivalent and 10 years 5 years in road 1
respective certifications projects (Full time
at Site)

64
.Section VII E. Specifications

E. SPECIFICATIONS

65
.Section VII E. Specifications

E.1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

E.1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

General Requirements of Work will be specified as follows:

The general work of scope comprises but not limited to followings;

a) Design, Construction and Completion of all civil works specified under the Contract.

b) Design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all mechanical and electrical
Plumbing and Information Technology (IT) equipment and plants; all other ancillary items
necessary for a complete and functional project including furnishing of operation and
maintenance manuals.

c) The testing and commissioning of the Works including Tests on Completion and Tests after
Completion and furnishing of test reports.

d) Remedying of defects

e) Carrying out of all ancillary works necessary for the completion of the Works

f) Furnishing As-built drawings of the project.

g) Furnishing Operation and maintenance manuals of the project including those for installed
equipment.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that his design complies with all relevant
standards, codes of practices and by-laws. All plant, equipment and material items supplied and I
or installed under the Contract shall be well-coordinated and be compatible with each other. In
designing the Works, the Contractor shall plan for the layouts which will produce efficiency in
operation.

E.1.2. EMPLOYER'S CONCEPTUAL DRAWINGS

The drawings provided with the Tender documents are intended to show the sites of the Works,
illustrations of the Employer's Requirements and conceptual layouts and designs for the Works.

E.1.3. GEOTECHNICAL AND OTHER INFORMATION

Geological and / or geotechnical information, Survey and any other information given in this
document or made available with the tender documents are only to assist the Tenderer for his
preparation of the Tender. The Tenderer shall be responsible for the interpretation of the data.

66
.Section VII E. Specifications
The Contractor shall undertake at his own expense such further geological and / or geotechnical
Investigations, Survey as may be necessary for him to design the works. He shall provide
supporting information to validate his design assumptions. Copies of the results of all such
investigations / reports shall be provided to the Employer and Engineer.

E.1.4. DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

E.1.4.1. Tenderer's Design Approach

The Tenderer in his proposal shall submit his design approach which shall include the general
layout of the project, improvements to the conceptual design (if any), standards and codes to be
used, design criteria, outline specifications for materials, equipment and workmanship, technology
to be used etc.

E.1.4.2.Criteria for Design Personnel

Contractor's Representative:

The Contractor's Representative shall have all the appropriate qualifications and experience
acceptable to the Engineer and will undertake the coordination and progressing of all aspects of the
Project from the commencement of the design through to final completion and commissioning of
the Works. He shall be responsible for ensuring that the Works form a well engineered and
integrated project complying with the Employer's Requirements.

Design Personnel:

The Contractor shall nominate suitably qualified and experienced personnel acceptable to the
Engineer including personnel nominated in the Tender to be responsible for each assigned task.
(Qualifications for Contractor's Personnel are given in xxx)

Once personnel nominated have been approved by the Engineer, no changes to these
personnel shall be made until approval has been obtained in writing from the Engineer for the new
nominee who is equally qualified or superior.

E.1.4.3. Contractor's Documents

The Contractor shall submit the following Contractors Documents for the Approval of the
Engineer:

a) Design Submittals which include Construction Drawings, Fabrication Drawings, Lift and
Placement Drawings, Layout Drawings of Temporary Works, Specifications and design
calculations and other details if required by the Engineer.

67
.Section VII E. Specifications
(b) Shop Drawings, Manufacturers' Specifications, Engineering Data and Certificates of
Compliance, other descriptive data for all materials and equipment

(c) Instruction Manuals for Assembly, Installation and Operation and Maintenance

(d) Test Procedure Instructions and reports

(e) Project Quality Plan and Quality Procedures

(f) Progress Reports

(g) Construction Schedule (Time Programme)

(h) Method Statements

(i) Other Schedules

(j) Other Submittals

(k) As-Built Documents

No separate payment will be made for the preparation and submission of the Contractor's
Documents specified in this Section, and the costs thereof shall be included in the lump sum prices
of the various items stated in the Activity Schedule.

E.1.4.4. Submission of Contractor’s Documents

E.1.4.4.1 Document Format

The Contractor shall produce all design submittals in reproducible quality and clearly
readable prints, photocopies and in soft copy form with all details to assure completion of
construction of the Works. All Design Submittals shall be checked, signed and sealed by an
authorized representative of the Contractor and the Design Engineer who is a registered
Professional Engineer / Professionally Qualified Engineer. Size of the drawings / documents shall
be unified as far as practicable and shall be as follows.

Al 594 mm x 841 mm

A2 420 mm x 594 mm

A3 297mm x 420 mm

A4 210 mm x 297 mm

68
.Section VII E. Specifications
• Contents list

• Summary

• References including specification requirements, design codes of practice, manuals

and supporting documents used, numbers and titles of drawings which are based on
the design

• Criteria, parameters, software and methods used

• Test procedures, analyses and results

• Calculations and schedules

• Qualitative description and comments on results

• Any other relevant information.

Designs and documents shall be presented on A4 size paper with every page numbered and bound
in order between a transparent front cover and stiff back. The title of the submission shall be given
on the front sheet beneath the title of Contract, Contractor‟s name, title of work location, author‟s
reference, date, Contractor‟s signature, and any other relevant information.

The Contractor shall bind in as appendices to the designs and documents English language copies
or photocopies of any standard, code of practice, manual or other reference referred to in the designs
and documents which have not otherwise been submitted.

E.1.4.4.2 Drawing Format

Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit his drawings in time
and in a logical order to the Engineer for approval. The drawings shall be submitted in sufficient
time to permit modifications to be made if such are deemed necessary by the Engineer without
delaying the delivery of the Contract Works.

All drawings and data submitted to the Engineer for review shall be stamped with "FOR
APPROVAL" and submitted within times mentioned hereunder. The drawings which are required
to be modified as required by the Engineer shall be re-submitted for approval.

Drawings submitted by the Contractor for review shall be based on previously submitted designs
or documents. Interrelated drawings shall be submitted at the same time in a complete and self-
sufficient set. Copies shall be collated into ordered bundles each with a list of contents.

All drawings provided by the Contractor shall be in the form of good quality reproductions and

69
.Section VII E. Specifications
shall conform to the requirements of relevant British Standards in respect of drawing size,
presentation and use of symbols. Drawings shall be no smaller than A4 and no larger than A1.
Drawings submitted as part of the design or document shall be presented on A1 size paper (unless
otherwise requested by the Engineer to submit on A2 / A3 size paper) folded into pockets at the
back.

All dimensions used on drawings shall be in metric units and all drawings shall be to scale and
shall include a graphical scale to aid the use of photographic reproductions. Preferred scales are
1:1, 1:2, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20, 1:50, 1:100, 1:200, 1:500, 1:1000, 1:2000, and 1:5000.

Drawings shall be complete with:

• Project cage approved by the Engineer.

• Drawing codification with revision number, revision clouds & related details.

• Legends with all details.

• Comprehensive notes describing all aspects, including revision, modifications made.

• Separate descriptive information for sub-assemblies, major components, foundation, fixing

details etc.

• Separate drawings for sub areas.

• Sections, elevations, plan layout information.

E.1.4.4.3. Numbering and Titling

The Contractor shall use a reference numbering system for designs notes, report, drawings and
documents so that each number used is unique. The numbering and title information on design
notes, reports, drawings and documents shall be designed so that management, transmittal and
communication of drawings can be carried out expeditiously using a computer aided data base
system.

All drawings shall bear the following information in a standard cage:

• Engineer’s name, address and logo

• Contractor’s name, address and logo

• Engineer’s name, address and logo

• Contract Title

70
.Section VII E. Specifications
• Contract Number
• Drawing Title, including names of project
• Drawing Number
• Revision Schedule
• Scale
• Date
The Contractor shall maintain a document / drawing register listing all documents /drawings
prepared as a part of the Contract.

The document / drawing register shall incorporate a revision number. Wherever a change is made
to the document / drawing the revision number, the date of the change, full details of the change
and person responsible for the change shall be recorded on the register. The first issue of a revised
document / drawing shall indicate, by the use of “clouds”, where on the document / drawing the
revision has been made. The first revision of the document / drawing shall be designed as revision
A. At monthly intervals until all design is complete the Contractor shall submit a copy of the
current drawing register to the Engineer for his information. A final copy of the register shall be
supplied to the Employer on completion of the Contract.

E.1.4.4.4. Design Submittals

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review five hard copies as well as five electronic
copies of all submissions – electronic copies shall be burned on DVD-ROM. Electronic
copies shall include original (DWG, WORD, Excel, etc.) and PDF formats. Only one hard-copy
will be returned to the Contractor.

Following acceptance of a note / document / drawing by all parties, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer one original print on white paper and four paper print copies of all accepted
drawings with the date of the Engineer‟s acceptance marked on the original.

E.1.4.4.5. Review Period

All design submittals after its receipt in the Engineer's Project Office will be reviewed within the
specified time periods as follows with another 7 days allowance for return mail purposes to the
Contractor.

No. of Drawings (N) Maximum Time Period

N<5 15 days
N< 10 30 days
Specifications 30 days

The Contractor shall set a priority for the review of the submittals and re-submittals.

71
.Section VII E. Specifications
Design submittals shall be submitted as provided in the approved schedule of design
submittal submission provided by the Contractor. Any deviation from the schedule may delay the
Engineer's response. If multiple submittals and re-submittals are made within short periods of time,
an extension of the above review period may be required.

E.1.4.4.6. Submittals Returned to the Contractor

Items submitted for review by the Contractor and returned by the Engineer will be
categorized as follows:

(1) Accepted: Subject to its compliance with the Employer’s Requirements and conformity with
the overall design, the Engineer has no comment on the submission.

(2) Accepted as Noted: Subject to its compliance with Employer’s Requirements and conformity
with the overall design, the Engineer has some comments on the submission, but they are not such
as to necessitate formal re-submission. Where the Contractor makes changes to an item an updated
issue shall be provided to the Engineer for record purposes.

(3) Rejected: The Engineer will indicate the grounds for his not accepting the submission; the
Contractor shall amend or revise the submission accordingly and re-submit the item for review.

Engineer shall review and / or approve the design submittals within the review period. If corrections
are necessary, the Engineer shall send one copy with review comments to the Contractor.
Acceptance by the Engineer of any drawing or revision, structural design, method of work or any
information regarding materials and equipment the Contractor proposes to supply, shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any errors or omissions therein, and shall not
be regarded as an assumption of risks or liability by the Employer. Such acceptance shall be
considered to mean that the Employer has no objection to the Contractor using, upon his own full
responsibility, the design, plan or method of work proposed or furnishing the materials and
equipment proposed.

The Contractor shall respond to the instructions noted on the Drawings. Drawings shall not be used
for construction unless marked with the notations 1 and 2 noted above. No drawing shall be
considered valid unless signed by the Engineer as “ACCEPTED”. The approval by the Engineer
of such drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations and responsibilities under the
Contract.

The Contractor shall be responsible for reproducing implementing the revisions noted, and
distributing copies of the returned design submittal, if this is necessary, to provide this
information to Subcontractors, Contractor's Design Engineer. The accuracy and completeness of

72
.Section VII E. Specifications
these additional copies of submittals are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor
shall have no claim under the Contract on account of the failure or partial failure, or inefficiency
of any design, plan or method of work or material and equipment so accepted. The Contractor shall
not be entitled to a time extension based upon the rejection of designs or detail drawings. No
separate payment will be made for furnishing and submission of the drawings required.

E.1.4.4.7. Re-submittals

After review, the Engineer shall provide the Contractor a list of written comments on items
requiring revision for compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall make
corrections as necessary and the corrected drawings and specifications shall be resubmitted to the
Engineer for review. When the returned drawings and documents are re-submitted for approval,
the Engineer will try to complete his review and / or approval of the drawings and documents
within fifteen (15) working days, however, this will depend on the number and complexity of the
corrections / revisions which have to be checked. This procedure will continue until satisfactory
response to all comments and re-submittal requirements have been received.

Coordination of design and construction requirements for the different design submittals shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor. No reimbursement shall be made for revisions or design
resulting from failure to adequately integrate the different design submittals within the overall plan
of the Works.

E.1.4.4.8. Submission of Sub-Contractor's Drawings for Review

Before submission, the Contractor shall verify all drawings and documents prepared by the
sub•contractors and manufacturers to ensure their compliance with the Employer's Requirements.
Such drawings shall be clearly identified as being checked by the Contractor. All drawings not so
checked and noted will be rejected by the Engineer and returned to the Contractor without further
comment. Sub-Contractor's drawings and documents shall be numbered in accordance with the
Contractor's system for which Engineer's consent has been obtained.

E.1.4.4.9 Checking

All submissions shall be checked first by the Contractor and shall be stamped and signed to confirm
that the checking has been carried out. Checking shall be carried out by a Chartered Project
Manager (or equivalent for other disciplines) experienced in the type of work involved. Any
submissions not so marked will be returned to the Contractor immediately.

E.1.4.5. Other Submittals for Review

73
.Section VII E. Specifications
The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer for review and approval in accordance
with the procedures specified for Shop Drawings:

(a) Lists of suppliers, manufactures and sources of Materials to be used for the Works.

(b) All relevant information and test data pertaining to representative samples from each supplier,
manufacturer or source of Materials

E.1.4.6. Other Design Submittals Schedule

The Contractor is required to submit his design documents for approval of the Engineer.

No construction work may commence on site until the Contractor's design proposals have been
approved by the Engineer for the relevant sections of the Works.

At the time the Construction Schedule (Time Programme) is submitted, the Contractor shall submit
a Programme for submitting the Design Documents and this should conform to the overall Project
Implementation Programme. The Design Programme shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. The Design Programme shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

For each required design submittal, the submittal date to the Engineer for review shall be indicated,
as well as the return date to avoid delay in any activities beyond the scheduled commencement
date. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time for initial review, correction, and a second
submittal, and final review and approval by the Engineer. In no case, will a schedule be acceptable
which allows less than the review time specified for each review by the Engineer.

The Programme of Submissions shall clearly identify the dates of submission of the key elements
of detail design and the final report. No designs, drawings and documents will be accepted by the
Engineer for review until the Programme for their Submission has been approved by him.

E.1.4.7. As-Built Drawings & Documents

As-built record drawings shall cover the work as completed, incorporating all modifications carried
out during construction or after testing at the Contractor‟s or sub-contractors‟ work and all
modifications carried out in the course of the erection and construction of the Work. These
drawings shall be submitted for review by the Engineer and may be produced by modifying
drawings produced for construction or may be produced separately. Important notes and
descriptive matter shall be in English.

The drawings shall include those provided by the Contractor during the design and construction
period together with drawings submitted by him with his Proposal as appropriate.

The Contractor shall submit As-built drawings as follows;

74
.Section VII E. Specifications
Hard Copies -The Contractor shall submit original and two copies of the relevant As- built
drawings properly signed by the Contractor and the Engineer. The drawings
shall be arranged insets of A1size (White Paper) or approved otherwise.

Soft Copies -The Contractor shall submit electronically stored soft copies of As-built
drawings through portable hard disc as follows;

Scan copy of signed and approved As-built drawings

PDF version of finalized As-built drawings

AutoCAD 2014

Two copies of each detail shall be provided and each shall be duly signed and dated by the Engineer
and Contractor. After signing off, the Contractor shall retain his copy in a purpose file until the
Performance Certificate has been issued.

As-Built Documents such as As-Built Drawings, layout data, survey data, movie films, and
photographs shall be submitted to the Engineer, for verification purposes. No separate
payment will be made for furnishing "As-Built" Drawings as above and all cost thereof shall be
included in the lump sum amounts in the price schedule.

The Contractor shall also supply any additional. copies that are required to be submitted as part of
the Operation and Maintenance (0 & M) Manuals. As-Built Drawings shall be subject to an
inspection at the Site by the Engineer's Representative, and if found unsatisfactory and not up-to-
date, shall be re-checked within six (06) working days later. As each of the Works delineated on
the Construction Drawings is completed, the Engineer and the Contractor or their representative
shall mutually sign all As-Built Drawings, after approval by the Engineer.

E.1.4.8. Construction Photographs

The Contractor shall be responsible for the production of construction photographs in soft copy
format for documenting construction work. Coloured photographs of the entire Site, or pertinent
features thereof, shall be taken before the commencement of the work at the Site and promptly
submitted to the Engineer. The same views shall be re-photographed throughout the Contract
period as requested herein and shall be taken at the start, during stages and at completion of each
major component of the work and at times as directed by the Engineer.

E.1.4.9. Progress Reports

75
.Section VII E. Specifications
The Contractor shall submit the Progress Reports in accordance with Sub-Clause 4.21 of the
General Conditions of Contract.

E.1.4.10. Contractor's Quality Control Review

Before a design document is submitted, the Contractor shall perform a complete quality
control review of all construction drawings and specifications, including design calculations,
dimensions, loading conditions, materials, coordination between disciplines, and other items as
required to ensure the design is complete, correct, and in conformity with the Contract
Specifications, design criteria, and the approved preliminary design.

After the quality control review and implementation of all revisions necessitated by the
review, the Documents shall be signed and sealed by a registered engineer. The Contractor shall
certify that the design submittal meets all the requirements of the Contract and shall submit
construction drawings and specifications to the Engineer for review and approval.

Each design submittal shall include a listing of the design criteria, standards and regulations to
be met and used for design of the works. Except as requested by the Engineer, no design
calculations shall be submitted with the design submittal. All calculations shall be kept by the
Contractor for the entire operation and maintenance period and shall be made available to the
Engineer if requested. No design submittal will be accepted for review without the
Contractor's certification that he has reviewed and approved the submittal.

E.1.4.11. Construction Schedule (Time Programme)

The Contractor shall submit the Construction Schedule in accordance with Sub-Clause 8.3 of the
General Conditions of Contract and within one (01) month from the date of the award of contract
showing milestones and key dates.

The time program shall submit as coloured prints of readable version of initial programme and
each revised programme to the Engineer for his acceptance in one paper copy, one electronic copy
and additional four paper copies. This programme shall be prepared to show the sequence and
interdependence of activities required for complete the performance of all items of Work under the
Contract and meeting milestone dates as required. The programme shall be prepared by the
Contractor using the latest version of “Primavera” or “Microsoft Project”.

E.1.4.11.1. Fortnight look ahead programme

The Contractor shall submit fortnight look ahead programme for the Works within the first two
Days of each week, comparing actual progress of the preceding week.

E.1.4.11.2. Format and Details of the Construction Schedule

76
.Section VII E. Specifications
In preparing the Construction Programme, the Contractor shall make due allowances for possible
delays, but not limiting to delays caused by frequently experiencing evening showers, all
types of holiday periods, local working conditions, problems relating to maintaining equipment,
problems relating to obtaining materials and supplies, and similar items etc. Under no
circumstances shall the programme show a completion date in excess of the "Time for Completion"
stated in the Appendix to Tender.

Further, within the specified time periods, the Contractor shall submit the Engineer the
following documents in the form agreed and approved by the Engineer for the purpose of
monitoring the progress of the Works:

(a) A detailed Programme, covering the activities for the first six (06) months, including
mobilization, transport to the Site, and erection of construction facilities.

(b) Detailed statements of construction methods. (c) List of construction equipment to be used.

(d) Forecast of total labour requirements for the Works.

(e) Site management organization chart. (f) Histogram of staff requirements.

(g) (Work schedule showing the proposed weighted monthly percentage of work accomplished.

(h) List of those drawings, which the Contractor will submit and may require approvals from
the Engineer during the first six (06) months of the construction period, and the priority order and
the approximate date of issue of such drawings.

The Engineer reserves the right to permit the Contractor to commence the Works only after
submission of the documents specified above.

During the construction period, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer:

(1) A detailed Construction Programme for each consecutive six (06) months period at least two
(02) months prior to the commencement of the relevant period, with a histogram of staff
requirements for the period.

(2) A list of drawings (including the order and date of issue of such drawings) which the Contractor
may require the Engineer to approve during each consecutive six (06) months period at least three
(03) months prior to commencement of the relevant period.

All the documents to be submitted in accordance with this Clause shall contain the

77
.Section VII E. Specifications
information required by the Engineer. In addition to the documents and information as
required above the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer at such times as the Engineer may direct
during the progress of the Works such further or special written particulars and information as are
required by the Engineer to enable a progress record to be maintained in respect of the Works.

E.1.5. TEMPORARY FACILITIES

E.1.5.1. Employer’s/ Engineer’s Facility

E.1.5.1.1. Office for Engineer/ Employer

The Contractor shall provide necessary air conditioned office space with separate sanitary facilities
as specified hereinafter for the use of the Engineer and the Employer. The Contractor
shall supply electricity and water (drinking water and general purpose) to office for the
Employer/Engineer and shall maintain continuous supply of above facilities throughout the
construction period. Further, the Contractor shall maintain sanitary, air conditioning, telephone, fax
and internet facilities for the entire construction duration. Supplying and maintaining of above
facilities shall be subject to the Engineer‟s approval. The Contractor shall employ an office
attendant throughout the construction period for assisting at office and maintaining the office and
make all payments and bear other expenses as required by the prevailing Labour Laws etc. Further,
the Contractor shall provide continuous service of security for the Employer/Engineer office.

Contractor shall continuously supply stationery, tools for measurements, 3ply face masks,
sanitizers with dispensers and light fittings to the Employer‟s/ Engineer‟s Office. Further,
drinking water, tea/ coffee to the Engineer‟s/ Employer‟s staff including drivers and office
assistants and refreshment for the site meetings shall be supplied by the Contractor
throughout the construction period.

Cost of maintenance, cost of repairs, cost of replacement, cost of alteration, shifting offices and
adopting same from time to time shall be borne by the Contractor.

All furniture and fittings provided by Contractor for use in Employer‟s /Engineer‟s office during
construction period shall become Contractor‟s property on completion of Works.

Unless expressly specified otherwise by the Engineer, spaces and facilities required to the office
of Employer/Engineer are as follows;

Table E.1: Employer/ Engineer’s Facility

78
.Section VII E. Specifications
Description Unit Quantity

Approximate total area required for the office for Engineer /

Employer is 200 Sq.m with relevant infrastructure facilities
including attached toilets and bathrooms, separate area for a conference
room (area not less than 10 Sq.m), full air conditioned with suitable
illumination, adequate voice and data points as informed by the
Engineer.

Executive tables (approx. 6‟0‟‟ x 3‟0‟‟ with side return) and an Set 3
executive chair with 2 nr visitor chairs.
Executive tables (approx.. 6‟0‟‟ x 3‟0‟‟) and an executive chair with Set 6
01 nr visitor chairs
Standard office table (approx.. 4‟0‟‟ x 6‟0‟‟) with 1 nr of office chair Set 3
Office conference table with 6 seats Set 1
Drawing racks of Aluminium or similar with clips to keep about 50 Set 2
drawings
Filling cabinet (4 drawers) nr 4
Computer (core i7-RAM 8 GB-HDD 1 TB- Monitor: LED 560mm) nr 3
Filing/Rack with a cupboard nr 4
Printer (A3 sized, colour) nr 2
Photocopier machines [Toshiba E-Studio 355 (Toshiba e-BRIDGE 3
technology or Equilent at 35/45 pages per minute with Colour, black
and white print, copy, fax, Colour scan and internal toner recycling
system)] including automatic document feeder and separate sizes of
drawers and stand with necessary network connections.

A4 Black and White printer (Laser) nr 2

Printers [HP Laser Jet Pro MFP M227 fdw Printer (Print, Scan,
Copy, Fax, Print Resolution: 1200 x 1200 dpi, Maximum Print Size:
8.5" x 14", Print Speed: 30 ppm)] with the stand.

Supply and installation of Projectors [BENQ W 1700 Projector (4K nr 1

UHD with Razor-Sharp True 8.3 Million Pixel Detail, Hyper- Realistic
Video Quality with Projector-Optimized HDR, Rec. 709 HDTV)]
with projector pen

Projector Screens [Easy Fold Screen 10'*8' (120"*90")] nr 1

Facsimile [Samsung SF-760P Laser Fax Machine with 4-in-1 nr 1

functionality with 4-in-1 versatility]

79
.Section VII E. Specifications
Description Unit Quantity

CDMA Phones [Panasonic Premium Digital Proprietary Telephone- kx- nr 1

DT486 (6-line Graphical LCD with backlighting, 24 freely
programmable function keys, EHS (Electronic Hook Switch), Speaker
Phone, handset and headset with full duplex)]

Waste paper basket nr 8

Magi board nr 1
Display board nr 1
Electric kettle nr 1
Water Dispensers [FUJI COD water dispenser FC-JX-C(Hot, nr 1
Normal and Cold Water, Semi-Conductor Cooling, Storage cabinet,
Stainless steel tank, Anti-Bacterial design)] with water.
First Aid Box nr 1
Refrigerator nr 1
Digital thermometers nr 3
Walk-in disinfection chamber with all required sanitizers and nr 1
accessories
Laptops nr 4
Latest mobile phones nr 4

E.1.5.2 Contractor’s Facilities and Working Areas

As the construction site is located within the heart of the city and the land availability is very much
limited, only the area indicated in Annex C.8 will be available for construction works and it is up
to the Contractor to schedule and manage the Contractor‟s temporary facilities accordingly.
Contractor‟s temporary facilities shall be arranged within or off the Site as approved by the
Employer/Engineer.

E.1.5.2.1 Contractor’s Temporary Site Office

The Contractor shall provide, maintain, dismantle and remove on completion of the Works, a
temporary site office of adequate size within and/or outside the Site premises in the areas approved
by the Employer/Engineer for the Contractor‟s use with necessary facilities such as water,
electricity, safety and sanitary.

Cost for altering, modifying, or dismantling and re-erecting of temporary building for workshops
and stores shall be borne by the Contractor.

E.1.5.2.2 Workshops and Stores

By considering the space available for construction works the Contractor shall make

80
.Section VII E. Specifications
necessary arrangements to provide and maintain, temporary workshops, machinery yards, bar
bending yards and the like, and storage facilities by himself within and/or outside the Site premises.
The Contractor shall obtain required insurance cover for Plant and Material which are stored outside
the Site premises.

This is for erection of temporary shed for protection, storage of materials and temporary fabrication
area and maintain for the duration of the construction period and remove on completion. Cost for
altering, modifying, or dismantling and re-erecting of temporary building for workshops and
stores shall be borne by the Contractor.

E.1.5.2.3 Sample Storage Room

By considering the space available for construction works, the Contractor shall provide two (02)
numbers of 40 feet containers as sample storage room. The internal arrangement of the containers
shall be in accordance with the plans prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

E.1.5.2.4 Accommodation for Workmen

The Contractor shall make necessary arrangement to provide and maintain accommodation and
other facilities, sanitation in connection with the accommodations for his workers during the
construction period.

E.1.5.2.5 Facilities for Workmen

The Contractor shall make necessary arrangement to provide and maintain welfare facilities/
sanitary facilities for workers on Site, including rest room, mobile toilet arrangement (at least 7
numbers), drinking water and other relevant facilities including maintaining good hygienic
conditions.

E.1.5.2.6 Samples

The Contractor shall provide specimens, samples for testing, making arrangements for testing of
Materials, Goods etc, as stipulated in the Employer‟s Requirement and obtaining test reports
by third party and submit same for Engineer‟s approval.

E.1.5.3 Bar schedules, Monthly Progress Report, Weekly Progress Report

Every month the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Progress Report for the previous month
which shall be the detailed report including information stated in Contract.

Progress photographs

81
.Section VII E. Specifications
The contractor shall supply 175x125 mm colour prints of each “record photographs”. The print
shall bear the date of the photograph. Each set of prints shall be separately bound approximately
A4 size, photographs albums.

E.1.5.4 Safety Measures

The Contractor shall provide and maintain the following safety measures (but not limiting to such)
in accordance with the Contract and also as per the requirements stipulated by the relevant
Statutory Authorities, ensuring safety of Employer‟s Personnel, Contractor‟s Personnel, visitors
of Employer and Engineer and others engaged in the Works.

i. Safe working conditions.

ii. Full time service of safety officer.

iii. Safe means of access and exit.

iv. Safety systems for Plant, Machinery and Equipment.

v. Appropriate safety equipment required at the site and yards such as Helmets, Gum
Boots, Masks, Welding Masks, Safety Belts, reflected jackets, rain coats etc.

vi. Safety signs, handrails, guardrail, platforms and other measures.

vii. Training, instructions, information and supervision as may be required to enable

employees to avoid any potential dangers and hazards.

viii. All measures ensuring the health and workmen including satisfactory welfare
facilities, working conditions and environment.

ix. Safety of the property of the Employer and the general public entering the premises.
(vehicles, etc.)

x. Safety signs should be in the Sinhala, Tamil and English languages.

xi. A comprehensive first aid box and separate space room with beds, tables and chairs
shall be made available at the Site by the Contractor and he shall ensure that at least three
of his staffs are trained in first aid measures.

xii. Ambulance or a vehicle suitable for transporting injured workmen should be made
available at the Site by the Contractor.

xiii. Health and welfare of work people.

E.1.5.5 Noise, Dust and Vibration Control

82
.Section VII E. Specifications
The Contractor shall take all possible measures necessary to protect and cover the adjacent
properties against noise, dust and vibration. Contractor shall carry out the Works in
accordance with the Employer‟s Requirement and rules and regulations of Central Environment
Authority.

E.1.5.6 Daily Records

The Contractor shall supply by 12 noon on every working day, the following daily records as may
be required by the Engineer.

• Daily weather condition (daily rainfall, temperature, humidity etc.) in a form approved by the
Engineer.

• A list of the labour employed on the previous day specifying the number employed in each trade,
including expatriate labour. (summaryof labour and plant required weekly)

• Particulars of all Materials and Goods delivered to Site, plant employed for the works

• Particulars of machinery and equipment brought to or taken out of site

• A list of works carried out with location

• Site test/ laboratory test

• Any other important records not listed above but required under the Contract.

• Following day scheduled work programme

E.1.5.7 Temporary Services

The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary services necessary for the execution of the
Works under the contract. The Contractor shall make applications and install such services
in accordance with the regulations and requirements of the relevant local authorities.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs and charges in connection with the installation,
alteration, shifting, adapting use and maintenance of such services. On completion of the
Works, the Contractor shall disconnect such services, which are no longer required by him and or
the Employer and clear away all traces.

E.1.5.7.1 Water

83
.Section VII E. Specifications
The Contractor shall apply for connection and pay for connection and settlement of monthly bills
and pay for the continuation of uninterrupted temporary water supply to the Site and construct
storage tanks with adequate capacity, together with the necessary internal temporary
distribution system including an overhead tank at an adequate elevation, water pumps as may be
required and providing taps, valves, etc. in order to provide water for the Works. In the case of
any failure of existing water supply the Contractor shall provide alternative supply without
any additional cost to the Employer.

E.1.5.7.2. Electricity

The Contractor shall apply for connection as per the loading requirement and pay for the provision
and use of required power supply and maintain for the duration of the construction period.
Contractor shall pay for temporary electrical connection, distribution system for the Works internal
arrangements and all payments to the authorities for connections.

In the case of any failure of existing power supply the Contractor shall provide a stand-by
Generator, with adequate capacity. The cost of supplying, installing, running and maintaining of
the stand-by generator shall be borne by the Contractor.

E.1.5.8. Security Arrangements

The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary protective fencing, hoardings, gates and
lighting for the security of Site and safeguarding the Works, Material, Plant, storage area and
yards. The Contractor shall maintain properly the existing perimeter fence. The Contractor
shall employ adequate number of security personnel & security systems on full time basis
throughout the period of construction. The shelters, guard house and other facilities to be provided
for the security personnel to do their duty in an efficient manner. Altering shifting and adapting
same from time to time and maintain for the duration of the construction period and remove on
completion shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor and all costs in connection with the
above shall be borne by the Contractor.

E.1.5.9. Temporary works, Equipment and Methods of Hoisting

Contractor shall provide and maintain hoisting equipment including passenger/ material
hoists, and other plant required for the proper execution of the Work.

Contractor shall pay special attention to the method of installation/erection of scaffoldings systems,
location and installation/erection of tower cranes, hoists (passenger and material) with necessary
temporary works and maintain for the duration of the construction period. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor to ensure steady safe and uninterrupted service to the other works.

84
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.1.5.10. Traffic Management

The Contractor shall acquaint himself with the traffic flow on main roads and other roads leading
to the site and the restrictions imposed by the Authorities in respect of certain types of
vehicles permitted to use such roadways. The Contractor shall organize and plan movement of
materials and equipment to the site taken into consideration the factors effecting such movements
in order to minimize delays and disruptions to work caused by traffic congestion, restrictions
etc.

The traffic management of adjoining public roads near the Site under the permission of the relevant
authorities shall be carried out by the Contractor when required. The Contractor shall provide traffic
controllers with necessary equipment (reflectable lights, sign boards, etc).

E.1.5.11. Maintaining the Site

The Contractor shall maintain the site in a clean and orderly manner at all times and during the
entire construction period. Arrange for washing bay to clean the tires of vehicles leaving site
during the process of construction and maintain for the duration of the construction period.
The Contractor shall take due care to prevent water stagnation, eliminate mosquito breeding places
at the Site and this is to be ensured through internal monitoring mechanism.

E.2. ARCHITECTURAL

E.2.1. FINISHES AND ALTERNATIVES:

The following table summarize the finishes and alternatives:

Table E.2: Finishes and Alternatives

Type of
Area Specification
Finishes
Flooring

B&A Power trowel finished concrete. Architecturally matching

Platforms, color pigment to be used. Surface should be anti-skid &
Lobbies, anti-glare type. Parking margins to be highlighted by an
Flooring appropriate color. Compressive strength to be compatible
Public
Circulation with heavy vehicles.
Area

Offices, Power trowel finished concrete. Architecturally matching

Flooring
Commercial color pigment to be used. Surface should be anti-skid &
(Option-01)
Area anti-glare type.

85
.Section VII E. Specifications
Type of
Area Specification
Finishes
Flooring
600mm X 600mm Non-Skid homogenous tiled floor
(Option-02)
Sensory
Include Tactile Block of approved color conforming to
pathways for
BS 7997:2003 of size 300 mmx 300mm on pedestrian
people with Flooring
pathway to direct to people with visual impairments. To
visual
be matched with the architectural design
impairments
Toilets Flooring 300mm X 600mm Non-Skid, homogenous tiled floor

100mmx100mm Interlocking concrete paving blocks laid

on compacted ground soil Compacted sand base course
Flooring for or quarry dust course.(surface should be anti-skid & anti-
the areas glare type).
Pedestrian hasn’t Keep appropriate drainage slope .Precast concrete curb
Pathways vehicle of natural color. Keep provisions for drop curbs
/Pavement movement wherever necessary.
Include Tactile Block of approved color conforming to
BS 7997:2003 of size 300 x 300 on pedestrian pathway
to direct people with visual impairments.

Driveways Flooring Fine graded natural black color asphalt to BS EN 13108

First Floor Bus
Flooring Fine graded natural black color asphalt to BS EN 13108
parking,
200mmx100mm Interlocking concrete paving blocks laid
on compacted sand base course or quarry dust course
Bus parking, layer on compacted ground soil.
B/A ,T n G The compressive strength to be compatible with the
Flooring
areas in heavy vehicles. (Surface should be anti-skid & anti-glare
Ground Floor type). Keep appropriate drainage slope. Parking margins
to be highlighted by an appropriate color. Compressive
strength to be compatible with heavy vehicles.
200mmx100mm Interlocking concrete paving blocks laid
on compacted sand base course or quarry dust course
Bus parking, layer on structural slab.
B/A ,T n G The compressive strength to be compatible with the
Flooring
areas in First heavy vehicles. (Surface should be anti-skid & anti-glare
Floor type). Keep appropriate drainage slope. Parking margins
to be highlighted by an appropriate color. Compressive
strength to be compatible with heavy vehicles.

Car ,Three 200mmx100mm Interlocking concrete paving blocks laid

wheeler Flooring on compacted ground soil Compacted sand base course
parking areas or quarry dust course. .The compressive strength to be
compatible with the heavy vehicles. (Surface should be

86
.Section VII E. Specifications
Type of
Area Specification
Finishes
anti-skid & anti-glare type).Keep appropriate drainage
slope. Parking margins to be highlighted by an
appropriate color. Compressive strength to be compatible
with heavy vehicles.
Slip resistant power trowel concrete. Broom finished,
Proper floor hardener to be used. Broom concrete
surface with a steel or fiber broom to produce
Flooring corrugations 5mm deep Broom perpendicular to nearest
(Option 01) edge of pavement. Broom all areas of a panel in the same
Ramps direction. Use the same type and manufacture of broom
for all paved surfaces to provide a consistent appearance.
Black pigment to be used.

Flooring
Carborundum finished concrete floor.
(Option 02)

Walls
Walls plaster to Smooth with 2-3 skim coats, to be
Walls – painted with 1 coat of primer/2 coats of filler and2 to 3
coats of approved internal paint as per manufacturer’s
Brick/
specifications.
Block) Wall
Plaster Colors and textures to suit the overall architectural
design.
Internal Wall
Walls -
(Option-
Selected
FFC-Fine finish concrete wall
areas of
external
walls)
Rough plastered walls to be finished with 1 coat of
external primer/2 coats of filler and to be painted with 2
Walls - to 3 coats of approved external weather resistant paint as
Brick/ Block per manufacturer’s specifications( To be include
Wall Plaster Elastomeric weather, fungal and alkali resistant emulsion
External Wall (Option) complete system with primer, top and protective coat
system) . Minimum 5 year warranty. Colors and textures
External Wall to suit the overall architectural design.
Walls -
(Option-
Selected
FFC-Fine finish concrete wall.
areas of
external
walls)

87
.Section VII E. Specifications
Type of
Area Specification
Finishes

Walls Correct combination of Aluminum cladding system,

polished granite with stainless steel mechanical
(Option) anchoring system to suit the overall architectural design.
Internal Office Toughen glass partition partitions comprising of
Partition Walls necessary Al/ PVC U-channels, patch fittings, etc. and
(Finishes to be joints are sealed with silicon sealant.
to be matched
with Glass & Aluminum Composite partitions- Al composite
architectural board (both side colored) from Finished Floor level to
appearance Walls
900mm & powder coated Al glass partition with above
and the from 900mm to 2100mm.
function)
Plaster board partition up to slab level(plaster board
both sides) ,GI box bar framework with necessary " L
"angle, plywood biscuits and aluminum tape, voids filled
Internal Shop
Walls with approved type glass wool for sound insulation,
Partition
Prepare surface with skim coat, leveling with acrylic
wall putty, one coat primer & minimum 2 coats emulsion
paint.
1800 mm high Architect selected color (HPL) High
pressure laminated partition system including 1 leg space
Toilet Internal complete with nylon plastic accessories including
Walls
partition indicator lock, legs, cloth hanger, door knob &
aluminum framework including swing door. (self-
lubricating swing & gravity return movement)
300mm X 600mm Ceramic/Porcelain tiled wall up to
2100mm level. Walls above to Smooth with 2-3 skim
Toilet Internal
Walls coats, to be painted with 1 coat of primer/2 coats of
Wall
filler and 2 to 3 coats of approved internal paint as per
manufacturer’s specifications.

Skirting

B&A
Platforms,
Lobbies, Terrazzo skirting with chips up to 100mm. Slip resistant
Skirting
Public & stain and impact resistant properties to be achieved.
Circulation
Area
Skirting for
600mm Length homogenous tiled skirting up to 100mm.
Offices, tiled floor
to be matched with floor tile layouts
Commercial areas
Area
Skrting for
Terrazzo skirting up to 100mm. Slip resistant & stain
terrazzo
and impact resistant properties to be achieved.
floor areas

88
.Section VII E. Specifications
Type of
Area Specification
Finishes
Ceiling

Store Room, Slab soffit surface finish & painted. RCC slab to be
Parking area, finished with 1 coat of skim coat/ 2 coats of filler and 2
Ceiling
Technical to 3 coats of approved paint color as per manufacturers
Rooms specifications.

B&A
Platforms,
Lobbies, (200mm/300mm) powder coated metal strip ceiling.
Ceiling
Public Minimum strip panel length 6m
Circulation
Area

Offices, 600mmx600mm demountable, concealed type powder

Ceiling
Control room coated metal ceiling

Waiting
Lounge
,Commercial (200mm/300mm) powder coated metal strip ceiling.
Ceiling
Area, Food Minimum strip panel length 6m
court,
restaurants
conference
Ceiling Plaster board projected ceiling.
room
Slab soffit surface finish & painted. RCC slab to be
Ceiling finished with 1 coat of skim coat/ 2 coats of filler and 2
(Option-01) to 3 coats of approved paint color as per manufacturers
Toilets specifications.

Ceiling 600mmx600mm Suspended Mineral fiber ceiling with

adjustable GI hanging rods and concealed framework to
(Option-02) detail.

Handrail

Marine painted M/s box iron handrail. M/s box iron

balustrade & top rail, M/s flat iron verticals between
balustrades.
Handrail
Staircase Stainless steel tube side staircase handrails with 25mm
(Option-01 ) dia wall supports to be include when necessary
areas(when have wall side).Safety of the stairways shall
not compromised for the purpose of architectural
designs.

89
.Section VII E. Specifications
Type of
Area Specification
Finishes
Stainless steel (vertical balustrade & top rail) with
Handrail tempered glass panels. Additional wall support handrails
to be include when necessary areas (when have wall
(Option-02 ) side). Safety of the stairways shall not compromised for
the purpose of architectural designs.

Stainless steel (vertical supports & timber top rail) with

Handrail tempered glass panels. Additional wall support handrails
(Option-03 ) to be include when necessary areas (when have wall
side). Safety of the stairways shall not compromised for
the purpose of architectural designs.
900 mm high disable handrail with steel top rail, steel
Ramp Handrail box bar bottom rail, steel box bar verticals pass through
stain less steel cables including all other accessories
900 mm high with 50 mm dia 300mm high heavy duty
Passenger GI vertical posts fixed to floor with GI floor fixing
queue Handrail bracket and 50mm dia GI pipe frame (beveled edge
handrails square shaped frame) fixed above the vertical posts.
Keep natural GI finish.
50 mm dia 300mm high heavy duty GI vertical posts
fixed to floor with GI floor fixing bracket and 50mm dia
Pedestrian
Handrail GI pipe frame (beveled edge square shaped frame) fixed
barriers
above the vertical posts. Keep natural GI finish .m/s flat
iron verticals between GI verticals.
Required RCC guardrails for upper floor areas has
Guardrails Guardrails
vehicle movement
Roofing

RCC Roof RCC flat roofs with heat insulation and water proofing
and finished with rustic porcelain tiling .Roof terrace to
be landscaped as open to sky space.

Roofing-Hip Cement tile roof including insulation layer, steel roof

or gable roof structure & Zn/Al aluminum gutters and down pipes.
2nd floor roof areas Cement roofing tile -Solar Reflective Index rating above
45 (min. 29). Also need to fulfill the WHO standards as
(Option-01 ) safe for Rain water harvesting

Roofing-Hip Zinc/Alum roof (AZ-200) system to approved profile

or gable roof including insulation layer, steel roof structure &
areas Zn/Aluminum gutters and down pipes. Also need to
fulfill the WHO standards as safe for Rain water
(Option-02 ) harvesting.
Skywalk, Side Roofing Zinc/Alum roof (AZ-200) system to approved profile
Entrances & including insulation layer, steel roof structure &
(Option-01 )
suitable aluminum gutters and down pipes. (Hidden roof type is

90
.Section VII E. Specifications
Type of
Area Specification
Finishes
Vertical Cores encouraged)

Roofing RCC flat roofs with heat insulation and water proofing.
(Option-02 )
Vendor Roofing Water tight tempered glass roof with supporting Steel/
Squares (Option) Cast Iron/Aluminum frame including flashings.
Doors and
Windows
Aluminum - Doors, windows and partitions shall be
Powder Coated Aluminum.
The Specification shall be
-Raw material Aluminum. Should complying to: BS EN
515:1993, BS EN 573-Part1-4, BS EN 12020-1:2008, BS
EN 12020-2:2008, BS EN 755-Part 1-9,SLS1410:2011.
Raw material chemical composition to be according to
Doors and alloy standard EN AW 6063. Powder coated film
Windows thickness 60-80 microns

All doors to be fitted with Door Closers, Handles and

Locks and the locks shall operate with a master key and
individual keys.
Low–E toughen glass for glass panels
Proprietary system is required for all powder coated
aluminum door windows

E.2.1.1. Performance characteristics for glass

Glass for all external doors and windows shall be reflective Low –E toughen glass having following
performance characteristics:

i. U Factor: Not exceeding 0.53 Btu/hr.sq.ft.F

ii. Average visible light transmittance: 23%- 35%

iii. Solar heat gain coefficient: Not exceeding 0.35

E.2.1.2. Performance characteristics for aluminum doors, windows and curtain wall systems

The system shall be tested for compliance with the following performance standards in accordance
with BS EN14351:

i. Air permeability: EN 1026:2000

ii. Water tightness: EN 1027:2000

91
.Section VII E. Specifications
iii. Wind resistance: EN 12211:2000

E.2.1.3. Structural glazed areas at lobbies/offices/food courts/restaurants:

It shall be designed for wind loads pertaining to the location and to satisfy the requirements of the
structural engineer. The system shall be designed by a specialist glazing Design Company and
supplied through them. The installer of the structural glass wall shall submit structural calculations
and shop drawings for approval prior to the installation.

E.2.1.4. Doors:

Frameless toughened glass double swing/ revolving/ doors are recommended for the main lobbies.
Proprietary system is required for all Powder coated aluminum door windows. All components
shall be identified in the product catalogue. Fire doors shall be of steel finished with relevant to
fire regulations. All doors shall satisfy the security and access control requirements specified under
ICT services.

E.2.1.5. Windows:

All windows shall be of a proprietary system recommended for low-rise buildings of the scale of
proposed building. Windows shall have Powder coated aluminum frames and sashes with Low-e
glazing .These windows could be of different types such as fixed, sliding, tilt and turn etc., to suit
the functional requirement of the activity areas. All windows shall be designed and installed to
satisfy splash tests and wind pressure specified under structural requirements. Suitable gondola
system or structural supports system also should be incorporated with the building structure itself
for cleaning and easy maintenance of external windows. Shading devices also shall be incorporated
wherever it is appropriate taking into consideration of the orientation of the building and sun path
throughout the year.

E.2.1.6. Partitions:

Full height internal workplace partitions are required for cubicles and medium height partitions for
general office areas. Full height partitions with toughened glass are recommended for the cubicles
in public areas for various supportive services for the users of the building. Minimum 75 mm thick
powder coated aluminum profiles with padded artificial leather or fabric is recommended for
internal workplace partitioning in office areas. Partitions in office areas shall be able to
accommodate power and telephone outlets within the thickness of the partition.

E.2.1.7. Furniture:

All furnishing items required for reception areas, lobbies, and passenger seating areas, office areas,
conference rooms, control room, restaurants, rest rooms, food court, cafeterias and other indoor

92
.Section VII E. Specifications
habitable areas shall be supplied by the contractor and general guidelines are as follows:

Passenger seating areas- Shall be durable, easily cleanable, easy maintained.

Reception Counters – Shall be durable, easily cleanable, easy maintained.

Office areas, conference rooms, Shall be durable, easily cleanable, easy maintained
control room,

Restaurants, Cafeterias – Chairs and tables for restaurants, cafeterias shall be

heavy duty, stackable and easily cleanable

The all loose and fixed furniture required minimum 3 year comprehensive warranty for
manufacturing defects. The furniture layout of the building to be incorporated in to the floor plans
and submited with the design proposal.Contractor have to supply of curtains and blinds for office
areas.Refer the reference for the specification guide for the furniture.The given specifications are
the minimum requirment to be followed and the furniture designs can be matched with the
architectural concept.The nos of furniture items can be increased with the design proposal.

Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Terminal Shops for Furniture items to be

building, commercial supplied by the shop
Parking activities, owners
building, Mini banks (Renter)
Arcade
building

Terminal Seating Waiting Stainless steel metal Adequate

building arrangeme chair waiting area bench, numbers
nt for the Combined seats type as per the
passenger standards
Seat and back-
at ground perforated cold-
floor rolled steel plate
after anti rust
detailing,electronic
polishing,static
coating,
Arms and legs-
1.2mm thickness
metal,die casting,
deepdrawig steel
plate, high strength
jointing, polishing

93
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Beam-1.8mm Thk
steel, required
cutting, perforating,
welding, anti-rust
dealing, static
coating

Reception Reception Reception desk--

desk with Dimension-as per
backdrop the schematic design
and with standards
celling, height and width.
Mid back
chair All internal
partitions to be
finished with particle
board with high
pressure lamination.
All external boards
to be melamine
particle boards.
Thickness:
Top board – 25mm
thk
All other side boards
– 18mm thk. Except
otherwise special
stated.
All hinges, handles
and other accessories
to be high quality
stainless steel SS
grade to be 304.
Bottom should be
supported with
heavy duty PVC
glides.

Mid back chair-

Ultra durable
breathable and

94
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

flexible mesh used in

construction, height
adjustable gas lift,
contoured seat
cushion with high
density foam,
polished chrome
steel 5 star base with
heavy duty casters,
arm rest in
polypropylene.

Passenger Tiketing Counters- 12

ticketing counters
counters As per the standard
counters at sizes and heights, 12 mid
2nd floor legth –Full periphary back
length , Quatrts top , chairs
Fit to purpose,
consist with Internal
drawers , CPU and
UPS rack (made out
of melamine boards )
underneath of the top
To be accommodate
for the required
service connections.
Mid back chairs-
Ultra durable
breathable and
flexible mesh used in
construction, height
adjustable gas lift,
contoured seat
cushion with high
density foam,
polished chrome
steel 5 star base with
heavy duty casters,
arm rest in
polypropylene.

95
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Passenger Waiting Stainless steel metal 600 seats

waiting waiting area
chair
areas bench,Combined
seats type
at 2nd floor
Seat and back-
perforated cold-
rolled steel plate
after anti rust
detailing,electronic
polishing,static
coating,
Arms and legs-
1.2mm thicknes
metal,die
casting,deepdrawing
steel plate,high
strength
jointing,polishing
Beam-1.8mm Thk
steel,required
cutting,perforating,w
elding,anti rust
dealing,static coating

Food court Dining Table- Adequate

at 2nd floor tables and numbers
steel powder coated
chairs frame,high pressure as per the
laminated top.4 reqirement
persons can be ,standards
accomodated
comfortably.Size-
Chair-plastic chair
with sturdy steel
structure/frame.
Baby care 2 Single Beds- Adequate
room Beds,2 numbers
Partial board with
chairs, Thermo fused as per the
1 table melamine finish, reqirement
with scratch resistant ,standards
power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides.
Chairs- plastic chair

96
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

with sturdy steel

structure/frame.

Table-
Partial board with
Thermo fused
melamine finish,
with scratch resistant
power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides. Size-
1500mmx600mmx7
62mm(LxHxH)

First aid 2 Single Beds- Adequate

room Beds,2 numbers
Partial board with
chairs, Thermo fused as per the
1 table, melamine finish, reqirement
with scratch resistant ,standards
Bed trolly
power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides.

Chairs-
plastic chair with
sturdy steel
structure/frame.

Table-
Partial board with
Thermo fused
melamine finish,
with scratch resistant
power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides. Size-
1500mmx600mmx7
62mm(LxHxH)
Pharmacy Counter, Counter-
2chairs, Partial board with
Thermo fused
Store
melamine finish,

97
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

racks with scratch resistant

power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides

Chairs-
plastic chair with
sturdy steel
structure/frame

Store racks-
powder coated steel
frame structure with
melamine boards
shelfs and
Side panels
1800x600mmx2100
mm(LxHxH)

Store cupbords-
made out of
melamine boards
,powder coated steel
frame structure ,with
openable two glass
doors
1800x600mmx2100
mm(LxHxH)

Parking Rest areas Bunker Bunker beds- Minimum

building for beds requireme
- Single bed size
150(Minim nt;
10 chairs ,bunker
um) nos of type(2beds),Partial 75 Bunker
bus drivers 7 Tables
board with Thermo beds
3 Stools fused melamine 150
3 Lokers finish, with scratch Mettress
resistant power
coated steel structure 10 chairs
Mettress-standard 7 Tables
single size ,Triple 3 Stools
layer 4’’Thk foam
3 Lockers

98
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

mattress

Chairs-
plastic chair with
sturdy steel
structure/frame.

Table-
Partial board with
Thermo fused
melamine finish,
with scratch resistant
power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides. Size-
1500mmx600mmx7
62mm(LxHxH)

Stools-
Partial board with
Thermo fused
melamine finish,
with scratch resistant
power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides

Lockers-
6 Nos
materiai,Powder
coated metal 25
lokable partitions per
each,Height –up to
ceiling level

Food Court Dining Table- Adequate

tables and numbers
steel powder coated
chairs frame,high pressure as per the
laminated top.4 standards
persons can be
accomodated

99
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

comfortably.

Chair-
plastic chair with
sturdy steel
structure/frame

Operatio Office Execative Execative tables- Adequate

nal and Space tables, numbers
made out of 25mm
Manage Execative thick solid teak top as per the
ment chairs, (visible thickness standards
Amenitie 50mm) and 18mm
s General
thick solid teak
(Building office
wood base with
/Floor as tables,
Stain in matt finish
per the General ,Anti-scratch ,anti-
Table office dirty ,anti-water.
B3) chairs, Stain colour to be
Minor staf approved by
table, architect.

Minor staf
chair All accessories to be
Cupboard stainless steel with
s-type1 s/s screws. Drawers
fixing to be With s/s
Cupboard sliders. Bottom
s-type2 should be supported
with PVC glides.

Technological
requirement: Station
should full fill the
technological
requirement as per
the client
requirement. (Flip
open wire box with
power & USB port).
Combination -
Main desk with pull
out keyboard tray
and drawer

100
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Side desk with

lockable Drawers +
moveable drawer for
CPU.
Thickness - Top
board - 25mm thk
Side - 18mm thk
Drawers - 15mm thk
All hinges, handles
and other accessories
to be high quality
s/s.
( s/s grade to be
304).
Size: Main desk – L
2000 mm x W 900
mm x H 760 mm
Side return – L
1200mm x W 500
mm X H 760 mm

Execative chairs-
High back Chair,
Ultra durable
breathable and
flexible mesh used in
construction, height
adjustable gas lift,
contoured seat
cushion with high
density foam,
polished chrome
steel 5 star base with
heavy duty casters,
arm rest in
polypropylene.

General office
tables- made out of
melamine pasted
board base with
1mm thick PVC
edging table top
(visible thickness

101
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

25mm).finish should
be
Anti-scratch, anti-
dirty, anti-water and
colour to be
approved by
architect.
All accessories to be
stainless steel with
s/s screws. Drawers
fixing to be with s/s
sliders.
Bottom should be
supported with PVC
glides.
Combination -
Main desk with pull
out keyboard tray
and drawer
All hinges, handles
and other accessories
to be high quality
s/s.
( s/s grade to be 304)

General office
chairs-
Mid back
chairs,Ultra durable
breathable and
flexible mesh used in
construction, height
adjustable gas lift,
contoured seat
cushion with high
density foam,
polished chrome
steel 5 star base with
heavy duty casters,
arm rest in
polypropylene.

102
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Minor staff table-

Partial board with
Thermo fused
melamine finish,
with scratch resistant
power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides. Size-
1500mmx600mmx7
62mm(LxHxH)

Minor staff chair-

Mesh Backrest ,
Backrest color

Cupboards(type1)-
1200mmX600mmX2
100mm made out of
25mm thk HDF
board (laminated
melamine) base with
1mm thick PVC
edging Including
Doors & shelves.

Cupboards(type2)-
Floor cupboard
(open + file)- 3930
mm x 450mm x 900
mm cupboard with
25mm thick HDF
(laminated
melamine)
framework consist
with 18mm thick
HDF drawers fixed
with standard
drawers runners.
All accessories to be
stainless steel with
s/s screws. Drawers
fixing to be with s/s
sliders.

103
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Enquiry Counter, Counter- Adequate

room (3 numbers
3chairs, Partial board with
Counters) Thermo fused as per the
3Cupboar
melamine finish, reqirement
ds,
with scratch resistant ,standards
power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides.counter
Size4500mmx600m
mx762mm(LxHxH),
Need counter
seperations

Chairs-
3 Nos,Mid back
chairs,Ultra durable
breathable and
flexible mesh used in
construction, height
adjustable gas lift,
contoured seat
cushion with high
density foam,
polished chrome
steel 5 star base with
heavy duty casters,
arm rest in
polypropylene.

Cupboards-
3Nos ,Size
1200mmX600mmX2
100mm made out of
25mm thk HDF
board (laminated
melamine) base with
1mm thick PVC
edging Including
Doors & shelves.

Defect 1Table, Table- Adequate

Reporting 2 Nos, Partial board numbers
2chairs,
with Thermo fused

104
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Room and 3 melamine finish, as per the

Repair Cupboard with scratch resistant reqirement
power coated steel
room s, base with necessary ,standards
PVC glides. Size-
6 Racks
1500mmx600mmx76
2mm(LxHxH)

Chair –
Mid back
chairs,Ultra durable
breathable and
flexible mesh used in
construction, height
adjustable gas lift,
contoured seat
cushion with high
density foam,
polished chrome
steel 5 star base with
heavy duty casters,
arm rest in
polypropylene.

Chair-
Chair-plastic chair
with sturdy steel
structure/frame.

Cupboards-
3nos,1200W x 450D
x1800Hsteel
cupboard with glass
panels, made of cold
Rolled carbon steel
with Scratch
Resistant Powder –
Coat Finish with 2
metal Doors

105
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Racks-
6 Nos,Steel open
shelves with slotted
angle frames. All
sections, Corner
plates, nut and bolts
feet and other
necessary
accessories should
be 1.8mm thick
nickel steel hot
nickel dipped
galvanized finished
for durable. Size.:
940 mm x 300mm x
1800mm

Locker Lockers, Lockers- Adequate

Room ( for numbers
Benches materiai,Powder
crew and coated metal 25 as per the
staff) lokable partitions per reqirement
each,Height –up to ,standards
ceiling level

Benches-
made out with hard
wood timber planks.
Size
600mmx1800mm

Cash Room Lockers, Lockers- Adequate

numbers
Cupboard, materiai,Powder
Table,Cha coated metal as per the
ir lokable partitions per design
each,Height –up to
ceiling level

106
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Training/ High back High back Chair- Adequate

numbers
conference chair Ultra durable
breathable and as per the
Room ,20 mid
flexible mesh used in reqirement
back
construction, height ,standards
chairs,
adjustable gas lift,
Conferenc contoured seat
e table cushion with high
density foam,
polished chrome
steel 5 star base with
heavy duty casters,
arm rest in
polypropylene.

Mid back chair-

Ultra durable
breathable and
flexible mesh used in
construction, height
adjustable gas lift,
contoured seat
cushion with high
density foam,
polished chrome
steel 5 star base with
heavy duty casters,
arm rest in
polypropylene.

Conference table-
Partial board with
Thermo fused
melamine finish,
with scratch resistant
power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides, consist
with 2 or 3 parts, can
be seated 10 persons
around the table.

107
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Control Control Control Table- Adequate

Centre for numbers
Table , Made out of Partial
Terminal board with Thermo as per the
Operation Mid back
fused melamine reqirement
System chairs,
finish, with scratch ,standards
Floor resistant power
cupboards coated steel base
with necessary PVC
glides
Size-as per the
standards and
requirment
To be accommodate
for the required
service connections.

Mid back chair- PU

leather upholstery
medium back
Revolving chair with
polypropylene arm
rest, gas lift, heavy
duty adjustment
mechanism, wider
five arms star base,
Heavy duty dual
wheel hooded caster
wheels and tilt
tension.

Floor cupboard-
(open + file)- 3930
mm x 450mm x 900
mm cupboard with
25mm thick HDF
(laminated
melamine)
framework consist
with 18mm thick
HDF drawers fixed
with standard
drawers runners.
All accessories to be
stainless steel with

108
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

s/s screws. Drawers

fixing to be with s/s
sliders.

ETM ETM Adequate

Room for charging numbers
down racks as per the
loading & reqirement
ETM
,standards
charging
racks
Data Steel 1200W x 450D x Adequate
storage- cupboards 1800H steel numbers
secured cupboard with glass as per the
room for panels, made of cold reqirement
tapes and Rolled carbon steel ,standards
data, (near with Scratch
the control Resistant Powder –
center) Coat Finish with 2
metal Doors

Security Size- 3 Nos

Posts 2100mmx2100mm,p
(portable ertable type,powder
cabins as coared steel structur
well as and aluminium
masonry) composite panel
envelop.to be
compatible with
outdoor climate.
Environme Tables, Table- Adequate
ntal chairs, numbers
made out of
Quality Cupboard melamine pasted as per the
Manageme s board base with reqirement
nt Room 1mm thick PVC ,standards
edging table top
(visible thickness
25mm).finish should
be Anti-scratch, anti-
dirty, anti-water and
colour to be
approved by

109
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

architect.
All accessories to be
stainless steel with
s/s screws. Drawers
fixing to be with s/s
sliders.
Bottom should be
supported with PVC
glides.
Combination -
Main desk with pull
out keyboard tray
and drawer
All hinges, handles
and other accessories
to be high quality
s/s.
( s/s grade to be 304)

Chairs-
Mid back
chairs,Ultra durable
breathable and
flexible mesh used in
construction, height
adjustable gas lift,
contoured seat
cushion with high
density foam,
polished chrome
steel 5 star base with
heavy duty casters,
arm rest in
polypropylene.

Cupboards-
Size
1200mmX600mmX2
100mm made out of
25mm thk HDF
board (laminated
melamine) base with
1mm thick PVC

110
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

edging Including
Doors & shelves.
Arcade Guest Every Single beds – 16 rooms
building rooms room is 2Nos,Standard size,
consist - made out with
with; hard wood
2 single timber,box type
beds , ,coverd pheryphary
2
matresses,
Matresses –
Wall fixed 2Nos,high quality
work spring
top,2 bed metreess,150mm
side thk, classic type
Cupbords,
2 chairs,
Wall fixed work
2cupboard top-,
s.
made out with hard
wood
timber,required
comfortable working
space for two users
at one time.

Bed side Cupbords-

2Nos, 325 mm x 400
mm bedhead
cupboard finished
with hard wood and
should include 02
no’s pull out
drawers.
Height should be bed
height.

Chairs-
2Nos, chair with
upholstery fabric
seat with hard wood
timber base with
legs.

111
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Cupboards-
2Nos,Size
1200mmx600mmx2
100mm, made out
with hard wood
timber

Re-fuel Operationa Table, Tables- Adequate

l office chair, numbers
station Partial board with
cupboard Thermo fused as per the
steel melamine finish, reqirement
drawer with scratch resistant ,standards
power coated steel
base with necessary
PVC glides. Size-
1500mmx600mmx7
62mm(LxHxH)

Mid back chair-

Ultra durable
breathable and
flexible mesh used in
construction, height
adjustable gas lift,
contoured seat
cushion with high
density foam,
polished chrome
steel 5 star base with
heavy duty casters,
arm rest in
polypropylene.

Cupboards-
1200W x 450D x
2100H steel
cupboard with glass
panels, made of cold
Rolled carbon steel
with Scratch

112
.Section VII E. Specifications
Furniture
Building Amenities Description Nos Reference image
item

Resistant Powder –
Coat Finish with 2
metal Doors.
Steel drawer-900W
x 450D x 2100 H
steel drawer made of
cold rolled carbon
steel with Scratch
Resistant Powder –
Coat Finish with
Metal drawer

E.2.1.8. Sanitary fittings and accessories:

Sanitary fittings shall be from reputed brands such as “Toto”, “American Standard”, “Rocel”or
equivalent. After sale service (with local agent), reliability, availability and durability shall be the
main consideration of the selection of items falling under this category. In addition, special
consideration shall be given for the hierarchy and type of user category. All accessories shall be in
chrome plated bronze. Preferred brands for accessories are “American Standard”, “Grohe” or
equivalent (with local agent).

E.2.1.9. Lighting and light fittings:

Architectural lighting systems are strongly recommended for the exterior lighting and interior
lighting in major areas such as entrances, parking areas, underpass area, entrance lobbies, general
lobbies, terminal office rooms, etc., In general an energy efficient State of the Art lighting system
is highly recommended in overall lighting arrangement. All light fittings shall be from preferred

113
.Section VII E. Specifications
brands specified under the Electrical section of this document.

E.2.1.10. Interior decoration items :

Interior decoration items including feature hanging items,statues and sculptures ,etc shall be
supplied and installed by the contractor. Interior elements including decorative RCC
elements,mouldings,engraving/carving works, etc to pe designed and constructed by the contractor.

E.2.1.11. Window blinds:

Adjustable vertical / horizontal blinds are recommended for all office areas and the contractor have
to supply and fixing of curtains and blinds.

E.2.1.12. Vertical circulation systems:

Vertical transportation shall be designed with adequate number of passenger lifts, escalators, ramps
and stairways to suit functional requirements and traffic patterns of the proposed building. All
habitable spaces shall be accessible to all including differently abled persons. Fire escapes shall
be provided to satisfy fire regulations and for the convenience of the users.

E.2.1.13. Signage:

Main name boards at the entrances of the building, on the body of the building, Signage for
identification of spaces and directions for users are required. Modern standard signage system with
a suitable lighting system is recommended.Have to follow a sutable theme for the internal signage
boards . The signages shall be durable, easily cleanable, easy maintained.Below mentioned
minimum requirment to be fullifilled by the contractor.

- Main name boards at the entrances –2 Nos, Size 4mx1.5m(length,height),stainless steel

plate letters with suitable LED lighting system

- Sub name boards at the secondary entrances at Colombo Kandy road,William Gopallawa
Mawatha –2 Nos, Size 2mx1m(length,height),stainless steel plate letters with suitable LED
lighting system

- Layout map of the building (Wall fixed or free stand signage for identification of the
location withinn the building ,“You are here” type) –size 2400mmx1200mm, to be located
at the ground and second floor lobbies.

- Free standing KMTT photo backdrop made out of MDF / melamine boards (movable) .-
1Nos ,Size 2.5mx3m(length,height), to be located at the second floor lobby.

114
.Section VII E. Specifications
- Wall fixed signage for identification of the location withinn the building (“You are here”)
–size 841mmx594mm, to be located at every circulation cores

- Signage for identification of spaces- ticketing counters,offices,toilets,vendors square,food

court,administrative and operational spaces,parking spaces etc

- Signage directions for users are required-(wall fixed way finding signages)at circulation
cores.

- Signage boards (matching with the theme) for shops /eateries/food stalls

- Internal road signages as per the standards.

- Signages relavent to evacuation paths and other fire regulation requirments

- Other required signage for fit to the purpose of the building.

E.2.1.14. External work:

Appropriate landscaping design proposal shall be submitted showing with roads, paved areas,
foliage, lighting systems and outdoor seating etc. for approval.The landscape works and other
exterior works should be done by the contractor. Improvement of junctions and aproaches
etc,integration of surrounding road network and facilities in line with the new facilities to be done
by the contractor.

Note- A reasonable quantity of extra finishes materials (All finishes, item wise), loose
furniture to be handed over to the employer (RDA) at the handing over the project

E.2.2. CONSTRUCTION STAGE

E.2.2.1. General

Main civil construction shall be carried out according to the standards, specifications described
under the structural section and all supportive building services shall be done to satisfy
specifications, standards and parameters given under respective engineering disciplines given in
this document.

Contractor is responsible for obtaining all necessary approvals from relevant authorities before
commencing any construction works at site.

E.2.2.2. Architectural Finishes

Architectural finishes shall be in accordance with the guidelines given under the “General
Guidelines for selection of Material, Fittings and Finishes” of this document.

E.2.2.3. Selection of Finishing Materials and Fittings

115
.Section VII E. Specifications
In addition to the aesthetical acceptability, finishing material and fittings shall be selected taking
into the consideration the functional requirements, durability, availability and after sale
service(local agent).

E.2.2.4. Sample Approvals

Prior approval shall be obtained from the employer /consultant appointed by the employer for all
finishing material, fittings and accessories. Submission shall be made with actual samples along
with technical literature, production details, Brand names, prices etc., Test certificates and
warranties shall be submitted along with the samples where it is applicable.

E.2.2.5. Mockups and Presentations

Detailed presentations shall be made by the contractor to obtain formal approval and consent from
the employer for color schemes and finishing themes of the major areas of the building.

Financial provisions shall be made by the contractor to carry out “mockups” as requested by the
employer.

E.2.2.6. Fabrications, Installations and Applications

Fabrication, installations and applications shall be done as per the specifications and guidelines
given in this document and as per the specifications and recommendations of the manufactures.

E.2.2.7. Construction Drawings and Shop Drawings

Detailed architectural drawings and shop drawings required for the construction shall be made
available for the approval of Employer/Engineer.

E.2.2.8. Spare material, Fittings and Accessories

A reasonable quantity of finishing materials, fittings and accessories shall be made available at the
handing over of the building for repairs, replacements and maintenance works.

E.2.2.9. Product Information

A detailed document shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted to the Employer giving all
the details related to finishing material, fittings and accessories such as brand names, model no,
sources of supply ,local agent etc., for future reference.

E.2.2.10. Functional Tests

Contractor shall get all the functional tests performed by qualified persons to achieve the
satisfactory levels and standards. All test certificates shall be handed over to the Employer at the

116
.Section VII E. Specifications
formal handing over of the project.

E.2.2.11. “As Built” Drawings.

Complete set of accurate “As Built” drawings shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted to
the Employer along with softcopies in “auto cad” and “pdf” versions.

E.2.2.12. Certificate of conformity

At the completion of the project, Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining “Certificates of
Conformities” for the building construction and installations from relevant local authorities which
shall be handed over to the Employer.

E.2.2.13. Product Manuals and operating manuals.

Contractor shall be responsible for compiling all relevant product information and operating
manuals, maintenance schedules etc., required for the smooth functioning of the building.

E.2.3. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

E.2.3.1. Local Authority Approvals

The Contractor is responsible for obtaining preliminary clearances and final approvals required for
the proposed development from the relevant authorities. Further, the contractor is responsible

for making any amendments to the drawings if necessary to satisfy the comments and
recommendations given by such authorities and to obtain final approvals. Contactor shall bear all
the expenses incurred in this regard. Contractor shall be responsible to pay processing and all other
fees incurred in obtaining approvals from the relevant authorities.

E.2.3.2. Certificate of Conformity

At the completion of the project, contractor shall prepare updated version of drawings incorporating
all the amendments made during the construction and submit to KMC/UDA and any other relevant
authorities in order to obtain all necessary certificates and “Certificates of Conformity” in respect
of the building works and installations done.

E.2.3.3. Fire Approvals

The contractor shall obtain certificate of conformity from Fire Service Department of
Kandy/Colombo Municipal Council on completion of the installation work of fire detection, fire
protection and any other services which require fire service department approval.

E.2.3.1. Rainwater Harvesting

Finalizing the targeted use of harvested rainwater require obtaining of Client’s decision as it has

117
.Section VII E. Specifications
bearing over the degree of treatment requirements.

In general any kind of rainwater harvesting system, in which collected water is destined for
anything other than garden irrigation, it is essential that dust, debris, bird droppings, leaves, and
other contaminants which accumulate on roofs are kept out when it starts to rain. Therefore it is
necessary to define steps and relevant components in the cleansing process. It is required to
highlight operation and maintenance procedure of the system.

However, as a pre-filtration process, first flush out system is recommended in the Rainwater
Harvesting System to flush out initially contaminated water from the system.

E.2.3.2. Green building Certificate and green building category

Green Building Certificate issued by the Urban Development Authority shall be obtained by the
design and build contractor. The proposed building shall comply with minimum “Green Gold
Category” of the Green Building Rating of Urban Development Authority .

E.2.4. STANDARDS, REGULATIONS, GUIDELINES AND SPECIFICATIONS TO BE

FOLLOWED

E.2.4.1. Standards

 Ernst and Peter Neufert,Architects’ Data,Third edition,Black well science

 International plumbing code-2018, International Code Council, Inc.

 Design considerations on accessibility for persons with disabilities-2013,Ministry of

Health,Sri Lanka.

 Other relevant standards from local stake holder institutes.(Especially standards followed
by Sri Lanka Railways-SLR, Road development authority-RDA)

 Environmental and public Health standards, Construction Industry Development

Authority(CIDA),publication no : CIDA/STD/01

 Ethical and Social responsibility standards, Construction Industry Development

Authority(CIDA),publication no : CIDA/STD/02

E.2.4.2. Regulations

 Building regulations 2021-Urban Development Authority(UDA) Sri Lanka

 Kandy Development plan 2021-2030 –Kandy Municipal council ,Sri Lanka

 Fire regulations [3rd Edition (Revised) 2018], Construction Industry Development

118
.Section VII E. Specifications
Authority(CIDA),publication no :ICTAD/DEV/14

 Railway reservation lines established by Railway Department, Sri Lanka

 Other relevant reservation and clearances from local stake holder institutes, Sri Lanka
(National Water Supply and Drainage Board, Central environment authority, Irrigation
department, Sri Lanka Land Reclamation & Development Corporation (SLLRDC),Civil
aviation authority etc..)

E.2.4.3. Guidelines

 Blue green Sri Lanka, Green building guidelines for Sri Lanka-2017, Urban Development
Authority(UDA) Sri Lanka

 Other relevant guidelines from local stake holder institutes.

 World Bank Environmental Safeguard Policies and Environmental Health and Safety
(EHS) Guidelines

E.2.4.4. Specifications

 Specifications for Building Works (Vol. I) – [3rd Edition (Revised) – July 2004],
Construction Industry Development Authority(CIDA),publication no : SCA/4/I

 Specifications for Building Works (Vol. II) – [2nd Edition (Revised) – October 2001].
Construction Industry Development Authority(CIDA),publication no : SCA/4/II

 Specifications for Landscape Works – Volume I, Construction Industry Development

Authority(CIDA),publication no : SCA/7

E.2.4.5. References

 Site survey plan .Plan No. Maha/MHN/2017/654P (Annexure 1)

 Updated Site survey plan with road expansion near arcade building .Plan No…….
(Annexure 2)

 Conceptual design drawings (5.2, Deliverable No-5) by DIMTS in association with Uni
consultants.–Addendam version, -(Annexure 3)

 Appendices to Integrated Strategic PT Plan, Public Transport Design & Operations

Management Plan & Strategic Traffic Demand Management & Design Plan for Kandy, Sri
Lanka by DIMTS in association with Uni consultants.–

 Integrated Strategic Public Transport Plan, ,Volume I of II ,Public Transport Design &

119
.Section VII E. Specifications
Operations Management Plan & Strategic Traffic Demand Management & Design Plan for
Kandy by DIMTS in association with Uni consultants.

 Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) and Traffic Impact Assessment (TIA) done for the
KMMIT Project

E.3. STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL WORK

E.3.1 STRUCTURAL

E.3.1.1 Standards

 BS 8110 Part I 1997 – Code of Practice for Design and Construction.

 BS 8110 Part II 1985 – Code of Practice for Special circumstances.

 BS 8110 Part III 1985 – Design Charts for Reinforcement elements.

 BS 5950 Structural Steel

 BS 5400 Bridges and related structures

 BS 5896 High tensile steel wire and strand for the pre-stressing of concrete

 BS 8007 Water retaining structures

 BS 5268 Structural use of timber

 BS 8004 Foundations

 BS 6399 Part 1 Design loading for building - Live Loads

 “Design of Buildings for High Winds –Sri Lanka –Ministry of Local Govt.

 Housing and Construction -1980” and BS CP 3 –Chapter V. Basic data for the design
of buildings or any other standard approved by the Engineer- Wind Loads

 BS 4449 Specification for steel bars for reinforcement of concrete

 BS 4461 Rolled steel bars for reinforced concrete

120
.Section VII E. Specifications
 BS 5328 Specifying concrete including ready-mixed concrete

 BS 8007 1987 – Code of Practice for design of concrete structures for aqueous liquids.

 ICTAD/DEV/15 - Guidelines for Interpretation of Site Investigation Data for

Estimating the Carrying Capacity of Single Piles for Design of Board & Cast In- Situ
Reinforced Concrete Piles

 SCA/4 (Vol. I) - Specifications for Building Works Vol. (I), Sri Lanka. 3rd Edition
(Revised), July 2004

 SCA/4 (Vol. II) - Specification for Building Works Second Edition (Revised), October
2001

 SCA/05(Vol. I) - Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Roads and

Bridges

The above standards or Eurocodes will be used as applicable; however, other British or other
internationally recognized equivalent standards will be used for specific areas of design should be
approved by the Engineer where necessary.

E.3.1.2 Special Loading

E.3.1.2.1. Earthquake Loads:

Sri Lanka is situated on the Indo-Australian Tectonic plate. Being located in the middle of Indian
plate, Sri Lanka is well away from the plate tectonic boundaries & it has been considered
an aseismic country in the past. The geological phenomena occurring in recent past in the Indian
Ocean and formation of weak geological zones around the Sri Lanka, enhances the vulnerability
of Sri Lanka to future hazards. Hence it is required to design the buildings & structures of KMTT
for minor earthquake conditions and it is recommended to use the acceleration co- efficient of
0.1g ( Peak Ground Acceleration): PGA value) for the

designs of buildings & structures in KMTT.

E.3.1.2.2. Wind Loads:

Wind speeds of Sri Lanka shall be obtained from the manual of “Design of Buildings for

High Winds –Sri Lanka” published by the Ministry of Local Govt. Housing and Construction

-1980.

With reference to the above document, Kandy is located in wind zone 3 of Sri Lankan map

& Basic wind speed shall be taken as one of the follows.

121
.Section VII E. Specifications
a) 38 m/s for post- disaster structures (3 second guest speed for 50 year return period-
CP3 Chapter V)

b) 23 m/s (10 min. average for 50 year return period- EN1991-1-4-2005)

c) 21 m/s (Mean hourly wind speed for BS 6399.2- 1997)

E.3.1.3. Minimum Live load Requirements:

All live loads for the design shall be obtained from the BS6399 & BS 5400 with following
minimum requirements.

Bus parking and Terminal Building:7.5 kN/m2(min) & HA & HB loading

Sky Walk :7.5 kN/m2 UDL with other code applicable conditions
Other Public Areas :5.0 kN/m2 UDL with other code applicable conditions

E.3.1.4 Guidance for design of retaining structures

E.3.1.4.1 Earth Retaining Structures

Retaining walls shall be designed according to the relevant standards. Type of retaining wall shall
be selected based on the retaining height, ground conditions, applied loads, available space for
construction, restrictions with the structures to be constructed, stability of the adjoining
structures (existing structures), etc.

Retaining structures shall be design for “at rest” condition when they connected with any other
structure/s or there is specific requirement to limit the lateral deflections. Otherwise earth
retaining structures could be designed for active and passive earth pressure in addition to other
loads. Stability against overturning, sliding, bearing, slope failures shall be checked in accordance
with relevant standards specified herein. Deflections shall be controlled by limiting the allowable
span to depth ratio in accordance with the relevant standards. The maximum crack with shall be
limited to 0.2mm where there are water tightness requirements and it shall be limited to 0.3mm
elsewhere.

E.3.1.4.2. Water Retaining Structures

122
.Section VII E. Specifications
Underground water sumps, overhead water tanks and fuel tanks should be designed according
to relevant standards & specifications.

E.3.2 CIVIL WORK

E.3.2.1 Surveying

The Contractor shall render all services for topographical survey and field measurement required
for the performance of the works. These services cover in general the verification of control points,
the setting out for construction the accompanying control surveys for correct locations, dimensions,
elevations as well as the necessary surveys for ground profile. Such surveys shall be based on
and/or referred to a basic grid of datum points and benchmarks extended adjacent to the Works
in the project area. This grid shall be the sole basis of reference for all survey work.

The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate suitable and appropriate equipment,
instruments, materials and auxiliary equipment, commensurate with the various tasks and precision
requirements of the survey works.

E.3.2.2. Setting Out

The Contractor shall perform all setting out and check surveying of the Works in accordance with
methods approved by the Engineer. The methods and program of checking shall be such, as to
ensure the construction of every part of the Works to the correct line and level. The Engineer may
at any time request the Contractor to submit proof that his own setting out has been satisfactorily
checked. The number of points required for setting out as well as the spacing between these points
shall be determined by the Contractor in accordance with the type of the work. The Engineer may
require that some or all of the given points and datum levels be clearly marked during construction
in such a way that the marks can be retained after completion of construction.

E.3.3 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING

E.3.3.1 Clearing

Clearing means the removal and disposal of materials above ground level including overhanging
branches except those areas where the Engineer directs to be left undisturbed. The material to
be cleared shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, trees, stumps, logs, brush, undergrowth,
grass crops, loose vegetable matter, structures and other objectionable materials.

E.3.3.2 Grubbing

Grubbing means the removal and disposal of buried logs, stumps, roots and all unsuitable
obstacles to a depth beneath the original ground surface as directed by the Engineer.

123
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.3.3.3 Stripping

Stripping means the removal and disposal of topsoil to a depth beneath the original ground

surface as directed by the Engineer.

Clearing, grubbing and stripping operations shall be strictly limited to the area to be occupied by
the indispensable works unless otherwise directed or approved by the Engineer. No trees shall be
cut outside the areas mentioned above without prior approval. Clearing and grubbing shall extend
to approximately five (05) meters beyond the limit of the works for permanent structures. As for
Temporary Works, the extension shall be a minimum as required.

All materials obtained by the clearing, grubbing and stripping operations shall be remove and
disposed of as specified or directed by the Engineer. All depressions below the ground
surface by the removal of stumps or roots shall be refilled with suitable materials and
compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Care shall be taken to see that the burning of such
material does not destroy or damage public or private property and adjacent vegetation, and the
Contractor shall be fully responsible for destruction, damage, or nuisance caused therein.

E.3.4 OPEN EXCAVATION

Open excavation shall include all and every excavation work for foundations of all structures and
any other excavation to be executed from the ground surface.

E.3.4.1 Common Excavation

The bottom and side slope of common excavations upon or against which structures are to be

Placed shall be finished accurately to the established lines and grades.

If, at any point in common excavation, the natural foundation material is disturbed or
loosened, for any reason, it shall be consolidated by tamping or rolling, or where directed by the
Engineer, It shall be removed and replaced with materials approved by the Engineer, which
shall be thoroughly compacted. All water and other objectionable materials shall be either pumped
out or removed.

E.3.4.2 Open Trench Excavation

Open trench excavation shall include excavation for all types of trenches and shall be performed
by the use of hand tools and/or approved mechanical equipment, in such a manner as to prevent
shattering of the sides and bottom of the excavation.

All planking, strutting and supports necessary to retain the sides of the open-cut trench excavation
shall be provided, erected and maintained in a safe condition by the Contractor. Trench excavation

124
.Section VII E. Specifications
with surfaces too steep to be stable shall be supported to prevent soil movement. The Contractor
shall furnish, place, and subsequently remove the supports.

E.3.4.3 Dewatering

The Contractor shall construct, operate and maintain drainage systems, including drainage trenches,
pump sumps, pumps, pipelines, emergency generator etc., to sufficiently dewater all appearing
water, service water and underground water encountered during excavation, in order to allow
for the workman like execution of all underground excavation works. The selection of a pump
(its type, capacity and location) for any specific task, requires the approval of the Engineer.
Construction pits, galleries, and trenches shall be maintained and be protected according to
regulations and as long as the progress of work demands such means.‟ Underground drainage shall
follow shortly after excavation at the face.

E.3.4.4 Slopes Support and Protection

The Contractor is responsible for all necessary safety measures for open excavation. From the
Commencement of Works until issuance of Certificate of Completion, the Contractor shall strictly
follow safety regulations in order to prevent accidents.

Proper strutting, including rearrangements of the struts when necessary, protection of slopes,
methods of excavation to reduce risk of slides, etc. shall be deemed to be included in the lump sum
prices. In the event of soil or rock slides occurring during earth excavation work, all damages shall
be rectified by the Contractor. All additional work from such damage will not be paid for. Where
the nature of the soil gives reason to fear of any movement, initial excavation operations shall be
carried out with special care.

All planking, strutting and supports necessary to retain the sides of the excavations shall be
provided, erected and maintained in a safe condition by the Contractor. Excavation shall not be
carried out below foundations of any structure, until underpinning and shoring etc. to be performed
by the Contractor, have been completed. All existing structures, pipes and foundations, if any,
which are to be incorporated into the final work, shall be adequately protected or replaced by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall provide soil support, gunite, and/or shotcrete support (with and
without reinforcement) for open excavations or other methods as approved by the Engineer.
These supporting measures shall be in accordance with the provision established in this document.

E.3.4.5 Seams, Cavities and Other Defects

The exploratory investigations of the foundations, slopes and other areas to be excavated cannot
be so detailed as to disclose all seams, cavities and other defects that may exist in the areas to be

125
.Section VII E. Specifications
excavated. It is anticipated that there may be depressions, fissures, faults, seams and bands of
soft disintegrating material running in various directions in the materials to be excavated and in the
foundations and under passes, slopes and other areas.

E.3.4.6 Filling for Foundation and Structures

No filling operation shall be started by the Contractor for any part of the foundation, until the
Engineer has inspected and accepted it. Where swamps, marshes, bogs or similar wet areas have to
be crossed by the works, they shall be drained and unsuitable material shall be removed according
to the materials and conditions encountered. When excavation operations are completed, the
foundation surfaces shall be compacted to a depth of 30 cm with the density specified for the
fill to be placed thereon unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

E.3.5. CONCRETE WORKS

E.3.5.1 General Requirements

All material shall be in accordance with the latest version of standards stated in Clause 2.11 of these
specifications. It is deemed that the Proposer has allowed for all charges for obtaining materials in
conformance to these standards in the Bill of Quantities.

E.3.5.2. Definitions

1. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate is defined as the aggregate substantially passing 4.75 mm
sieve.

2. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate is defined as the aggregate substantially retained on

the 4.75mm sieve and having maximum size of 80 mm.

3. Construction Joints: Concrete surfaces, upon or against which concrete is to be placed and
to which new concrete is to adhere, that have become so rigid that the new concrete cannot
be incorporated integrally with that previously placed are defined as construction joints.

4. Expansion or Contraction Joints: All joints allowing relative movement of concrete

structures with respect to an adjacent one, due to expansion, shrinkage, settlement of
foundations, etc. are to be considered expansion or contraction joints.

E.3.5.3. Submissions

(1) Ready mix concrete:

Ready-mix Concrete from a Central Mixing Plants (Batching plant) is only permitted for all
reinforced concrete if approved batching plant is not installed at site by the Proposer. The details
of the Mixing Plant and relevant Test Results should be submitted to the Engineer for the approval

126
.Section VII E. Specifications
before 56 days.

(2) Cement:

The Contractor shall submit at least twenty eight (28) days before the use of cement, a typical
mill test report regarding the control tests performed at the factory, including the physical and
chemical properties of the cement proposed for the Works. The Contractor shall indicate in
writing to the Engineer the source of the cement at least fifty six (56) days in advance of his
purchase order, indicating the shipping schedule and the estimated quantity to be obtained from
each source. The Contractor shall submit a manufacturer's test certificate for each consignment
and/or 1,000 tons cement received at site.

Having obtained the Engineer's approval of the source of supply, transport, storage and
certification of the cement, the Proposer shall not modify or change the agreed arrangements
without obtained the Engineer's permission.

(3) Aggregates:

At least ninety (90) days prior to placing any concrete, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for approval the confirmation of sources, processing procedures, gradation curves and quality
assurance. Where this document requires specific types of materials or equipment to be used or
specified procedures to be followed, such requirements are not to be construed as prohibiting use
of alternative types of materials, equipment or procedures. Before giving approval for the use of
alternatives, the Engineer may request the Contractor to submit proof that the use of such
alternatives will not reduce the quality of concrete obtained. The Contractor shall not use such
alternatives without the approval of the Engineer.

(4) Mix Proportion:

At least fifty six (56) days prior to placing any concrete the Contractor shall submit details
of his proposed mix proportion of mix designs or the various classes of concrete specified as well
as test results, for the approval of the Engineer.

(5) Conveyance Facilities:

Description of equipment and methods proposed for the transport of concrete from the batching
plant to the works including placement equipment such as cranes, conveyors, concrete pumps and
similar shall be subject to the Engineer's approval prior to the concrete work.

(6) Forms:

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, prior to the start of any concrete work,

127
.Section VII E. Specifications
the detailed design he proposes to adopt for formwork, but approval of the drawings shall not
relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for their adequacy.

(7) Drawings and Schedules:

The Contractor shall submit in advance the drawings showing the order, magnitude and
construction joints proposed for the cast-in-place concrete. The Contractor shall submit in advance,
a weekly placing schedule including layer thickness where applicable, giving the detailed locations
of the placement, the approximate placement volume and the date on which the concrete will be
placed.

(8) Placing Report:

The Contractor shall submit a daily placing report for each concrete pour duly signed by the
Engineer, which include the detailed location of the placement, the volume, slump test result,
concrete temperature and the date on which the concrete was placed.

E.3.5.4. Material Specifications

E.3.5.4.1 Cement

E.3.5.4.1.1 Types of Cement

The cement used for all reinforced concrete works shall be Ordinary Portland Cement complying
with the requirements of the latest version of SLS 107(BS EN 197-1:2011). For thick concrete
sections low heat cement or Portland cement with flyash or blended Hydraulic cements complying
with the requirements of the latest version SLS 1247 (BS EN 15167) shall be used to reduce the heat
of hydration of concrete with the approval of the Engineer.

E.3.5.4.1.2 Storage and Delivery of cement

The cement shall be delivered to the site or approved mixing plant in sound and properly sealed
bags and while being loaded and during transit to the concrete mixers, whether conveyed in
vehicles or by mechanical means must be protected from the weather by effective coverings. The
cement shall be stored in approved weather proof and well ventilated sheds with a raised floor of
timber or concrete.

All cement shall be used within six months of the date of manufacture.

E.3.5.4.2 Aggregates

E.3.5.4.2.1. Types of Aggregate

128
.Section VII E. Specifications
Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring material unless otherwise specified or ordered. The
Proposer shall inform to the Engineer about source of supply of the aggregates before
commencement of work and provide evidence regarding their properties and consistency at the
request of the Engineer.

Aggregates shall be in accordance with BS EN 12620-2002, 1192-2007 and

1200-2005 and tested in accordance with BSEN 932-1. All aggregates shall be hard, durable and
clean, composed of inert material. All aggregate shall be free from clay, coal or other organic
impurities, iron pyrites and soluble sulphate salts and other deleterious material which may cause
corrosion of the reinforcement or may impair the strength and or durability of the concrete.

The use of aggregates derived from mica, shale or other naturally occurring laminated material
will not be permitted. If the aggregates do not conform to the prescribed standards the Engineer
may reject them or order that they be washed, screened and graded until they meet with his
approval.

Manufactured coarse aggregates, containing more than fifteen 15% elongated or flat particles, shall
not be used. An elongated particle is defined as a particle having a maximum length of more than
five (5) times its maximum width. A flat particle is defined as a particle in which its maximum
diameter or length is more than five (5) times its maximum thickness.

The content of chloride salt in the aggregate used in reinforced concrete work expressed as the
equivalent anhydrous calcium chloride percentage by weight of the cement to be used in the
concrete shall not exceed 1%.

Fine aggregate shall consist of river sand graded such that not more than 10% is retained on a 5
mm sieve and not more than 15 % passes a no. 100 sieve.

Coarse aggregate for reinforced concrete members of minimum thickness less than or equal to
100mm shall be graded such that not more than 5% is retained on a 12mm sieve and not more
than 10% passes a 5mm sieve.

Coarse aggregate for mass concrete shall be graded such that not more than 5%

is retained on a 40mm sieve and not more than 5% passes a 5mm sieve.

E.3.5.4.2.2. Storage of aggregates

All aggregates brought to the Site shall be free and kept free from deleterious matter. Aggregates
of different types and sizes shall be stored separately in different hoppers or different stockpiles.

E.3.5.4.3. Water

129
.Section VII E. Specifications
Water used in mixing concrete, mortar, or grout shall be free from lime, sulphates or other
deleterious materials and from a source approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall have
the right to request samples of the water subjected to analysis from time to time.

E.3.5.4.4 Admixtures

Admixtures may be used if approved and when so required. The plasticizer shall be transported to
the Site under cover in sound and properly sealed bags or in the manufacturer‟s containers, and
shall be stored off the ground in a proper watertight shed of an approved design. The plasticizer
shall be stored completely separated from all other materials to the approval of the Engineer.

E.3.5.4.5. Waterstops

The waterstops shall be extruded from an elastometric plastic compound, the basic resin of which
shall be polyvinylchloride (PVC). The compound shall contain any additional resins, plasticizers,
stabilizers, or other materials needed to ensure that, when the material is compounded, it is
durable and resistant to any decomposition.

The plastic waterstops shall meet the following requirements:

Requirement Method of Test

Tensile strength using die "C": not less than 150 kgf/cm2 ASTM D-412
Ultimate elongation using die "C'': not less than 330% ASTM D-412
Stiffness in flexure, 6 mm span: not less than 28 kgf/cm 2 ASTM D-747
Tear resistance : not less than 30 kgf/cm2 ASTM D-624
Specific gravity: not less than 1.20 ASTM D-792
The corresponding British Standards are applicable subjected to the approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the test results from a recognized institution
showing that the material supplied meets the requirements specified. The Engineer may order to
carry out additional tests, for which the Contractor shall supply specimens from the same material
to be used in the Works. Test specimens, if required, shall be of the shape and dimensions required
in the individual test methods. The extruded waterstops shall be dense, homogeneous, and free
from holes, scratches and other imperfections.

E.3.5.4.6 Execution of Concrete Work

E.3.5.4.6.1. General

The concrete to be produced and placed shall be of highest quality and uniformity. In all phases of

130
.Section VII E. Specifications
his operations the Contractor will be subject to strict inspection to assure concrete of the best
quality. Special emphasis will be placed on the uniformity of the concrete aggregates, water-
cement ratio, consistency, air content and the temperature control of the concrete at the time of
placement in the formwork, as well as the density and finishing when placed.

E.3.5.4.6.2 Tolerances for concrete structures

Construction tolerances for concrete structures shall be as follows unless otherwise specified
elsewhere.

Table E.3: Tolerances for concrete structures

(a) Variation from vertical:
-In the lines & surfaces of columns, piers, In 3 m………………………………..+/-5 mm
walls and towers In 6 m……………………………..…+/-8 mm
In 12 m or more…………………..…+/-16 mm

- For exposed columns control joint

In 6 m max…………………………+/-5 mm
grooves and other conspicuous lines
In 12 m or more………………… …+/-10 mm

(b) Variation from the level or from the In 3 m ………………………………..+/-5 mm

grades indicated on the Drawing In any bay or 6 m max………………..+/-8 mm
- In floor, inverts, ceilings, and beam so In 12 m or more……………..….…….+/-16 mm
fits

(c) Variation of the linear structure lines In any bay or 6 m max………………..+/-12 mm

from established position in plan and In 12 m or more………………………+/-25 mm
related position of walls
(d) Variation in location of sleeves and ………………………………..…….….+/-5 mm
sizes and locations of floor openings and
wall openings
(e) Variation in cross-sectional ……………………………...…………..-5 mm
dimensions of columns, beams and in ……………..…………………………...+10 mm
the thickness of slabs and walls
(f) Variation in steps:
- In a flight of stairs Rise ……………………………….…..+/-3mm
Tread………………………………….+/-5 1mm
- In consecutive steps Rise……………………………………+/-2 mm

131
.Section VII E. Specifications
Tread…………………………………..+/-3 mm
(g) Variation in lining concrete:
- In design center line ……………+/-30 mm
- In inner diameter ……………+/-30 mm
-Tolerance in lining thickness ……………+/-30 mm

E.3.5.5. Concrete Mixes

E.3.5.5.1 Grade designation

Grades of concrete shall be denoted by the 28 day test cube strength in Newton‟s per square
millimetre (N/mm2).

E.3.5.5.2 Mixing

Concrete mix shall be in accordance with clause E 3.5.5.3 (Designed mix) and the grades approved
appropriate to the work. The various quantities of cement, aggregate and water for the
concrete mix shall be measured by weight. A separate weighing device shall be provided for
weighing concrete; alternatively cement may be measured by using a whole number of bags. The
accuracy of weighing devices shall be within 3% tolerance.

The batching plant shall have an automatic control capable of ready adjustment, to compensate for
the varying moisture content of the aggregates, and to change the weights of the materials being
batched.

Volume batching for concrete mix is only approved for minor structures such as man holes, curbs,
cover slabs and lean concrete works.

The Proposer will maintain on site cellular telephone link between site and the Concrete Mixing
Plant and record times of Truck Mixer leaving Plant, arriving at the site and the Truck Mixer
number. Copies of all records are to be delivered to the Engineer's Representative daily or more
frequently, if requested.

E.3.5.5.3 Designed mix

All concrete mixes whether they are measured by weight or volume batching shall be according to
the designed mixers approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for
producing and maintaining the quality of concrete with especially compressive strength not
inferior to the specified one, except if different instructions are given by the Engineer. After
completion of tests, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer and get his approval on the

132
.Section VII E. Specifications
proportioning of mixtures to be adopted for the various classes of concrete.

The Proposer shall meet the requirements for the minimum cement content and other properties in
his design mix. The Engineer may require ensuring durability etc. Designed mixes shall be in
accordance with grades indicated in the drawings. Complete information on the mix and sources
of aggregate for each grade of concrete and the water/cement ratio and the proposed degree of
workability shall be approved before work commences.

No concreting will be permitted until the results of these tests are accepted by the Engineer.

E.3.5.5.4 Minimum and Maximum cement contents

The minimum cement content shall be not less than 300 kg/m3 and the maximum cement
content shall be not greater than 400 kg/m3 for concrete used in reinforced concrete works.

E.3.5.6. Trial Mixes

E.3.5.6.1 General

Mix designs shall be prepared and submitted by the Proposer for approval of the Engineer. The
Proposer shall submit result of trial mixes, grading curves and all other details to enable the
Engineer to evaluate the proposed mix designs.

When designed mixes are specified, the trial mixes shall be prepared for each grade of concrete in
accordance with the BS 1881-125:1986, BS1881-129:1992 unless there are existing data showing
that the proposed mix proportions and manufacture will produce a concrete of the strength and
quality required having adequate workability for compaction by the method to be used in placing.

E.3.5.6.2 Preliminary trial mixes

Before the commencement of concreting, Proposer shall have preliminary trial mixes prepared
preferably under full-scale production conditions or if this is not possible in an approved laboratory
using a sufficient number of samples to be representative of the aggregates and cement to be used.
Unless otherwise approved for each grade of concrete, a set of six cubes shall be made from each
of three batches in accordance with BS 5328 from each set of six cubes three shall be tested at
an age of 7 days and three at 28 days.

E.3.5.6.3. Workability

The workability of each batch of the trial mixes shall be determined by the slump test as
described in BS 1881-1998 or by an alternative approved method.

E.3.5.6.4. Variations in approved mix

133
.Section VII E. Specifications
When a mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the proportions, the original
source of the cement and aggregates or their type, size or grading zone without the consent of
the Engineer.

E.3.5.7. Transportation

General Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposition, and finally
poured as rapidly as practicable by approved methods, which will prevent segregation, loss of
ingredients or damage by exposure to the atmospheric agents, and shall be deposited as nearly as
is practicable to its final position. Concrete can be conveyed by truck mixers and agitators,
buckets, trucks, chutes and pipes, belt conveyors, concrete pumps and other equipment approved
by the Engineer. Conveying equipment shall be of such size, design and condition to ensure a
practically continuous supply of concrete at the point of placement, and a concrete placing in
approximate horizontal layers while the previous layer is still soft. The maximum height from
which the concrete shall be dropped shall not exceed one and a half meters, except where the use
of suitable equipment to confine and control the falling concrete is specifically authorized by
the Engineer. All conveying equipment shall be supported independently of the forms. The
conveying equipment shall be kept free from hardened concrete and foreign materials, and shall be
cleaned at frequent intervals. Should the concrete show signs of segregation when it reaches the
placing point, and provided that the maximum permissible time has not elapsed, it shall be remixed
by mechanical means in the vicinity of the placing, otherwise it shall be rejected at Contractor's
expense. In particular, the Contractor shall take appropriate measures to avoid excessive loss of
moisture by evaporation, during the transportation and placing of the concrete. Addition of water
in the mixture to make up for the evaporation losses shall not be permitted.

E.3.5.8. Forms

E.3.5.8.1. General

Forms shall be used whenever necessary to confine the concrete, and to shape it to the required
lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Drawings. Forms shall have sufficient strength to
withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete, and shall provide
concrete surfaces conforming to the requirements of the finishes specified. Forms shall be
sufficiently tight to prevent the loss of mortar from the concrete. Where re-usable forms are
used, the original strength, rigidity, tightness and surface smoothness of the forms shall be
maintained throughout their usage. The form surfaces in contact with the concrete shall be treated
or protected to avoid chemical reactions or discolouring of the concrete surface. The use of forms
with bruises, irregularities and incrustations shall not be permitted. Should displacement occur in

134
.Section VII E. Specifications
the position of the forms, with a consequent modification of the lines of the structure, as
compared with the lines shown on the Drawings, the prescriptions set forth in the Clause
"Tolerance of Concrete Structures" and "Repair of Concrete" shall be applied. Forms shall be
placed so that the joint marks on concrete surfaces are, as much as possible, in alignment both
horizontally and vertically. The support for forms shall be such that no deflection occurs under
the weight of wet concrete and other loads. Forms shall not be tied, supported, rested or loaded on
to any parts of the Works unless approved by the Engineer.

At the time of concrete placing, the inner surface of the forms, the contacts .and connections shall
be free from any incrustations, mortar, grout or other foreign matter that may contaminate the
concrete. Prior to pouring, the surface of the forms, with the sole exception of those made of rough
wood, shall be smeared with a bond-breaking compound such as emulsified oil, or with refined
mineral paraffin oil, designed to prevent sticking of concrete on the form. The treatment of the
forms shall not cause harmful effects, or stains, on the concrete surface, or on the reinforcement
system. Bond breaking compound shall be applied before reinforcement is placed if the method is
feasible.

Forms made of timber which have been left in place for such a period that they have dried out,
shall be wetted as directed by the Engineer. Furthermore, special care must be taken to prevent
concrete adhering to the surface of the forms. Oil treatment shall be made in such a manner as to
avoid spillage on previously placed concrete. All excess oil on the form surfaces, and any oil on
the concrete, metal or other parts to be embedded in the concrete, shall be carefully removed.

E.3.5.8.2 Form Ties

The design of form ties shall be such that no metal shall be within 20 mm of any exposed surface
except specified. Sufficient form ties and bolts shall be used on both sides, and within a few
centimeters of construction joints, to ensure the forms fit snugly against the concrete previously
placed, and shall remain in tight contact during placing operations. After removal of formwork, the
Contractor shall withdraw the bolts and securely fill up the holes with cement mortar patch, as
required by the Engineer. The terminal part of the wire ties, if their use is allowed, shall be shaped
in such a manner that cutting and removal will not damage the concrete surfaces exposed to the
sight. Possible damage to the concrete due to the aforementioned operations shall be repaired in
accordance with Clause ''Repair of Concrete".

E.3.5.9.3. Removal of Forms

The removal of the forms shall be carried out when the concrete has reached sufficient strength, so
that no damage will be caused by removing. No forms shall be removed within the specified time

135
.Section VII E. Specifications
after the end of concrete placing, except for special cases where shorter time is approved by the
Engineer. As a rule, the forms shall be kept in place at least for the time hereunder indicated
after concrete has been placed:

Retaining Walls 48 hours

Columns and concrete walls 48 hours
Beams and slabs with a span less than 6 m 14 days
The same with a span larger than 6 m 21 days

The minimum time which shall elapse between the completion of concreting and removal of the
forms for beams and slabs shall be established by the Engineer for any particular structure,
according to the design calculations. After authorization for removal, the forms shall be removed
as soon as practicable, to avoid delay in specified curing of concrete, and also to enable earliest
practicable repair of surface imperfections. Methods of form removal likely to cause
overstressing of the concrete, or injury to the concrete surface, shall not be used. Forms and their
supports shall be removed in such a manner as to allow the concrete to take the stresses due to its
own weight uniformly and gradually. Provisions shall be made by means of suitable wedges, sand
boxes or other devices, for the gradual relaxation of the support given by false work and centering.

E.3.5.10. Placing

E.3.5.10.1. General

All concrete placing equipment and methods shall be subjected to the approval of the Engineer.
Concrete placing shall not be started until all formworks, reinforcement, installation of embedded
parts, and preparation of the surfaces of rock, and hardened concrete involved in the placement
have been inspected and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at
least 48 hours in advance and allow a reasonable time for inspection before placing begins.
Placement schedules shall be submitted before the end of the last working day of each week and
shall cover all concrete works planned for the following week. At least 48 hours before the start of
concreting, the Contractor shall submit drawings and sketches showing embedded parts, shoring
and scaffolding. Concreting of any part of the work will be authorized only after verification and
acceptance of the following items:

a) The characteristics of the concrete mix to be used

b) The concreting program, type and quantity of equipment for placement and compaction,
including the hourly placement rates

c) The availability at the site, of equipment and material necessary for finishing, curing

136
.Section VII E. Specifications
and protection of concrete

d) The condition and cleanliness of forms, adjacent concrete or other surfaces, reinforcement
and embedded parts

e) Conformity of the installation, including shoring and scaffolding, with the formwork drawings

f) Concrete placed without prior knowledge and approval of the Engineer may be required to be
removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense

E.3.5.10.2 Method of Placing

The concrete shall be deposited generally in horizontal layers in such a manner as to maintain, until
completion of the pour, plastic surface approximate horizontal. The thickness of each layer shall
range from 30 to 60 cm as approved by the Engineer and the placement shall be carried out at such
a rate that no concrete surface can reach an initial set, before additional concrete is placed thereon.
The lift thickness shall depend upon the ambient temperature, etc. at the time of placement and be
based on temperature studies made by the contractor. However, the maximum lift of placing shall
not exceed 2.00 m unless otherwise instructed or approved by the Engineer. The Engineer may
authorize higher lifts or layers where concrete can be placed or consolidated in thick layers.
Concrete shall be deposited as closely as possible, directly into its final position and in such as to
avoid segregation or modification of other properties. Bouncing concrete off forms, reinforcing
steel or any other obstruction is prohibited. Movement of concrete with vibrators, or by other
means will not be permitted. For locations when direct placement is not possible, and in narrow
forms, hoppers and trunks must be provided to a convenient size to allow a proper placing.
Concrete that is of excessive slump, segregated, partially hardened, or unworkable, shall not
be placed in forms or if placed, shall be removed and dumped as directed by the Engineer, at the
Contractor's expense. Each layer of concrete which shall be placed and compacted with
suitable types of equipment, until the concrete is consolidated to the maximum practicable
density, shall be free of pockets of coarse aggregate, and fits tightly against all form
surfaces and embedded materials. Construction equipment used for spreading, vibrating or other
operation must absolutely not spatter loose oil, fuel and grease on the concrete. If a
placement is stopped before completion, bulkheads shall be used to make a vertical joint.
Any unconsolidated/ un-compacted concrete shall be removed before completing the placement.
During placement, and until curing has been completed, the concrete shall be protected to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, against the harmful effects of exposure to sunlight, wind and rain.

137
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.3.5.10.3 Placing restrictions

a) Reinforced structures and embedded parts

Where concrete has to be placed through reinforcement, care shall be taken so that no segregation
of concrete or displacement of bars occurs. Closed chutes, elephant trunks, or tremies receiving
hoppers, shall be used to place concrete in deep forms, around reinforcement, or other places
not readily accessible for direct placing. Extreme care shall be devoted to placing the concrete
around the various embedded parts, to ensure that unbalanced loading and impact from placing
concrete, will not cause distortion or dislocation of parts. Both during and after placing of a lift,
careful checks shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer and Other
Contractors to see that the parts requiring accurate setting have not been displaced. Where the
embedded parts of Other Contractors are involved, check surveys shall be made jointly with Other
Contractors before placing of concrete to confirm the original position of such embedded
parts. No additional payment will be made for such work. The differential level of the fresh
concrete shall not exceed 40 cm at any embedded parts and 30 cm around the spiral case. A
minimum of seventy two (72) hours shall elapse between the placing of each successive lift. Any
placing restriction deemed necessary by the Engineer, to maintain alignment of the embedded
parts, shall be implemented promptly by the Contractor. Lifts may be terminated at any time,
to allow implementation of any action necessary to maintain the accuracy requirements.
Mechanical vibrators shall not be used for placing consolidating concrete around movable
embedded parts, except as approved by the Engineer. In this case concrete shall be consolidated
thoroughly by hand spading and tamping.

b) Rain

Outdoor concreting shall not be started during rains unless the Contractor has taken all protective
measures including proper shelters so that during transport and placing. The concrete maintains the
consistency tested at the mixing plant. Should concreting be already in process, the Contractor
shall provide proper shelters in order to complete the pouring operation. In any case, placing
operations shall be suspended if the rain affects the quality of concrete, if the Engineer directed.

c) Water

No concreting shall be carried out under water, unless it is foreseen or is approved by the Engineer.
The "drop-bottom bucket" or "tremie" method shall be used to pour concrete under water.
Concreting shall neither be conducted in running water, nor be exposed to the action of the same,
before it is sufficiently set.

138
.Section VII E. Specifications
d) Blockouts, Recesses, etc.

The Contractor shall place concrete in blockouts, recesses, etc., constructed as designed or as
directed by the Engineer, after e.g. the installation and adjustment of metal work has been
completed. Before concrete is placed in the blockouts, recesses, etc. the surfaces of the concrete
previously placed shall be roughened and cleaned. The roughening shall be performed by
scrabbling or other methods so as not to crack or scatter any other part or me concrete surface. All
concrete, which is not hard, dense and durable, as determined by the Engineer, shall be removed to
the depth required to secure a surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall place
the concrete in a way to ensure satisfactory bond with the existing concrete, to secure complete
contact with e .g. metal work to be embedded and to avoid any displacement. Where
directed by the Engineer, concrete placed in recesses shall contain an approved expanding
agent or non-shrink grout. No force or load shall be applied before the concrete reaches its 28 days
strength.

E.3.5.10.4 Temperature control

Hydration temperature of the concrete shall be controlled in shielding structure concrete as

follows;

a) Concrete when placed shall have a temperature of not more than 300 C. b.) Maximum
hydration temperature of concrete shall not exceed 700 C.

b) No temperature gradient within concrete shall be allowed to exceed 150 C, in a distance of

1 m and maximum temperature difference between two parts of the same pour shall not be
allowed to exceed 200 C.

c) Portland cement with flyash or low-heat Portland or Blended Hydraulic cement

complying with the requirements of SLS cement or equivalent BS/EN standards may be
used to achieve the above requirements, in addition to other measures required for
temperature controlling in concreting (i.e. use of ice or chilled water for concrete mixing
special curing/insulation methods during hydration of concrete).

d) Proposer shall make a sample concrete block of 1m x1m x1m using the design mix
for the concrete and shall demonstrate the temperature increase variation during the process
of hydration to verify the suitability of the mix design and other temperature controlling
measures for the use thick concrete sections.

e) Proposer shall submit a method statement detailing all the measures adopted to achieve
above temperature control measures at least two months before the concrete work for the

139
.Section VII E. Specifications
Engineer approval.

All precautions needed for manufacture, transportation, placement, curing and protection shall be
taken during extreme weather conditions as per standard practices and guidelines. For mass
concreting, the Contractor shall also determine the layer and lift thicknesses during various
weather conditions based on ambient temperature at site during different periods by making
temperature studies. The proposed sequence of concreting including lifts/layer, time intervals along
with the studies made shall be supplied in advance for the approval of the Engineer.

E.3.5.11. Compacting

Concrete shall be compacted with mechanical vibrating equipment, supplemented by hand spading
and tamping, to a maximum practicable density so that it is in complete contact with the forms,
reinforcement and other embedded parts. The vibration shall be carried out by means of immersion
type high-frequency vibrators, of the electrically driven or compressed air types, or by means of
engine driven vibrators. For the consolidation of concrete where immersion vibrations shall prove
impracticable, vibrators rigidly attached to the forms shall be adopted subject to the approval of
the Engineer. The size and number of vibrators, at each pour, shall be sufficient to thoroughly
compact concrete, at the rate and conditions of placement. The total consolidating capacity, in
cubic meter of concrete per hour, of all vibrators in effective operating condition, and employed
on concrete consolidation in the Works, shall be based on a rated capacity of 80% of the
manufacturer's recommendation for each type of vibrator. The total consolidating capacity so
computed shall be not less than the maximum rate at which concrete is placed in the Works. For
components of secondary importance the concrete may be deposited layer-by-layer with bottom-
opening skips or traveling tremies on the foundation bed or on the surface of the individual layers
of concrete. The tremies must be constantly and sufficiently far immersed in the concrete already
placed for the concrete flowing out of the tremies to displace the earlier concrete.

For every four vibrators in use on the Works, an additional standby vibrator of similar
consolidating capacity and in good working order shall be provided. When vibrating a layer of
fresh concrete, the vibrator shall be held in a near-vertical position. The immersion of the vibrator
shall be sufficiently deep to vibrate the entire depth of a new layer: the vibration should penetrate
several centimeters into the layer below, to ensure thorough union of the layers. No new layer of
concrete shall be placed, before the underlying one has been thoroughly vibrated. Immersion points
for the vibrators shall be adequately spaced, so as to make sure that every part of the concrete has
been properly vibrated. Care shall be taken to prevent contact of vibrators against reinforcement

140
.Section VII E. Specifications
steel, especially that starting initial set. Vibrators shall not be allowed to come into contact with
form or finish surfaces. Spreading concrete horizontally with vibrators is prohibited. Vibrators
shall not be applied on reinforcing steel, embedded parts or formwork. Provisions shall be
made to ensure that any entrapped air, formed during the placing of concrete, be allowed to escape,
by leaving effective air vents in the formwork. Care shall be taken to provide a dense envelope of
concrete surrounding the waterstops with no voids or honeycombing. Excessive vibration,
causing segregation and laitance, and tending to bring water to the surface, shall be avoided.

E.3.5.12. Joints

E.3.5.12.1 Construction Joints

The shape and position of all construction joints shall be proposed by the Contractor and are subject
to the approval by the Engineer, if not shown on the Drawings and/or not instructed by the
Engineer. Construction joints shall be sealed by waterstops or other means if so shown on the
Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. After the initial set, but before final hardening of the
concrete, the unshuttered surface of the joint shall be washed with water and compressed air jets
to thoroughly remove the top layer of mortar and all semi-detached parts from the surface, and to
expose the upper half of the big-size aggregates, however, without loosening or undercutting them.

If the surface of a lift with reinforcing steel is congested and is relatively inaccessible, or if for any
other reason disturbing an unhardened surface is considered undesirable, green cutting by air-water
jets will not be permitted and the use of wet sand blasting will be required after hardening of the
concrete. When employed in the preparation of construction joints, wet sand blasting shall be
performed immediately before final cleaning for the following lift. The operation shall be continued
until all unsatisfactory concrete and all laitance, coatings, stains, debris, and other foreign
materials are removed. Immediately before pouring is resumed, air and water jet cleaning will be
repeated, until the washing water remains quite clear; the Contractor shall deal in a controlled way
with the water used in washing, carefully diverting it from the pouring zone, leaving the surface
wet, but without water puddles. The air pressure used in the

jet shall be not less than 6 kgf/cm2, and the water pressure shall be sufficient for thorough cleaning.
When construction joints are not covered with concrete within twenty one (21) days after their
formation, the Contractor shall apply wet sand blasting or roughen all surfaces by light
jackhammering, when preparing for the next lift. The extent of concrete to be removed will be
indicated by the Engineer. The

141
.Section VII E. Specifications
treatment described above shall also be carried out when construction joints have been covered by
stagnant water for a period of more than seven (7) days or by foreign materials difficult to remove
by normal cleaning operations.

Formed surfaces of construction joints shall be roughened prior to continuing concreting and shall
be clean and free from oil, objectionable coatings and loose, semi-detached or unsound
fragments. The period of moistening of concreted surface shall not be less than two days. Wherever
possible, forms for construction joints shall be made of expanded metal. Formed surfaces of
construction joints to be grouted shall be cleaned of all accretions of concrete or other foreign
material by scraping, chiseling or other effective means. Whenever required by the length and type
of structure the Engineer may instruct to carry out compulsory construction joints. At these joints
no concrete shall be placed against the joint surface for at least 7 days for structures up to 1.00 m
in thickness and for 10 days where the thickness exceeds 1.00 m.

E.3.5.12.2 Expansion and Contraction Joints

Joints shall be provided at the locations indicated on the Drawings prepared by the Contractor, or
as directed or approved by the Engineer. In no case shall any fixed metal embedded in the
concrete, continue across an expansion or contraction joint.

The expansion joints can be of the smooth and even or dented type to guarantee the contact of the
structures. The opposite faces, which form the joint, shall be completely separate. Expansion or
contraction joints shall be sealed by waterstops and/or joint sealants. The Contractor shall
undertake the pouring of the second surface only after the first one has thoroughly hardened. When
shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer, a sheet of plain joint filler or other approved
material may be placed in contact with the first pouring before starting the second pouring. The
cost of the joint filler shall be included in the relevant concreting. Powerhouse sidewalls concrete
around penstock shall be sealed by approved joint sealing compound to stop seepage water between
penstock steel pipe and filling concrete as shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer. The
cost of the joint sealing compound shall be included in the relevant concreting.

E.3.5.13. Curing of Concrete

Curing provisions shall be made so that:

(a) Hydration of cement is developed gradually and completely

142
.Section VII E. Specifications
(b) Concrete does not quickly pass from plastic state to elastic state

(c) Concrete is not cracked or damaged by high differential temperatures or rapid changes
in temperature

(d) Surfaces of concrete are not damaged by traffic, nor discoloured by chemical agents.

The methods and materials used in the curing process shall be at all times, subject to the approval
of the Engineer. All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of any concrete pour
shall be ready to install before actual concrete placement begins.

Concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of weather, running water and drying out. One
of the following methods appropriated to the particular situation shall be adopted.

A liquid curing compound shall be applied to the concrete surface by a low pressure spray until a
continuous visible covering is achieved.

The concrete surface shall be covered with Hessian, sacking, canvas or other absorbent
material agreed by the Engineer. The concrete surface shall be covered with polyethylene sheets.
If concrete surfaces which have become dry shall be thoroughly wetted before the sheeting is
placed. The minimum curing period shall be seven (07) days.

E.3.5.14. Testing of concrete

E.3.5.14.1 Sampling

Concrete shall be sampled in accordance with BS 1881-1993.

E.3.5.14.2 Slump

The workability of concrete shall be determined by the slump test as described in BS 1881-

1993 or by an alternative approved method.

E.3.5.14.3 Works cube tests

For each grade of concrete, 4 cubes shall be made from a single batch when required for each 15m
3
of concrete of part thereof in each day’s work. The cubes shall be made, cured and tested in
accordance with BS 1881-1993 or as otherwise approved. One shall be tested at an age of 7 days
and the other 3 at 28 days. The Contractor shall submit certified copies of the results of all tests to
the Engineer.

E.3.5.14.4 Standard of acceptance

143
.Section VII E. Specifications
The standard of acceptance of the works cubes shall be in accordance with BS 8500-1-2002 or
as otherwise approved.

E.3.5.14.5 Records of tests

The Contractor shall keep a detailed record of the results of all tests on concrete and concrete
materials. Each test shall be clearly identified with the locations to which it relates.

E.3.5.15. Repairs of Concrete

E.3.5.15.1. General

Any indentation, irregularity and bulge occurring beyond the specified tolerance, or any voids and
honeycombs, fractures or other damages, shall be repaired. Repairs shall be performed by skilled
workmen and the Contractor shall inform the Engineer before starting the repair work. Materials,
procedures and operations used in the repair of concrete, and also the finished work, shall be
done in accordance with the orders and instructions of the Engineer. · In general the repair
work shall be started within 24 hours after stripping of the formwork. Concrete damaged by any
cause and concrete that is honeycombed, fractured or otherwise defective, and concrete which,
because of excessive surface depressions must be cut back and rebuilt, shall be replaced with
mortar, concrete or epoxy resin as specified hereafter or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
The repairs of tunnel lining shall be carried out with epoxy resin except different instructions
are given by the Engineer.

E.3.5.15.2 Repairs with New Concrete or Mortar

Existing concrete of the portion to be repaired shall be cut back to sound concrete at least to a depth
behind the reinforcement, sufficient to provide complete embedment of the reinforcement in the
replacement concrete. Voids to be filled shall be provided with anchors, welded wire mesh, and/or
dovetail slots whenever necessary to hold the new material securely in place. The edges of the cut
shall be sawn normal to the concrete surface and the replacement concrete adequately doweled to
the old concrete as directed by the Engineer. Cut out areas shall be thoroughly cleaned. Holes
left by the removal of tie rods shall be thoroughly moistened and filled with dry-pack mortar
thoroughly tamped into place. The colour of replacement concrete and patching mortar shall
match the surrounding concrete. Concrete and mortar used for patching and repairs shall be cured
in the same manner as specified for general concrete works. Where specifically authorized by
the Engineer, bulges may be removed by grinding. Other methods to be followed in carrying out
such repair works shall be those detailed in Chapter VII of the Concrete Manual USBR, 8th Edition

144
.Section VII E. Specifications
or equivalent Repair of concrete, whenever practicable, shall be completed within thirty six (36)
hours after removal of forms.

E.3.5.15.3 Repairs with Epoxy Resin

(i) Repairs to depths of more than 6 cm

Where the depth of damage is more than 6 cm, the repair shall be made by first saw-cutting a
grove 4 cm deep around the perimeter of the damaged area. Then the damaged concrete shall be
removed by light-weight jackhammer and the resulting surface shall be cleaned by chisel and
compressed air to receive the epoxy-bond coat. Damp or wet areas shall be dried with a propane
torch immediately before applying the bonding agent to prepare a warm surface when touched.
The applicable epoxy bonding agent shall be approved by the Engineer.

After the application on the clean and dry surface, and while still in a tacky stage, the bonding
agent shall be overlaid with the repair concrete.

The repair concrete shall be of Class A with plastic to stiff consistency or as otherwise directed
by the Engineer. If the bonding agent has set before applying the concrete, it shall be removed
by sand blasting or additional chiselling.

(ii) Repair to depths of less than 6 cm

Where the depth of damage is less than 6 cm the repair shall be made by first saw-cutting a grove
3 cm deep around the perimeter of the damaged area. Then the damaged concrete shall be
removed by chisel and the resulting surface shall be cleaned by compressed air to receive the
epoxy mortar. The applicable epoxy mortar shall be approved by the Engineer. The material shall
be applied on the clean and dry surface according to the manufacturer's instructions. Damp or
wet areas shall be dried with a propane torch immediately before applying the epoxy mortar,
to prepare a warm surface when touched.

E.3.5.16. Dental Concrete

Dental cavities shall be filled with concrete or shotcrete wherever possible prior to concrete
lacement. Where dental concrete is used it shall have the same mix proportion as the
concrete covering it, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Dental cavity side surfaces
shall be cleaned of all loose and friable materials prior to concrete placement.

E.3.5.17. Second-Stage Concrete

The work shall be scheduled as shown on the Drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer,
and;

145
.Section VII E. Specifications
(a) Special care shall be taken not so as to give effects on embedded items such as draft
tube liner, stay ring, spiral casing, vertical guides for gates and trash racks.

(b) For encasement or mounting the air conditioner or other equipment as directed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate the procedures with the relevant
manufacturer.

E.3.5.18 Placing of WaterStops

Splices in the continuity or at the intersection of runs of waterstops shall be performed by heat
sealing the adjacent surfaces, in accordance with the supplier's recommendations. The continuity
of the characteristic corrugations of the cross-sections of the waterstops design shall be maintained
across the splice.

The number of splices in the sealings shall be the minimum possible and all splices shall be
approved by the Engineer; the equipment used for making splices in PVC sealings. and the
splicing method shall also be approved.

A specimen as required by the Engineer shall be tested by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
make the splices in such a manner as to ensure that the splices have a tensile strength not
less than 80% of that of the unsliced material.

E.3.6. REINFORCEMENT

E.3.6.1. General

The type of reinforcement used in each part of the work shall as described on the drawings. All
reinforcement used throughout the works shall be from one manufacturer.

Bars designated „R‟ shall be mild steel plain round bars having yield strength of 250N/mm2
complying with BS 4449 and Bars designated „T‟ shall be high yield bars having yield strength
of 460 N/mm2.

All reinforcement shall be free from pitting due to corrosion and shall also be free from loose rust,
mill scale, paint, oil, grease, adhering earth or other material that may in the opinion of the Engineer
impart the strength or cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete.

Metal bar supports, ties, chairs, saddles ets., shall be of an approved design and shall be adequate
to ensure that no displacement occurs during placing of wet concrete. All tying wire shall be 16

146
.Section VII E. Specifications
gauge soft annealed wire.

E.3.6.1.1 Storage

Steel reinforcement shall be stored in clean conditions such a way as to avoid distortion and rusting
or coating by grease, oil, dirt and other objectionable materials. Storage shall be above ground in
separate piles or racks so as to avoid confusion or loss of identification after the bundles are broken.

E.3.6.1.2. Placing of reinforcement

Reinforcement bending schedules shall be prepared and produced for Engineers approval by the
Contractor. Bending and fixing of bars shall start only after the Contractor has convinced himself
that no changes will be made to the concrete structure. Mill certificates of composition and strength
tests on samples of steel purchased for use on this project and tested in an independent approved
local laboratory should be furnished.

All intersecting bars shall be tied together with approved wire unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer.

Reinforcement in the form of a mast shall be assembled with additional support such as benches
necessary to form a rigid mat. Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in position. The cover
to all reinforcement shall be according to the drawings. Cover blocks shall be approved and shall
be as small as possible consistent with their purpose. They shall be made with 10 mm
maximum aggregate size and shall have strength not less than that of the concrete to be
placed.

E.3.6.1.3 Welding of reinforcement

Welded joints and welding procedures shall be carried out in accordance with BS 693 or BS 1856.

E.3.6.1.4 Expansion joints

Expansion joints shall be provided at every 6m intervals for in situ floor concrete work or as
directed by the Engineer. The expansion joint shall be of 15mm and reinforcement should be
discontinued. The joints should be filled with flexible bituminous material.

E.3.6.2 Drawings

The Contractor shall supply and fix all reinforcement of diameters and shapes as shown on the
drawings. In case reinforcement is not shown but when the nature and / or purpose of the relevant
element distinctly and obviously required the incorporation of reinforcement, then the Contractor
shall be deemed to have included in his tender a quantity of 120kg reinforcement per cubic meter
of concrete for such elements.

147
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.3.6.3 Cutting and Bending

If reinforcement already cast into concrete has to be bent, the internal radius of the bend shall be
not less than twice the diameter of bars of mild steel or three times the diameter of bars of high-
yield steel.

Unless shown to the contrary on the drawings, the cutting and bending of reinforcement shall be
in accordance with the requirements of BS 8666. No steel which has been previously bent shall
be re-shaped without the Engineer‟s approval.

Steel reinforcement shall be stored in clean conditions. It shall be clean and free from loose rust
and loose mill scale at the time of fixing in position and subsequent concreting.

All steel reinforcement must be stacked on the site. All bars must be cut and bent cold in an
approved bending machine. Welding of bars is not permitted. The Contractor shall prepare bending
schedules. Bending and fixing of bars shall start only after the bending schedules have been
submitted to the architect for approval and after the Contractor has convinced himself that no
changes will be made to the concrete structure. Re-bending of reinforcement will not be permitted.

E.3.6.4 Conditions

All reinforcement shall when placed be free from rust, scale, grease, clay, salt deposits and other
coatings or deleterious material that would destroy or reduce the bond with the concrete and all
reinforcement in store on Site and in use shall be protected and/or cleaned as often as may be
necessary.

E.3.6.5 Tying

All knots in tying wire shall be located within the reinforcement cage and shall not be located closer
to the surface of finished concrete than the specified minimum cover.

Ensure that reinforcement cannot cause any rust staining to surfaces intended to be kept clean.

E.3.6.6 Supports

The Contractor shall supply and install chairs, ties, spacers, supports etc., as necessary to
fix the reinforcement and maintain it in correct position during placing and vibration of
concrete. Only precast concrete spacers shall be used in the formwork to maintain the required
cover, their frequency and location shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

E.3.6.7 Laps and Joints

148
.Section VII E. Specifications
Laps and joints shall be in strict accordance with those specified on the Drawings. Relocation and
additional laps shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

E.3.6.8 Testing Procedures

Reinforcement Steel Bars shall be hot rolled high yield steel bars either hot or cold worked for
reinforcement purposes. Steel billets and reinforcement bars should comply with SLS 375:2009,
ASTM A706/A 706M and BS 4449 – 2005 + A2 : 2009 as stipulated in the ICTAD Specification
for Building Works – Volume 1 (SCA/4/1).

E.3.6.8.1 Billets

Steel billets shall be from sources which compliance with above standards. Chemical compositions
marked as percentages by mass.

Table E.4: Chemical composition of bullets

Value or description
Description Standard
(value by mass (%))
Carbon, C max.0.25 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Sulphur, S max. 0.05 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Phosphorus, P max. 0.05 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Copper, Cu max. 0.80 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Nitrogen, N max. 0.012 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Silicon, Si max. 0.50 ASTM A706/A 706M -00 Cl. 6.2
Manganese, Mn max. 1.50 ASTM A706/A 706M -00 Cl. 6.2

Carbon Equivalent value = C + Mn + Cr+Mo+V + Ni+Cu

6 5 15
Table E.5: Carbon equivalent
Value or Description
Description Standard
(value by mass (%))

Carbon Equivalent (C.E) ≤ 0.50 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2

Mill certificates certified by the Billet Producer and Steel Manufacturer pertaining to billets
imported/ purchased recently, confirming compliance with the above shall be submitted to the
purchaser. The successful Steel Manufacturer shall, carry out tests in a laboratory directed by the

149
.Section VII E. Specifications
purchaser or certified laboratory, established for the testing quality of reinforcement if requested
by the consultant/ purchaser. (1 test for every 1000 tonnes of steel production).

E.3.6.8.2 Traceability and Test Reports

Delivered batches of billets shall be identifiable and traceable. The manufacturer shall establish
and maintain the records required and shall identify the products and their delivery documentation
accordingly.

For each delivery, manufacturers shall supply the following information:

a) The cast number and cast analysis, including all specified elements and elements used for
the calculation of the carbon equivalent value;

b) The carbon equivalent value;

c) The results of the tensile and rebend tests;

d) The mass per metre;

e) The manufacturing process route; and

f) The rolled on mill mark.

E.3.6.8.3 Reinforcement bars

The following tests which had been carried out on the Steel Manufacturers steel production during
the past 6 months shall be submitted with his bid including documentary proof, ensuring his
compliance with the given specifications. A minimum of 3 sets of tests carried in house together
with 1 set carried out in an independent laboratory shall be submitted.

a) Tensile Testing

b) Bend / Re-bend Testing

c) Rib Geometry

d) Chemical Analysis

e) Nominal mass per meter & Cross sectional area

A successful Steel Manufacturers shall submit In house test certificates with the delivery of each
major steel consignment of 100 Tonne to the site. The Steel Manufacturers shall carry out tests in
an independent laboratory on specimen bars for 1 set of tests for every 1000 Tonne consignment.

The bars shall conform to the following;

E.3.6.8.4. Mechanical Properties of Reinforcement bars

150
.Section VII E. Specifications
Table E.6: Mechanical properties of reinforcement bars

Description Standard/ Specification

Absolute max. permissible value - 650 SLS 375:2009 Table 07
Yield Strength (MPa)
Absolute min. permissible value - 500 SLS 375:2009 Table 07
Tensile Strength (MPa) Tensile / Yield Strength ratio ≥1.05 SLS 375:2009 Table 07
Total elongation at
≥ 2.5 SLS 375:2009 Table 07
maximum force, Agt(%)
Total elongation at
≥ 14% SLS 375:2009 Table 07
fracture, At(%)
Re-bend Test Should be pass BS 4449: 2005

E.3.6.8.5. Chemical Properties of Reinforcement bars

Table E.7: Chemical properties of reinforcement bars

Value or Description
Description Standard
(value by mass (%) )
Carbon, C max.0.27 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Sulphur, S max. 0.055 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Phosphorus, P max. 0.055 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Copper, Cu max. 0.85 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Nitrogen, N max. 0.014 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Silicon, Si max. 0.55 ASTM A706/A 706M -00 Cl.6.5
Manganese, Mn max. 1.56 ASTM A706/A 706M -00 Cl.6.5
Carbon
≤ 0.52 SLS 375: 2009 Table 2
Equivalent (C.E)

E.3.6.8.6 Surface Geometry of Reinforcement bars

Table E.8: Surface geometry of reinforcement bars

Description Standard / Specification

Transverse Rib Height(mm) 0.03d to 0.15d

Rib spacing (mm) 0.4d to 1.2d BS 4449: 2005 + A2 :
0
Rib Inclination ( ) 0
35 - 75 0 2009 Table 8

151
.Section VII E. Specifications

Description Standard / Specification

BS 4449: 2005 + A2 :
Longitudinal Rib Height (mm) ≤0.10d
2009 cl.7.4.2.3

Here "d" is nominal diameter of the product.

Diameter Area Deviation

10mm 78.5
12mm 113
BS 4449: 2005 + A2:
Cross sectional Area (mm2) 16mm 201 Cross
2009 Table 7 & Cl. 7.3.2
sectional
20mm 314
area
25mm 491 ±4.5%
32mm 804

Diameter Mass
10mm 0.617
12mm 0.888 Nominal
Mass per BS 4449: 2005 + A2:
Mass per meter (kg/m) 16mm 1.58
meter 2009 Table 7 & Cl. 7.3.2
20mm 2.47 ±4.5%
25mm 3.85
32mm 6.31

E.3.6.8.7 Particular

In addition, the manufacturer’s steel shall comply with the following requirements.

E.3.6.8.8 Quality Assurance Plan

The Steel Manufacturer shall submit the detail quality assurance plan followed and implemented
within his steel mills. This shall include detail flow diagrams and schedules on the manner in which
the quality and process control are integrated into the manufacturing process. Staff organization
chart associated with the quality and process control together with CV’s of key staff associated
with the quality monitoring function shall be submitted.

Information in this submission shall include but not be limited to that given in the specimen table
Table E.9. The specimen has been included to indicate the nature of the information being sought
by the Purchaser.

152
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.3.6.8.9 In House Testing

The Steel Manufacturer shall submit with his bid his detail in-house testing regime for the
production of steel reinforcement bars. The testing regime shall elaborate in detail the tests that
shall be carried out as well as the frequency. The tests shall cover the mechanical properties as well
as Rib geometry verification. The mechanical properties investigated shall include but not be
limited to the following;

a) Profile (mm)

b) Weight per length (kg/m)

c) Yield Stress (MPa)

d) Ultimate Tensile Stress (MPa)

e) Elongation %

f) Bend /Rebend Test Results

E.3.6.8.10 Quality Controlling System

The Steel Manufacturer shall furnish details of the quality controlling system in place for his rolling
mills covering the Pre-Production, Production and Post-Production stages of the plant. The
Pre-production information should include but not be limited to Physical Properties of the steel
billets; length deviations, twisting, concavity, camber, buckling & surface defects like cracks,
shrinkage and scabs. The Chemical Composition of the steel billets (C, Mn, Si, S, Cu, N & P)
should also be provided.

Checking and monitoring procedures associated with the production phase within the quenching
area for hot worked bars (water purity, pressure, flow rate, finishing and tempering temperatures)
shall be provided.

Checking and monitoring of Cold Worked bars shall include the process of twisting to achieve the
required specifications (Measuring procedure of number of twists, measurement of the pitch of the
spiral etc.). The frequency of the inspections, checks and tests in the cooling bed area (mass per
unit length, Rib height, Rib width, Core diameter and Test for mechanical properties eg: YS, UTS,
EL% & Bending) shall also be provided.

E 3.6.8.11 Inspection and Auditing

The successful Supplier shall allow the Purchaser’s staff and/or their authorized staff (i.e.
Consultant’s staff etc.) to inspect and audit the all steps of manufacturing process including raw
material yards, factory, storage yard etc.) without any hindrance during the supply period of

153
.Section VII E. Specifications
material. The Supplier shall also include in his bid his arrangements and facilities for such
inspection and audit procedures.

E 3.6.8.12 Submission documents with the bid

The following documents shall be submitted with the bid.

a) Previous Mill Certificates (clause E.3.6.8.1)

b) Previous Test Certificates (clause E.3.6.8.3)

c) Quality Assurance Plan (clause E.3.6.8.8) – Typical example given in Appendix A

d) Details of the Quality Assurance staff with their CVs. (clause E.3.6.8.8)

e) In house testing regime (clause E.3.6.8.9)

f) Quality Controlling System (clause E.3.6.8.10)

g) Arrangements for Inspection and Auditing for the Purchaser and his representatives.
(clause E.3.6.8.11)

Table E.9: Quality assurance plan

Process Control Method

Quality Character Chart or Person/s Inspection/ Test

Process Check Sampling
to be Checked Responsible for
Name Sheet Frequency Parameters
Process Control
Ref.
Store man/ Size, Weight,
Receipt of Physical Technical Per lorry load Count
raw material Dimensions, Heat
Assistant (Raw
Number material &
Furnace)
Technical Consignment
Storage of Physical
Assistant (Raw Length & Cross
raw Dimensions &
material & Per lorry load Section, Heat
materials Consignment
Furnace) Number
Bending, Twist
Physical Rhomboidity,
Inspection
Dimensions , Quality control Length end
of raw
Appearance Technologist, Curvature, Quality
materials
chemical (Q.A. Dept.) of steel, cross
Properties section, Chemical
composition
Cutting & Length Technical
Stacking of Perpendicularity Assistant (Raw Nos. of Billets Visual, Length
billets of cut Materials &

154
.Section VII E. Specifications

Process Control Method

Quality Character Chart or Person/s Inspection/ Test

Process Check Sampling
to be Checked Responsible for
Name Sheet Frequency Parameters
Process Control
Ref.
Furnace)
Charging of Technical Count Section
Physical
billets to the Assistant (Raw Length
Dimensions count Nos. of Billets
Furnace Materials & Consignment, Heat
& Consignment
Furnace) Number

Technical
Heating of Assistant (Raw Per Hour Temperature
billets in the Heat Materials &
furnace Furnace)

Technical
Physical Length, Section &
Discharging Assistants
Dimensions & Nos. of Billets Consignment
of billets (Furnace &Billet
Consignment Temperature
Yard)
(For Non
Tr. Rib height &
Twisting Quality Control
width, Rib
bars) Technician
inclination Rib
Rolling, Physical (Process control)
height, Rib width,
Quenching Dimensions & Technical
Rib spacing unit
& Appearance Assistants
weight & section
Tempering Production &
surface finish &
process Pulpit
Roundness
control
Visual, Tr. Rib
height & width,
Unit weight, Rib
height, Rib width
Cutting, Quality Control Diameter & Section
inspection & Technologist (Q.A
grading at Dept.)/ Q.C Yield Strength, Unit
cold shear Technician weight, Bendability
Ultimate Tensile
Strength,
Elongation
Diameter , Profile
& Section,
Bundling,
Profile Roundness
labeling & Quality control Weight, Profile,
sending to Identification No. technician, Length, Date &shift
Ware House Mechanical
(Q.A Dept.) Consignment
for weighing Properties
& stacking

155
.Section VII E. Specifications

Process Control Method

Quality Character Chart or Person/s Inspection/ Test

Process Check Sampling
to be Checked Responsible for
Name Sheet Frequency Parameters
Process Control
Ref.
Machining Depth of cut &
of rolls at Groove Technical Groove width, Roll
Roll Dimensions Roll Assistant (Roll diameter, core
Preparation Diameter Preparation Shop) diameter, Surface
Shop Defects(visual)

Technical Tr. Rib Height

TR.Rib
Roll Diameter Assistant Tr. Rib Width
cutting on
Tr.Rib
Finishing (Roll Preparation Tr.Rib Spacing
Dimensions
Stand Rolls Shop) Tr.Rib Inclination

Technical
Physical Alignment (Visual)
Supply of Assistant (Guide
Dimensions of Pass height & width
Roller Assembly &
Guide rolls & Roll height &
Guides Maintenance
passes diameter
shop)

Technical
Physical
Supply of Assistants (Guide
Dimensions of Stripper length &
Stripper Assembly &
Stripper guide & width (visual)
passes Maintenance
passes
shop)

Supply of Physical Technical

Surface finish
Friction Dimensions of Assistant (Guide
(Visual) Diameter
guides guide pass Shop)

For Twisting
Bars Profile, Visual, Weight,
Technical
Stacking identification No., Profile, Grade,
Assistant Every bundle
semi- Physical Length, Date &
(Finishing Area)
finished bars Dimensions Shift
at finishing
area Physical Pitch of twist,
Twisting &
Dimensions, Pitch length, unit weight,
Inspection at Quality Control
parameters & Yield Strength,
the twisting Technician
Mechanical UTS, Elongation,
Area
Properties Bendability

* Tr.Rib –Transverse Rib

E.3.6.8.13 Inspections and Tests

156
.Section VII E. Specifications
The following inspections and tests in whole or part as required by the Purchaser to be performed
or proof documents shall be produced by the Bidder to establish his compliance with the given
Specification.

a) Tensile Testing

b) Fatigue Testing (optional)

c) Re-bend Testing

d) Chemical Analysis

e) Rib Geometry

The quality of reinforcement steel shall be tested after the delivery of each 100 Tonne by the
Purchaser, using a test method acceptable to the purchaser for the above properties from an
independent institute acceptable to the Purchaser at the Cost of the Steel Manufacturer.

E.3.7. DESIGN, SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

E.3.7.1. General

Prestressed Concrete Works shall consist of prestressing precast or cast-in-place concrete by

furnishing, placing, and tensioning of prestressing steel in accordance with details shown on the
approved drawings, and as specified in these specifications and the special provisions or as directed
by the Engineer. It includes prestressing by either the pretensioning or posttensioning methods or
by a combination of these methods.

This work shall include the furnishing and installation of any appurtenant items necessary for the
particular prestressing system to be used, including but not limited to ducts, anchorage assemblies
and grout used for pressure grouting ducts.

Post-tensioning work shall consist of designing, supply and installation of post-tensioning

materials for the post-tensioned slabs/beams. The work shall be carried out in accordance with the
forms, shapes and dimensions shown on the approved Drawings and these Specifications or as
directed by the Engineer.

When structural members are to be constructed with part of the reinforcement pretensioned and
part post-tensioned, the applicable requirement of this Specification shall apply to each method.

E.3.7.2. References

 Standards

1. BS 5896:1980 -High tensile steel wire and strand for the pre-stressing of concrete.

157
.Section VII E. Specifications
2. BS 8110:1997 -Structural use of Concrete.

3. BS 5896 High tensile steel wire and strand for the pre-stressing of concrete.

 Where more than one applicable Standard are specified or in case of differences with this
Specification, use the most restrictive provisions and recommendation or as directed by the
Engineer.

E.3.7.3. Submittals

Prior to starting Pre tensioning/ Post-tensioning work, the Successful Proposer/ Contractor shall
submit the Drawings, Reports and Procedures for review and approval of the Engineer. These
submittals shall include the following;

1. Design information.

2. General notes, specifically for Prestressed / post-tensioned structural system.

3. Shop drawings including Tendon layout, dimensions, location of the tendons in the
horizontal plane. Openings and anchorages and show all openings in slabs and beams.
Clearly designate each tendon.

4. Method Statement.

5. Material Submission.

6. Quality Manual

7. Inspection and Test Plan.

8. Programme in line with the Contractor’s Programme.

9. As built drawings after completion of the work.

 Manufacturer's Data: Submit for review and approval.

1. Sample hardware, including but not limited to Anchorage system, strand, wedges, pocket
formers, and other sub-assemblies required for complete installation including all
accessories required to complete the system.

2. Mill Certificates: Submitting certified mill reports of post-tensioning steel (strand)

immediately upon shipment indicating compliance with specified requirements for all
material that is to be delivered to the project.

3. Equipment Calibration: Submitting certification of the calibration of jack and gauge sets.

158
.Section VII E. Specifications
4. Certifications and other data as may be further required to demonstrate compliance with
other items in this section.

 Calculations:

1. Design calculations and all the relevant supporting documents including the computer
analysis models shall be submitted to the Engineer of the project for his review and
approval.

2. Elongation calculations shall be submitted for every floor level before stressing for
review and approval of the Engineer.

 Checklists: The Successful Proposer/ Contactor shall provide their own check lists for
the following operations before execute the same.

1. Checklist for installation operation.

2. Checklist for stressing operation.

3. Checklist for grouting operation.

 Stressing Reports: The Successful Proposer/ Contactor shall provide the information
described below for review and approval of the Engineer.

a. Floor pour and tendon identification numbers. Calculated elongation and actual
measured elongation for each jacking point, and total for each tendon.

b. Stressing jack serial number, pressure gauge serial number and required gauge pressure
to be applied to tendon.

c. Date of stressing operation and signature of the Subcontractor’s engineer / supervisor

and Contractor’s / Engineer’s inspector witnessing the operation.

 Further submissions shall be made for any change of material quality or source and
the Engineer's approval to be obtained before the new materials are used.

E.3.7.4. Materials

E.3.7.4.1. Pre-stressing Steel and Anchorages

Pre-stressing reinforcement shall be high-strength seven-wire strand, high strength steel wire of the
grade and type called for on the plans or in the special provisions and shall conform to the

159
.Section VII E. Specifications
requirements of the following specifications.

 Strands

Strands shall be stress relived seven wire low relaxation super stabilised strands complying with
BS 5896 or uncoated seven wire strands complying with the requirements of AASHTO M203
(ASTM A416) Supplement S1 (low relaxation) and as approved by the Engineer. To ensure that
the strand pays off straight, the pre-stressing strand, however manufactured, shall be in coils of
sufficiently large diameter.

 Steel Wire

Steel wire shall be uncoated stress-relieved steel wire complying with the requirements of
AASHTO M204 (ASTM A421) or BS 5896. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer low
relaxation and normal relaxation wire shall be in coils of sufficiently large diameter to ensure that
the wire pays off straight.

 Post-tensioning Anchorages and Coupler

Anchorages shall be cast units and assemblies that are standard with the pre-stressing
manufacturer’s system and to the review by the Engineer.

Anchorages shall be tested in accordance with BS 4447 or equivalent code and construction
specification. Proprietary anchorages shall be handled and used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

All anchorages and couplers shall develop at least 95% of the minimum specified ultimate strength
of the pre-stressing steel, when tested in an unbonded state, without exceeding anticipated set. The
coupling of tendons shall not reduce the elongation at rupture below the requirements of the tendon
itself. Couplers and/or coupler components shall be enclosed in housing long enough to permit the
necessary movements. Couplers for tendons shall be used only at locations specifically required
and/or approved by the Engineer and couplers shall not be used at points of sharp tendon curvature.

 Identification and Testing

All wire, strand to be transferred to the site shall be numbered and tagged for identification
purposes. Each cable shall be tagged with its number from which the coil numbers of the steel used
can be identified.

Cables shall not be kinked or twisted. Individual wires and strands of which extensions are to be
measured shall be readily identifiable at each end of the member. The strand that has come
unraveled shall not be used.

160
.Section VII E. Specifications
Each lot of wire and each reel of strand reinforcement shall be accompanied by a manufacturer’s
certificate of compliance, a mill certificate, and a test report. The mill certificate and test report
shall include the chemical composition for wires, cross- sectional area, yield and ultimate strengths,
elongation at rupture, modulus or elasticity and the stress strain curve for the actual pre-stressing
steel intended for use. All values certified shall be based on test values and nominal sectional area
of the material being certified.

The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer for verification testing the sample described here. If
ordered by the Engineer, the selection of samples shall be made at the manufacturer’s plant by the
Inspector.

All samples submitted shall be representative of the lot to be furnished and in the case of wire or
strand, shall be taken from the same master roll.

The actual strength of the pre-stressing steel shall not be less than specified by the applicable British
or ASTM Standard, and shall be determined by tests of representative samples of the tendon
material in conformance with the appropriate Standards.

All of the materials specified for testing shall be furnished free of cost and shall be delivered in
time for tests to be made well in advance of anticipated time of use.

 Pre-tensioning & post tensioning Tendon Samples

Selection of samples shall be done as per the standards.

 Anchorage Assemblies and Couplers

The Contractor shall perform the testing and shall furnish certified copies of test results that
indicate conformance with the specified requirements prior to installation of anchorages or couplers
when dynamic testing is required. The Contractor shall furnish for testing, one specimen of each
size of pre-stressing tendon, including couplings, of the selected type, with end fittings and
anchorage assembly attached, for strength tests only.

 Protection of Pre-stressing Steel

All pre-stressing steel shall be protected against physical damage work hardening or heating and
rust or other results of corrosion at all times from manufacture to grouting or encasing in concrete.
Pre-stressing steel shall also be free of deleterious material such as grease, oil, wax or paint. Pre-
stressing steel that has sustained physical damage at any time shall be rejected and the development
of pitting or other results of corrosion, other than rust stain, shall be cause for rejection.

All pre-stressing steel shall be stored clear of the ground and be protected from the weather, from

161
.Section VII E. Specifications
splashes from any other materials and from splashes from the cutting operation of an oxy-acetylene
torch, or arc welding activity in the vicinity. In no circumstances shall pre-stressing steel after
manufacture be subjected to any welding operation, or heat treatment or metallic coating such as
galvanizing.

All anchorages, end fittings, couplers, and exposed tendons, which will not be encased in concrete
or grout in the completed work, shall be permanently protected against corrosion.

E.3.7.4.2. Corrosion Protection

All the pre-stressing bars shall be protected against corrosion. Water-soluble oil may be used on
tendons as a corrosion protection when approved.

E.3.7.4.3. Ducts

The system of ducts, duct connectors, grouting connections, vents, vent connectors, drains,
transition to anchorages and caps for anchors shall form a complete encapsulation for the tendon
which is resistant to ingress of air and water. Ducts shall be a corrosion resistant durable material.
Ducting which may degrade or corrode during the expected life of the structure shall not be
permitted.

Where ducts are non-conductive, metal parts of the anchorages shall be electrically bonded to the
adjacent reinforcement at each end of the tendon and electrical continuity of the structure over the
length of the tendon shall be confirmed by testing.

For duct fitting, coupling and transition fittings for ducts formed by sheathing shall be of a material
compatible with the ducts and corrosion resistant, and shall be cement paste intrusion proof and of
sufficient strength to prevent distortion or displacement of the ducts during concrete placement.
All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or other suitable connections at
each end of the duct for the injection of grout after pre-stressing.

E.3.7.5. Placement of ducts and steel

The Contractor shall submit method Statements with full details of placement of steel and ducts
and get approval by the Engineer.

E.3.7.5.1. Placement of Ducts

Ducts shall be rigidly supported at the proper locations by ties to reinforcing steel that are adequate
to prevent displacement during concreting and supplementary support bars shall be used where

162
.Section VII E. Specifications
needed to maintain proper alignment of the duct. The tolerance in location of the centerline of the
duct shall be 5mm. Joints between sections of duct shall be coupled with positive connections that
not to be changed the angle and will prevent the intrusion of cement paste. All unintentional holes
or openings in the duct must be repaired prior to concrete placing and grout openings and vents
must be securely anchored to the duct and to either the forms or to reinforcing steel. Internal and
external surfaces of ducts shall be cleaned and free from pitting at the time of incorporation in the
work. After installation in the forms, the ends of ducts shall be covered.

E.3.7.5.2. Vents and Drains

All ducts for continuous structures shall be vented at the high points of the duct profile, except
where the curvature is small, as in continuous slabs and at additional locations where necessary.
At low point in ducts where needed to prevent the accumulation of water, drains shall be installed
and shall remain open until grouting is started. The ends of vents and drains shall be removed
25mm below the surface of the concrete after grouting has been completed, and the void filled with
flowable non-shrink mortar to a level flush with the adjacent concrete surface.

E.3.7.5.3. Placement of Pre-stressing Steel

 Placement for Pre-tensioning

Pre-stressing steel shall be accurately installed in the forms and held in place by the stressing jack
or temporary anchors. When tendons are to be draped shall be done by hold-down devices which
used at all points of change in slope of tendon trajectory shall be of an approved low-friction type.

 Placement for Post-Tensioning

All pre-stressing steel pre-assembled in ducts and installed prior to the placement of concrete shall
be accurately placed and held in position during concrete placement. Pre-installing of tendons shall
be permitted only when the total length of tendons does not exceed 35m so that during concrete
initial setting period the tendon can be moved to ensure that there is no concrete blockage inside
the duct and tendons will be free to move when stressing.

When the pre-stressing steel is installed after the concrete has been placed, the Contractor shall
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the ducts are free of water and debris
immediately prior to installation of the steel. The total number of strands in an individual tendon
may be pulled into the duct as a unit, or the individual strand may be pulled or pushed through the
duct.

Method of protection of steel after installation shall be included in the method statement which is
to be submitted by the contractor for the Engineers approval.

163
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.3.7.6. Tensioning

E.3.7.6.1. General Tensioning Requirements

 Pre-stressing steel shall be tensioned by hydraulic jacks so as to produce the forces shown
in the approved working drawing with appropriate allowances for all losses. For post-
tensioned work the losses shall also include the anchor set loss appropriate for the
anchorage system employed.

 For pre-tensioned and post-tensioned members, the strand jacking stress shall be as
specified in the design.

 The method of tensioning shall be one of the following as specified or approved:

o In pre-tensioning; which the pre-stressing strand or tendons are stressed prior to being
embedded in the concrete placed for the member. After the concrete has attained the
required strength, the pre-stressing force is released from the external anchorages and
transferred, by bond, into the concrete.

o In post-tensioning; which the reinforcing tendons are installed in voids or ducts within
the concrete and are stressed and anchored against the concrete after the development of
the required concrete strength. The voids or ducts are pressure-grouted shall be done as
a final operation under this method.

 Concrete Strength

o Until the concrete has reached the strength specified for initial stressing, pre-stressing
forces shall not be applied or transferred to the concrete. The Contractor shall cast and
test sufficient cubes to demonstrate this to the Engineer.

 Pre-stressing Equipment

o Hydraulic jacks which shall be capable of imposing a controlled total force gradually,
are used to stress tendons and they shall be capable of providing and sustaining the
necessary forces and shall be equipped with either a pressure gauge or a load cell for
determining the jacking stress.

o During the pre-stressing operations of the project for verifying pressure gauge readings,
master gauges shall be supplied on site.

o Re-calibration of gauges shall be repeated at least annually and whenever gauge

164
.Section VII E. Specifications
pressures and elongations indicate materially different stresses.

o All cutting of wire, strand shall be carried out using either:

o A high-speed abrasive cutting wheel or friction saw at not less than one diameter from
the anchor, or any other mechanical method approved by the Engineer; or

o An oxy-acetylene cutting flame, using excess oxygen to ensure a cutting rather than a
melting action, not less than 75mm from the anchor. The temperature of the tendon
adjacent to the anchor shall not be greater than 200°C. Care shall be taken that neither
the flame nor splashes come into contact with the anchorages or tendons.

 Sequence of Stressing

o The stressing of post-tensioning tendons and the release of pre-tensioned tendons shall
be done in a sequence that produces a minimum of eccentric force in the member when
the sequence of stressing individual tendons is not otherwise specified.

 Measurement of Stress

o Contractor shall provide a record of gauge pressures and tendon elongations for each
tendon Engineer’s review. Elongations shall be measured to an accuracy of 1mm.
Stressing tails of post-tensioned tendons shall not be cut off until the stressing records
have been approved. A facility shall also be provided to measure any movement of the
tendon in the gripping devices.

 Before elongation readings are started all tendons shall be tensioned to a preliminary force,
which is to be in between 5 and 25 percent of the final jacking force, as necessary to
eliminate any take-up in the tensioning system. The initial force shall be measured by a
dynamometer or by other approved method, so that its amount can be used as a check
against elongation as computed and as measured. Each strand shall be marked prior to final
stressing to permit measurement of elongation and to ensure that all anchor wedges set
properly.

E.3.7.6.2. Pre-tensioning Method Requirements

 Stressing shall be accomplished by either single strand stressing or multiple strand

stressing. The amount of stress to be given each strand shall be as shown in the approved
working drawings.

 All strand to be stressed in a group (multiple strand stressing) shall be brought to a uniform

165
.Section VII E. Specifications
initial tension prior to being given their full pre-tensioning. The amount of the initial
tensioning force shall be within the range specified in General tensioning requirement
section and shall be the minimum required to eliminate all slack and to equalize the stresses
in the tendons as determined by the Engineer.

 To ensure that the wires or strands are maintained in their proper position during concreting,
sufficient locator plates shall be distributed throughout the length of the bed, when straight
tendons are used in the long-line method of pre-tensioning. Where a number of units are
made in line, they shall be free to slide in the direction of their length and thus permit
transfer of the pre-stressing force to the concrete along the whole line.

 In the individual mould system, the moulds shall be sufficiently rigid to provide the reaction
to the pre-stressing force without distortion.

 Approved low-friction devices shall be used at all points of change in slope of tendon
trajectory when tensioning draped pre-tensioned strands, regardless of the tensioning
method used. For single tendons, the deflector in contact with the tendon shall have a radius
of not less than 5 times the tendon diameter for wire or 10 times the tendon diameter for
strand, and the total angle of deflection shall not exceed 15°.

 If the load for a draped strand, as determined by elongation measurements, is more than 5
percent less than that indicated by the jack gauges, the strand shall be tensioned from both
ends of the bed and the load as computed from the sum of elongation at both ends shall
agree within 5 percent of that indicated by the jack gauges.

 Pre-stressing steel strands in pre-tensioned members, if tensioned individually, shall be

checked by the Contractor for loss of pre-stress not more than 3 hours prior to placing
concrete f`or the members, when ordered by the Engineer. The method and equipment for
checking the loss of pre-stress shall be subject to the review by the Engineer. All strands
that show a loss of pre-stress in excess of 3 percent shall be re-tensioned to the original
computed jacking stress.

 Until the concrete has reached the compressive strength required at time of transfer of stress
to concrete, stress on all strands including hold down/hold up forces shall be maintained
between anchorages and transfer of stress shall take place slowly to minimize shock.

 When pre-stressing steel in pre-tensioned members is tensioned at a temperature more than

14°C lower than the estimated temperature of the concrete and the pre-stressing steel at the
time of initial set of the concrete, the calculated elongation of the pre-stressing steel shall

166
.Section VII E. Specifications
be increased to compensate for the loss in stress, due to the change in temperature, but in
no case shall the jacking stress exceed 80% of the specified minimum ultimate tensile
strength of the pre-stressing steel.

 Strand splicing methods and devices shall be approved by the Engineer. Only one splice
per strand will be permitted, when single strand jacking is used. When multi-strand jacking
is used, either all strands shall be spliced or no more than 10 percent of the strands shall be
spliced.

E.3.7.6.3. Post-Tensioning Method Requirements.

 Prior to post-tensioning any member, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Engineer that the pre-stressing steel is free and unbonded in the duct.

 All strands in each tendon, except for those in flat ducts with not more than four strands,
shall be stressed simultaneously with a multi-strand jack. Tensioning shall be accomplished
so as to provide the forces and elongations specified in Section General tensioning
requirement except as provided herein or when shown in the approved working drawings,
tendons in continuous post-tensioned members shall be tensioned by jacking at each end of
the tendon.

 All post-tensioning shall be by means of hydraulic jacks equipped with accurate reading
calibrated hydraulic pressure gauges to permit the stress in the pre-stressing steel to be
computed at any time. A certified calibration curve shall be submitted for each jacking
system. In the event inconsistencies occur between the measured elongation and the jack
gauge reading, the jack gauge shall be immediately be recalibrated. In the event still further
discrepancies occur, the cause shall be determined and reported to the Engineer.

 Deflectors in contact with tendons shall have a radius of not less than 50 times the diameter
of the tendon, and unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the total angle of deflection
shall not exceed 15°.

 Stressing shall continue until the required extension and tendon load are reached or are
approved by the Engineer. Elongation is the preferred method of stress determination
wherever possible. The tendons shall be tensioned to the total forces as specified in the
design.

167
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Elongation shall be measured to an accuracy of 1mm. Elongation tolerances for individual
tendons, based on agreed and approved friction coefficients (established through Friction
Tests) and material properties determined from laboratory tests, shall be within + 7% of the
theoretical value. Prior to commencing pre-stressing work, the Contractor shall submit
elongation calculations to the Engineer for review. These elongations should be based on
actual area and elastic modulus values of the strands making a single tendon which in case
of a single tendon made-up of more than one pre-stressing steel coil, weighted average
values of strand areas and Elastic modulus shall be used in the calculations.

 After the tendons have been anchored, the force exerted by the tensioning apparatus shall
be decreased gradually and steadily so as to avoid shock to the tendon or the anchorage.
Full records shall be kept of all tensioning operations, including the measured extensions,
pressure-gauge or load-cell readings, and the amount of draw-in at each anchorage. Copies
of these records shall be supplied to the Engineer within 24 hours of each tensioning
operation.

 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer tendons shall not be cut less than 3 days after
grouting.

 Friction Test

 Friction losses estimated on the basis of friction and wobble coefficients as in the design.
Total friction losses shall be estimated by carrying out Friction Test on one tendon for each
tendon configuration at the very start of the post-tensioning to check and compare with that
obtained using theoretical coefficient values from the Contract drawings. In case the friction
losses in tests exceed the computed losses, all wires shall be relieved and lubricated using
water-soluble oil and re-tensioned. For the calculation of theoretical elongations, values of
friction and wobble coefficients obtained in Friction Test shall be used.

Sequence of pre-tensioning and posttensioning shall be included in the method statements to be

approved by the Engineer prior to commence work.

E.3.7.7. Grouting

E.3.7.7.1. General

The Contractor shall undertake grout trials in accordance with the details described here. The
grouting methods and procedures proposed by the Contractor will ensure that grout completely fills
the ducts and surrounds the pre-stressing steel.

168
.Section VII E. Specifications
The Contractor shall submit at least 4 weeks before on-site trials a detailed method statement
covering proposed materials, duct, anchorage and vent arrangements, personnel, equipment
grouting procedures and quality control for Engineer’s review.

E.3.7.7.2. Grout Materials

 The properties of the grout, shall be assessed for suitability for the intended purpose
sufficiently in advance of grouting operations. All retrials shall be at the Contractor’s
expense.

 The materials assessment shall consist of the preparation of the grout, made with the
materials and using the plant and personnel proposed for use on site, and the testing of it in
accordance with this section. The preparation shall be carried out under conditions of
temperature expected on site. If grouting operations are likely to cover different seasons,
the assessment shall include the range of expected temperatures.

 The sources of materials and procedures approved as a result of satisfactory trials shall not
be changed without the written review of the Engineer.

 Unless otherwise instructed or agreed by the Engineer as a result of grouting trials, the grout
shall consist only of Portland cement complying with BS12 Class 42.5 N, admixtures
complying with this Section and water complying with BS3148.

 The materials used shall be such that the chloride ion content of the grout shall not exceed
0.1% chlorides by mass of the cement.

E.3.7.7.3. Ducts

The system of ducts, duct connectors grouting connections, vents, vent connections, drains,
transitions to anchorage and caps for anchorages shall form a complete air and water tight
encapsulation for the tendons. Each ducting assembly complete shall be pressure tested for leaks
using air prior to concreting. The wall thickness of ducts after tensioning is not less than 1.5mm
and the duct shall transmit full bond strength from the tendons to the surrounding concrete over a
length no greater than 40 duct diameters.

Air vents of at least 25mm internal diameter shall be provided at the anchorages and in the ducts
at troughs and crests and 400mm beyond each intermediate crest in the direction of grout flow, and
elsewhere as required by the Engineer. All ducts shall be kept free from standing water at all times
and shall be thoroughly clean before grouting. All anchorages shall be sealed by caps and fitted
with grouting connections and vents. Air vents on each tendon shall be identified by labelling and
shall be protected against damage at all times.

169
.Section VII E. Specifications
Air vents at high points shall extend to a minimum of 500mm above the highest point on the duct
profile.

E.3.7.7.4. Grouting Equipment

Grouting equipment shall consist of mixer, a storage reservoir and a pump with all the necessary
connection hoses, valves, measuring devices for water, cement and admixtures and testing
equipment. The mixing equipment shall be capable of producing a grout of homogeneous
consistency and shall be capable of providing a continuous supply to the injection equipment. The
equipment shall have a constant delivery pressure of less than 1 N/mm2, it shall be equipped with
a pressure gauge and shall prevent pressures above 2 N/mm2. All piping to the grout pump shall
have a minimum number of bends, valves and changes in diameter and shall incorporate a sampling
Tee with stop cock. The equipment shall be capable of maintaining pressure on completely grouted
ducts and shall be fitted with a valve that can be locked off without loss of pressure in the duct.

E.3.7.7.5. Batching and Mixing of Grout

All materials shall be batched by mass except the mixing water and liquid admixtures, which may
be batched, by mass or volume. The accuracy of batching shall be ± 2% for cement and admixtures
and ± 1% of mixing water of the quantities specified. The mixing water shall include the water
content of liquid admixtures. The w/c ratio shall be kept as low as possible having regard to the
required plastic properties of the grout. The maximum w/c ratio shall be 0.40. The temperature of
freshly mixed grout shall be between 5°C and 25°C.

E.3.7.7.6. Injecting Grout

A check shall be done by blowing through the system with dry, oil-free air and proving each vent
in turn to ensure the ducts, vents, inlets and outlets are capable of accepting injection of the grout.
Grouting of the ducts shall be carried out as soon as is practicable after the tendons have been
stressed and the Engineer’s written agreement to commence has been obtained. Injection shall be
continuous, and slow enough to avoid producing segregation of the grout. Grout shall be allowed
to flow from each vent and the free end of the duct until its consistency is equivalent to that of the
grout injected. The injection tubes shall be sealed off under pressure of 0.5N/mm2 which shall be
maintained for at least one minute.

The filled ducts shall not be subjected to shock or vibration within 24 hours of grouting.

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, there is cause for doubt that the ducts are completely filled with
grout, the Engineer may require non-destructive testing to be carried out.

The Contractor shall keep full records of grouting for each duct including the date each duct was

170
.Section VII E. Specifications
grouted, the proportion of the grout and any admixtures used, the pressure, details of any
interruptions and topping up required. Grout vents shall be positively sealed to be waterproof on
completion of grouting.

E.3.7.7.7. Properties of Grout

The fluidity of the grout during the injection period shall be high enough for it to be pumped
effectively and adequately to fill the duct, but low enough to expel the air and any water in the
sheath.

The material used shall comply with the standard and shall be taken the prior approval from the
Engineer.

The bleeding of the grout shall be sufficiently low to prevent excessive segregation and settlement
of the grout materials. The volume change of the grout shall be within the range 0% to +5%. For
grouts with expanding agents there shall be no decrease in volume.

The compressive strength of 100mm cubes made of the grout shall be in accordance with BS 1881.

E.3.7.7.8. The Testing of Grout

The testing of grout shall be done accordance with the standards of BS 1881.

Procedures of tests shall be submitted by the Contractor for review shall include but not limited to.

 Fluidity Test

 Bleeding Test

 Sieve Test

E.3.7.7.9. Admixtures

Admixtures shall be used to achieve a low water/cement ratio and impart good fluidity, minimum
bleed and volume stability or expansion to the grout. They should be added on site during the
mixing process and used in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Admixtures may
be used singly or in combination to obtain the required grout performance and which used in
combination shall be checked for compatibility. Admixtures shall not contain substances in
quantities, which will adversely affect the grout or the corrosion protection of the pre-stressing
steel. Thiocyante, nitrates, formate and sulphides shall not be used in admixtures. Admixture shall
not segregate and shall be uniform in colour. The Contractor shall submit and get approved of trial
mixers which are done to determine the optimum dosage of admixture. The method of measuring
dosage and checking weights of pre-packed dry materials shall be agreed with the Engineer.

171
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.3.7.7.10. Grouting Trials

The Contractor shall provide full documentary evidence, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, of
successful grouting trials on a similar project, using similar grout and similar equipment. All
relevant details of ducts, vents, duct supports, pre-stressing anchorages, pre-stressing strands, grout
inlets and outlets shall be incorporated.

All system methods and materials are to be those proposed for the permanent works and shall have
been submitted to the Engineer as part of the detailed method statement required in this Section.

Grouting and testing shall be carried out in accordance with the Specification.

After 3 days the Contractor shall carefully cut and expose cross-sections and longitudinal sections
of the duct and anchorages where directed by the Engineer to demonstrate that the duct is fully
grouted. Where polyethylene ducts are used, the Contractor may propose proven non-destructive
imaging procedures as an alternative method of verification of full filling of the duct with grout
subject to the approval of the Engineer. A report shall be prepared by the Contractor including full
details of the trial, testing results and photographs of the cut sections. Pre-stressing for the
permanent works will not be permitted without the written review by the Engineer to the grouting
procedures and formal acceptance of the results of the grouting trial or the documentary evidence
of previous grouting trials.

E.3.7.7.11. Protection of Tendons

The pre-stressing tendons shall be protected by cement grout within a pressure tested completely
sealed encapsulation. Metal parts of anchorages shall be electrically bonded to the adjacent
reinforcement at each end of the tendon. Electrical continuity of the structure over the length of the
tendon shall be tested.

E.3.7.8. Quality Assurance

Successful Proposer/ Contactor shall maintain the quality of work according to the approved
Quality Manual. It shall contain the following details to maintain the quality.

1. Introduction.

2. Materials.

3. Material Tests.

4. Work Procedures.

5. Acceptable Tolerances for each operation.

172
.Section VII E. Specifications
6. Check list for each operation.

7. Study guidelines prior to the relevant operation.

8. Actions to be taken on site to rectification.

9. Further investigations.

E.3.8. STRUCTURAL STEEL

E.3.8.1. Standards

E.3.8.1.1.

For the structural steelwork the following codes and standards will be applicable.

BS 449 : Specification for the use of structural steel in building.

BS 4360 : Specification for weldable structural steels,1986

E.3.8.1.2.

Unless otherwise specified the structural steel to be used shall be mild steel grade 43.

E.3.8.1.3

All weld metal shall be suitable steel relative to the parent metal of the structure and all electrodes
used for manual welding shall conform with B.S 639. Continuous electrodes for machine
welding shall be to the approval of the Engineer. All welding must conform to B.S. 5135.

E.3.8.1.4

Site-bolted joints will normally be made using general grade high strength friction grip (H.S.F.G.)
bolts conform with BS 4395, and conform with BS 4190.

E.3.8.2.General

E.3.8.2.1

In general, shop joints shall be made by welding and site joints by bolting. Site welding will not be
permitted without the express approval of the Engineer.

E.3.8.2.2

Contact between galvanized steel members and aluminium surfaces is to be prevented by

means of a layer of P.V.C self adhesive plastic tape “Densochrome” tape or similar approved
material.

E.3.8.3. Drawings and calculations

173
.Section VII E. Specifications

E.3.8.3.1

The Contractor shall check dimensions on all shop drawings with the dimensions on the Contract
drawings before start of manufacturing of the relevant items.

E.3.8.3.2

Should and discrepancies occur between the Contract drawings and the Specification, the
matter is to be referred immediately to the Engineer for decision.

E.3.8.3.3

All steel members shown on the Contract drawings are based on West European Standards,
Dimensions, weights and strengths. In case the specified sizes are not available, the Contractor shall
submit alternatives which shall be to the approval of the Engineer in all respects.

E.3.8.3.4

The Contractor shall prepare and submit detailed working drawings for the structural steelwork
for the Engineer‟s approval if an alternative is to be offered to the Architect‟s design. Detailed design,
fabrication, erection etc. shall comply with all requirements of B.S 449 including amendments.

E.3.8.3.5

The Contractor shall prepare and submit all calculations and shop drawings for all parts of the steel
structures and all detail drawings of all connections in welded, bolted or riveted constructions for the
Engineer‟s approval before manufacturing, The Engineer‟s approval does not release the Contractor
from his responsibilities for the structure and the dimensions on such shop drawings.

E.3.8.3.6

At the Contractor‟s request, the Engineer will supply design calculations for information only.

E.3.8.3.7

The Contractor shall prepare assembly drawings showing the location, position and reference
numbers of all components including fixing materials and sequences of erection and installation to
the approval of the Engineer.

E.3.8.3.8

Any damage to materials on the site or other storage areas due to inadequate precautions being
taken during the erection of steelwork shall be made good as required by the Engineer at the

174
.Section VII E. Specifications
Contractor‟s expense.

E.3.8.4. Scope of work

E.3.8.4.1

Steel work to be supplied and delivered according to the drawings and specifications
comprises all structural steel works including the necessary anchors, base plates, head plates,
connection plates, stiffening plates, bolts, nuts, washers, temporary bracing and additional rails
required for the fixing of the roofing and cladding etc.

E.3.8.4.2

The Contractor shall supply and fix all mild steel profiles such as mild steel angles to be welded to
various structural steel frame members to receive block work, mild steel plates at columns at corners
etc. According to the structural and Architectural drawings.

E.3.8.4.3

All structural steel to be hot-dip galvanized. Damages to the layer to be touched – up immediately
upon discovery or infliction. All excess to be removed carefully. The finished surfaces shall be clean.

E.3.8.4.4

The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with test certificates obtained from the rolling mills with
each delivery of structural steel and reinforcement steel.

E.3.8.5. Welding

E.3.8.5.1

Machine welding shall be carried out using approved machines sufficiently supervised by
qualified operators and hand welding shall be executed in an efficient manner by fully qualified
workmen equipped with plant suitable for the purpose. All welding tests shall comply with B.S 4870
and 4871 so far as applicable and except as modified in this Specification.

E.3.8.5.2

The manipulators and the sequence of welding shall be suitable for the work, and

shall be subject to the Engineer‟s approval before welding is commenced.

E.3.8.5.3

Welding procedure shall be such that distortion is reduced to a minimum and local distortion is
rendered negligible in the final structure.

175
.Section VII E. Specifications

E.3.8.5.4

Surfaces to be welded shall be properly prepared in accordance with accepted standards and during
welding shall be kept clean and free from all extraneous matter.

E.3.8.5.6

All welds shall be finished full and made with the proper number of runs, the welds being kept free
of slag instrusions and all adhering slag being carefully removed from the exposed surfaces
immediately after each run.

E.3.8.5.7

Approval of any welding procedure shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for correct
welding and for the minimising of distortion in the finished structure.

E. 3.8.5.8

Only skilled welding operators who satisfy the appropriate welding tests specified in the relevant
Standards shall be employed on welding.

E.3.8.5.9

Notwithstanding any routine testing of operators by the Contractor the Engineer reserves the right
to have any welding operator re-tested at any time.

E.3.8.5.10

In addition to the Contractor‟s normal supervision and testing procedure, radiographic and
other non-destructive examination shall be carried out as and when required by the Engineer, on butt
or fillet welded joints and/or on test specimens. Prepared etched sections of welds may be required
for examination. The Contractor shall at his own cost, provide all equipment necessary for such
tests and shall cut out and remove any portion of the steelwork which the Engineer shall decide is
defective.

E.3.8.5.11

The acceptance of the welding work shall depend upon correct dimensions and alignment, absence
of distortion in the structure, satisfactory results from the examination and testing of the joints
and the test specimens, soundness of the welds, and upon general good workmanship.

E.3.8.5.12

Welding other than in properly equipped fabrication shops will normally be limited to non-structural

176
.Section VII E. Specifications
members except where specifically permitted by the Engineer and designated beam seatings and
cleats to be welded to the structural steelwork for receiving the small steelwork.

E.3.8.6. Bolted fixings

E.3.8.6.1

All bolts and nuts shall be complete with washers and shall be galvanized where specified, If washers
are not shown on the Drawings, they shall be provided in accordance with best current practice to
the approval of the Engineer.

E.3.8.6.2

Where H.S.F.G. bolts are used, the holes shall be drilled full size to a diameter not more than 2 mm
greater than the shank diameter of the bolt and all gurrs shall be removed.

E.3.8.6.3

Any type of H.S.F.G bolts which the Contractor may wish to supply and use shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval and must comply with BS 4395.

E.3.8.7. Erection of steelwork

E.3.8.7.1

The Contractor shall ensure that all component parts of the structures will fit correctly and that
the holes of adjoining members correctly register with one another. The Contractor shall temporarily
erect at his works such proportion of the component parts as is necessary to verify to the satisfaction
of the architect the accuracy of fabrication.

The verification will not however relieve the Contractor of his responsibility in ensuring correct
fit etc.

E.3.8.7.2

The Contractor shall include in his rates all costs in respect of temporarily erecting components, the
provision of all necessary scaffolding, flooring, staging, bolts and everything else necessary for
erection.

E.3.8.7.3

The steelwork shall be lined, levelled and plumbed as the erection proceeds and no cladding or doors
shall be fixed to the framework until the bolting up, lining, levelling and plumbing is complete and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

E.3.8.7.4

177
.Section VII E. Specifications
After steelwork has been plumbed, lined and levelled, all bases shall be grouted with neat non-
shrink grout of as dry a consistency as possible compatible with the requirement as regards pouring,
raking and ramming of the grout under and through the steel bases The grout shall be from an
approved manufacturer and shall be applied in strict accordance with his instructions.

E.3.8.8 Correction of work

Correction of minor misfits and a reasonable amount of reaming and cutting of excess stock from
rivets will be considered as a legitimate part of erection. Any error that may occur in shop work
which prevent the proper assembling and fitting of parts by moderate use of drift pins or a
moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping or cutting shall immediately be called to the
attention of the Engineer and approval of the method or procedure of correction shall be obtained
or such method or procedure shall not be employed. The use of cutting torches to enlarge or alter
bolt or rivet holes shall be prohibited.

E.3.8.9 Purlins

Purlins are cold formed from hot dipped zinc coated high strength steel strip which has minimum
yield stress of 450 MPa. The standard galvanized coating is 450g/m to BS 2989 on all sides.
Minimum thickness of purlins shall be 2.0 mm. “C” sections shall be used for simple span
construction with the purlin butted at internal support.

E.3.8.10 Insulation

Insulation shall be 100 mm thick glass fibre of 24 kg/m3 density having thermal conductivity of
less than 0.035W/mK at mean temperature 25 C0, thermal resistance (R value) shall be greater than
2.857 m2/WC0 laid on two way reinforced double sided aluminium foil. All joints shall be sealed
with aluminium vapour sealed tape and thermal insulation system shall be supported with a 3”x3”
17 gauge BRC welded roofing galvanized mesh fixed to the purlins.

E.3.8.11. Painting and Galvanizing

E.3.8.11.1 Galvanized steel work (internal and external)

E.3.8.11.1.1 Cleaning

After the shop works have been completed and accepted, all material to be galvanized according
to the Specifications shall be cleaned of rust, loose scale, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign
substances in accordance with the provisions stipulated under Chapter , ‘Painting and Corrosion
Protection of these Specifications. Particular care shall be taken to clean slag from welded areas.
Execution of galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 123, ASTM A153 and ASTM A384.

178
.Section VII E. Specifications

E.3.8.11.1.2 Galvanizing of Plates and Shapes

After being cleaned, the material shall be zinc coated (galvanized) in accordance with applicable
Standards. Where members are of such lengths that they cannot be dipped on one operation great
care shall be exercised to prevent warping. Finished compression members shall not have lateral
variations greater than one-thousandth of the axial lengths between the points which are to be
supported laterally. Finished tension members shall not have lateral variations exceeding 3 mm for
each 1.50 m of length. Sharp kinks or bends will be cause for rejection of the material. All holes in
material shall be free of excess spelter after galvanizing.

E.3.8.11.1.3 Galvanizing of Hardware

Bolts, nuts, washers, locknuts and similar hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with the
relevant Standards. Excess spelter shall be removed by centrifugal spinning.

E.3.8.11.1.4 Straightening after Galvanizing

All plates and shapes which have been warped by the galvanizing process shall be straightened by
being rerolled or pressed. The material shall not be hammered or otherwise straightened in a
manner that will injure the protective coating. If the material has been harmfully bent or warped in
the process of fabrication or galvanizing, such defects shall be cause for rejection.

E.3.8.11.1.5 Repair of Galvanizing

Materials of which galvanizing has been damaged shall be re-dipped unless the damage is local
and can be repaired by soldering or by applying a galvanizing repair compound, in which case the
compound shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Soldering shall be done with a soldering-iron using 50/50 bar solder (tin and lead). Surplus flux or
acid shall be washed off promptly and the work shall be performed so as not to damage the adjacent
coating or the metal itself. Any member on which the galvanized coating becomes damaged after
having been dipped twice shall be rejected.

E.3.8.11.2 Painting

E.3.8.11.2.1 Shop Painting

Paint shall be delivered to the shop and the site in original sealed containers, which shall be clearly
marked with the manufacturer's name and the identifying brand number or name. The paint shall
be used as prepared by the manufacturer without thinning or other admixtures.

Steel to be encased in concrete shall not be painted. All steel parts such as steel structures, girders,

179
.Section VII E. Specifications
frames, chequered plates, grids, railings, latticed members, gratings, bars and plates of any kind,
etc. shall be sand blasted down to white metal according to the provisions of Chapter “Painting and
Corrosion Protection”.

Before assembly of the different structural parts, surfaces shall be coated as specified.

E.3.8.11.2.2 Surface Preparation

White metal sandblast cleaning in accordance with steel structures. Painting Council Specification
SP 5 latest edition.

E.3.8.11.2.3 Shop Priming

As specified in Chapter “Painting and Corrosion Protection". Mating surfaces of friction

connections shall be prepared as specified.

No paint which prevents proper welding shall be used within 5 cm (2 inches) of indicated field
welds.

E.3.8.11.2.4 Field Painting

After assembly welding spots shall be ground smooth, the first coat shall be repaired and a second
coat similar to the above mentioned shall be provided. Isolation of non-compatible metals shall be
provided in all installation by giving the metal a coat of asphalt and an isolation barrier (i.e. asphalt
impregnate felt) to prevent contact with dissimilar metals, masonry, concrete or plaster. Galvanized
structural steel parts except girders and gratings shall also be provided as mentioned above.

All field rivets, bolt and welds, and all serious abrasions to the shop coat shall be spot painted with
the same material used for the shop coat or an equivalent, and all mud, grime and other firmly
attached foreign and objectionable materials shall be removed. Then, a through coat of approved
field paint shall be applied to all steel work, except when steel comes in contact with concrete.
After erection, the finish coat of painting on Site shall be carried out in accordance with the painting
specifications and any damaged restored.

E.3.9. MASONRY WORKS

The work under this Section shall comprise the supply of all labour, materials and equipment

and the performance of all works required for the masonry works for the buildings as
specified herein.

180
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.3.9.1 Material and Execution

E.3.9.1.1 Brick Masonry

(1) Materials

The bricks shall be uniform in size and shape and shall be deep red in colour and must be well
burnt. The bricks shall be wholly clean and free from flaws, cracks and under burnt lumps of any
kind. They shall have sharp edges and angles and even surfaces. The Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer sample bricks for his approval before the bricks are supplied, and all bricks used
on the works shall be equal to the approved samples. The bricks shall be sampled and tested for
dimensions, general requirements, compressive strength, water absorption and efflorescence as per
SLS 39.

(2) Brick Laying

The bricks shall be thoroughly soaked with water before their use and they shall be laid end and
side in one operation in close compact mortar joints. The cement mortar to be used shall have
cement to sand ratio of 1 : 5 .

E. 3.9.1.2 Concrete Block Masonry

(1) Materials

The concrete blocks shall have a compressive strength of not less than 2.8 N I mm2 and an apparent
specific gravity, air dried of not less than 1 . 7 . Sampling and testing shall be as per BS 6073 Part-
1.

(2) Concrete Block Laying

The concrete blocks shall be laid in straight and struck joints of about one (1) cm thick with

1:5 cement mortar. The concrete block walls shall be reinforced with steel reinforcement deformed
bars of a diameter of 12 mm at 60 cm intervals in horizontal and 40 crn intervals in vertical
directions. Steel anchor bars shall be pre-installed to the surrounding floor, columns, walls and
ceiling at intervals and locations to enable connection to the reinforcement bars. All splices shall
be taken 40 times the bar diameter.

The hollows through which the reinforcement bars run shall be thoroughly filled with 1 :3 cement
mortar. A bay wall shall, when large in height and width, be divided into sections with
reinforced concrete frames. The Contractor .shall design the reinforced concrete frames and obtain
the approval of the Engineer. Where required to install doors, windows and any other opening in
walls, reinforced concrete lintels shall be provided. The Contractor shall design the reinforced

181
.Section VII E. Specifications
concrete lintels and shall obtain the approval of the Engineer.

Laying of the concrete blocks shall not exceed 1. 2 m in height per day.

E. 3.9.1.3 Random Rubble Masonry (R. R. Masonry)

Random rubble Masonry is to be built with stones from quarries approved by the Engineer. The
stones shall be hard, free from decay, weathering and defects like cavities, cracks, flaws, sand holes,
veins etc. Stones with rounded surfaces shall not be used. The stones used shall be small enough
to be lifted and placed by hand. The length of the stone shall not exceed three times the height.
The breath of stone on base shall not be greater than three-fourth of the thickness of the wall (
except for through stones) nor be less than l 50mm. The height of the stones may not exceed
300mm.

Stones shall be hammer dressed to enable it to come into close proximity with the
neighboring stones. The bushing in the face shall not project more than 40mm on an exposed face,
and 10mm on a face to be plastered. Unless otherwise stated 1 :3 cement sand mortar may be used
for jointing the stones in the masonry.

All stones shall be cleaned and watered before use and shall be laid on natural bed on a full even
bed of mortar and hammered down in to position. Every stone shall be carefully fitted to the
adjacent stones leaving a minimum space of 15mm between stones to provide mortar bond
between them. Chips and spalls of stones may be used to avoid thick mortar beds or joints, and to
ensure that no hollow spaces are left anywhere in the masonry.

In building RR Masonry walls up to 600mm thickness at least one through stone shall be used at
intervals of l.8m horizontally and 0.6m vertically. Such stones shall be at least l 50mm square at
the face (rough shape). For walls exceeding 600mm in thickness more than one stone may be
used to run through the full thickness with overlaps of not less than l 50mm, and such stones are
called "bond stones". If suitable bond stones are not available they may be cast out of 1 :3:6
(20mm) concrete. Face joints shall not be more than 20mm thick.

Any holes left in the masonry for supporting scaffolding as approved by the Engineer shall be
completely filled with proper sized stones and mortar. The masonry shall be kept constantly moist
for a period of seven days.

E.3.10. PAINTING

The works under this Section shall comprise the supply of labour, materials and equipment and
performance of all works necessary for applying painting finishes to the interior and exterior
surfaces of the buildings and facilities. The works shall be performed as shown on the Drawings

182
.Section VII E. Specifications
prepared by the Contractor or as directed by the Engineer arid as specified herein.

E.3.10.1 Materials

Paints shall be of the best quality of their kind. Colour of paints shall be in accordance with the
colour schemes accepted by the Engineer. Exact tone of the colour selected shall be in accordance
with the samples supplied and applied on test areas in the Works approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit color samples and catalogues of all paints to be used to the Engineer for
his approval.

All paint materials shall be delivered to the Site in their original containers with labels intact and
seals unbroken. All paints shall be of reputed registered brands, with the exception of ready mixed
materials in original containers and all mixing shall be done at the Site. ·

E.3.10.2 Execution

All metal components other than galvanized steel shall be prepared and primed in the shop

and final paint coat applied after erection. Metal cabinets and machinery shall be prepared, primed
and given two coats of rust resistant paint in the shop, and all damaged places shall be cleaned and
touched-up after installation is completed.

Metal surfaces shall be cleaned with mechanical methods by metal scrapers and wire brushed to
remove all mill scale, weld spatter, rust and any other deleterious materials. Oil and grease shall be
removed by an approved solvent. The surfaces shall be wiped clean of any dust prior to priming.
Priming shall be done immediately after cleaning to prevent new rust. Any primed surfaces that
show rusting, flaking, powdering or peeling shall be re-cleaned and repainted.

All wood surfaces to receive paint shall be cleaned of all dirt, grease, dust or any other deleterious
matters. All surfaces shall be thoroughly sanded and all nail holes, cracks and any other defects
shall be puttied, and re-sanded to a smooth and flush finish. The painted surface shall show a
smooth, level and uniform finish, free from any stains and shall be uniform in colour and shade.

All concrete, masonry and plastered surfaces to be painted shall be smooth, dry, and free from dirt
or other deleterious material and stopped up holes. All rubbish waste or surplus material shall be
removed from time to time, walls/floors or other adjacent work shall be cleaned. The mortar and
concrete shall be left to dry for a minimum period of 3 weeks after application. Spray painting
equipment shall be adequate for the work to be performed and shall have suitable air pressure and
paint flow controls. Air lines shall be equipped with moisture and dirt traps. The paint shall be
continuously stirred during the painting process. The paint shall be mixed and applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. and painting process shall be subjected to

183
.Section VII E. Specifications
the approval of the Engineer.

All painting works shall conform to the manufacturer's specifications and instructions.
Painting shall not be done in rain, fog or mist, or at any other time considered unsuitable by the
Engineer. All the surrounding works shall be protected in a suitable manner from paint drops and
overspray. All smeared and damaged surfaces shall be cleaned or repaired to the Engineer's
satisfaction. Sufficient quantities of all types and colour paints shall be supplied in unopened cans
to the Employer for touch up paints.

E.3.10.2.1Vinyl Paint and Oil Paint to Metal Surfaces

Steel surfaces except galvanized areas shall be applied with two shop coats of rust resistant paint
prior to its delivery to the Site, then touch up painting of rust resistant paint shall be applied after
erection of the steel structure at the Site. Exposed surfaces shall be applied with two finishing coats
of viny I paint.

Galvanized metal surfaces to be painted such as steel doors shall be first etched with a 5% Acetic
acid solution and washed clean before applied with two finishing coats of oil paint.

E.3.10.2.2Vinyl Paint to Wooden Surfaces

Wooden doors and all other wooden surfaces except wooden handrails to receive paint shall be
thoroughly dry and free from foreign substances. Paints shall be applied in 3 coats including
one coat of primer paint. Sufficient time shall be allowed for drying between each new coat in
accordance with the paint manufactures recommendations.

E.3.10.2.3 Vinyl Emulsion Paint to Mortar, Concrete Surfaces and Flexible Boards

The mortar and concrete shall be left to dry for a minimum period of 3 weeks before
application. The vinyl emulsion paint shall be applied in 3 coats including a primer coat. Minimum
1 2 hours or a period recommended by the manufactures, whichever is higher, shall be allowed
before application of each successive coat. Outside and the other areas liable for wetting shall be
applied a weather proof type paint.

E.3.10.2.4 Clear Lacquer Finish

Wooden surfaces shall be properly smoothened with sandpapers. Clear lacquer finish shall be
applied in 3 coats to a clear and uniform finish in shade and to reveal the grain of the wood.

E.3.10.2.5 Floor Paints

Floor paints shall be of epoxy-resin type which has high durability against rubbing.

E.3.10.2.6 Acid-resistant Paints

184
.Section VII E. Specifications
Acid-resistant paints shall be emulsion/epoxy type synthetic resin paint which has a proven

quality of acid-resistance. Battery rooms shall be painted with acid-resistant paints.

E.3.11.WATERPROOFING

E.3.11.1 General

E.3.11.1.1 Warranty

 Insulation, water proofing and tanking shall be applied in accordance with the directions
of the manufacturer of the materials and components, and the complete systems shall be
fitted in the works by experienced specialist crew.

 Notwithstanding maintenance requirements for the works, the Contractor shall warrant
the Owner with the assurance of a reputable local insurance company that roofs and tanks
shall remain waterproof, vapour proof and damp-proof in respect of workmanship and
materials for a minimum period of 10 years calculated from the time that the works are
certified as substantially completed.

 The form of guarantee offered by the specialist, applicator shall be submitted for the
Consultant's approval prior to commencement of waterproofing. This guarantee shall in
no way indemnify the against the improper performance of the waterproofing system.

 All structural components that retained or exclude water or any other liquid should be
applied with approved water proofing material.

 Roof slab should be externally water proofed and insulated by an agent approved by the
Engineer.

E.3.11.1.2 Structure

 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the specialist applicator takes note
of the type of the structure, nature and the location of waterproofing to be applied, including
any movement joints provided, when designing his water proofing system.

 The laying of a water proofing system on a concrete surface will be taken as signifying
the acceptance of that surface, both in terms of surface quality, spacing and arrangement
of movement joints and the construction joints by the Contractor and his specialist
applicator.

185
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.3.11.1.3 Application

 Where applicable, aprons and other sections for roof/tank penetrations, trims, side laps,
bends and corners shall be incorporated, corrected finished and uniformly lined.

 The water proofing system shall be dressed up all pipes and other penetrations to a
minimum height of 250 above the top of the concrete slab.

 Sharp corners are to be filled with screed or other fillets and water proofing should be
laid with generous overlap as per manufacturer's instructions.

 When water proofing is to be applied on exposed areas, colours have to be approved by

the Engineer.

 Where finishes such as concrete paving or tiles are specified and to be laid over water
proofing membranes, of concrete floor. The floor shall be tested for water - tightness
prior to laying of these tiles/paving. The structures such as Sumps and tanks shall also be
tested after the application of water proofing systems. The cost of carrying out these tests
including that of blocking any outlets shall be borne by the Contractor. Where it is seen
that water tightness has not been achieved, the Contractor shall take whatever remedial
measures as are ordered by the Consultant and the cost of all such measures shall be
borne by the Contractor.

E.3.11.1.4 Joints with abutting walls, columns, piping etc.

 Joints with abutting structures shall be carried out with materials as specified in the relevant
Clause of other trades, such as weather sealant all as generally shown in typical details on
the drawings.

 Special joints which are not shown on drawings or particular sections there of requiring a
special attention, are deemed to be included in the Contractor's drawings and are to be
executed in a workman like manner and in consent with and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

E.3.11.2. Distinction of waterproofing - Systems

In order to distinguish between the various systems of water proofing in relation to the Finishing
Schedules and / or drawings; the following denomination shall be adhered to:

WP 1 : For roof slab and machine floor areas.

WP 2 : For basement floor slabs, beams, pile caps.

186
.Section VII E. Specifications
WP 3 : For basement floor walls.
WP 4 : For concrete slabs before finishing (heavy duty), comprising toilet floors,
balconies, gutters etc.
WP 5 : For sumps, tanks and ponds
WP 6 : For pits, gulleys etc., comprising but not limited to all pits, inspection
pits, pumps-pits etc., inside and outside the building, for drainage, waste water,
sewerage and rainwater assembly and/or transport.
WP 7 : Special Flooring and Wall Coatings

E.3.11.2.1. Waterproofing system to roof slabs and machine floor areas – (WP1)

Material Specification – Torch-On Waterproofing Membrane

 The following specification is for a built-up Waterproofing system of non-metallic roofing

compound of laminar bituminised construction, intended for this project. The Contractor
may submit alternative reputable constructions together with the relevant specification and
method statement to the approval of the Consultant; such constructions should in any case
conform to the insurance requirement specified under "Warranty" requirement.

 Waterproofing membrane shall be 4.0mm thick with sand finish on top, UV resistant;

 Atactic Polypropylene (APP) modified bituminous membrane reinforced with

160g/m2 polyester fabric, with approximate weight 4.6 kg/m2 and torch-applied over
the substrate after application of the approved primer.

 An interruption of work the edges of the sheets have to be finished in such a manner that
rain water and dust cannot penetrate underneath.

 A Prefabricated multi-layer sandwich type membrance should conform to the

manufacturer‟s Specifications.

 Mechanically batch mixed cement; sand (1:3) protective screed shall be laid over the
waterproofing membrane having a minimum layer thickness of 15mm.

Insulation

 On top of the Waterproofing membrane, polyurethane or equivalent extruded

polystyrene boards 25-50mm thick with Thermal conductivity of not more than
0.03W/Mk (as per ASTM C5 18) shall be laid.

 Method should comply with the following standards ASTM D-1622, ASTM C-518,
ASTMD2842 and ASTM D1621-95.

187
.Section VII E. Specifications
 The boards shall have rebated / ship lap edges all round for interlocked laying in sizes
of 600x1200mm, tightly laid in stretcher bond.

 The compressive strength of the insulation boards shall be not less than 40kPa
according to ASTMC165 procedure B.

 Insulation boards shall be protected against rain and humidity.

Separation Layer

 On top of the Insulation / Waterproofing membrane, non-woven geo-textile polyester mat

or equivalent shall be laid as the separation layer.

 It should conform to the manufacturer's specifications.

Concrete covering screed

 Concrete covering screed of grade 20-25mm thick shall be laid over the gauge 1000
polythene sheet (Separation sheet) as shown on the drawing. 50 x 50mm (3mm dia.)
galvanized steel wire-mesh shall be incorporated in the concrete screed layer. 10mm thick
expansion joints shall be provided in covering screed to limit the concrete screed panel size
approximately to 4.0 Sq.m. Expansion joints shall be coincided with the joints of the tile
layer (if any) above and later filled by the approved joint sealant.

 Floor tiles with approved colour and quality shall be laid over the screed as the finishing
layer,

 Alternatively, reinforced concrete floating slab shall be constructed instead of concrete

screed if there is any possibility of installation of mechanical plants or equipment.

E.3.11.2.2. Waterproofing system for Basement floor slabs, beams, pile caps– (WP2)

Material Specification – Torch-On Waterproofing Membrane

 The prepared concrete surface shall be waterproofed by means APP bituminous

polyester sheet or equivalent 4.0mm thick sand finish, UV resistant, APP modified
bituminous. Torch-applied membrane reinforced with 160gms/sqm. polyester fabric over
the substrate after application of the approved primer.

 Application of the Waterproofing membrane shall strictly be in accordance with the

manufacturer's instruction maintaining sufficient over lap at joints.

 At interruption of work the edges of the sheets have to be finished in such a manner that
rain water or duct shall not penetrate underneath.

188
.Section VII E. Specifications
 The Contractor shall ensure timely submission to the Consultant of details, type, make
and composition of the Waterproofing systems together with certified proof from the
manufacturer of the proposed system.

 Prefabricated multi-layer sandwiched type membrane conforming to the manufacturer's

specifications.

 Mechanically batch mixed cement; sand (1:3) protective screed shall be laid over the
waterproofing membrane having a minimum layer thickness of 15mm.

E.3.11.2.3. Waterproofing system to Basement walls – (WP3)

Material Specification – Sheet Membrane

 The prepared concrete surface shall be waterproofed by means of a 1.5mm thick

(minimum thickness) P.V.C. film/self- adhesive bitumen laminated, supplied in roll
form or other approved system. The laminate or other approved system shall be applied in
strict accordance with the manufacturer‟s instructions, including the necessary prime coats,
tact coats etc.

 Application of the Waterproofing membrane shall strictly be in accordance with the

manufacturer's instruction maintaining sufficient over lap at joints.

 At interruption of work the edges of the sheets have to be finished in such a manner
that rain water or duct shall not penetrate underneath.

 The Contractor shall ensure timely submission to the Consultant of details, type, make
and composition of the Waterproofing systems together with certified proof from the
manufacturer of the proposed system.

 Mechanically batch mixed cement; sand (1:3) protective screed shall be laid over the
waterproofing membrane having a minimum layer thickness of 15mm.

E.3.11.2.4 Waterproofing system to concrete slabs before finishing (heavy duty),

comprising toilet floors, balconies, gutters, etc. – (WP4)

Material Specification- Flexible Cementitious Coating System

 The material used shall 2-part polymer (acrylic), flexible cementations

waterproofing slurry or equivalent to 1.5mm minimum thickness with sound bond
properties to cement screed/mortar surfaces.

 Water proofing of concrete slabs before receiving the ultimate finish shall be carried

189
.Section VII E. Specifications
out as detailed below.

 In these areas, the prepared concrete floor and abutting up- stands/fillets shall be
water proofed by means of application of Polymer modified cementations water proofing
coatings or other approved method in accordance with the manufacturers‟ instruction.

 The water proofing system shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions, including primers etc. The system shall be suitable to receive the screed.

 The Contractor shall ensure that all penetrations of the relevant floors/slabs shall be
water proofed in a workmanlike manner and as per instructions by the manufacturers or,
lacking that, by the Engineer.

 The Contractor shall ensure timely submission to the Engineer of details, type, make and
composition of the systems, together with certified proof from the manufacturer in respect
of the suitability of his system.

 Mechanically batch mixed cement; sand (1:3) protective screed shall be laid over the
waterproofing membrane having a minimum layer thickness of 15mm.

E.3.11.2.5.Waterproofing system to sumps, tanks and ponds-(WP5)

Material Specification- Cementitious Crystalline type Coating System

 The water proofing shall consist of application of Cementitious Crystalline type

approved water proofing coating according to the manufacturer‟s recommendations.

 The Contractors shall ensure that all penetrations for piping, gulleys etc., shall be water
proofed in a workmanlike manner.

 The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the waterproof coating is not of a toxic
nature, giving no elements toxic to drinking water.

 If the latter should occur, the shall provide and apply extra coat(s) of non- toxic sealant to
walls and floors of drinking water sumps, all in accordance with the manufacturers'
instructions.

 The water proofed areas shall be filled with water for 3 days to check any seepage of water
or dampness.

 After testing of water proofing, 1:3 cement and sand screed shall be laid as a protective
screed.

190
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.3.11.2.6. Waterproofing system to pits, gulleys, etc. - (WP6)

Material Specification-Flexible Cementitious Coating System

 All pits, gulleys, gutters and such other structures as the Consultant shall designate, shall
be internally treated with two coats of black tar paint, in accordance with BS 1070.

 Concrete or masonry, whether plastered or not, which is to be coated with tar paint shall
be well cleaned, and free from damp, dust and dirt. The paint shall be applied to bottoms
of pits, benching therein and sides over full height.

 Mechanically batch mixed cement; sand (1:3) protective screed shall be laid over the
waterproofing membrane having a minimum layer thickness of 15mm.

E.3.11.2.7 Waterproofing system to special flooring and wall coatings - (WP7)

E.3.11.2.7.1 Wall Coating to Emergency Stair Ways, Service Duct and Lobby Wall

 Material Specification – Water Based Two Part Epoxy Coating

 Apply 2 coats of Epoxy Coating with approved colour as per the specification and
instruction of Manufacturer's representative.

E.3.11.2.7.2 Dust Proofing to Lift Shaft Walls

 Material Specification – Single pack colorless, penetrating Synthetic Acrylic coating.

 Dust Proof coating shall be semi-gloss finish.

 Apply 2 coats of dust Proof coating as per his specification and instruction of
Manufacturer's representative.

E.3.11.2.7.3 Waterproofing system to concrete decks/slabs and areas overlaid by asphalt

 Concrete deck waterproofing shall be continuous and cover the entire deck between
parapet up stands.

 The waterproofing system shall provide a watertight seal at edges and around
interruptions, such as gulleys.

 Arises shall be chamfered or rounded and fillets formed in internal angles.

 The waterproofing system shall be compiled with BS Standards and it shall be approved
by the engineer.

 A permitted waterproofing system shall have a valid and current certification at

191
.Section VII E. Specifications
the time of use.

 The waterproofing system specified for use on concrete decks shall be compatible with
the concrete and the concrete surfacing.

E.3.11.3. Product Characteristics

 The tolerance does not have to be declared by manufacturer where it is defined by the
standards.

 The product shall be free of visible defects, as determined in accordance with relevant
British Standards

 The length, width and straightness shall be determined in accordance with relevant British
Standards

 Water tightness shall be checked as per the relevant British Standards or local standards.

 Waterproofing systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

specified procedures.

E.3.12. PLASTERING

The works under this Section shall comprise the supply of all labour, materials and equipment and
performance of all works for the plastering work to floors, walls, and ceilings in the buildings. The
work shall be performed as shown on the Drawings prepared by the Contractor or as directed by
.the Engineer and as specified herein.

E.3.12.1 Materials and Execution

E.3.12.1.1 Material

The sand to be used in the mortar shall be clean, hard, solid and durable and shall not contain
harmful amounts of dust, mud, organic materials or other objectionable matter. The grading of
the sand shall be within the following limits:

Table E.10: Grading of sand for Plastering

Classification Screen Size Percentage by Weight Passing Screen

Rendering Coat 5mm 100%

0.15mm 10% or below
Finishing Coat 2.5mm 100%
0.15mm 10% or below

The mix proportions of the cement mortar shall be as follows:

192
.Section VII E. Specifications
Table E.11: Mix Proportions for Plastering
Applying Bed Place of Application Rendering Coat Finish Coat
Cement: Sand Cement: Sand or
Concrete Floor - Cement:
1: 2 Sand: Lime
Interior wall 1: 2 1: 3 : 0.3
Ceiling 1: 2 1: 3 : 0.3
Exterior wall 1: 2 1: 3
Brick & Concrete Interior wall 1: 3 1: 3 : 0.3
Block masonry Exterior wall 1: 3 1: 3

E.3.12.1.2 Execution

The surfaces which are to receive a rendering coat shall be roughened, brushed or washed clean,
free from all laitance, scum, loose carbonate scale, loose aggregate, dirt and other foreign matters.
In the case of concrete block or brick surfaces, they shall be sufficiently and uniformly dampened
before the application of mortar.

Concrete surfaces shall be roughened and kept thoroughly dampened for 24 hours prior to
application of mortar.

Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes from the time of mixing. Retempering will not be permitted.
The rendering for tile work shall be made with 1 8 mm thick, and its surface shall be cross
scratched. In the case of mortar finish, the total thickness of rendering and-finishing coat shall be
30 mm for the floors, and 20 mm for walls and other places. When the finishing coat is applied, the
entire surface of wall or ceiling shall be finished in one operation in order to minimize joint marks.
Where expansion and control joints exist in the base structure, provision shall be made to prevent
cracking of the mortar by inserting galvanized steel expansion beads within the coating thickness
in a manner approved by the Engineer. The finished surface shall be perfectly plumb or level as
the case may be without any bulging, runs, bruises of stains.

After application of the finishing coat, the surfaces shall be kept continuously damp for not less
than 48 hours and then allowed to become thoroughly dry. Moistening shall be started as soon as
the surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent displacement or damage. Where shown on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer, metal wire lath shall be fixed to concrete block wall surfaces
and into waterproof mortar on roofs before applying mortar plaster. The metal wire lath shall be
galvanized expanded metal sheet with reinforcing ribs and shall be fixed with staples.

193
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.3.12.2 Waterproof Mortar

Waterproof mortar shall be applied to roofs, balconies, parapets, eaves, external walls and other
required places. Mortar shall conform to the technical requirements as provided for in this Section.
Waterproof admixture shall be used in the mortar in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations to effect waterproofing. Catalogues of waterproofing admixture shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his approval.

E.3.12.3 Expanding Grout

An expanding grout shall be used around any pipe passing through a concrete or masonry wall
where water may stand on one or both sides of the wall and where the pipe is not embedded in the
initially constructed structure. Such grout shall expand upon setting to effect bonding to the
concrete and the pipe. An approved expanding agent shall be used and the grout composition
shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions.

E.4. ELECTRICAL WORK

E.4.1. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

E.4.1.1. General Requirements

E.4.1.1.1. Site Environmental Conditions

Altitude of site above sea level : 500 m

Maximum ambient air temperature : 28 0C
Minimum ambient air temperature : 20 0C

194
.Section VII E. Specifications
Relative humidity - Maximum : 95%
-Annual average : 76%

E.4.1.1.2. Electrical System

MV LV
Nominal system voltage between phases 11kV 400V
Wiring system Three phase, Three phase,
Three wire Four wire
Earthing of system Solid earthing Solid earthing
TT/TN system
System frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz
Symmetrical short-circuit RMS current Verified by CEB To be calculated

E.4.1.1.3. Standards

As a rule, the electrical systems are to be in accordance with the relevant British Standards (BS)
and International Electro technical Commission (IEC) publications. All the regulations of Ceylon
Electricity Board (regular power supply authority of Sri Lanka) and other relevant authorities are
to be strictly followed.

 Electrical Installations within buildings to be according to BS 7671 : 2018: IET Wiring

Regulations, 18th edition

 Building lightning protection systems to be as per IEC 62305: 2010-12, Protection

 Against Lightning -Part 1, Part 2, Part 3 & Part 4

 Code for Lighting 2002 by CIBSE (Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers)
/ The Lighting Handbook by IESNA (Illuminating Engineering Society North America)

 Green Building Guildlines issued by UDA (Blue Green Sri Lanka First Print, January
2017).

 Electrical Equipment – Relevant IEC / British Standards (BS)

 Energy Efficiency Building Code of Sri Lanka 2020 published by Sri Lanka

 Sustainable Energy Authority

E.4.1.1.4. Selection of Equipment

When determining the type of equipment to be specified /used for the electrical systems,

195
.Section VII E. Specifications
following parameters are to be considered:

 Functional suitability for the application

 Reliability and durability
 Efficiency
 Ease of maintenance
 Suitability for ambient conditions
 Suitability in appearance
 Cost
 Country of Origin and Manufacture
 Availability of a local agent
 Warranty

The following types of equipment are therefore being advised to choose in the scheme design:

MV Power cables : XLPE insulated copper cables, armoured

LV Power cables : XLPE insulated copper cables

LV Wiring cables : PVC insulated copper cables

MV Switchgear : Metal-enclosed, Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) with vacuum

circuit breakers

LV Switchgear : Air Circuit Breakers (ACB), Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

(MCCB), Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB), Residual Current
Devices (RCD), monitoring devices, protection relays and contactors

Transformers : Cast resin dry transformers (11kV/400V)

Standby Generators : Sound attenuated canopy type, imported

Solar PV Modules : Mono crystalline, 320-350 Wp, high efficiency

Lighting fixtures Energy efficient LED luminaires for all areas depending on functional
and architectural requirements for each area

E.4.1.1.5. Conductor Size Selection

Conductor size has to be determined considering the following:

 Maximum load to be fed by the cable

 Voltage drop at the load

196
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Short-circuit fault level at the feeding point of the cable

The maximum permissible voltage drop at the load would be as per the latest IET Wiring
Regulation. Typical calculation for conductor selection shall be submitted with the proposal.

E.4.1.1.6. Electric1al Loads

The electrical load of the building premises comprises the following:

i. Electrical lighting (indoor, outdoor, street lighting & emergency lighting)

ii. Air conditioning and Ventilation

iii. Computers and other office equipment

iv. Pumps and motors

v. Lifts and escalators

vi. Kitchen/Restaurant equipment

vii. Telephone system, fire detection system, BMS, PA, CCTV, Parking/terminal management
systems and other ELV system loads

viii. Electrical vehicle charging bays

ix. ETM charging racks

x. Small power requirements for commercial and common areas

xi. Any other loads identified by the Proposer

Out of the above, all loads except air-conditioning load shall be considered as essential loads.

E.4.1.1.7. Spare/Future Expansion Capacity

All equipment including feeder cables, Switchgears and Distribution Boards shall be sized /
designed to allow for sufficient spare capacity (at least 20 %) for any unforeseen future loads.

E.4.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

The Proposer shall carry out the design, supply, delivery, erection, connection, testing and
commissioning of all the equipment and material for complete electrical works of the entire KMTT
building complex. Work to be carried out under this contract shall include, but not necessarily be
limited to the following major work/equipment and systems.

 Medium Voltage (MV) distribution system including 11kV cables, MV switchgears &
transformers

197
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Standby power supply system including diesel generators, synchronization panels, Auto
Transfer Switch (ATS) panels, power cables, fuel tanks, fuel transfer system

 Low Voltage (LV) distribution system including LV cables, all type of LV

switchgears and power factor correction capacitor banks etc.

 Final circuit (point) wirings

 Luminaires, socket outlets, industrial sockets and fans

 Lighting control systems

 Lightning Protection System

 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems

 Solar Photo Voltaic (PV) system

Lighting and socket outlet layout design shall meet the functional requirements, architectural
requirements and the energy efficient aspects.

Diesel generators shall be provided as standby power source to provide power supply to the total
load in the event of utility power failure.

Considering all the circumstances and after visiting the site, it is the Proposer's responsibility to
design and submit a proposal to achieve the Employer‟s requirements as described herein. After
making detail calculations, equipment and panel boards, cables cable management system etc
shall be selected sized appropriately.

Spaces for main equipment such as Transformers, Generators, fuel tanks, Main MV & LV
Switchgears, Distribution Boards, Consumer Units, vertical and horizontal power distribution
system and Solar PV system shall be provided by the Proposer considering safety,
accessibility and maintenance aspects. Cable trenches inside and outside of buildings and electrical
service ducts shall also be provided as per the requirement. Proposer shall plan and consider
mounting structures and any related civil works for the installation of the above mentioned
electrical equipment. The detailed calculation for selection of equipment shall be submitted and
obtained the Engineer‟s approval before purchasing the equipment.

The Employer expect to integrate green building features in the building complex as per UDA green
building guidelines. Hence the electrical design shall be carried out to maximize the green features
and energy efficiency within the premises.

The given format for the BOQ shall be followed by the Proposer in submitting the price proposal.

198
.Section VII E. Specifications
Proposer shall include the cost for all other necessary work (which has not been specified in the
given BOQ format/ER and the necessity of those items have been identified by the proposer)
under the “Miscellaneous” item. Rate breakdowns with detailed descriptions shall be provided for
all items included under the “Miscellaneous” item.

E.4.3 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

E.4.3.1 Regular Power Supply System

Regular power supply to the building shall be obtained from Ceylon Electricity Board (CEB)
within the premises and an appropriate location shall be proposed for the CEB substation by the
Proposer and agree with CEB.

Proposer shall have the sole responsibility to select the appropriate capacity of transformers and
number of required transformers as per their calculations. Transformers shall be selected so that in
the event of failure of one transformer, others can take the essential loads of the building. Loads
considered as essential loads is given under the previous chapter “Electrical Loads”.
Transformers and other equipment proposed for the installation has to be standardised as
economically as possible. The preliminar y design with sufficient calculations, schematic
diagrams and room arrangements shall be submitted along with the Proposal.

Prior to start cost ructions, detail design calculations and drawings shall be submit ted to
the Engineer for approval.

The total power requirement as estimated by the contractor shall be submitted to the employer for
obtaining the utility power supply from Ceylon Electricity Board. Contractor shall co- ordinate
with Ceylon Electricity Board for obtaining the utility connection. Total CEB supply to the building
will be metered at one point.

If the estimated pow er demand exceeds 1000 kVA, C EB will provide a HT connection
and underground 11kV cables from the CEB substation to the receiving 11kV switchgear in the
transformer room shall be installed by the contractor. Also, the civil construction of the CEB

substati on shall be carrie d out by the Contractor. Employer‟s receiving 11kV switchgear
panel shall be provided by the contractor to control the MV power supply and to feed the individual
power transformers with 11kV power supply. This 11kV switchgear panel is not belonging to CEB
but is a Client‟s property. 11kV supply (MV) has to be stepped down to low voltage (LV) 400V
to feed lighting, small power and other loads.

If the estimated power demand less than 1000 kVA, CEB will provide a 400V, LV bulk supply
connection with CEB own transformer and meter panel. The Contractor is responsible for the

199
.Section VII E. Specifications
internal LV power distribution system within the premises from the CEB meters. Also, the civil
works of CEB transformer and meter room shall be carried out by the Contractor.

E.4.3.2 Standby Power Supply System

Diesel generators shall be provided as a standby backup power supply source to the load in the
event of a regular power failure. Total generator capacity shall be sufficient to cater the full load
of the building complex. Careful attention has to be drawn to noise controlling to meet the Central
Environmental Authority (CEA) regulations and the exhaust disposal of the generators away from
the buildings.

E.4.3.3 Emergency Power Supply System

Emergency power shall be provided for the escape route lighting, selected lighting in other areas
(toilet areas, stair cases, ramps, lift lobbies) and specified essential loads of the building.

Emergency power shall be provided using direct on-line type Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
System. Minimum back-up time shall be provided as per the fire protection requirements.

E.4.4 MEDIUM VOLTAGE (MV) DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

If the estimated power demand ex ceeds 1000 kVA, C EB will provide a HT connection
and the proposer shall design the MV distribution system. Therefore, specifications in this
section will apply only if the estimated power demand exceeds 1000 kVA.

Medium voltage distribution system shall contain incoming MV cables, MV switchgears and

11kV/400V transformers. Contractor shall design, supply, delivery, erection, connection, testing
and commissioning of all the equipment and materials. Contractors shall incorporate required
provisions for the installations (trenches or any other cable management system, plinths) in the
designs and drawings (architectural and structural).

The calculations for selection of major equipment shall be submitted with the proposal and
Engineer‟s approval shall be obtained before purchasing the equipment.

E.4.4.1 Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) Panels

Scope of work includes design, manufacture, test at manufacturer‟s factory (FAT), supply to the
site, install, test at site, commission and maintain during defect liability period of 11kV Gas
Insulated Switchboard as specified here with necessary measuring, control & protection equipment.
All equipment supplied shall be brand new and best of their respective kinds and shall be of the
class most suitable for the purpose for which they are intended. The scope of contractor includes

200
.Section VII E. Specifications
all associated items / sensors / interlocks required for smooth and efficient working of system and
required during installation, testing & commissioning. All such items are deemed to have been
included in the contractor‟s scope.

Safety interlocks, necessary to ensure maintenance operation shall be provided. Design shall be
type tested for Seismic conditions. Type test certificates shall be in the name of the panel builder.

ISO 9001 Quality Assurance System shall be followed in the manufacture of Gas Insulated
Switchgear. Contractor shall furnish documentary evidence (Complete Document) that he has
obtained ISO 9001 Certification for the manufacturing plant. Proposals without the proof of ISO
9001 Certification will be rejected.

E.4.4.1.1. Type Test Certificates

Type tests shall have been carried out on the similar switchgear components in accordance with
the relevant IEC standards preferably in an independent test laboratory during currently accepted
time duration for corresponding type tests.

The performance of the components of the switchgear shall be substantiated by test data relevant
to the particular designs offered.

E.4.4.1.2. Routine Tests

All the routine tests as specified in relevant IEC shall be carried out at the manufacturer's
Workshops on 11kV GIS panel, witnessed by the Employer‟s representative and Engineer‟s
representatives.
Contractor shall notify the engineer thirty (30) calendar days in advance to witness the factory
performance test. All the costs of Employer‟s representative and Engineer‟s representatives for
witnessing the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. All the test shall be carried out as per the
following standards.

Complete Bay IEC 62271-200

Circuit Breaker IEC 62271-100
Disconnector & Earth Switch IEC 62271-102
Current Transformers IEC 61869-2, 61869-6
Voltage Transformers IEC 60186 & 61869-3

E.4.4.2 Dry Type Transformers

Proposer shall design, manufacture, test at manufacturers factory (FAT), supply to the site, install,
test and commission 11/0.4 kV, cast resin insulated dry type distribution transformer(s)

201
.Section VII E. Specifications
with required spares, tools and accessories. Transformer(s) shall be provided with an enclosure for
indoor installation.

The HV windings will be connected to 11kV switch gears through 11kV XLPE cables. LV winding
will be connected to Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS) through 600/1000V XLPE cables.

Design shall be type tested for Seismic conditions with following characteristics.

Type : Cast resin encapsulated winding, 3 phase units

Enclosure : Sheet steel or other approved metal (Natural
ventilated)
Degree of protection : IP21
Type of cooling : AN
Rated frequency : 50Hz
Rated voltages
o Higher voltage winding : 11 kV
o Lower voltage winding : 400 V
Tapings (in HV winding)
o Range : + 5.0 % to -5.0 %
o Steps : 2.5 %
o Type : Manual, off circuit links
Vector group : Dyn 11
Impedance : As specified by the manufacturer
Sound pressure level ≤ 62 dB(A) at 1m from the enclosure
The transformers/accessories shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC
60076 part 11, other relevant parts of IEC 60076 and other publications quoted in these Standards.
Also, ISO 9001 Quality Assurance System shall be followed by the manufacturer. Proposer shall
furnish documentary evidence (Complete Document) that he has obtained ISO

9001 Certification for the manufacturing plant.

E.4.4.2.1. Testing

Contractor shall notify the engineer in advance to witness the Factory Acceptance Tests
(FAT). All the costs of the Employer‟s representative and Engineer‟s representatives for
witnessing the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. All the routine tests as specified in IEC

60726 shall be carried out at the manufacturer's workshops on each transformer witnessed by the
Engineer and Employer.

E.4.4.3 Medium Voltage (MV) Power Cables

202
.Section VII E. Specifications
Scope of work includes design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning at site of 11kV
XLPE insulated power cables from CEB substation to the MV receiving panel (11kV switchgear)
of the KMTT premises and from 11kV MV switchgear to power transformers including cable
termination using heat shrinks terminations.

Underground feeder shall be installed from CEB substation to the MV receiving panel and outgoing
feeders from the MV switchgear to the transformers shall be installed in a cable trench. Location
of the CEB substation shall be decided by the Proposer. Appropriate cable sizes shall be selected
by the Proposer and it shall be clearly mentioned in the schematic diagrams to be submitted with
Proposal. Cable selection calculations shall also be submitted with the Proposal.

ISO 9001 Quality Assurance System shall be followed in manufacturing the XLPE insulated
underground cables. Contractor shall furnish documentary evidence (Complete Document) ISO
9001 Certification is available for the manufacturing plant. Proposals of contractors without the
proof of ISO 9001 Certification will be rejected.

The cables shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with IEC 60502 and the
specific requirements set out below. The Cables shall be designed to operate at the rated voltage
(System highest voltage) of 12kV. The conductors shall be screened in accordance with IEC 60502.
The conductor screen shall be Extruded layer of Semi-conducting cross- linkable compound type
(taped conductor screening not acceptable). The extruded layer shall be continuous and shall
cover the surface of the conductor completely. The nominal insulation thickness as per BS
6622:2007 is 3.4mm and maximum resistivity of the conductor screen shall not exceed 500 Ω.m at
900C.

Maximum design electrical stress shall be such that purity of raw materials, manufacturing
conditions and ageing of cables has been taken into account. Maximum design stress shall not be
more than 5kV/mm.

The conductors shall be stranded (Class 2) circular compacted Plain Annealed Copper
Conductors in accordance with BS EN / IEC 60228.

E.4.4.3.1. Type Test Certificates

Certified copies of type test reports shall be submitted for the approval of Engineer/Consultant on
tests conducted previously on similar 11kV cables. Type tests shall have been carried out on the
similar cables in accordance with the relevant BS / IEC standards preferably in an
independent test laboratory during currently accepted time duration for corresponding type tests.
If acceptable type test reports are not available, contractor shall carry out the type test in

203
.Section VII E. Specifications
accordance with the applicable standards and show acceptable results.

E.4.4.3.2. Inspection and Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)

The selected contractor shall make necessary arrangements for inspection by the Employer‟s
representative and Engineer‟s representatives and to carry out in his presence necessary
Sample/Acceptance tests of the cables offered in compliance with the standard specified.

All the routine tests as specified in relevant IEC shall be carried out at the manufacturer's workshops
on 11kV cables and submitted to Engineer/Consultant who visits for the factory tests.

Contractor shall notify the Engineer thirty (30) calendar days in advance to witness the
factory performance test. All the costs of the Employer‟s representative and Engineer‟s
representatives for witnessing the tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

E.4.5 LOW VOLTAGE (LV) DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

LV distribution system shall include premises Main Distribution Board (MDB), Sub Main
Distribution Boards (SMDBs) for each individual building and major services, Floor Distribution
Boards (FDBs) for each floor of the buildings, Distribution Boards (DBs) / Consumer Units (CUs),
low voltage cables, and final circuit wirings.

In the design, all required protections (against over current, short circuit current, earth leakage
current & surge protection etc.) shall be provided up to the final circuits in the distribution system
as per the latest IET wiring regulations. Selected contractor shall submit the detailed design
including calculations and drawings for the prior approval after the awarding of the contract.

Proposer shall submit the schematic diagram of the entire LV power distribution system with the
Proposal.

E.4.5.1 Main Distribution Board (MDB) and Sub Main Distribution Boards
(SMDBs)

A Main Distribution Board (MDB) shall be provided for the entire premises in the Main Electrical
Panel Room for control and distribution of low voltage electrical power to the individual building
loads. Suitable location / space for the MDB shall be proposed by the Proposers and the MDB shall
be designed as per their calculations. Sub Main Distribution Board (SMDBs) shall be provided for
each of the separate buildings in the premises and for the larger individual loads.

204
.Section VII E. Specifications
The MDB and SMDBs shall be of the rigid, freestanding, metal cubicle type, totally
enclosed, dust and vermin protected and factory fabricated in compliance with BS 5486 (IEC

60439) and this specification where applicable. Form of internal separation shall be Form 4b as
specified in IEC 60439-1. The Panels shall be of type tested design. Design shall be type tested for
Seismic conditions. Type test certificates shall be in the name of the panel builder.

MDB and SMDBs shall include Air Circuit Breakers (ACBs)/Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
(MCCBs), power analysers, indicator lamps, bus bars, current transformers, auxiliary fuses,
protection relays, surge protective devices small wiring, interconnections and other accessories.
Sufficient space shall be provided in the panels for future expansions.

Connection facilities for all incoming and outgoing cables shall be designed appropriately by the
Contractor. Those details shall be provided in the single line diagrams/schematic diagrams/general
arrangements. Bus bars shall be of tin plated copper, and purity of copper shall be 99.99%. The
rating of main bus bar and fault current rating at the main bus bar shall be selected as per the
contractor‟s calculations.

All the outgoing feeders shall be metered using digital power analyzers and shall be able to integrate
to with the proposed Building Management System (BMS).

Proposer shall approximately size the MDB and SMDBs. Drawings shall be submitted with the
Proposal along with the main panel room equipment arrangement, incoming and outgoing feeder
details etc.

E.4.5.2 Floor Distribution Board (FDB)

Floor Distribution Boards shall be provided for each floor in each building to distribute power to
each floor via cables or other way (i.e. bus risers) from the respective SMDB. FDB shall be located
in an electrical panel room provided in each floor.

FDB shall include incoming and outgoing Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCBs), power
analysers, indicator lamps, bus bars, current transformers, auxiliary fuses, protection relays, surge
protective devices, small wiring, interconnections and other accessories. Sufficient space
(spare breakers and free space for spare breakers) shall be provided in the FDB for future
expansions.

The FDB shall be of the rigid, freestanding or wall mounted, metal cubicle type, totally enclosed,
dust and vermin protected and factory fabricated in compliance with BS 5486 (IEC

60439) and this specification where applicable. Form of internal separation shall be Form 3b as

205
.Section VII E. Specifications
specified in IEC 60439-1.

Critical outgoing feeders shall be metered using digital power analyzers and shall be able to
integrate to with the proposed Building Management System (BMS).

E.4.5.3 Distribution Board (SDB) / Consumer Units (CUs)

Distribution Boards (DBs)/Consumer Units (CUs) shall be wall surface mounted/

freestanding, metal cubicle type, totally enclosed, dust and vermin protected and factory fabricated
in compliance with BS 5486 (IEC 60439). DBs/CUs shall be fed via the FDBs in each floor and
separate units shall be provided for each individual section. All the final point wirings shall be
connected to the DBs/CUs.

DBs/CUs shall include incoming MCCBs/MCBs, outgoing MCBs, RCCBs, indicator lamps, bus
bars, current transformers, auxiliary fuses, protection relays, surge protective devices, small
wiring, interconnections and other accessories. Sufficient space 40% (spare breakers and free
space for spare breakers) shall be provided for future expansions.

E.4.5.4 Low Voltage (LV) Switchgear Accessories

E.4.5.4.1. Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)

ACBs shall comply with standards IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2 and be of type tested (test
certificates shall be submitted) and reputable make. Utilization category of ACB shall be Category
B. Air circuit breakers shall have a rated operational voltage of 690V AC (50Hz). All
circuit breakers shall be fully tropicalized as standard. Air circuit breakers shall be suitable for
isolation according to IEC 60947-1 and –2 for the rated insulation voltage.

Circuit breakers shall be of the automatic, metal clad, withdrawable isolating, removable
type having provision for safe maintenance. Provision shall be made to padlock the circuit
breaker in the isolated/ withdrawn position and to padlock the automatic shutters covering the
live contacts when the circuit breaker is removed from its housing. Interlocks shall be
provided to prevent movement of the circuit breaker within the housing when it is in the
'closed' or 'service' condition and automatic shutters shall be provided to cover all live
contacts when the circuit breaker is isolated or withdrawn or is removed from its housing.

The operating mechanism shall be of the Open / Closed /Open stored-energy spring type and shall
be of the trip-free, spring assisted motorized closing and opening design. Interlocking mechanism
shall be built in as a standard feature to prevent the breaker from closing when the spring is not
fully charged. Mechanical indicators shall be incorporated to indicate breaker OPEN,
CLOSED and TRIPPED status, and spring CHARGED and DISCHARGED.

206
.Section VII E. Specifications
Shunt trips and other required accessories shall be provided for the breaker. Auxiliary
switches shall be fitted to provide illuminated indication of circuit breaker ON/OFF status.

The ACB control unit shall offer the following protection functions as standard:

 Long-time (LT) protection with an adjustable current setting and time delay

 Short-time (ST) protection with an adjustable pick-up and time delay

 Instantaneous (INST) protection with an adjustable pick-up and an OFF

 Current and time-delay settings shall be indicated in ampere respectively on a digital

display.

 Earth-fault protection with an adjustable pick-up and time delay

Current rating and the rated short circuit capacity shall be selected by the Contractor. Calculations
shall be submitted after the award of contract under the “Schedule for Selection of Circuit
Breakers”.

E.4.5.4.2. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)

MCCB shall comply with IEC 60947-2 and be of type tested and reputable make. MCCB shall
be of current limiting type and shall have a rated operational voltage of 690V AC (50Hz).
All circuit breakers shall be fully tropicalized as standard. MCCBs shall suitable for isolation
according to IEC 60947-1 and –2 for the rated insulation voltage.

The operating mechanism shall be of the quick-made, quick-break, trip-free type with the speed of
operation independent of the operator. The mechanism shall be designed to operate all poles
simultaneously during opening, closing and tripping conditions. The breaker shall be operated by
a toggle unless otherwise specified in the schedules, drawings or bill of quantities.

The breaker shall be provided with thermal bi-metallic elements for an inverse time-current trip
characteristic to protect against sustained overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip elements
for short circuits protection. Thermal trips and magnetic trips shall be adjustable. A single
adjustment shall ensure the setting of all poles in a multi-pole breaker simultaneously.

MCCBs above 800A shall be provided with a micro-processor control unit for tripping. The CB
control unit shall offer the following protection functions as standard:

 Long-time (LT) protection with an adjustable current setting and time delay;

 Short-time (ST) protection with an adjustable pick-up and time delay;

 Instantaneous (INST) protection with an adjustable pick-up and an OFF position.

207
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Current and time-delay settings shall be indicated in amperes and seconds respectively on
a digital display.

 Earth-fault protection with an adjustable pick-up and time delay

Current rating and the rated short circuit capacity shall be selected by the Contractor and the
calculations shall be submitted with the Proposal under the “Schedule for Selection of Circuit
Breakers”.

E.4.5.4.3. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)

The Miniature Circuit Breaker shall be a compact electro-mechanical device for making, breaking
and disconnecting a circuit in normal conditions and protecting circuit in abnormal conditions such
as over-current and short circuit. The circuit breaker time current operating characteristics shall
conform to type C, table 7 of IEC 60898-1 (shall apply for all office areas).

The Miniature Circuit Breaker shall be of wire in, wire out type and basically comprise the
following features.

 Independent Manually operated latched switching mechanism with trip free release

 Arc-quenching chamber

 Overload protection

 Instantaneous Short circuit protection

 Safe Disconnection of load from the source

The single phase MCB shall be of Single or two pole type suitable for operating on 230V supply
and three phase Miniature Circuit Breaker shall be of three or four pole type suitable for operating
on 400 V supply. Minimum short circuit capacity of all type of MCBs shall not be less than 10kA.

The manufacturer shall possess ISO 9001:2015 Quality Assurance Certification valid throughout
the delivery period of this Proposal, for the manufacture of Miniature Circuit Breakers for the
plant where the Miniature Circuit Breaker is being manufactured. The Proposer shall furnish
a copy of the ISO certificate certified as true copy of the original by the manufacturer, along with
the offer.

Type Test Certificates conforming to IEC 60898-1 shall be provided for the Engineer‟s
approval.

E.4.5.4.4. Residual Current Devices (RCD) & Earth Leakage/Fault Protection Devices

RCD shall disconnect a circuit whenever it detects that the electric current is not balanced between

208
.Section VII E. Specifications
the energized conductor and the return neutral conductor. They shall provide protection against
earth leakage currents and earth fault currents. The tripping current shall be

30 mA/100mA as specified. RCD shall be super immunized type.

RCD shall be conforming to IEC 60755. Each RCD shall consist of a current transformer, a tripping
coil with contact assembly, main supply contacts, ON/OFF switch, a test button and a trip-free
mechanism, all mounted on robust body of all insulated material. RCD shall be suitable for
operation on a single phase/three phase, 50 Hz supply and shall give trouble-free service in the
locally prevailing climatic conditions.

Earth Leakage, Fault Protection Devices (ELRs/EFRs) shall be provided in the up-stream
distribution boards (MDB, SMDB/FDB levels) and the co-ordination between protection devices
shall be considered in the design.

E.4.5.4.5. Power Analyzers

Digital power analyzers shall be provided in the SMDBs and/or three phase DBs with current
transformers, potential transformers and all required accessories to monitor the following
parameters.

 Active power (kW) and reactive power (kVAR) - total and per phase

 Current (A) – 3 phases and neutral

 Voltage (V) – phase to phase and phase to neutral

 Frequency (Hz)

 Apparent power (kVA)

 Power factor

 Active energy (kWh)

 Reactive energy (kVAR)

 Maximum active power demand (kW)

Accuracy of multi-function power meter shall be not less than the following.

 Energy and power accuracy: 2%

 Current and voltage accuracy : 0.5%

All s required for Power Analyzers shall be provided.

209
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.4.5.4.6. Communication

Communication facility all power analyzers shall be compatible with the proposed Building

Management System (BMS).

E.4.5.5 Power Factor Correction Capacitor Banks

Power Factor Correction Capacitor Banks shall be provided to the system to reduce the Reactive
Power fed to the system by the utility. Capacitor Banks shall be connected to the MDB, SMDBs
as well as for each large individual and/or group of electrical equipment to acquire an additional
credit which is to enhance the active power handling capacity of the long-run sub-main
distributions cables.

The PFC shall be assembled in an independent cubicle. A number of capacitor units shall be
combined to capacitor banks. The PFC shall be designed to correct the total power factor in between
0.98 lag and unity and the calculations for the selection of capacitor banks shall be submitted.

Capacitors with suitable harmonic suppression detuned series reactors shall be offered. PFC shall
be automatically operating type. The PFC shall be microprocessor controlled type based on solid
state switching. The power factor shall be always lagging.

The power factor control panel enclosures shall be floor mounted type made of 1.5mm sheet steel
with a minimum degree of protection of IP 54 and shall include all necessary internal connections
and bus bars, insulators and other fittings.

Capacitor bank shall provide communication facility to integrate with proposed BMS.

E.4.5.6 Low Voltage (LV) Power Cables

Cables shall be installed in properly designed/planned cable management system (cable tray/ladder,
PVC compartment trunkings etc.). If cables are supposed to lay underground, cables shall be
armoured cables and laying shall be as per the standard practice. Concrete cable trenches shall
be provided as specified under cable management systems.

Feeder cables shall be of four (4) core, copper conductor, XLPE or PVC insulated, PVC
sheathed, 600/1000V grade complying with BS 5467 or IEC 60502.

Conductor size of the cable shall be decided by considering the total allowable voltage drop in
the cable and current rating considering all correction factors and future expansions.

End terminations of all feeder cables shall be properly installed (tightly fixed to the circuit breaker
terminals) including sleeves (with standard colour code to identify the three phases & neutral),
copper cable lugs and cable glands. Cable joints are not be allowed in between.

210
.Section VII E. Specifications
Suitably selected Fire Resistance (FR) cables complying with BS 6387:2013, BS 8519:2020 &
BS 8491:2008 shall be used to feed power to emergency lighting systems, fire pumps, fire lifts and
any other essential critical load which are to be in operation under fire conditions.

E.4.5.7 Low Voltage (LV) Small Power System

Power socket outlets of single phase 230V, 13A switched shuttered flush mounting type
complying with BS 1363 shall be provided. The final locations of all socket outlets shall be agreed
with the Interior Designer/Architect/Engineer, during the detail design stage. Power outlets
(industrial sockets) shall also be provided for electric vehicle charging bays in the parking areas
and all other necessary locations.

Office areas shall be provided with a suitable method to get the connectivity for power, data and
communication to the working tables in the middle of the office. Number of socket outlets
provided in the office areas shall be sufficient for intended occupancy of the particular area. (At
least 2 Nos. 13A socket outlets shall be provided for a one workstation with a computer. Only 6-
8 computers shall be connected to a single Residual Current Device (RCD) to prevent from
nuisance tripping.

For the other areas, sufficient amount of socket outlets shall be provided considering the occupancy
and the power requirement of equipment to be installed. Also the final arrangement shall
be designed considering the requirements of other building services such as fire protection &
detection system, IT services, air conditioning system and building management system etc.

The wiring for 13A socket outlets shall be carried out using PVC insulated, PVC sheathed, copper
conductor single core cables. Type of circuit shall be radial or ring as per the Proposer‟s design.
The minimum conductor size to be used for socket outlet circuits shall be 2.5 mm2 and 1.5 mm2
for lighting circuits and all lighting circuits shall be provided with 2.5 mm2 earth conductor.

E.4.5.8 Electrical Lighting System

The lighting design has to provide a good general ambient level of lighting as well as special task
and effect lighting. Proposer shall have the sole responsibility to design the lighting systems in the
entire building premises as per their calculations and software simulations. All the calculations and
software simulation details shall be submitted along with the proposal.

For the lighting design, international standards and design guidelines for public transport terminals
and CPTED methods (Crime Prevention through Environmental Design) shall be followed. Also
the design shall be complied with the CIBSE standards & Sri Lanka Standard Code of Practice for
the Energy Efficient Buildings. Required illumination levels given below shall be referred for the

211
.Section VII E. Specifications
lighting design and the appropriate type of energy efficient luminaires shall be proposed
accordingly.

Table E.12: Design Illumination Levels

Area Illumination Level (Lux)

Terminal Entrance and Exits 250

Driving Lanes 75
Driving Lanes – at Ramps 150
Public Roads & Streets ( outside the terminal) 30
Bus/Car Park (Indoor) 100
Bus/Car Park (Outdoor) 50
Passenger Entrances 150
Passenger Concourses 150
Passenger waiting area & waiting rooms 150
Lounges 300
Ticketing counters 500
Offices 400-500
Public Canteens 150
Restaurants 200
Food preparation/Cooking 500
Lifts 150
Escalators 200
Lift Lobbies 200
Staircases 150
Corridors 200
Toilets 200
Store rooms 200
Pump rooms, AC plant rooms, Generator and 200
transformer rooms, Electrical panel rooms
Canopied Areas 150
Commercial areas 300

Energy efficient type LED luminaries shall be provided for lighting at all indoor and outdoor area.
The luminaires at each area shall be selected to match with the architectural features of the location

212
.Section VII E. Specifications
where the lighting fixture is intended to be used. A schedule of proposed light fitting types shall
also be submitted with the Proposal.

Each individual component of luminaire such as LED chip, driver, optics and heat sink shall be
properly selected and placed within the system. There shall be good convective air flow around
the heat sink and LED chip. The driver or the control gear shall be constant current integrated type.
Life time of lamps shall be greater than 30,000 burning hours. All type of luminaries shall be in
accordance with SLS 1639 Part 1 & 2.

All the lamps/fittings must be reputed & proven European or equivalent brands, with
minimum efficacy of 90 lm/W (If it is not specified), must be supplied from their original
manufacturer through the authorized local agents with a comprehensive warrantee of minimum
02 years. 10 % spares of each type of luminaire shall be handed over with the building handing
over.

Engineer‟s approval shall be obtained for light fitting samples before purchasing them by
submitting technical and architectural catalogues. After obtaining the approval, one sample of each
type of luminaire shall be subjected to test at any of following local test laboratories by the
contractor and test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer‟s approval before purchasing.
In case the test reports do not meet the specifications of the manufacturer, the particular samples
will not be accepted and contractor shall submit alternative light fittings for the replacement.

 Regional Centre for Lighting (RCL) under Ceylon Electricity Board (CEB)

 National Engineering Research and Development Centre of Sri Lanka

E.4.5.8.1. (NERDC) Applicable Standards

 IEC 62031:2018 LED Modules for General Lighting - Safety Specifications

 IEC 62717:2019 LED Modules for General Lighting - Performance Requirements

 SLS 1639 Part 1 Specification for LED Modules for General Lighting – Safety
Requirements

 SLS 1639 Part 2 Specification for LED Modules for General Lighting – Performance
Requirements

 IESNA LM-79-08 Approved Method : Electrical and Photometric Measurement of Solid

State Lighting Products

 IESNA LM-80-08 Approved Method for Lumen Maintenance Testing of LED Light
Sources

213
.Section VII E. Specifications
 IEC 62384- DC or AC Supplied Electronic Control Gear of LED Modules –
Performance Requirements

The wiring for electrical lighting fixtures and ceiling fans shall be carried out using PVC
insulated, PVC sheathed, copper conductor single core cables. The minimum conductor size to
be used for lighting circuits shall be 1.5 mm2 and all lighting circuits shall be provided with 2.5
mm2 earth conductor.

E.4.5.8.2. Lighting Control System

The proposed lighting system shall be able to control (dimmable, on & off) with the day light gain
through glass walls at all possible areas for the maximum energy efficiency. Also, the entire indoor
lighting system (including all terminals, underpasses etc.) shall be day light sensor and 24 hrs timer
operated type. Those lighting circuits shall be integrated to the Building Management System
(BMS).

It is Contractor’s responsibility to suitably select a control strategy/ strategies based on the areas
and the usage of each area. And also Contractor shall select and supply all the required components
to control the lighting systems such as light fittings, sensors, switches, controllers, cabling ect. A
facility to by-pass the controller system shall also be provided to use when it is required.

Documents incorporating the details of proposed lighting control strategy, Electrical Power Wiring
diagrams, Control Wiring Diagrams, data sheets of all the components of the lighting control
systems with other documents prepared for the green aspects of the building shall be submitted for
the review.

ON/OFF switches for lighting/controlling devices shall be provided at appropriate convenient

locations and number of switches shall be selected to meet Green guidelines.

E.4.5.8.3. Emergency Lighting

Adequate emergency lighting circuits shall be provided as per the fire regulations to cover the
escape route lighting under the emergency conditions. Those circuits shall be originated from the
separate Distribution Board (DB)/Consumer Unit (CU) for emergency power fed via a UPS
system. At the locations where the UPS can‟t be provided maintained type emergency luminaires
shall be provided. All emergency wirings from each respective CU/DB shall be carried out using
properly sized fire rated (FR) cables complying with BS 6387.

Design of this system shall coordinated with the fire protection & detection system design team.
Back-up time shall also be decided as per the fire requirements. Contractor shall clearly indicate
the lights to be controlled via emergency power supplies (via UPSs and maintained type) in the

214
.Section VII E. Specifications
lighting layout and wiring drawings.

E.4.5.8.4. Outdoor Lighting

Street lighting and security lighting system shall be provided for the building complex considering
architectural and functional requirements. Light fittings shall be weather proof and made of non-
corrosive materials (die-cast aluminium/Stainless Steel). Their mounting accessories shall be
properly protected against corrosion (Galvanized Iron/Stainless Steel). Special attention shall be
taken in selecting outdoor equipment considering the building environmental conditions.

The entire outdoor lighting system shall be photo sensor and/or timer operated type. Also, shall
be able to integrate with the BMS system. LED fittings with inbuilt Surge Protective Devices
(SPDs) are recommended. Lighting design shall be carried out using a simulation software and the
simulation details shall be submitted.

Possibilities of introducing renewable energy sources (solar) to power up the street lighting are
encouraged and shall be proposed wherever it is appropriate.

 Street Light Pole - The Octagonal Poles shall be designed to withstand the maximum
wind speed as per BS EN 875. The top loading i.e. area and the weight of fixtures are

 to be considered to calculate maximum deflection of the pole and the same shall meet the
requirement of BS: 5649 Part VI 1982.

 Octagonal Poles HT Steel Conforming to grade S355JO. Foundation Bolts EN.8 grade
welding the welding shall be carried out confirming to approve procedures duly qualified
by third party inspection agency. Pole sections The Octagonal Poles shall be in single
section. There shall not be any circumferential weld joint.

 Pole shaft shall be adequately strengthened at the location of the door to compensate

 for the loss in section. Door opening the octagonal Poles shall have door of approximate
500 mm length at the elevation of 500 mm from the Base plate. The door shall be vandal
resistance and shall be weather proof to ensure safety of inside connections. The door shall
be flush with the exterior surface and shall have suitable locking. 20A, 4P MCCB with
connectors and earthing terminals shall be provided inside the pole.

 Galvanization - The poles shall be hot dip galvanized as per BS EN ISO 1461

 standards with average coating thickness of 70 micron. The galvanizing shall be done in
single dipping.

215
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Installation Method - All octagonal pole shafts shall be provided with the rigid flange
plate of suitable thickness with provision for fixing 4 foundation bolts. This baseplate shall
be fillet welded to the pole shaft at two locations i.e. from inside and outside. The
welding shall be done as per qualified MMAW process approved by Third Party Inspection
agency. The Octagonal Poles shall be bolted on a foundation with a set of four foundation
bolts for greater rigidity.

 Bracket for street light fittings - The brackets shall be made of specified size heavy
duty pipe approx. 1.4 M long, bent at the center at an angle of 120 degree, with necessary
holding brackets, hold fasts etc. with special reducer at end to accommodate type of street
light fitting to be fixed. The bracket shall have one coat of anti-corrosion paint before
dispatch to site and two coats of approved make and shade of enamel paint.

 Earthing Arrangement - Suitable earthing arrangement shall be provide for the street
lighting poles and at least earth electrodes shall be installed one after the other pole.

Apart from the street lighting landscaping lighting system within the premises shall be provided as
per the Architectural requirements. All the outdoor wirings shall be carried out via a separate
Distribution Board using underground armoured power cables direct buried and through GI
conduits for mechanical protection as per the requirement and all the termination points shall be
water-proofed. Outdoor type Feeder Pillar units shall also be used if required.

E.4.5.9 Electricity Metering

E.4.5.9.1. Utility Metering

CEB Electricity supply to the building complex is metered at medium voltage (11kV). Only one
electricity bill will be issued by CEB for the electricity consumption of each month. Tariff
that will be applied is Bulk Supply Tariff which comprises of charges for electrical energy
(kWh) consumption and maximum demand (kVA). Electricity service connection charges are not
included to the Contractor‟s scope. However, the contractor shall provide all the
facilities/provisions as per the requirements of the utility provider and shall coordinate with
them until the bulk supply connection is obtained.

E.4.5.9.2. Sub Metering

Within the building complex power distribution, electricity metering (internal) facility shall be

216
.Section VII E. Specifications
provided for each separate buildings (at SMDBs), every floor of the each building (in FDB levels),
at large individual loads and all rentable commercial spaces. Facility for remote monitoring/reading
of electricity meters from a single place shall also be provided. Thus these electricity meters shall
be of electronic type capable of metering multi functions and shall be essentially connected with
the Building Management System (BMS).

E.4.5.10 Earthing System

A complete and effective system earthing has to be provided for the building, in accordance with
the IET Wiring Regulations. The exposed metal parts of all electrical equipment shall be bonded
to earth.

All metallic components of services including water mains, water treatment systems, fire and
sprinkler mains etc. entering or leaving the respective building shall be effectively bonded to the
main earth bar.

All equipotential bonding conductors shall be insulated, the insulation being coloured green/yellow.
The electrical earthing system has to be interconnected with the lightning protection earth
termination system.

E.4.5.11 Cable Management System

Cable Management System shall include cable trenches, heavy duty GI pipes for road crossings,
vertical cable ladders, horizontal cable trays, PVC/GI conduits, multi-compartment PVC trunkings
and raised floor systems (if any). Size of the systems shall be designed providing the 60% of free
space inside the system after installing the cables.

Layout drawings shall be submitted after the tender awarding and shop drawings shall be submitted
for the prior approval in the construction stage.

E.4.5.11.1. Cable Trenches

Concrete cable trenches with concrete cover slabs shall be provided for following cable
installations.

 11kV Utility Cables within the entire premises and crossing the premises (if any)

 11kV incoming cables from utility substation to the Transformer room

 From the Transformer room to Main Electrical Panel Room

 From the Generator room to Main Electrical Panel Room

217
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Main Electrical Panel Room to all the buildings/zones of the premises as per design of the
proposer

 For outdoor lighting and street lighting

 For any other service or to any location as per the design

The structural design of cable trenches shall be suitable for handling heavy vehicle movements. At
the locations where the trench crosses canals or bridges, suitable size of GI pipes shall be provided.
Cable trench layout shall also be submitted with the proposal.

E.4.5.11.2. Cable Trays and Ladders

Metallic systems shall be made of hot dipped Galvanized Iron (GI) or epoxy powder coated zinc
coated sheet metal depending on the location to be installed and shall comply with BS EN
61537:2007 Cable Management – Cable Tray and Cable Ladder Systems/NEC Article 318, NEMA
VE 1, and NEMA FG 1 and follow safe work practices as described in NFPA 70E. Samples of
each item with fixing accessories shall be subjected to the prior approval.

E.4.5.12 Testing of the Installation

After completing the installation work, Testing of the entire electrical installation of the building
shall be carried out by the Contractor. Test report/certificate as required by latest IET Wiring
Regulations and requirements of IEC 62305 and certified by a Chartered Electrical Engineer (CEB
registered) shall be submitted. Test reports/certificates shall be submitted per each building
separately and for the total electrical installation. Test reports shall be acceptable to Ceylon
Electricity Board (CEB).

Contractor shall energize the building after testing and make arrangements to commission of the
electrical installation. Contractor shall co-ordinate with CEB for obtaining the incoming power
connection to the building complex. Commissioning of main equipment such as transformers,
generators, main panels, UPS systems, lightning protection system and solar PV systems shall be
arranged to witness by the Employer and the Engineer.

E.4.6 STANDBY POWER SYSTEM

Scope of work includes design, supply, delivery to the site install, testing and commissioning of
prime rated brand new diesel generators (canopy type) and accessories as an alternative (Stand-by)
power supply for the building complex. If it is proposed open type generators due to some restricted
spacing issue, then the generator room shall be sound proofed.

The standby power supply shall be designed by the Proposer to cater the total power requirement

218
.Section VII E. Specifications
of the premises (as per the calculations of the Proposer). Night time loads and weekend/holiday
loads (minimum possible load) shall also be considered in the design. Number of generators
and their capacities shall be decided accordingly. Minimum possible load for any generator shall
be more than 1/3rd of the prime rating.

In addition, a separate stand-by diesel generator (canopy type) shall be provided for the

Refueling Station. This system shall be complete with an inbuilt fuel tank and a separate Auto
Transfer Switch (ATS) panel and a proper exhaust system. Capacity of the referred stand-by system
shall be selected to cater the total demand of the refueling station (as per the calculations of the
Proposer) during a utility power failure.

Following works shall be included in the scope of the work.

 Selection of adequate capacity of the Generators

 Design of Standby Power Distribution Systems including Generator Distribution

Board/Synchronize Panel (GDB), Auto Transfer Switch (ATS) panels, power cables and
cable management systems (trenches, cable trays/ladders etc.)

 Design of underground fuel sump, day tanks and fuel pumps, pump controlling system and
piping system

 Design of structural arrangements of the generator rooms (considering the vibration

reduction and room sound proofing requirements.)

 Design of a proper exhaust systems as per the requirements of Central Environmental

 Authority (CEA) and the architectural aspects.

 Obtaining the necessary approval for the designs and shop drawings.

 Arranging the Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) at the manufacturers workshops before
importing the Generator sets.

 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of diesel Generator sets (canopy type) with
GDB, ATS panels, power cables, cable management systems, additional room sound
proofing (if required), fuel sumps/tanks, fuel pump system and all other necessary
accessories.

 Training of the Employer‟s staff about the operation of the system.

 Maintenance of the system/Handing over the maintenance to the local agent of

 Generator Manufacturer (after the defect liability period if required by the Employer).

219
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.4.6.1 Qualification Information

 Engine Manufacturer: Shall be a renowned company specialized in manufacture of

diesel engines with minimum 10 years documented experience. Manufacturing plant where
the proposed engine would be built shall have minimum 5 years documented experience in
the production of diesel engines. Quality assurance system of the manufacturer shall have
ISO 9001 certificate.

 Alternator Manufacturer: Shall be a renowned company specialized in manufacture of

alternators with minimum 10 years documented experience. Manufacturing plant where the
proposed alternator would be built shall have minimum 5 years documented experience in
the production of alternators for diesel gen sets. Quality assurance system of the
manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certificate.

 Assembly of Generator Set: If the assembly of engine-alternator set is carried out

neither by engine manufacturer nor alternator manufacturer, then the assembling party shall
be a reputable company with a minimum of 5 years‟ experience in the assembly of generating
sets. The quality assurance system of the assembling company shall have ISO 9001 and/or
ISO 9002 certification.

 Local Agent: There shall be an accredited agency in Sri Lanka for the make of generator set
offered and also the agent shall have proven record of providing after sales services
including maintenance services at least during last five years. The local agent shall have
adequate stock of spare parts at all the time, qualified maintenance staff and repair facilities.

E.4.6.2 Diesel Generators

Each Generator set shall consist of one diesel engine complete with radiator, exhaust system,
electronic governing one alternator with exciter and one flywheel with flywheel housing, mounted
on a steel base. The automatic voltage regulator may be mounted on the alternator. Generator
control, protection, monitoring systems and accessories shall be mounted on a control panel. Each
generator set shall be factory assembled and aligned accurately on the steel base which shall
be strong and rigid enough to ensure permanent alignment of all rotating units and prevent
vibration build up and shall permit skidding in any direction during installation.

The generator sets shall be capable of delivering the rated output for continuous period of not less
than 12 hours at a time. It shall have overload capacity of 110% of the rated output for one hour
during a period of 12 continuous hour‟s operation.

220
.Section VII E. Specifications
Generator set shall have the following features:

 Factory-mounted on a common, rigid, welded, structural steel base.

 Sound attenuated type canopy to meet with recommended sound levels or room sound
proofing for open type generators

 Automatic start, accelerate to the rated speed and deliver the specified kW/kVA

 output at 50 Hz within 10 seconds.

 Recover rapidly from instantaneous changes between no load and the specified
kW/kVA rating, and the reverse changes of load, without damage.

 Engine-generator set shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.

E.4.6.3 Sound Attenuating Type Canopy

The canopy shall be sound attenuating type and manufactured from high quality Zinc coated steel
sheeting or other approved material. The canopy shall be base frame mounted and lined with sound
absorbing materials retained by steel perforated sheet or other suitable arrangement. Entering of
air to the enclosure shall be via acoustic intake louvers at the generator end and discharge shall
be acoustic louvers at the engine end. Access to the generator set shall be provided by side
opening doors with lockable recessed handles. The acoustic lining shall be applied to the doors,
discharge and inlet louvers and roof.

Noise level should be less than 70 dB at 1m distance from the walls of the generator room with
doors closed, when operating at full load.

E.4.6.4 Generator Distribution Board (GDB)

The Synchronizing Panel/ Generator Distribution Board (GDB) shall be of the rigid, freestanding,
metal cubicle type, totally enclosed, dust and vermin protected and factory fabricated in compliance
with BS 5486 (IEC 60439) and this specification where applicable. Form of internal separation
shall be Form 4b as specified in IEC 60439-1. The Panel shall be of type tested design. Type test
certificates shall be in the name of the panel builder.

Synchronizing panel shall contain separate incoming breakers for all generator incomings and
separate outgoing breakers for the outgoings up to the Auto Transfer Switch (ATS) units and all
the indicating instruments, contactors indicator lamps, current transformers, auxiliary fuses,
protection relays, surge arrestors, small wiring, interconnections and other accessories of that
circuit. Busbars shall be of tin plated copper, and purity of copper shall be 99.99%. The rating of
main bus bar and fault current rating at the main bus bar shall be selected as per the contractor‟s

221
.Section VII E. Specifications
calculations.

Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) in Synchronizing panel shall be furnished with normally
closed auxiliary contacts for circuit breaker on/off and tripped signals for connectivity with Master
Control Panel and Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA).

Enclosure protection class shall be IP 54 as a minimum. The Synchronizing Panel shall be flush
fronted with front and rear access, and suitable for indoor use. Access doors and covers shall
incorporate sealing gaskets. Synchronizing Panel shall be provided with a metal plinth of
minimum 200mm high. All metal work (other than current carrying parts) shall be bonded to the
earthing bar.

E.4.6.5 Auto Transfer Switch (ATS) Panels

The ATS panels shall be of the rigid, freestanding, metal cubicle type, totally enclosed, dust and
vermin protected and factory fabricated in compliance with BS 5486 (IEC 60439) and this
specification where applicable. Form of internal separation shall be Form 4b as specified in IEC
60439-1. The Panel shall be of type tested design. Type test certificates shall be in the name of the
panel builder.

Connection facilities for all incoming and outgoing cables shall be designed by the
Contractor. Those details shall be provided in the single line diagrams/schematic diagrams/general
arrangements.

E.4.6.6 Cables & Cable Management Systems

Requirements under 5.5.6-Low Voltage (LV) Power Cables and 5.5.11-Cable Management

Systems shall be applied for cabling under generator scope.

E.4.6.7 Fuel Delivery system

E.4.6.7.1. Fuel Storage (Bulk Tanks)

Proposer shall determine the required capacity of the underground fuel storage which shall be
sufficient for operation of continuous 3 days (with 12 hours operation cycle @ full load) of all the
generators. A suitable location shall also be proposed. Delivery system shall be consists of
underground pipeline from the storage tanks to day tanks, fuel transfer pumps for pumping diesel
from main storage tanks to day tanks and manual pumps.

Calculations for the capacity selection and shop drawings for the underground fuel storage
including, fuel transfer pump arrangement and piping system shall be submitted for the approval
prior to the construction.

222
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.4.6.7.2. Day Tanks

Day tanks capacity shall be sufficient for 12 hour operation of all the generators. The tanks shall
be provided with all necessary fittings including fill, vent, drain and overflow line, level indication,
Level switches and access for inspection and maintenance. Fuel transfer from day tank

to diesel engine shall be by gravity.

E.4.6.7.3. Fuel Pump Control Panel

A pump control panel complete with all required starters, relays, switches, push buttons etc., shall
be provided. The pump control panel shall contain a selector each so that each pump may be
either started or stopped by hand or automatically on receipt of signal from the level switches in
the service tank. All required wiring between pumps, day tanks and pump control panel shall be
provided.

E.4.6.8 Generator Room Sound Proofing

It is expected to provide the Generators with sound attenuated canopies for the sound reduction.
Noise level of the generator sets shall be not more than 70 dB(A), when running at full load, at
outside of the generator room 1m away from the walls of the generator room with doors closed.

If it is proposed open type generators due to some restricted spacing issue, then the generator room
shall be sound proofed. The sound attenuation design shall include layers of sound absorbing
materials for the fresh air intake attenuators and hot air discharge attenuators. A proper exhaust
silencer shall be provided so that the noise level will be minimized.

Noise level outside the generator room shall meet the Central Environmental Authority
(CEA) requirements. CEA requirements with regard to the generator sets are as follows.

 “The in-plant generator planned to be used during power failures should be installed
in such a manner that the noise generated from the operation of the in-plant generator
shall be maintained at or below 63dB (A) during day time (0600 hrs to 1800hrs) and
50dB (A) during night time (1800hrs to 0600hrs). The generator shall be installed on
resilient foundations in an enclosed sound proof chamber”.

The above CEA requirements may apply at the boundary of the building premises where the
generators are installed.

E.4.6.9 Generator Room Vibration reduction

The engine-generator set shall be provided with proper vibration dampers fitted to the base
mountings. Vibration isolators of spring/pad type shall be provided as recommended by the

223
.Section VII E. Specifications
generator set manufacturer. Isolators shall include seismic restraints as per the employer‟s
requirement.

Flexible connections shall be provided to all exhaust, water, air, fuel and oil piping that leave the
engine to prevent the transmission of vibration and the fracture of the piping due to movement of
the set. The choice of connections and their installation is to be such as to give long life under
normal operating condition of the set.

E.4.6.10 Tests

The following tests and checks shall be carried out in the manufacturer's workshops and test
certificates shall be submitted. All tests as required by the manufacturer's practice or by applicable
standards during the manufacture stage.

E.4.6.10.1. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT):

Manufacturer shall furnish load banks, testing instruments and all other equipment as necessary to
perform these tests to be witnessed by representatives of the Engineer and Employer. All the costs
of the witnessing representatives (travelling, lodging etc.) for witnessing the tests shall be borne by
the Contractor.

 Load Test: During this test record the following data at 15-minute intervals.

Time Engine RPM Oil Temperature Out

kW Water Temperature In Fuel Pressure
Voltage Water Temperature Out Oil Pressure
Amperes Oil Temperature In Ambient Temperature

 Quick Start Test: Record time required for the engine generator set to develop
specified voltage, frequency and kW load from a standstill condition.

 Performance tests on the assembled diesel generating set (with voltage regulator)

o Check of fuel consumption at different loads

o Dielectric or insulation tests

E.4.6.10.2. Site Tests

The following tests shall be carried out after installation at the Site:

 Operational tests (including instantaneous loading and load rejection)

 Measurement of the output

 Functional testing of all alarm and control devices

224
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Checking of the starting time and of the time up to taking-over full load.

 Testing of noise levels. Measurement of sound level at 1m and 7 m distances.

E.4.7 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

Emergency power shall be provided for the escape route lighting in all areas (Terminal areas,
parking areas, connecting bridge, office areas, corridors, stair cases, fire lift lobbies etc.) as
per the fire regulations and the following specific power requirements of the building.
 Servers and server room equipment

 Parking management and terminal management systems

 Electronic security system head end equipment,

 CCTV system

 Data & Telephone Network

 BMS Network

 Any other special loads

Emergency power shall be provided using direct on-line type Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
System compliance with IEC 62040-1, IEC 62040-2 & IEC 62040-3. Separate UPS shall be
provided for above specific systems. Minimum back-up time for all UPSs shall be provided as per
the fire protection requirements.

Separate Distribution Board (DB)/Consumer Unit (CU) shall be allocated for emergency power
and lighting circuits in a floor. Required capacities (rating of UPS, single phase or three phase,
battery capacity, cable sizes etc.) of UPS for a typical floor shall be proposed by the contractor
with the calculations.

E.4.7.1. Experience of the UPS manufacturer

Shall be a renowned company specialized in manufacture of UPSs with minimum 10 years

documented experience. Manufacturing plant where the proposed UPS would be built shall have
minimum 5 years documented experience in the production of UPS units. Quality assurance
system of the manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certificate.

E.4.7.2. Experience of the battery manufacturer

Shall be a renowned company specialized in manufacture of Sealed AGM VRLA or Gel type
Batteries with minimum 10 years documented experience. Manufacturing plant where the proposed
batteries would be built shall have minimum 5 years documented experience in the production of

225
.Section VII E. Specifications
batteries. Quality assurance system of the manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certificate.

E.4.7.3.Experience of the local agent

There shall be an accredited agency in Sri Lanka for the make of UPS system offered and also the
agent shall have proven record of providing after sales services including maintenance services
at least during last 05 years. The local agent shall have adequate stocks of spare parts at all the
time, qualified maintenance staff and repair facilities.

E.4.8 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (LPS)

All buildings within the premises shall be protected against Lightning. Lightning protection system
shall comply with the requirements of IEC 62305:2010-12 Part 1, Part 2, and Part 3 & Part 4 for
protection against lightning. The direct protection system includes, but not be limited to, an
air termination network, down conductors, joints and bonds, test joints, earth terminations and earth
electrodes. The indirect lightning protection shall be provided by incorporating coordinated Surge
Protective Devices (SPDs) in Distribution Boards.

The risk assessment shall be carried out to find the class of the protection needed for the building
against lightning. Contractor shall submit the detailed drawings for the proposed Lightning
Protection System with detailed calculations including risk analysis for the approval prior to
the construction.

E.4.8.1.Air Termination System

Air termination components shall be positioned in a way to cover up all exposed points and edges.
The air termination network shall comprise bare copper strips and solid copper air termination rods
(finials).

E.4.8.2. Down Conductors

Dedicated circular mild steel conductors running through the structure columns and en-cased in
concrete or exposed bare copper strips shall be used as down conductors. Distance between two
adjacent down conductors shall be determined as per the class of LPS required. Down conductors
shall be provided for each edges and corners of the building perimeter.

All down conductors shall be continued from pile cap reinforcement of the structure up to the air
termination network in the roof level. At the ground level a connection shall be provided to the
column surface mounted test box. At the roof levels all down conductors shall be connected to the
to the air termination network with 25mm x 3mm solid copper tapes. (Solid bond form MS rod to
a 25mm x 3mm solid copper tape). Surface mounted down conductors (25mm x 3mm solid copper
tapes) shall be used in some locations if it is required.

226
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.4.8.3. Earth Termination System

Earthing arrangement with vertical solid copper earth electrodes properly bonded to the
reinforcement of the pile caps has been proposed. Earth electrodes will be positioned near to all
down conductor locations (near to columns) and the down conductor will be connected to the
electrode through test joints installed on columns above the ground level. The earth resistance of
the earth termination network shall not exceed 10 (ten) ohms.

E.4.8.4. Equipotential Bonding

All exposed metalwork such as steel handrails, cooling towers, chillers, pump arrangements,
cladding structures, metal structures of glass walls, metal roofs, etc shall be bonded to the lightning
protection system as specified in the standards, using bonds and clamps appropriate to the location.
Equipotential bonding terminals (which have been connected to the down conductor system) shall
be provided in all plant rooms and machine rooms.

E.4.8.5. Selection of Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)

IEC 62305-4 (Edition 2.0 2010-12): Protection against lightning – Part 4: Electrical and electronic
systems within structures; and IET Wiring Regulations shall be referred to design the indirect
Lightning Protection System using surge protective devices (SPDs). Coordinated Surge Protective
Devices (SPDs) arrangement with appropriate protection levels and capacities have to be
installed in the main and other distribution boards up to the sensitive equipment levels to protect
electrical and electronic systems within the buildings. The Cost for SPDs shall be included to the
respective switchgear items in the BOQ.

E.4.9 SOLAR PHOTO VOLTAIC (PV) SYSTEM

Scope of work include design, supply, installation and commissioning of grid connected, net
metered, solar PV plant with all relevant accessories at most suitable locations at the premises (roof
tops areas) as per the guidelines of Public Utility Commission of Sri Lanka (PUCSL).

Contractor shall responsible for the coordination with Ceylon Electricity Board (CEB) until the
solar PV system is connected to the grid. The solar PV system shall include solar PV modules,
mounting structure, grid-tie inverters, junction boxes, isolators, DC cables, AC cables, Surge
Protective Devices (DC/AC), LV panels and import/export meters, etc.

Number of solar panels shall be selected as per the shadow free space available in the
premises (shall be coordinated with the other services) and the total solar PV system shall be
designed accordingly. Proposers must consider shading losses as per the relevant Industry Standard
& Practice which designing the proposed power plant. Schematic diagram for the complete system

227
.Section VII E. Specifications
with all calculations are required to submit with the Proposal.

E.4.9.1. PV Module

PV module shall contain mono crystalline high power silicon solar cells. The solar cells shall have
surface anti-reflective coating to heal to absorb more light in all weather conditions.

Proposer shall submit the details of the following performances under standard test conditions (with
the Proposal)

(STC: 1000 W/m2, 25 0C & AM 1.5)

 Maximum power

 Open circuit voltage

 Maximum power point voltage

 Maximum power point current

 Short circuit current

 Maximum allowed system voltage (Open circuit voltage of PV strings)

 Module efficiency at STC (>17 %)

 Fill factor of the modules ( > 0.7)

The rated power output of any supplied module shall not vary by more than 5% from the average
power rating of all ratings. Test certificate confirming the rating shall be submitted with the offer.

Solar modules offered shall be certified as per latest edition of IEC 61215-2, IEC 61730-1, and
IEC 61730-2 for safety qualification testing. Also, it shall meet the ISO 9001:2008, ISO
14001:2004 and ISO 17025:2005 international standards. Copies of the certification should be
submitted with the offer.

E.4.9.2. Grid Tie Inverters

Total Rating of the Inverters shall be selected by the Proposer considering the availability and

the efficiency. Inverter units shall convert DC produced by SPV array and adjust the voltage and
frequency levels to suit the Grid.

 Nominal AC voltage shall be 03 Phase, 30V/400V

 AC Grid Frequency shall be 50Hz. ±2.5Hz Allowed

All the Inverters shall be housed in a suitable switch cabinet, with minimum IP65 degree of Ingress

228
.Section VII E. Specifications
Protection, weatherproof, Rodents & Insect proof and Components and Circuit Boards
mounted inside the enclosures clearly identified with appropriate permanent designations.

The grid supervision must comply with relevant local regulations. Maximum Power point Tracker
(MPPT) has to be integrated in the Inverter Unit to maximize energy drawn from the array. The
MPPT shall be microprocessor based to minimize power losses. The MPPT shall have provision
(manual setting) for constant voltage Operation.

 DC voltage ripple content shall not be more than 3%.

 Efficiency of inverter shall not be less than 97%.

 Operating temperature range shall be 5°C to 60°C

 Islanding Protection. Facility to reconnect the inverter automatically to the grid

following restoration of grid, subsequent to grid failure condition.

 Inverter generated harmonics shall not exceed a total harmonic distortion of 5%, a
single frequency current distortion of 3% and single frequency current distortion of

 1% when the 1st through the 5th integer harmonics of 50Hz are considered.

 Inverter shall not produce Electromagnetic interface (EMI)

 Code & Standards: VDE 0126, G83/1, IEC 61727, IEC62116

E.4.9.3.Module Mounting Structure

The Array Structure shall also be designed to occupy minimum space without wasting the output
from SPV Panels. The Structure shall be designed such that there is adequate heat dissipation from
solar panels under maximum solar radiation and to allow easy replacement of any module.

The PV array & support structure shall be designed to withstand wind speed as per relevant wind
load codes and the details shall be included in the design calculations and shall also be connected
to lightning protection system.

Structure shall be fabricated out of steel channels and hot dipped galvanized. Nut & bolts should
be non-corrosive. The contractor shall submit detailed drawings of the mounting structure for
approval of the structural engineer (shall be enclosed in structural drawings).

E.4.9.4.Warranty

Solar PV modules shall have more than 10 years product warranty (materials and workmanship)
and 25 years power output warranty.

229
.Section VII E. Specifications
 All the inverters shall be covered under the warranty period of 10 years from the date of
commissioning of the system.

E.4.9.5. System Monitoring, Remote Diagnosis & Data Storage

Meter to log the actual amount of AC energy generated/consumed by the PV System shall have to
be provided. An integrated measuring device to be provided with the sensor mounted in the plane
of the array.

Suitable Mechanism shall be provided to monitor the plant performance, to log plant data, to access
current values, previous values up to one month & average values at any time. Provisions
shall be provided to connect that system directly to the proposed Building Management system
(BMS).

E.4.9.6. Site Testing and Commissioning

Proposer should submit a complete proposal with time schedule for testing and
commissioning of the Grid Connected Solar Power System at site. The Program should
include a trial operation of all main equipment with any necessary adjustments to ensure that
system is working correctly. The Contractor should provide all instruments and equipment together
with commissioning engineers and adequate assistance for carrying out the commissioning and
testing activity which should be done in accordance with the recommendations of relevant
Standards.

If any portion of the works fails to pass the tests, the Contractor should, at his own expense carry
out such alterations or replacements as are required to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
Engineer should be at liberty to call for further commissioning when such alterations have been
completed to their satisfactory. The Contractor should provide commissioning spares at his own
expense.

E.4.10 GREEN ASPECTS

The Employer expect to integrate green building features as much as possible in the building
complex as per recommended green building guidelines. Hence the electrical design shall be carried
out to maximize the green features and energy efficiency within the premises.

The design shall comply with the minimum Green Building Guild lines issued by UDA (Blue
Green Sri Lanka First Print, January 2017). If the Employer needs to apply for the UDA or any
other green building certification in future, Contractor shall coordinate that process. Proposer shall
refer the relevant green building guidelines of UDA and the maximum points which can be claimed
for the design proposal shall be submitted with the calculations with the proposal.

230
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.4.11 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROLLING

Provisions shall be made to centrally monitor the low voltage electrical power distribution system
at the each SMDB and FDB levels via Building Management System (BMS). Hence main
components such as breakers, power analyzers, etc. shall be compatible and complete with required
access ports.

Medium voltage system shall also be centrally monitored via BMS. Outdoor lighting and common
area/special feature lighting shall also be able to control via BMS.

E.4.12 PREFERRED LIST OF MANUFACTURERS / MAKES

Preferred list of manufacturers/makes of equipment in electrical system is given in the

E.4.17.

It has been provided for the sole purpose of defining and establishing standards of quality and
performance and not with the intention of restricting the procurement of materials or fittings to a
particular manufacture. Proposer shall ensure that all products, even though they are from the above
list, meet the specification requirement.

E.4.13 TRAINING OF EMPLOYER’S STAFF

It is required to provide training of Employer‟s personnel for the following major electrical
systems before the handing over of the project.

 Dry type transformers

 MV Switchgears

 Standby Generator System

 LV Power Distribution system

 Emergency Power (UPS) systems

 Lighting control systems

 Solar PV System

 Any other system requested by the Employer

E.4.14 SPARE PARTS, TOOLS AND CONSUMABLES

Spare parts for the following items/systems are required to be submitted at the handing over.

231
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Light fittings, ballasts/LED drivers, batteries, sensors and lamps (10% of each
category)

 Switches and power socket outlets

 LV switchgear accessories (MCB & RCCB, fuses, indicator lamps, relays, timers etc.)

 Spare parts for generator system (lubricating oil filters, primary and secondary fuel oil
filters and air filters)

E.4.15 MAINTENANCE STRATEGY

Maintenance strategy for the electrical distribution system of the building after the
Contractor‟s defects liability period shall be furnished with the Proposal. For main equipment /
components of the electrical distribution system, local agent‟s confirmation on maintenance ability
(draft maintenance agreements for major equipment and systems) and spare parts availability shall
be submitted. Contractor shall coordinate with their sub-contractors and the Employer for entering
into the maintenance agreements after the defect liability period.

E.4.16. MINIMUM QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS OF EXECUTION OF

SPECIALIZED ELECTRIC WORK

Electrical work shall be carried out by an experienced electrical contractor who has previous
experience in similar scale projects (at least one project) during last 05 years and shall have
necessary tools, equipment and experienced staff for medium/low voltage electrical installation
and testing. The contractor or the sub-contractor selected for electrical works shall have the
following experiences sub specialties.

Medium Voltage Electrical Installations - Experience in successfully completion of at least one

(1) MV installations of similar capacity or larger within last 5 years

Low Voltage Electrical Installations - Experience in successfully completion of at least two (2)
LV installations of similar capacity or larger within last 5 years

Standby Generator System - Experience in successfully completion of at least three (3) Generator
installations of similar capacity or larger within last 5 years

Lightning protection System - Experience in successfully completion of at least one (1) Lightning
protection system installations of similar nature/capacity or larger within last 5 years

Solar Photo Voltaic (PV) System - Experience in successfully completion of at least five (5) Solar
Photo Voltic (PV) Systems installations of similar nature/capacity or larger within last 5 years and
shall be a registered supplier/contractor of Sri Lanka Sustainable Energy Authority (SLSEA).

232
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.4.17. LIST OF PREFERRED MANUFACTURES – ELECTRICAL WORKS

Table E.13: List of Preferred Manufactures

Item Manufacture/ Brand Country of Origin &

Name Manufacture
1. Air Circuit Breakers ABB Italy
Siemens Germany
Schneider France
Terasaki Japan
Moller Germany
2. Moulded Case Circuit ABB Italy
Breakers Siemens Germany
Schneider France
Terasaki Japan
Moller Germany
3. Miniature Circuit ABB Italy
Breakers Siemens Germany
Schneider France
Terasaki Japan
Moller Germany
Hager Europe
4. Residual Current Devices ABB Italy
Siemens Germany
Schneider France
Terasaki Japan
Moller Germany
Hager Europe
5. Surge Protection Devices OBO Bettermann Germany
Eaton Europe
Soule France
Furse United Kingdom
Novaris Australia
J.Propster Germany
6. Power Factor Correction ABB Switzerland
Capacitor Banks Legrand France
Epcos Germany

233
.Section VII E. Specifications
Item Manufacture/ Brand Country of Origin &
Name Manufacture
Eaton Europe

7. Uninterruptible Power APC Europe

Supply Eaton Europe
MGE Europe
8. Power Cables ACL Sri Lanka
Kelani Sri Lanka
Sierra Sri Lanka
9. Light Fittings Philips Holland
RZB Germany
Thorn UK
Davis Australia
Osram Germany
10. GIS Panels ABB Germany
Siemens Germany
Schneider France
11. AIS Panels ABB India
Siemens India
Schneider India
Tamco Malaysia
12. Dry type Transformers TRAFO Electro Italy
TRIHAL France
ABB Switzerland
13. Diesel Generators FG Wilson United Kingdom
Cummins United Kingdom
Caterpillar USA

Note:

Reference made here to certain manufacturers products and items identified by registered
trademarks. This has been done for the sole purpose of defining and establishing standards of
quality and performance and not with the intention of restricting the procurement of materials or
fittings to a particular manufacture. Proposer shall ensure that all products, even though they are

234
.Section VII E. Specifications
from the above list, meet the specification requirement.

E.5. WATER SUPPLY, DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE WORKS

E.5.1. SCOPE OF WORKS

Contractor shall undertake design, construction, installations, testing, commissioning and also
operation and maintenance during defect liability period for following major activities and
requirements, without limiting to the same, under the development of KMTT.

a) It require utmost care to minimize disturbances and to ensure safety to the public and
common activities going on the city, during execution of construction activities including
underground construction,

b) Construction of the entire potable water and harvested rainwater storage and conveyance
infrastructure,

c) Construction of the entire storm & foul water conveyance infrastructure,

d) Indoor & outdoor building plumbing,

e) Installation of sanitary fittings & fixtures,

f) Installation of necessary pumps, machineries and control devices,

g) Necessary control and safety systems in water conveyance infrastructures, for both
temporary (during construction) and permanent uses,

h) Diversion of center canal (Meda Ela), including capacity improvements,

i) Waterproofing to suit different conditions such as; indoor wet-floor, outdoor terraces, under
vegetation etc.,

j) Irrigation system for roof top gardening and landscaping area,

k) Green building design as per UDA green building guide, in Sri Lanka.

l) Potable cold water supply to all the individual buildings and amenities.

m) Non-Potable water supply to flushing cisterns after proper filtration.

n) Sanitary plumbing and drainage connections from individual buildings to sanitary drainage

235
.Section VII E. Specifications
system.

o) Trade waste connection such as commercial kitchen to the building greasy waste drainage
system.

p) Installation of sanitary fixtures, tap ware and outlets.

q) Rain water harvesting system with necessary first flushing and storage.

r) Irrigation system for roof top gardening and landscaping.

E.5.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

E.5.2.1. General Specification

All pipes, fittings, valves, appliances, joints and materials shall be;

a) Selected to operate effectively under all normal conditions likely to be experienced in the
specific installation for the anticipated life of such installation, and used in strict accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

b) Where reference is made to certain manufacturers' products and items identified by

registered trademarks, shall considered to be for the sole purpose of defining and
establishing standards of quality and performance and not with the intention of restricting
the procurement of material or fitting to a particular manufacturer.

c) All materials, fittings and equipment shall be supplied by a local supplier who is in
operation for more than five years. All shall be manufactured by reputed manufacturer who
is manufacturing the same material or equipment for more than ten years.

d) All testing shall be done according to BS EN standards unless otherwise specified.

e) Factory acceptance/ performance test shall be carried out for water supply and drainage
pipes and other materials, pumps, sanitary fittings, treatment systems etc. and contractor
shall arrange and facilitate for the engineers and Employers representatives (one from each)
to witness each factory acceptance/ performance tests. Cost of these shall be borne by the
contractor.

f) The contractor shall arrange and facilitate training of staff, demonstration.

g) All types of fittings, materials, painting and finishes shall be approved by the Engineer prior
to installation.

h) Canal improvements and diversion require systematical approaches with cofferdams,

bypass conduits, submersible pumps for storm water Lifting up etc.,

236
.Section VII E. Specifications
i) The contractor is responsible to obtain necessary authority approvals for the design,
equipment and installation, relocation etc.,

j) The contractor shall submit shop drawings for the approval of the Engineer where required,
prior to commencing work.

k) Contractor shall prepare and submit As Built drawings as per the Contract.

l) All samples shall be provided for approval by the Engineer prior to purchase of material.

E.5.2.2. Standards for both ‘water supply and Drainage’

Water supply work shall be conforming to BS EN 806-1 to 5 new series on Specifications for
installations inside buildings conveying water for human consumption. Design, installation, testing
and maintenance of services supplying water for domestic use within buildings and their cartilage
specification shall conform to BS 8558. The water supply and distribution system shall be designed
in accordance with Plumbing Engineering Services Design Guide by the Institute of Plumbing, UK
(ISBN 1871956404).

Wastewater drainage work shall be conforming to BS EN 752 - Drain and sewer systems outside
buildings. Sewer system management and BS EN 12056-1 to 5- Gravity drainage systems inside
buildings.

All uPVC pipes shall be conforming to requirements by SLS 147: 2013 and new series of British
Standards BS EN 1452- 1 to 5. BS EN 1329-1 Plastic piping system for soil and waste discharge
(low and high temperature) within the building structure shall be referred to design the uPVC pipes.

Hot and cold water supply pipes with any other material such as polyethylene, Polypropylene,
ductile iron, C- PVC etc. shall conform to new version of relevant European Standards.

American Water Works Association (AWWA) standards shall be applied for ‘Disinfection
Practices, Storage tanks, and Pipes and Fittings’ as well as ‘performance testing of pressure
pipelines’.

ICTAD publication No. SCA/3/1 – specification for irrigation and land Drainage (2 nd edition –
Revised – November 1999) shall be used to design waste water drainage and rainwater discharge
system.

ICTAD publication No. SCA/3/2 – specification for water supply, Sewerage and Stormwater
drainage works (2nd edition – Revised – November 1999) shall be used to design water supply,
Sewerage and Stormwater drainage works.

Water supply pipes, fittings shall be conforming to following standards.

237
.Section VII E. Specifications
 BS EN 12201 – 1 - Plastic piping systems for water supply – Polyethylene (PE) – Part 1:
General

 BS EN 12201 – 2 - Plastic piping systems for water supply – Polyethylene (PE) – Part 2:
Pipes

 BS EN 12201 – 3 - Plastic piping systems for water supply – Polyethylene (PE) – Part 3:
Fittings

 BS EN 545 - Ductile Iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water pipelines –
Requirements and test methods

 BS EN 1092 - Flanges and their joints – Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and
accessories, PN designated – Part 1: Steel flanges

 BS EN 1074 – 4 - Valves for water supply – Fitness for purpose requirements and
appropriate verification tests – Part 4: Air Valves

 ISO 4427:1:2007 - Plastic Piping System - Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings Part 1-
General for water supply.

 ISO 4427:2:2007 - Plastic Piping System - Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings Part 2-
Pipes for water supply

 ISO 4427:3:2007 - Plastic Piping System - Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings Part 3-
Fittings for water supply

 ISO 4427:5:2007 - Plastic Piping System - Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings Part 5-
Fitness for water supply

 ISO 1167-1:2006 - Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of liquids - Determination of

the resistance to internal pressures – General method

 ASTM D 2774 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of thermoplastic

Pressure Piping

 ASTM D 3350 - Standard Practice for Polyethylene Plastic Pipes and Fitting
Materials

 ASTM F 2389 - Standard Specification for Pressure-Rate Piping System

American Water Works Association (AWWA) standards for testing pipelines and disinfection

 AWWA C651 - Procedures for the Disinfection of Water mains

238
.Section VII E. Specifications
 AWWA C651 - Procedures for Pressure and Leakages testing of water mains

 AWWA C652 - Disinfection of water storage facilities

Sanitary appliances/ fitting shall be conforming to following standards.

 BS 6465 – 1:2006+A1:2009 – Code of practice for the design of sanitary facilities and
scales of provision of sanitary and associated appliances.

 BS 3402:1969 – Code of practice for Quality of vitreous china sanitary fittings.

 BS EN 12288 - Industrial valves. Copper alloy gate valves

 SLS 377 – Wash Basins.

 SLS 832 – Ceramic Sinks.

 SLS 568 – Ceramic Squatting pans and traps.

 SLS 1459 – Stainless Steel Kitchen Sinks.

 SLS 792 – Ceramic pedestal wash down water closet pans and traps.

 BS 316S16 – Stainless Steel for External Application

 BS 304S16 – Stainless Steel for Internal Application

 SLS 1174 – Polyethylene water storage tanks.

 SLS 596 – Bib taps and stop valves for water services.

E.5.3. BUILDING WATER SUPPLY

E.5.3.1. Capacity Calculation

It is required to indicate clearly parameters and conditions that are to be follow for design stage.
Following requirement shall be addressed during conceptual design stage, and shall not be limited
to purview of the same.

1. Assessment of ‘per day total water demand in compliance with the following.

 Water demand per capita per day (for different categories) including kitchen and
cafeteria (Sri Lankan standards shall be followed)

 Requirement for makeup water for cooling towers & A/C system

 Recreational needs

 Security needs

239
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Gardening and landscaping

 Washing and cleaning

 Requirement for fire protection.

2. Overhead water tank and sump capacities based on per day total water demand.

E.5.3.2. System Description for building Water Supply

The portable water supply and distribution system shall be suitably developed in harmony with
building structural form. Concern is drawn over following requirements.

1. Above ground or underground water storage sumps.

2. Adopting of zoning method for efficient water distribution system considering energy
conservation and reliable supply.

3. Reuse of treated rainwater to reduce clean water consumption.

4. Provisions for uninterrupted vertical and horizontal clean water supply.

5. Water service facilities for all the remote user-point with stipulated residual pressure.

6. Supply connections for ancillary facilities, AHU rooms, flower troughs.

E.5.3.3. Water Storage

The total in house potable water storage capacity (both ground and overhead) shall be designed to
suit minimum of 1 1/2 days and maximum of 2 days requirements (sump is to be for 1 1/2 days
with an overhead tank of 1/3 days storage). The governing factors in determining the capacity of
storage tanks are based on security/ safety aspects, category of building importance, reliability of
the city water supply, possible shut-downs and the length of such shut downs.

Potable water supply system starts from the NWS&DB water meter chamber, and then collects to
ground sump for enable pumping to overhead tanks, which spearhead distributing clean water via
the main distribution system to each user point. Design considerations include the sizing of pumps,
pump protection, control requirements, pipe sizing for the entire feeder and distribution network.

The location of water meter chamber, diameter of water supply service connection pipe line and
pipe route up to the water meter chamber will be designed and laid by the National Water Supply
and Drainage Board (NWS&DB) on client’s request. The extending of city water supply beyond
the water-meter is requited under the contract to reach up to the sump. Line laid up to bulk meter
point including bulk water meter chamber shall be constructed as per NWS&DB’s requirement.
Bulk meter and sub meters are to be provided to monitor the water consumption in different

240
.Section VII E. Specifications
department.

Further, there will be different categories of water usages (apart from human consumption) such
as; landscape usage, cooling tower usage and fire fighting requirements. As such, separate sumps
might become necessary for storage of different qualities of water, for enable economical
accommodation of various category water supply needs.

Location of sumps, pump room and overhead water tanks shall be clearly marked on layout plans.

Decision for requirement of space for overhead tank shall be arrived based on in-house water
supply demand (human consumption) and any other category of water supply need. Arrangement
of overhead water storage, aiming of zoning distribution pattern, may require spaces at different
locations of the building. Despite the fact of scarification of habitable space for deploying storage
tanks in various places, it might be advantageous in energy saving during long term running of the
system.

It is preferable to have overhead water tank and reinforced concrete sump with adequate capacities.
Tank as well as sump structures shall be designed, constructed and tested to cater the entire
requirement of the building water supply need. Automated water pumping mechanism would be
preferable for pumping water from sump to overhead tank. Adequate capacity pumps with all
necessary accessories should be supplied, installed, tested and commissioned in a suitable pump
house constructed to suit with the purposes.

Firefighting water requirements should also be made available in a ground sump with all necessary
utilities. Storage water in any of these sumps requires refreshing to maintain water qualities at
favourable limits. Economical as well as effective methodologies shall be adopted to refresh
various quality water bodies inside sumps.

Waterproofing is an aspect requires careful intervention to accomplish water storage tank structural
works. Those should be assigned to a reputed specialist supplier/ company/ agent with at least 10
year guarantee in compliance with the requirements stipulated under Chapter E.6 of this document.

Prior approval of the client & consultant/engineer should be obtained for all the installations
including pumps, pipes and accessories/ fittings such as taps, shower and valves etc. Proper
ventilation and maintenance access for the water tanks and sump shall be provided and that shall
be esthetically acceptable with the elevation. Precautions shall to be taken to prevent mosquito
breeding and entering of insects to water storage or distribution system.

Hot water supply shall be provided for kitchen and bathrooms as per employer’s requirement and
specialist kitchen designer’s requirement.

241
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.5.3.4. Water Supply Pumps

Water pumps are mainly centrifugal for transfer pump work for feeding water to overhead storage
tanks. Booster pumps might be necessary to lift up pressure in low pressure areas in the distribution
system. Water supply pumps are required to operate in duty and standby configuration, and as such
minimum 2 pumps are needed at each pumping points. All water supply pumps shall be factory
tested to determine the capacity, specific power consumption, efficiency, MEI level etc. The overall
efficiency of the pumps shall not be less than 60% at the duty point and Minimum Efficiency Index
(MEI) shall be not less than 0.4. The hydraulic performance acceptance test of water supply pumps
shall be done according to ANSI/HI 14.6. Degree of protection shall be IP 54 and insulation class
shall be F. Pumps shall be European make and shall have a reputed local agent, having minimum
5 years continuous business operation.

Pumps shall be of the non-overloading, centrifugal, back pull-out type. Pumps shall generally be
of the horizontal end suction type or equivalent.

Casings of horizontal end suction pumps shall be designed for a working pressure of 10 kg per
square cm or 1½ times the actual discharge pressure, whichever is greater. Casings of Vertical
Inline pumps shall be designed for working pressure of 5 kg per square cm or 1½ times the actual
discharge pressure, whichever is greater. Pressure classification of flange connection shall
correspond to casing working pressures.

Pumps having discharge connections larger than 75mm and operating at more than 20 metres total
dynamic head shall be provided with casing wearing rings. Rings shall be of bronze, chrome iron,
nickel iron or the composition suitable for the individual application.

High points of pump casings shall be provided with air vent cocks. Cocks shall be extended outside
of any insulation. Low points of casings shall be provided with valved drains and inlet and outlet
connections shall be provided with properly located gauge tapings. Each removable casing part
weighing over 10kg shall be provided with a lifting eye or lugs of ample strength. Casing brackets
of vertically-split pumps equipped with stuffing boxes shall be arranged to form drip pockets. A
drip pipe shall be run from each drip pocket and terminated with an approved air gap over the
nearest drip funnel or floor drain.

Impellers shall be bronze and shall be dynamically balanced. Impellers of pumps having 40mm
and larger discharge connection shall be fully enclosed and hydraulically balanced.

Shafts for pumps with stuffing boxes shall be stainless steel, monel alloy or shall be carbon steel
with sleeves of bronze, chrome iron or nickel iron extending through the stuffing boxes. Shafts

242
.Section VII E. Specifications
shall be provided with water slingers where stuffing boxes are used.

Bearings for close coupled pumps shall be of the ball or roller type. Bearings for all other pumps
shall be either ball or roller bearings, or ring oiled or wool packed sleeve bearings with ample oil
reservoirs. Thrust bearings shall be of either the ball or roller type. Bearings shall be effectively
sealed to prevent loss of oil and entrance of dirt or water.

Stuffing boxes shall be deep enough for not less than 4 rings of packing and shall be have bronze
glands. Glands for horizontally-split case pumps shall be split. Pumps of 40mm size and larger
operating with a suction lift shall be equipped with bronze lantern rings and external or internal
water seal connection with needle valves.

Packing shall be suitable in all cases for the service required with proper consideration of water
pressure, temperature, temperature changes and sediment carried in the water. Mechanical seals
may be provided in lieu of stuffing boxes where recommended and guaranteed by the pump
manufacturer for the particular service involved.

All pumps, other than close coupled pumps, shall be provided with suitable flexible couplings.
Couplings shall impose no restriction on normal end play or expansion. Suitable coupling guards
shall be provided.

Each flexible coupled pump shall be provided with a cast iron or fabricated steel bedplate of ample
size to hold both pump and motor in correct alignment. Pump and motor shall be accurately aligned
when running at normal temperature. Bed plates of horizontally split pumps shall have raised lips
and drain connections. A drain pipe shall be run from each drain connection and terminated with
an approved air gap over the nearest drip funnel or floor drain.

The bedplate shall be mounted on a reinforced concrete foundation block of a weight at least equal
to the weight of the pump. These concrete foundation blocks shall be poured in a steel pan of a
shape conforming to the shape of the bedplate.

The concrete foundation block shall be supported in neoprene vibration isolating pads, sized for 2
mm static deflection. Each isolation pad shall be sized correctly for its share of the load.

The isolation pads shall be mounted on concrete sub-bases. These sub-bases will be made by the
Contractor according to details to be supplied by the pump manufacturer.

All pumps are to be supplied by one manufacturer.

Manufacturer shall provide pump characteristic curves including Head (H) curve, Efficiency (Ƞ)
curve, Horse Power (HP) curve and Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH-R) curve. It should mention
the shut-off head of the pump in the Head curve itself. Difference between shut-off head and the

243
.Section VII E. Specifications
head at Duty Point shall be greater than the 10 % of the head at duty point. Otherwise pump shall
be rejected.

Difference of flow rates between Duty Point (DP) and Best efficiency Point (BEP) shall be lesser
than 10 % of the flow rate at Duty Point. Otherwise pump shall be rejected.

Pumps shall be selected for an overall efficiency of not less than 60%.

General frequency of pump shall be 50 Hz and frequency of inlet power supply shall be kept within
the range of 40- 60 Hz.

Test for pumps shall be done accordance with the standard of ISO 9906:1999 and tests shall be
done for each and every pump.

E.5.3.5. Water Distribution Pipe Network

Efficient distribution system is required with ensuring stipulated residual pressure at the each and
every user points. Pipe material, pipe joining system, installation techniques, water hammer
arresters and pressure controlling devices shall be in accordance with the standards and those shall
be installed as per the manufacturer’s specification.

Suitable identification method with signs and colours shall be assigned to enable identify different
category of water distribution pipes (e.g.; portable water supply), during operation and maintenance
phase.

All pumping pipe lines & vertical water supply stacks shall be made from durable pipe material
(PE, PPR, HDPE etc.) to sustain in aggressive environmental situations.

E.5.3.6. Testing and Commissioning

Before conceal any pipe installation, it is necessary to carryout hydrostatic pressure testing to
confirm the engineer compliances with relevant ICTAD, BS and AWWA standards.

Further system is requiring disinfection prior to commissioning as per the procedure illustrated in
BS and AWWA standards.

E.5.3.7. Air Circulation and Ventilation inside Toilets

Sufficient mechanical/ natural ventilation should be provided to achieve a pleasing atmosphere

inside toilets and also necessary to minimize energy usage by adopting natural as well as
environmentally friendly concept.

Smooth air circulation inside the toilets shall be ensured by efficient space during the design of
architectural lay out. due to wind flow.

244
.Section VII E. Specifications

E.5.4. BUILDING DRAINAGE WORKS

E.5.4.1. Conceptual Development

It requireS arrive on optimum system design for ‘Sanitary plumbing and drainage system design
under the prevailing circumstances. Following requirements are worth to consider during the
process of evaluating possible options.

a. Underground disposal pipe network, including manholes and catch-pits, pump pits shall be
designed in harmony with landscape.

b. Multiple stacks (vertical pipes) system shall be adopted for building drainage inside vertical
ducts. Waste water stacks, urinal stack and sewer stacks shall be totally differentiated until
reach manhole or water-seal catch pit in the ground.

c. Suitable venting shall be introduced for back vent, branch vent, trap vent, cross vent etc.,

d. Efficient arrangement of floor drains and branch discharge pipes are required. It require
clearly illustrate sewers installation & slopes inside the toilet i.e., embedded into the floor
(with second stage concrete) or hung under the soffit of toilet floor slab.

E.5.4.2. Drainage System Description

Sewage and Wastewater Disposal system includes:

1. Pipe network inside the building (building drainage)

2. External sewer network including manholes, silt traps, oil/ grease traps, ‘water sealed catch
pits’ and ‘urinal catch pits’.

During the design of building drainage, it is compulsory to differentiate sewage (black water)
disposal arrangement and wastewater (gray water) disposal arrangement inside buildings. Further,
it is preferable to have separate vertical stack for urinal waste disposal until connect to a dedicated
water-sealed catch-pit in the ground. More importantly, it require methodology to cut-off entering
of foul smell back into building through user-points such as wash basins and floor gullies. Care
shall be exercised to avoid potential blockages from hair, grit or any other fiberous and/ or oily
matters clogged inside pipe lines, catch-pits or manholes.

In line with this requirement vertical stacks shall be provided inside ducts to drain sewage, urinal
waste and wastewater separately from upper floor toilets of the building upto the ground. Suitable

245
.Section VII E. Specifications
venting arrangement is required at upper floor for lateral disposal branch confections and stacks.

Vertical ducts shall be of suitable size to have space for accommodate vertical pipes, horizontal
branch connections and also attending for maintenance.

Solid particles and oils discharged from kitchens & cafeterias shall be thrashed prior to entering
into combined sewer network.

Water supply and drainage system for flower troughs, AHU rooms and chillers in buildings, rooftop
garden and landscape area shall be considered in the design and to be provided.

It is expected that the Kandy City Wastewater Management Project (KCWMP) will be completed
by the time the KMTT will be in operation. Therefore the KMTT sewers shall be connected to the
Kandy sewerage system. All external pipe lines should be underground as appropriate to satisfy
the relevant standards & regulations. All internal pipe systems including necessary accessories and
fittings etc. should be fixed and tighten to satisfy the employer’s requirements and as in accordance
with the relevant standards/ regulations. Prior approval of the engineer should be obtained for pipes
and accessories/ fittings etc. in installation works.

E.5.4.3. Construction of the Drainage line belonging to Kandy Waste Water

Management Project

The proposed sewer service line of the Kandy Waste Water Management Project also runs through
KMTT and it is required to be done under the same contract of KMTT construction to meet with
the operational conditions of waste water management of Kandy city as per the drawings and
instructions issued by Kandy Waste Water Management PD. Presently the water Trunk Main is
running under the existing road and needs to be relocated outside the KMTT site or a suitable
alternate arrangement as it is in conflict with the proposed main storm water drainage canal and
peripheral drain trace, before construction commences. Since the proposed location is in a highly
built-up area in an undulating terrain the space management without disturbing the city functions
is challenging.

E.5.5. RAINWATER HARVESTING

E.5.5.1. Standards

Rainwater Harvesting system shall conform to Code of Practice BS 8515: 2009.

Rainwater harvesting system will be designed in accordance with requirements stipulated by Sri
Lanka Gazette Notification dated 17 April 2009 on ‘The Urban Development Authority Law, No.
414 of 1978’ , Green building rating system in urban development authority and guidelines of
relevant local administrative authorities.

246
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.5.5.2. Preliminary Planning

It is required to indicate clearly intended usage, parameters and conditions that are to be applied in
conceptual design stage. The following requirements shall be addressed during the conceptual
design stage backed by detailed calculations.

 Assessment of Metrological department data for the recorded rainfall in the vicinity of the
site.

 Roof surfaces will be suitably selected as the rainwater catchment.

 Rainwater harvesting tank / sump volume shall be adequate to meet requirements stipulated
in UDA regulations and the green rating system in urban development authority.

 Harvested rain water shall be used for toilet flushing after proper filtration and irrigation

E.5.5.3. Filtration system

In general any kind of rainwater harvesting system, in which collected water is destined for
anything other than garden irrigation, is essential that dust, debris, bird droppings, leaves and other
contaminants accumulated on roofs are kept out when it starts to rain. Therefore it is necessary to
define steps and relevant components in the cleansing process. It is required to highlight operation
and maintenance procedure of the system.

However, as a pre-filtration process, first flush out system is recommended in the rainwater
harvesting system to flush out initially contaminated water from the system. Approved filtration
system with lesser operational and maintenance cost, prior supplying water to toilet flushing shall
be installed.

E.5.5.4. System Description for Rainwater Harvesting

It is required to indicate important basic components that are to be used in developing the system.
Considering the adoptability of above main components, it is required to indicate necessary
provisions for installation of components. These details shall be finalized at the design development
and arranged to incorporate those in the architectural drawings too.

Rainwater storage tank/ sump is required to be installed/ constructed so as enable to fill with a
gravity fed system from the roof catchment. This tank can be coupled with a reserve of any other
category of usage for effective system design. Methodologies to minimize capital as well as
operational and maintenance costs shall be encouraged during components design stage.

E.5.5.5. Backup water supply for Rainwater Storage Tank

It is essential to choose a source of water supply to look after supplementary water supply need as

247
.Section VII E. Specifications
well as entire water demand, under particular category of water usage, for the duration absence of
natural rain. This source for backup water supply for the rainwater supply tank shall be equal or
superior quality water compared to usual rainwater collected to the tank. Backup water supply
source has to be a reliable continuous supply to be enabling relies on.

E.5.6. STORM WATER DISPOSAL SYSTEM

E.5.6.1. Preliminary Planning

Following requirements shall be fulfilled at the conceptual design stage for storm water drainage
in the site limit while accommodating flow from the upstream catchment.

1. The Metrological department data for the recorded rainfall in the vicinity of the site will be
made available (Preferably recent 10 years period).

2. contour survey map to indicate ground topography

3. Building finish floor and external ground formation levels shall be finalized in line with
landscape design planning.

4. Ensure that surface drainage of abutting properties will not be adversely affected by the
development

5. Limit the extend of impervious surface

6. Reuse storm water for irrigation or any other suitable purposes (where possible)

7. Undergo preliminary treatment system to improve the quality of storm water before it exists
the site (thrush racks, silt traps etc.)

8. The excess rainwater falling on the ground within the KMTT footprint shall be discharged
via the storm water drains into the main canal (Meda Ela)

E.5.6.2. System Description for Storm water Drainage

Storm water disposal system includes:

1. Gutters and Rainwater down pipes

2. Rain water collecting tanks/sump inside the building including filtration systems and pipe
network on the ground outside buildings

3. Side drains of internal roads

4. Drains along the periphery of the site boundary.

Disposal of rain water from the roof of buildings and open areas are the concern under this topic.

248
.Section VII E. Specifications
Methodologies on developing the Storm water disposal system should be clearly defined and
indicated in the proposal. The system development is required to be in harmony with landscape,
retaining structures, topography, internal road network etc. Storm water disposal route should be
planned in such a manner avoiding disturbances for vehicular and human circulation, while
ensuring cleared from spot pooling within the premises.

Peripheral drains join the main canal (Meda Ela) from the Peradeniya Road side. During the tail
end of the realignment of the main canal (Meda Ela), the peripheral drains will still drain into the
existing main canal (Meda Ela). However, there will be a switch from the existing main canal
(Meda Ela) to the new alignment. Household drains currently run into the main canal (Meda Ela)
inside the KMTT footprint. These lines shall be taken into consideration when designing the
peripheral drains so that all these lines will run into the peripheral drains which will then run into
the realigned main canal (Meda Ela).

Finally storm water is required to be discharged via the storm water drains into the main canal
(Meda Ela), after meeting the requirements of relevant authorities.

E.5.6.3. Main Canal Development

The drain that runs east to the dividing ridge near Ampitiya in which the Kandy lake is situated, is
known as Meda Ela (Main Canal). It carries overflow from storm water from Kandy Lake. It was
originally an open natural stream and was converted into a stone/brick masonry drain in about
1920. It runs in West direction as a tunnel of about 461m, thereafter runs in a south-westerly
direction as a tunnel for another 70m and becomes an open channel at about 531m from the
spillway.

It runs as an open channel up to goods shed bus stand where the proposed KMTT will be
constructed and crosses the existing bus stand as covered underground section before it becomes
an open channel on the other side of the bus stand. Meda Ela (Main Canal) is considered a major
conveyance for Storm water discharge in the Kandy city and discharges its waters in to the
Mahaveli River at Getambe.

With the rapid urbanization of the city the main canal has been encroached at several places and
poses a threat to flooding of the surrounding areas. The section of the covered drain in the Project
area is in a poor state with the remaining masonry drain which has deteriorated requiring
reconstruction and rehabilitation.

Construction of new canal diversion & connect to the existing main canal (Meda Ela) at the
upstream & downstream ends at the designated locations. Canal diversion works include:

249
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Setting out and trial pits and testing.

 Temporary sheet piling or any other forms of piling/shoring and shoring works.

 Construction of main canal including manholes, silt traps, trash screen.

 Construction of peripheral canal/drain and associated structures.

 Diversions, over pumping and cofferdams.

 Construction of merging sections at inlet and outlet.

 Demolish/clear the existing main canal in section where it becomes redundant after the
construction of the diverted new canal and fill where necessary.

 Until the completion & commissioning of the new canal diversion the piles located on the
trace of existing main canal should be delayed.

Drainage capacity in main canal (Meda Ela) has to be improved, within the limit of site premises,
to cater for development related to KMTT project. It requires diversion of the main canal in
harmony with proposed KMTT development in a safe and orderly manner, for the affected stretch
of the canal. Household drains currently run into the main canal (Meda Ela) inside the KMTT
footprint. These lines shall be taken into consideration when designing the peripheral drains. Canal
shall lead the spill water from the Kandy city lake, while accommodating storm water in the
downstream catchment of the lake. Design shall consider maximum spill flow from the lake for a
100 year flood, while storm water flow in downstream catchment for a 10 years return period.

Conveyance system and necessary hydraulic structures shall be designed using updated
meteorological data and catchment pattern. Further, design shall foresee potential future changes
in the catchment as well as upstream water bodies.

E.5.7. SANITARY INSTALLATIONS

E.5.7.1. General

Sanitary installation shall be carried out as per approved drawings/samples and in accordance with
the BS EN (British standards) & SLS (Sri Lanka standards) standards. Associated appliances and
fittings shall be compatible. Relevant tests to be done at such time and in such manner as the
Engineer/Consultant shall direct and to his satisfaction.

All toilet fittings selection, installation and requirements of appliances shall conform to relevant
BS EN & SLS standards or to be as specified in specification of ICTAD SCA/4/II and subjected to
engineers’ approval and the supplied by a reputed supplier having minimum of 5 years continuous

250
.Section VII E. Specifications
business for the product.

Luxury type fittings shall be supplied to individual toilets based on employer’s requirement.

All taps, shower appliances, cocks and floor waste covers used in the plumping installation shall
be chromium plated brass or stainless steel. 5 year warranty period shall be provided for these shall
be in working order.

Special facilities for disable persons to be provided with grab rail set, stainless steel studs & other
necessary accessories shall be provided in disable toilets.

As per the green rating system recommendations, target performance to reduce water usage for
various fixtures are as below.

Table E.14: Target performance of fixtures

Fixture Type Recommended values

Shower heads 1.32 GPM
Basin taps and mixers (public) 0.52 GPM
WC flush valves (per flush) 0.95 GPF
Urinal flush valves (per flush) 0.13 GPF

a. All sanitary fittings shall be subjected to approval of the client.

b. All sanitary fittings shall be local or European make.

c. All taps and valves shall be Japanese or European make.

d. Water closets shall be provided with cisterns and bidet showers and urinals shall be
provided with automatic sensor type flush valves.

e. Wash basins shall be provided with mirrors.

f. All toilets (individual or toilet blocks) shall be provided with at least one bib tap.

g. All Squatting pans shall be provided with bib taps and bidet showers.

E.5.7.2. Appliances

E.5.7.2.1. Water closet & cistern

Low level close coupled back to wall water closet in white vitreous china, 100 mm dia. ‘P/S’ trap,
symphonic system, hinged acrylic soft closing seat and lid complete with dual flush 6/4.5 liter
capacity cistern with chromium plated flexible hose and other necessary fixtures.

E.5.7.2.2. Squatting pan

251
.Section VII E. Specifications
Approved colour ceramic squatting pan with high/ medium level cistern, consisting with 100mm
diameter ‘P/S’ trap, symphonic system with chromium plated flexible hose and other necessary
fixtures.

E.5.7.2.3. Wall mounted type wash basin

510mm x 420mm wall mounted type wash basin in overall white vitreous china including 40mm
(1 ¼”) dia. plastic bottle trap, 20mm (1/2”) dia. 01 no. lever type handled pillar tap of approved
quality, 40mm (1 ¼”) dia. waste plug and chain, chromium plated flexible hose and other necessary
fixtures.

E.5.7.2.4. Vanity type wash basin

Vanity type wash basin in overall white vitreous china including 40mm (1 ¼”) dia. plastic bottle
trap, 20mm (1/2”) dia. 01 no. lever type handled pillar tap of approved quality, 40mm (1 ¼”) dia.
waste plug and chain, chromium plated flexible hose and other necessary fixtures.

E.5.7.2.5. Stainless steel sink

Stainless steel sink including chromium plated swan neck tap of approved quality, plastic bottle
trap, 1 ½” dia. waste plugs and chains, chromium plated flexible hose, semi concealed brackets
with all necessary accessories. Grade 316 stainless steel shall be used.

E.5.7.2.6. Hand spray unit, shower roses, taps & traps

These shall be stainless steel based on employer’s requirement (grade 316). Traps shall be of such
designs that do not allow accumulation of deposits.

E.5.8. SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

Planning of Solid Waste Management techniques shall follow the guidelines of Central
Environmental Authority (CEA) of Sri Lanka and relevant Kandy Municipal Council (KMC)
requirements and also shall be in compliance with any other stakeholder authority requirements.
During the development of the Management system, National and International ‘colour codes’ for
waste collection bins should be considered.

In-house ‘solid wastes’ shall be handled by ‘Waste Management Team (WMT)’ appointed by
employer or his authority. All the solid waste generated in the building complex shall be transferred
to final collection chamber in a segregated form, as assign with colour codes.

Garbage collection points (room) shall be allocated at each floor levels of the building. Solid waste
generated in a floor shall be collected in segregated pattern and store in this room, until transferring
those by WMT to the final collection chamber as sooner possible.

252
.Section VII E. Specifications
Storage capacity, for short-term biodegradable wastes, shall be made available in a cool-room, with
temperature below 10 0C at the final waste collection chamber. This final solid waste collection
chamber shall be located in a convenient place having trouble free access path to reach local
authority garbage collection truck.

Proper solid waste management proposal shall be included describing solid waste load calculation
and methodologies for reducing, reuse and garbage floor wise.

Table E.15: Recommended Products, Materials and Equipment

No. Description Recommended Products

Manufacture/Brand Country of Origin
Name
01 Cold Water Supply Pipes (UPVC PNT 11 S-loan / National/ Sri Lanka
pipes with fittings) Anton
02 Hot Water Pipes (Polypropylene PN20 Wavinpilsa or Turkey
and fittings are Polypropylene PN 20) equitant
03 Cold Water Supply Pipes (Polypropylene Wavinpilsa or Turkey
PN16/20 and fittings are Polypropylene equitant
PN 16/20)
04 Sewer and Waste Water Pipes (UPVC S-loan / National/ Sri Lanka
PNT 7 pipes) Anton
05 UPVC Drainage fittings (Compatibility Shanko/Era/Sloan/ India / China / Sri
to be recommended by the pipe supplier) National/Anton Lanka
06 Gate Valves “Kitz/Peglar” or Japan/UK
equivalent
07 Stop Valves “Kitz/Peglar” or Japan/UK
equivalent
08 Ball Float Valves “Peglar” UK
09 Foot Valves “Z-tide” Thaiwan
10 Transfer Pump MAS DAF/ Turkey/Europe
Grundfos or
equivalent
11 Booster Pump MAS DAF/ Turkey/Europe
Grundfos or
equivalent
12 Water Closet DURAVIT Germany/Sri Lanka
Durastyle/ Rocel
Riviera or equivalent
13 Wash Basin DURAVIT D-CODE Germany/Sri Lanka
/ Rocel Riviera or
equivalent

253
.Section VII E. Specifications
No. Description Recommended Products
Manufacture/Brand Country of Origin
Name
14 Urinals DURAVIT Germany/Sri Lanka
Durastyle CODE /
Rocel Flo or
equivalent
15 Taps Euro Bath/ Grohe or Europe
equivalent

E.6. MECHANICAL WORKS

E.6.1. GENERAL

Table E.16: Site Environmental Conditions

Altitude, reference to the mean sea

465
level (m)
Maximum ambient temperature 33 ⁰ C
Minimum ambient air temperature 20 ⁰ C
Relative humidity – Maximum 95%
Relative humidity – Annual average 76%

E.6.2. SCOPE OF WORKS

The contractor shall carry out the design, supply, delivery, erection, connection, testing and
commissioning and maintenance during detect liability period of all the equipment and material for
following mechanical works.

 Fire detection and Protection system

 Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation System

 Lifts and Escalators

 Building Management System

 Cold Room – Garbage Collection

 Fuel Pumping System

 Centralized Gas Distribution and Detection System

The design information developed by the Engineer are enclosed here with for information purposes

254
.Section VII E. Specifications
(only as guidance) of the bidders and aiming the complete design developments/improvements by
the bidder. Spaces for main equipment chillers, chilled water and condenser pumps, cooling towers,
air handling units, primary air handling units, fire pumps, fire command center, lift and escalators,
and mechanical service ducts have been incorporated in the Architectural drawings for information
only. The detailed calculation for selection of equipment shall be submitted and obtained the
engineer’s approval before purchasing the equipment.

However, contractors shall not be expected to make major changes/deviations for the spaces
provided for major equipment and general arrangements of equipment since the Architectural
drawings have already been almost finalized.

Considering all the circumstances it is the contractor’s responsibility to review the adequacy of the
existing design information drawings and submit contractors proposal to achieve the employers
requirements as described herein.

If the contractor is not capable of handling all the mechanical services directly, the contractor has
to select sub-contractors having experience and qualifications in relevant specialty to carry out all
the mechanical systems stipulated above. The main contractor shall corporate and coordinate all
the specialist contractors’ works.

The contractor shall be obtained certificate of conformity relevant to fire protection system from
Fire Services Department on completion of work. Furthermore, complete detailed drawing of the
all above fire detection and protection system including floor plans and schematic diagrams shall
be certified by Authorized Person prior to submit the same to the Fire Services Department on
completion.

All equipment and components shall be brand new, and of manufacturer's current models. The
materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized
approval agency for use as part of a protected premises protective signaling (fire alarm) system.
All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with each manufacturer's
recommendations. Samples and manufacturer's technical literature shall be submitted for
Engineer's approval before the installation. All samples shall be supplied by the Contractor at his
own expenses.

E.6.3. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

E.6.3.1. Fire Detection and Protection System

All equipment and material used and Fire Detection and Protection shall meet the requirements of
the relevant standards / publications.

255
.Section VII E. Specifications

E.6.3.1.1. Fire Detection System

a. British Standards Institution

BS 5445 Components of automatic fire detection systems

Part 5 : Heat sensitive detectors

Part 7 :Specifications for point type smoke detectors using scattered light transmitted light
or ionization

Part 8 : Specifications for high temperature heat detectors

BS 5839 Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings

Part 1 :Code of practice for system design, installation and servicing.

Part 2 : Specifications for manual call points.

Part 4 : Specifications for control and indicating equipment.

BS 5499 Safety signs including fire safety signs

Part 1 : Code of practice for escape route signing

Part 10 : Guidance for the selection and use of safety signs and fire safety notices

BS 7629 Electrical Cables

Part 1 : Specification for 300/500V fire resistance screened cables having low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire

b. Fire regulations of Institute for Construction Training and Development of the Ministry of
Housing, Construction and Public Utilities, Sri Lanka

c. All requirements of the Fire Services Department of Colombo Municipality.

d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of America

e. ICTAD/DEV/14 Fire Regulation (Rev. 2018)

E.6.3.1.2. Fire Protection System

a. British Standards Institution

BS 5306 Part 1 - Hydrant Systems, Hose Reels and Foam Inlets (formally CP 402)

256
.Section VII E. Specifications
Part 2 - Sprinkler System

Part 3 - Portable Fire Extinguishers

BS 334 - Fire Hose Couplings and Ancillary equipment

Part 1 - Specifications for landing valves for wet risers

BS EN 12845:2004+A2:2009 - Fixed Fire Fighting System, Design, Installation and maintenance

BS 5274 - Fire hose reels (water) for fixed installation

BS EN 3 - Fire extinguishing System

BS EN 671 - Fire hose reel system

BS EN 15004 – Fixed firefighting system, Gas extinguishing system

ISO 14520 – Gaseous fire –extinguishing system

b. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of America

NFPA 2001 : Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 750 : Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection Systems

NFPA 17A : Standards on Wet Chemical Extinguishing System

NFPA15 : Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection

NFPA 20 : Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection

NFPA 25 : Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire
Protection Systems

NFPA 96 :Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operation

BS EN 15004 : Fixed firefighting systems. Gas extinguishing system

ISO 14520 : Gaseous fire-extinguishing systems

c. All requirements of the Fire Services Department of Colombo Municipality.

d. ICTAD/DEV/14 Fire Regulation (Rev. 2018)

E.6.3.2. Air Conditioning & Ventilation System and Refrigeration (Cold Rooms)

Code of practice for Energy Efficient Buildings in Sri Lanka 2008.

ASHRAE 90.1 (2013): Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings I-P
Edition

257
.Section VII E. Specifications
ASHRAE 62.1-2007 : Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

ASHRAE 55-2004 : Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy

ASHRAE whether data

CIBSE Guide A : Environmental Design January 2006 (7th edition). Chartered Institution of
Building Services Engineers, London.

SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association

BS 5588 Part 4 : Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of buildings Part 4:
Code of practice for smoke control using pressure differentials Department
of Meteorology, Sri Lanka.

ASHRAE 150: 2019 : Method of Testing the Performance of Cool-Storage Systems

ASHRAE : Refrigeration Handbook

ANSI/AHRI 540 : Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors

and Compressor Units

AHRI 1250 : Performance Rating of Walk In Coolers and Freezers

EN 14509:2013 : Self-supporting Double Skin Metal Faced Insulating Panels

BS EN 16855-1:2017 : Walk In Cold Rooms - Definition, thermal insulation performance and test
methods

BS EN 13771-1:2016 : Compressors and condensing units for refrigeration. Performance testing

and test methods Refrigerant compressors

EN 10143:2006 : Continuously Hot-Dip Coated Steel Sheet and Strip

EN 12900 : Refrigerant Compressors – Rating conditions, tolerances and presentation of

manufacturer’s performance data

BS EN 378 : Refrigeration and Heat Pumps (all parts of the standard)

BS EN ISO 4126 : Safety devices for pressure relief

BS 1012-2 : 2010: Compressors and Vacuum Pumps

BS 1306 : 1975:Specifications for copper and copper piping

BS 2502 :Specification for manufacture of sectional cold rooms

BS 7671 :IEE Wiring Regulation

258
.Section VII E. Specifications
BS 5266-1:2011 :Emergency Lighting

E.6.3.3. Elevators and Escalators

Relevant part of BS. EN 81-1, EN-72 and EN-70:2003

IEE Regulations for Electrical Equipment in Buildings

Regulations and Recommendations of the Ceylon Electricity Board and the Sri Lanka Standards
Institution

Other recognized national or international specifications, not less exacting than those above may
be used, provided that the latest edition of such specification (in English) had been furnished with
the tender and accepted.

E.6.3.4. Fuel Pumping System

a. American National Standards Institute

ANSI - NFPA 30 : Flammable and combustible liquid code

ANSI- UL 87 : Power operated dispensing devices for petroleum products.

ANSI - UL 57 : Steel underground tanks for flammable and combustible liquids

ANSI- UL 79 : Power Operated pumps for petroleum product dispensing system

b. British Standards Institution

BS 2594 : Horizontal mild steel welded storage tanks.

BS 799 (Part 5) : Oil burning equipment – Specification for oil storage tanks.

E.6.3.5. LP gas distribution system

a. British Standards Institution

BS 5482 : Code of practice for domestic butane- and propane-gas-burning

installation.

BS EN 50073:1999 : Guide for selection, installation, use and maintenance of apparatus

for the detection and measurement of combustible gases or oxygen.

b. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of America

NFPA 58 : Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code

c. ICTAD/DEV/14 Fire Regulation (Rev. 2018)

d. SLS 1196; Part 3 : LPG piping system – Design and Installation

259
.Section VII E. Specifications

E.6.4. SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT

When determine the type of equipment, to be specified/ used for mechanical systems, following
parameters shall be considered;

 Complying with stipulated standards

 Functional suitability for the application

 Reliability and durability

 Efficiency

 Ease of maintenance

 Suitability for ambient conditions

 Suitability in appearance

Since this proposed building to be located at high humid environment, special attentions/
precautions shall be made during selecting the equipment and execution.

Further, following requirements shall be fulfilled while supplying the equipment

Table E.17: Air Conditioning and Ventilation System

Item Requirement
1. Chillers
The manufacturer of the equipment shall have at
2. Air Handling Unit least fifteen (15) years experience in the Design
and Manufacture of similar type air conditioners
3. Fan Coil Unit
and make of offered equipment shall have at
4. Pumps least five (05) years proven service record in Sri
5. Cooling Tower Lanka.

6. Exhaust Fan

Table E.18: Elevators and Escalators

Item Manufacturer/Brand Name

1. Lifts The manufacturer of the equipment shall

have at least fifteen (15) years experience in
2. Escalators the Design and Manufacture of similar type
air conditioners and make of offered
equipment shall have at least five (05) years
proven service record in Sri Lanka.

260
.Section VII E. Specifications

Table E.19: Fire Detection and Protection System

Item Manufacturer / Brand Name

1. Fire Pumps The manufacturer of the equipment shall
have at least fifteen (15) years experience in
2. Landing Valves, Hose Reels, Pillar the Design and Manufacture of similar type
Hydrants, Valves etc. air conditioners and make of offered
equipment shall have at least five (05) years
3. Detection system – Initiating proven service record in Sri Lanka
Devices, Alarm Devices, Fire
Detection Cables
Note:

The reference made here to certain manufacturers` products and items identified by registered trade
marks, this has been done for the sole purpose of defining and establishing standards of quality and
performance and not with the intention of restricting the procurement of materials or fittings to a
particular manufacturer.

E.6.5. GREEN ASPECTS

The employer expect to apply for the “Silver or above” grade under “Blue-Green Sri Lanka”, the
green building guideline published by Urban Development Authority (UDA). The contractor shall
refer the guideline and the design shall be carried out in order to achieve the maximum points to
be obtained.

Maximum points which can be attained by the contractor’s design shall be submitted with the
calculations and any other documents as evidence and proofs.

E.6.6. PRODUCT REVIEW AND FACTORY INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURE’S

FACILITIES

Factory Acceptance Test (FATs), Pre-Dispatch Inspection, Product Review and Awareness
Programs on major plants and equipment of mechanical systems as specified in below (Sub-section
5.6.1 to 5.6.4) followed by factory inspection for witnessing the manufacturing process and quality
control process shall be conducted at the Manufacture’s Overseas Facility for two representatives
of Employer and two representatives of Engineer

All costs (Air Tickets, Travelling, and Lodging etc.) for the representatives of Employer and
representatives of Engineer (04 persons) participating for the above program at the manufacture’s
facility shall be borne by the Contractor.

Those programs shall cover the main topics and procedures as mentioned below ( Sub-section 5.6.1

261
.Section VII E. Specifications
to 5.6.4).

E.6.6.1. Factory Acceptance Tests - Chillers

The Following tests and checks shall be carried out in the manufacturer’s works and test certificates
issued by an approved Testing Authority shall be submitted.

 All tests as required by the manufacturer’s practice or applicable standards during

manufacturing stage.

 Chiller Performance Test in accordance with ARI 550/590 to achieve ASHRAE standard
90.1 requirements at ARI 550/590 stipulated testing procedure at following load points.

o At 100% load point

o At 75% load point

o At 50% load point

o At 25% load point

During the above factory test the manufacturer shall be able to satisfactorily prove to the Engineer
that the efficiencies of water cooled packaged chillers shall meet the stipulated minimum
efficiencies as per ASHRAE Standard 90.1 at ARI 550/590 specified conditions. In addition to the
above all other functional tests required by the Engineer shall be performed by the manufacturer at
the manufacturer’s works.

In the event of not performing above factory acceptance tests to achieve the required rating
to the satisfaction of the Engineer then chiller plant under consideration will not be accepted
for incorporation in the work.

E.6.6.2. BMS Product Review and Factory Inspection at Manufacture’s Facility

BMS System Product Review and Familiarization Program including Factory Inspection shall be
conducted at the Manufacture’s Facility. This program shall cover the following main topics with
regards to the BMS System.

 Basic techniques of control engineering

 BMS introduction and best practices

 Brief introduction on various components of a BMS

 DDC controllers

 BMS related sensors

262
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Method of interfacing with auxiliary devices including their limitations

 I/O configuration

 Trends, schedules, alarms and report generation

 Graphics generations

 Limitation of BMS

 Backup and restore plan

 Factory visit to obtain first hand information on the standards manufacturing process of
BMS controllers, performance testing, quality control procedure.

E.6.6.3. Chilled Water Pumps / Condensed Water Pumps

All chilled water pumps & condensed water pumps shall be factory tested to determine the capacity,
specific power consumption, efficiency, MEI level etc. the efficiency of the pumps shall not be less
than 70% and Minimum Efficiency Index (MEI) shall be not less than 0.4. The hydraulic
performance acceptance test of chilled water pumps/ condensed water pumps shall be done
according to ANSI/HI 14.6.

E.6.6.4. Lift & Escalators

The Engineer / Engineer’s representative shall inspect the manufacturer’s premises for
manufacturing process and testing procedures of the lift & escalators for ensuring proper quality
and standards to be maintained.

During the above factory tests the manufacturer shall be able to satisfactorily prove to the Engineer
that the equipment is in line with requirements stipulated in relevant standards and modern
engineering practice.

E.6.6.5. Cold Room

The Engineer / Engineer’s representative shall inspect the manufacturer’s premises for
manufacturing process and testing procedures of the refrigeration unit for ensuring proper quality
and standards to be maintained.

During the above factory tests the manufacturer shall be able to satisfactorily prove to the Engineer
that the equipment is in line with requirements stipulated in AHRI standards and modern
engineering practice.

E.6.6.6. Fire Pumps

All the fire pumps shall be factory tested to determine the operating point, churn head (no flow

263
.Section VII E. Specifications
head), NPSHR and the discharge water flow rate of the pump at 65% of the rated pressure. The
hydraulic performance acceptance test of fire pumps shall be done according to ANSI/HI 14.6 and
NFPA 20.

E.6.7. WARRANTY

All equipment & accessories shall be given minimum one year warranty from the date of handing
over the project to owner after substantial completion unless specifically mention in the relevant
sections of the specifications. The warranty shall include plant/equipment/parts and labor costs for
the repair or replacement of defects in material or workmanship.

Warranty for chiller compressors, chilled water pumps, condenser water pumps, fire pumps, motors
and control panels of elevators and escalators shall be provided for a period of ten years.

E.6.8. MAINTENANCE STRATEGY

Maintenance strategy for the all mechanical works carried out under the scope of mechanical works
of the building after the Contractor’s defects notification period shall be furnished with the
Proposal. Local agent’s confirmation on maintenance ability and spare parts availability for
following major equipment shall be submitted. But shall not be limited to the same.

Table E.20: Major Equipment for Mechanical System

Mechanical System Major Equipment

Chillers
Compressor units of chillers
Chilled water/ condenser water pumps
Air Conditioning System Cooling towers
Motorized valve
Air Handling Units (AHUs)
Variable Speed Drive Units
Fire Protection and Detection Fire Pumps
System
Fire Alarm Control panel
Building Management System Supervisory Control Panel
Direct Digital Controllers
Fuel Pumping System Dispenser Units/ Pumps
Cold Storage for Wet Garbage, Cold Rooms
Kitchen etc.

264
.Section VII E. Specifications

E.6.9. SYSTEMS

E.6.9.1. Fire Detection System

E.6.9.1.1. General

The type of the system required for the building shall be decided based on the class of fire as per
the classification given in BS 5839. Furthermore the system shall be complied with the Local Fire
Regulation (CIDA/DEV/14, 2018) and relevant standards. The contractor shall obtain the Fire
Approval for the project from the Fire Service Department.

The building complex shall be provided with addressable fire detection system. Main Fire Alarm
control panel, two way communication system equipment, personal computer and printer shall to
be provided in the Fire Command Centre provided in the building. Repeater panel shall be be
installed in the Monitor & Control Room (24 hours monitoring facility) that can monitor the
detection systems. The system shall be an addressable type system which shall have the capability
to detect and identify exact location of the fault. Unique identification which is known as “address”
can be assigned to each and every points. With the help of this address once any point is activated,
the system shall have the capability to indicate the details such as location, type of device, the
response at the panel.

As building complex is consists with 03 nos of multi storied buildings (i.e. Parking Building,
Terminal Building and Railway side Building) and a Sky Walk, zoning system is identified. Sub
Fire Alarm Control Panels shall be installed at the each building and same shall be interconnected
with Main Fire Alarm Control Panel, which shall be installed at the Fire Command center. Location
of the Fire Command Centre (FCC) shall be decided by the Contractor and the same shall be
incorporated in to the architectural drawings. The minimum area of the FCC shall be 10m2.

A software tool shall be installed to the personal computer and which shall compatible with the fire
alarm control panel. All the features of FACP shall be virtually displayed on the PC via the software
tool with continuous data logging and storing.

Main components of the system shall be as follows.

E.6.9.1.2. Main/Sub Control panel

Control panels shall be located at the Fire Command Center and dedicated room at each building.
The panel shall have the capability to communicate with the Building Manage System.

265
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.6.9.1.3. Repeater panels

Repeater panel shall be located at a place where 24 hr monitoring designated by the employer. (i.e.
Entrance Lobbies, Maintenance Rooms etc.)

E.6.9.1.4. Smoke detectors

Smoke detectors shall be provided on the ceilings at lobbies, office areas, auditoriums, conference
rooms, inside the air conditioning ducts, lift shafts, plant rooms, generator rooms, panel rooms,
electrical ducts, etc.

E.6.9.1.5. Ducted Smoke detectors

Ducted smoke detectors shall be installed at the main rerun air duct of each Air handling Unit
(AHU) and where appropriate.

E.6.9.1.6. Heat detectors

Heat detectors shall be placed on the ceilings at pantry, cafeteria, car park area etc.

E.6.9.1.7. Audible alarms

Alarm sounders shall be placed at every lobby and all the enclosed areas to maintain the minimum
decibel level of 65dB at office and common spaces and 10dB than the surrounding sound level at
car parks, service areas etc (if the sound level is higher than 65dB and less than 90dB).

E.6.9.1.8. Combined Audible & Visual alarms

Combined Audible & Visual alarms shall be placed at each lobby levels where the disable lift is
landed, every disable toilets, auditorium, plant rooms and other areas where the surrounding sound
level is more than 90dB.

E.6.9.1.9. Manual call points

Manual call points shall be provided at the start and end of escape routes in the building and any
location to maintain the maximum travelling distance to nearest call point less than 45m.

E.6.9.1.10. Short Circuit modules

Short Circuits modules shall be placed between each floor level to isolate the circuit.

E.6.9.1.11. Interface with other systems

Further the system shall be interfaced with the Air conditioning and ventilation system. In a
situation of fire smoke control system shall be operated to prevent spreading of smoke. This shall
be achieved by actuating the staircase & lobby pressurization fans, by shutting down all the fire
dampers and air handlers etc. Integrated Fire-fighting Smoke Control Panel shall be introduced for

266
.Section VII E. Specifications
remote controlling of fans and dampers for pressurization system and smoke extraction system.

The elevators and the fire detection system shall be interfaced with automatic recall system in order
to bring the elevator to the ground floor in case of fire.

Basement ventilation system and fire detection system shall be integrated to increase the speed of
exhaust and supply fans to maintain 10 ACH at fire situation.

Fire detection system shall interface with Emergency Voice Evacuation System (EVES) and Public
Address System to make alert or evacuation announcements during a fire by EVES while
overriding any music or tuner distributed via Public Address System.

The system shall interface with Door Access Control System for controlling and monitoring of
access-controlled doors required under security aspects, Smoke Control system and evaluation
purposes of the building.

The system shall interface with CCTV System in order to focus the relevant camera towards the
active fire detector or manual call point for identifying actual fire condition if any through building
management system (BMS).

The detection system shall interface with fire protection system to monitor the on/off status of the
fire pumps (sprinkler & hydrants), open/closed status of the zone control valves, activation of
sprinkler at each floor level and water level of the fire sump

The system shall interface with water mist systems, inert gas system and kitchen wet chemical
suppression system for monitoring the status of the systems.

Make provision in Fire Alarm Control Panel to transmit an alarm signal to the Fire Services
Department, Colombo.

All above interfaces shall be completed in order to facilitate the phase evacuation of the building
at fire and emergency situations. Hence all sounder output shall be programmed as Alert tone
(intermittent pulsed tone) and Evacuate tone (continuous tone).

E.6.9.1.12. Exit/Fire Exit sign boards

EXIT sign board shall be installed to define the exit route and FIRE EXIT sign board s shall be
installed to define the evacuation path at a fire situation. Contractor shall decide the location and
mounting method of Exit/Fire Exit sign board by examine the exit/ escape routes and same shall
be placed to assist an occupant to leave the building or premises without any other disturbances.
All the configuration and installation of Exit/ Fire Exit sign board shall comply to BS 5499 and
Exit/Fire Exit sign boards shall be internally illuminated type with LED lamps and battery backup.

267
.Section VII E. Specifications
Other safety sign boards and fire safety notices shall be displayed at appropriate locations as per
BS 5499.

E.6.9.1.13. Fire resistant cable, conduits

The wiring and conduit system for Fire Detection System shall be completely segregated from all
other wiring systems and shall be in accordance with the IEE Regulations.

All wirings shall be enclosed in conduit run in the following manner,

 Wiring within false ceiling spaces and all other areas shall be PVC concealed conduits to
be chased in wall cast in columns/ concrete slabs or clipped soffit as directed by the
engineer.

 Wiring within riser ducts, electrical switch-rooms, substations and mechanical pant rooms
shall be in surface mounted or hanged in G.I. conduits.

o All wiring/ cable dropping from the concrete slab to the false ceiling shall be drawn
in flexible steel conduits not more than 1m in length.

The wiring shall be carried out with fire resistant cables complied with BS 6387, CWZ and BS
7629.

Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer,
but not less than 1.5mm2 for initiating device circuits and signal line circuits, and 2.5 mm2 for
notification appliances circuits.

Cable Construction

Fire resistant cable shall be consisting of conductors, insulation, screen, earth wiring and sheath.
The insulated conductors shall be plain or tinned annealed copper. Minimum insulation thickness
of conductors shall be 0.7 mm for 1.5 mm2 conductor and 0.8 mm for 2.5 mm2. The earth wire
shall comprise one or more tinned annealed copper wires with total nominal cross section area not
less than 0.5 mm2. Sheath shall be LSZH (Low Smoke Zero Halogen) and radial thickness of
sheath shall not be less than 0.9 mm for 1.5 mm2 and 1.0 mm for 2.5 mm2. Screen shall be made
from one or more metallic or laminated metallic tape(s) and applied longitudinal or helically or a
combination of both. The minimum thickness of the metallic element of the screen shall be 0.008.

E.6.9.1.14. Two way fireman’s communication system

Two way fireman’s communication system shall be provided to communicate with fire fighters in
a situation of fire and interfaced with public address system in order to send warning massagers at

268
.Section VII E. Specifications
the affected areas. The system shall comply with BS 5839-9 and ICTAD/DEV/14 Fire Regulation
(Rev. 2018).

The master station of two way fireman’s communication system shall be installed at the fire
command. The master station may inbuilt in the fire alarm control panel or the same may be
installed as a separate panel with a provision to communicate the fire alarm control panel.
Outstations points of fireman’s two way communication system shall be installed in following
locations

 Each Fire Fighter’s Lobby

 Fire Pump Room

 Lift Machine Room

 Generator Room

 Chillier Plant Rooms

The fire alarm control panel, repeater panels, initiative devices, alarm devices, fire resistant cables
shall be UL listed, FM approved or LPCB approved. Relevant documents as a proof of
certifications shall be submitted with the bid.

E.6.9.2. Fire Protection System

a. General

Centralized fire protection system shall be provided for the building. Pump room shall be provided
at ground level to house all the hydrant pumps, sprinkler pumps, main vales, control panels etc.

The water requirement for the fire hydrant system and sprinklers system shall be fulfilled by the
main water sump closer to the fire pump room.

Fire protection of a building consists with following sub systems:

 Wet Riser system with Hydrants and Hose Reels

 Sprinkler System

 Inert Gas Fire Suppression System

 Water Mist System

 Portable Fire Extinguishers

 Wet Chemical System for Kitchen

269
.Section VII E. Specifications
For the wet riser fire hydrant system, duty pump, standby pump and jockey pump shall be provided
at the fire pump room and the contractor shall decide a suitable location for fire pump room and
the same shall be incorporated in to the architectural drawings.

b. Design Conditions

Fire Hydrant System

 Water quantity at furthest hydrant connection - 25 l/s

 Pressure required at furthest hydrant - 5 bar (max)

 Connection valve fully open - 4 bar (min)

 Water quantity at furthest hose reel connection- 0.5 l/s

 Minimum pressure required at hose reel nozzle- 1.25 bar

Sprinkler System

 Hazard classification - Ordinary Group II or as per the CIDA Regulations

 Sprinkler head - 15 mm (nominal size)

 Area coverage of sprinkler head - 12 m2

 Design discharge density - 5 mm/min

 Assumed maximum area of operation - 144 m2

Inert gas system

 Type of System - Triple Layer System (Protected ceiling void, room space and under
raised floor)

 Hazard classification - Class C Fire

 Design concentration - Below 43%

 Discharge time - 95% of the total quantity of extinguishing agent in 120 seconds

Water mist system

 Type of System - Pre-engineered system with self-contained water supply (Pulse

mist system)

 Hazard classification - Class B & C Fire

 Pressure Rating - High Pressure Application (> 500Psi)

270
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.6.9.2.1. Wet Riser system with Hydrants and Hose Reels

Landing vales and hose reels shall be provided inside the building at the fire-fighting lobbies and
Main lobbies as required. External hydrants shall be located outside the building in such a way that
distance from any entry is not more than 70 m, the minimum distance between any hydrant and the
building shall be 6 m and distance between two hydrants shall not be more than 90 m if required.
External fire hydrants shall be connected with the fire system through an underground ring main.

E.6.9.2.2. Fire Pumps

All the Pumps shall be vertical turbine type and the flow rates and the operating pressures shall be
selected according to the number of risers to be served and the habitable height of the building and
those selections shall be make according to the ICTAD/DEV/14 Fire Regulation (Rev. 2018). The
contractor shall not to be restricted on the Architectural design and contractor shall re-calculate the
number of risers required for complete installation. The fire pumps shall delivery water at a rate
of 150% of rated flow at a pressure of 65% of rated pressure.

Main fire pump shall be electrically driven and a continuous supply shall provide to the pump while
the standby pump shall be driven by an auxiliary power source or electrical power according to the
ICTAD/DEV/14 Fire Regulation (Rev. 2018).

All the fire pumps shall be UL listed, FM approved or LPCB approved. Relevant documents as a
proof of certifications shall be submitted with the bid.

E.6.9.2.3. Pipes

Above ground

All above ground pipes shall be seamless and complied to ASTM A53 (Hot Dipped Galvanized),
Grade B, Schedule 40, Type S (Seamless). All the precautions shall me made to prevent corrosions.

All above ground pipe shall be supported or bracketed with required distance as specified in the
standards stipulated in clause C.1.2.

All the pipe joints shall be made with Victaulic grooved couplings or similar approved mechanical
pipe couplings.

Underground ground

All underground pipes shall be HDPE pipe or ASTM A53 (Hot Dipped Galvanized), Grade B,
Schedule 40, Type S (Seamless) pipes (including all the joints) wrapping with grease impregnated
jute wrappings (Denso or equivalent) having minimum 50% overlap.

Before backfilling, pipes shall be pressure tested to 1.5 times the working pressure and maintain

271
.Section VII E. Specifications
that pressure 24 hours. The pipe shall be laid on 100mm thick fined sand layer. Soil around the
pipe shall be plain and free of stones, well compacted and back filled up to minimum height of 150
mm from the top surface of the pipe and the rest shall be filled with Aggregate Base Coat (ABC)
or sand as per drawings.

If water fills in to the trench at the construction level, contractor shall dewater and shall take the
precaution such as shoveling the trench wall etc.

As a safety precaution, warning tape shall be buried at the half of the ABC backfilling.

At paved and turf areas, minimum depth of 750 mm shall be maintained to the Centre of Pipe
(COP) from the ground level and at vehicle moving areas that minimum depth shall be maintained
as 900 mm.

E.6.9.3. Automatic Sprinkler System

Parking Areas of the building shall be protected with automatic sprinkler system. Number of
sprinklers risers required shall be decided by the contractor by considering the total building height
and the total floor area of the building.

Appropriate sprinkler type shall be decided by the contractor to match with the each serving area
(i.e. upright sprinklers, pendant sprinklers, side wall sprinklers, open sprinklers etc.).

Table E.21: Type of Sprinklers

Location/ System Type of Sprinklers

Parking Floors , floor height is less than Upright Sprinklers
3000m
Parking Floors, floor height is more than Pendent Sprinklers with sprinkler guard
3000m
Other areas (except parking) without a Side wall sprinklers
ceiling
Other areas (except parking) with a ceiling Pendent Sprinkler with ceiling
concealed type rosettes
Auditorium Drencher system Open type sprinklers
Above table is provided as a design reference but the design shall not be limited on the given data
except all the rosettes of pendant sprinklers installed at any area covered by a ceiling shall be ceiling
concealed type.

The screen of the auditorium shall be protected by manually operated drencher system including
position indication butterfly wall with enclosure box (break glass type) and open type sprinklers.
And the system shall connect with the sprinkler system at the relevant floor.

272
.Section VII E. Specifications
Sprinkler risers of building shall be tapped from the main sprinkler header. Branching and zoning
of sprinkler system shall be carried out in accordance with the BS Standards. Depending on the
zoning system numbers of sprinkler valve sets shall be provided at each floor and the same shall
be placed inside sprinkler valve room.

Zone control valve sets shall be installed where it appropriate and the same shall include zone
subsidiary stop valve with temper switch, flow switch, isolations valves, sight glass etc. the zone
subsidiary stop valve and the flow switch shall be connected with the fire alarm control panel
though a monitor module.

All the pumps, pipes and pipe installation shall be complied with the details stipulated in the clause
5.9.2.2.

All the fire pumps shall be UL listed, FM approved or LPCB approved. Relevant documents as a
proof of certifications shall be submitted with the Proposal.

E.6.9.3.1. Portable Fire Extinguishers

Water/CO2, and CO2, ABC Dry Power portable fire extinguishers shall be provided throughout
the building as per the minimum requirements stipulated in the below table.

Table E.22: Types of portable extinguishers

Location Types of portable extinguishers

Parking Floors ABC Dry Powder, CO2
Generator Room, Fire Command Centre ABC Dry Powder, CO2
Office Areas CO2/ Water, CO2

The design shall not be limited to the above minimum requirement, but shall be based on BS 5306
Part3.

E.6.9.3.2. Inert Gas Fire Suppression System:

Triple layer inert gas fire suppression systems comply with NFPA 2001- Clean agent fire
extinguishing systems shall be provided for Server Room. The Inert Gas Agent installation shall
be an engineered fixed full flooding system which is suitable for Class C energized electrical
equipment fires.

The contractor shall decide the system size, discharge times, discharge pressure etc. by a detailed
design and the appropriate location for the cylinder bank shall be decided by the contractor upon
the size and number of required cylinders. The system shall comprise with following items, but
shall not be limited to stipulated items.

273
.Section VII E. Specifications
 Control panel, Manifold, Pressure reducing unit, Nozzle, Smoke/heat detector, Alarm bell,
Strobe Light, Manual call point, Pressure gauges, Pressure relief flap, cylinder manifold
with master and slave cylinders

The system shall be incorporated with dedicated early warning detection and alarm to facilitate
confirmation of an incipient fire before release of agent.

The dedicated detection system shall act separately from the central detection system of the
building except status of the system shall be indicated through the main detection panel of the
central system.

Control panel shall be capable of communicate with Integrated Building Management System
(IBMS) regarding the system updates of the inert gas system. The control panel shall be a releasing
panel and shall be UL/LPCB listed and shall contain release circuits for activation of a fire
suppression system.

The fire suppression system shall be designed in such a way to capable of providing homogenous
concentration of inert gas throughout the covered spaces, within the required time period.

Additionally all the equipment’s including initiative devices, alarms devices shall be UL listed, FM
approved or LPCB approved. Relevant documents as a proof of certifications shall be submitted
with the bid.

All distribution piping shall be Schedule 40 seamless galvanized carbon steel pipe to ASTM A106
Grade B (latest edition). All pipe fittings such as elbows, tees, etc. shall be forged steel fittings to
ANSI B16.11 Class 3000lb (latest edition). All pipe flanges shall be steel flanges to ANSI B16.5
Class 600lb (latest edition). All threaded connections shall confirm to ANSI B1.20.1 (latest
edition).

E.6.9.3.3. Water Mist System

Wet chemical suppression system shall be provided for the generator room at ground floor and the
same shall comply with NFPA 750 - Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection Systems and the
pressure rating shall be in accordance with the listing requirement (UL300) or LPCB certified.

The system shall comprise with following items, but shall not be limited to stipulated items.

 Pressurized water container, pressurized air container, automatic spray nozzles, etc.
The system pressure and the cylinder sizes shall be decided by the contactor via detailed
calculations

An audible or visible indicator shall be provided to show that the system has operated and provision

274
.Section VII E. Specifications
to be provided to connect with the central fire detection panel to indicate the system activation. In
advance the main panel if the system shall be capable of communicate with Integrated Building
Management System (IBMS) regarding the system updates of the water mist system.

All the equipment in suppression system shall be UL listed or LPCB certified. Relevant documents
as a proof of certifications shall be submitted with the Proposal.

The pipe materials shall be non-corroded and stainless steel pipes are mostly recommended.

E.6.9.3.4. Wet Chemical Suppression System

Wet chemical suppression system (pre-engineered) shall be provided for Kitchen at Second floor
and the same shall comply with NFPA 17A – Wet Chemical Extinguishing System, UL300 - Fire
Testing of Fire Extinguishing System for Protection of Restaurant Cooking Areas and relevant
LPCB standards.

The contractor shall decide the system size, discharge times, discharge pressure etc. by a detailed
design and the appropriate location for the cylinder/s shall be decided by the contractor upon the
size and number of required cylinders.

The system shall comprise with following items, but shall not be limited to stipulated items.

 Wet Chemical Cylinders, cylinder brackets, cylinder enclosure, Mechanical Control box,
nozzles (appliance, duct and plenum), remote manual actuators (pull station), corner & three
way pulleys, fusible link detectors, liquid seal devices etc.

An audible or visible indicator shall be provided to show that the system has operated and
provision to be provided to connect with the central fire detection panel to indicate the system
activation. In advance controller box shall be capable of communicate with Integrated Building
Management System (IBMS) regarding the system updates of the wet chemical suppression
system.

All the equipment in suppression system shall be UL listed or LPCB certified. Relevant documents
as a proof of certifications shall be submitted with the bid.

All the pipes and fitting shall be noncombustible type and shall have the chemical and mechanical
characteristic to compatible with the chemical used in the suppression system.

Chrome-plated or stainless steel pipes and fittings are recommended for appropriate installation
and hot dipped galvanized is not allowed.

E.6.9.4. Air Conditioning System

E.6.9.4.1. General Details

275
.Section VII E. Specifications
a. Design Criteria/Conditions

Table E.23: Average Outdoor conditions

Description Temperature °C Relative Humidity (RH)/%

Day time 29 - 33 70-90

Night time 24 - 26 70-90

Table E.24: Indoor conditions

Space Usage/Activity level DB / °C RH % (maximum)

Office area Office/office work 24±1 55 -65

Shops Light Work 24±1 55 -65

Reception and Lobbies Light Work 25±2 55 -65

b. Humidity control

Precious Humidity control- only for Server room

c. Occupancy load

For cooling load calculations, following occupancy density for each area shall be considered as
follows,

Table E.25: Occupancy Density

Area Description
Occupancy loads in Total occupancy density is considered as the higher
office area value of 8m2/person or based on the number of
seats indicated on the Furniture lay out drawings.

d. Building envelop characteristics

Overall Heat Transfer coefficients of Roof (Non-tiled area), external walls, and internal walls shall
be selected by the contractor to match with the architectural drawings.

The performance data of glasses shall be comply with the following table

Table E.26: Performance data of glasses

Glass Type Parameter Value

276
.Section VII E. Specifications
U Value (Max.) 2.5 W/m2.°C
Single Glazing Shading Coefficient – SC (Max.) 0.3
Visible Transmissivity (VT) (Max.) 40 %
U Value (Max.) 5.0 W/m2.°C
Low E Glazing Shading Coefficient – SC (Max.) 0.8
Visible Transmissivity (VT) (Max.) 70%

e. Lighting Criteria

The maximum Light Power Density shall not be more than 10W/m2.

f. Ventilation criteria

Table E.27: Air changes per hour (ACH)

Description Air changes per hour (ACH)

Toilet exhausting flow rate 8.0 -10.0
Car park areas 6.0

Fire Pump room 6.0

g. Ventilation criteria

Table E.28: Infiltration rate

Description Infiltration rate

(when supply fan on)
Entrance lobby 0.50 ACH

h. Acoustic criteria

Table E.29: Acoustic criteria

Space NC
Open plan office (except where adjacent to plant room) 35 - 40
Small office (except where adjacent to plant room) 30 - 35
Corridors 45 - 50

277
 .Section VII E. Specifications
Space NC
Café 40 - 45
IT rooms 35 - 40
Auditorium 25 - 30
Meeting room / board rooms 30 - 35
Changing room 35 - 40

Design Margins

Table E.30: Design Margins

Description Margin

AHU selection
Safety margin for sensible load Add 10% for design sensible load

Safety margin for latent load Add 10% for design latent load
Pump selection
Primary Chilled water Pumps Design flow 10% design flow against the system design
pressure

Fan selection
Design flow 10% design flow against 15% system pressure
Chillers-Total Cooling load 10-15 %
Cooling Towers 25%

E.6.9.4.2. Specific Details

A Centralized Air Conditioning system shall be provided for the complex consists of Water Cooled
Chillers, AHUs, FCUs, Primary-secondary chilled water distribution system and Condenser water
system.

The capacities of the equipment shall be selected by the contractor using the computer simulation
licensed soft-ware “Trace”/ “Carrier HAP”. And the contractor shall decide the proper locations
for the chiller plants including chillers, pumps, control panels etc. and cooling tower locations.

All areas mentioned in the following schedule shall be air conditioned but shall not be limited to
that schedule.

Table E.31: Areas need to be air-conditioned

278
.Section VII E. Specifications

Building Floor Sample areas to be air-conditioned

1 Food Courts
2 Operator Office 1
3 Operator Office 2
4 Female Staff Rest Room
5 Pantry
6 UPS/ Data Room
7 Maintenance Office
8 Meeting Room
9 Control Room
10 Asst. Manager Office
11 Manager's Office
12 Operator Office 3
13 Management Facilities Room
14 Wet Garbage Store
Mezzanine Floor,
15 Parking Building, Ground floor, First Wet Garbage Store
Terminal Building Floor, Second
16 Waiting Area
Floor…etc, Roof
17 Terrace Super Market
18 Shops
19 Reception
20 Baby Care Room
21 First-Aid Room
22 Operators' Admin Office
23 Police Post
24 Police Post Lobby

25 Security Control Center with CCTV

26 ATM Room
27 Mini Bank
28 Ticketing Area
29 Vaults Area
30 Pharmacy

279
.Section VII E. Specifications

Building Floor Sample areas to be air-conditioned

31 Food Courts
32 Wet Garbage Store
33 Preparation Area
34 Restaurant
35 Wet Garbage Store

Additionally, areas in basement level, all toilets, and all parking areas shall be provided with
mechanical ventilation system.

The MVAC system shall be controlled via BMS (Intelligent Building Management System) and
shall circulate chilled and Condenser water through the piping network connected to Fan Coil
Units, AHUs and CTs in building.

Rentable spaces which are to be air conditioned, shall be only provided with chilled water
distribution pipes with Energy Meter by the AC contractor and the buyer shall have the
responsibility to install the air-side equipment (ducting, AC units etc.). The Energy Meter shall
compatible to communicate with BMS. Area to be rented are mentioned in the below table,

Some spaces mentioned under the section of “DETAILED MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES

TO BE INCORPORATED IN THE TERMINAL AND PARKING BUILDINGS” will be
considered as rentable spaces and air conditioning and ventilation system shall be provided as
suitably.

All plant location piping and the chiller plant room piping shall be supported on combination
rubber spring vibration isolators which shall be attached as close as possible to beams.

For the design, if additional space is required for AC plants, Contractor shall decide the required
size and location of the space and shall incorporate the same in the architectural drawings.

E.6.9.4.3. Chilled water Distribution system

Variable Secondary/ Primary pumping system shall be used for chilled water supply. Chilled water
flow rate shall be varied by varying the speed of the primary pumps with VSD according to building
load. Pressure independent valve shall be used to maintain the minimum chilled water flow through
the chillers.

E.6.9.4.3.1. Chillers

Contractor shall decide the chiller sizing and configuration base on total cooling load of the

280
.Section VII E. Specifications
building and building operation based on N+1 configuration. All the chillers shall be water called
type and the minimum COP valves and IPLV shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1-2013). All the
chillers shall be packaged type chillers and the same shall be deemed to include inbuilt restrained
spring isolators (double spring) or equivalent for vibration control. All chillers shall be water
cooled and the same shall be complied with ANSI/AHRI 551/591-2011 Standard for Performance
Rating of Water-Chilling and Heat Pump Water-Heating Packages Using the Vapor Compression
Cycle.

The refrigerant used in the chiller will be R-410a or R134a concerning the environmental
regulations.

E.6.9.4.3.2. Chilled Water Pumps

All chilled water pumps shall be VSD driven and the same shall be selected for an average
efficiency of not less than 70% and the minimum efficiency index (MEI) shall be not less than
0.40. The pumps shall be installed on rectangular concrete inertia bases.

The pump motors shall be comply with IEC 60034-30 (2008) efficiency classes and comparable
efficiency level shall be IE3.

E.6.9.4.3.3.Chilled Water Pipes

Chilled water piping shall be seamless black steel to ASTM 53A; Grade B; Type S or ASTM 106
Schedule 40.

All chilled water pipe work shall be suitably insulated with flexible elastomeric closed cell
thermal insulation (complying with ASTM C534 standard) with a thermal conductivity (K) value
not greater than 0.04 W/m°C and vapour-sealed, including all valves, flanges, expansion vessels
etc.

For the support of all insulated piping 80 mm long machine cut timber support blocks shall be fitted
all round the pipe to suit the insulation thickness. Wooden blocks shall not be fitted at anchor points

E.6.9.4.3.4. Condensate Drain Water Pipes

Condensate drain water piping shall be rigid PVC type 1000.

Furthermore, the system shall include with expansion tanks, headers, pressure gauges, thermo
meters, motorized valve (IP55 for indoor installation and IP65 for outdoor installation), Pressure
Independent Control Valve for AHUs, electromagnetic 2 way FCU valves, balancing valves,

281
.Section VII E. Specifications
strainers and all necessary accessories required for the complete installation of the system.

E.6.9.4.4. Condenser Water Distribution System

Condenser water distribution system is a constant flow water distribution system, which uses a set
of constant speed pumps to deliver the required flow to the Cooling Towers, based on the amount
of heat rejected by the Condenser.

The cooling towers shall be installed at 18th level (Cooling tower level) and the condenser pumps
shall be installed Chiller room level – 17th level.

E.6.9.4.4.1. Cooling Towers

The cooling capacities and configuration of the cooling towers shall be selected to match with
chillers and for the election cooling capacities, following parameters shall be considered.

 Condensed Water Flow rate – to be decided based on chiller configurations

 Entering temperature - 35°C

 Leaving temperature - 30°C

 Operating air wet bulb temperature - 27°C

The minimum total cooling capacity of the cooling towers shall be not less than 130% of total
cooling capacity of the chillers.

All cooling type shall be induced draft cross flow type and manufactured from fiber reinforced
plastic and shall have CTI Certification.

Fan shall be of Aluminium blades type driven with IP65 class motor shall be compatible to VFD.

Note-: it is recommended to operate the all cooling towers in Duty Mode.

E.6.9.4.4.2. Condenser Water Pumps

All condenser water pumps shall be constant speed pumps and the same shall be selected for an
average efficiency of not less than 70% and the minimum efficiency index (MEI) shall be not less
than 0.40. The pumps shall be installed on rectangular concrete inertia bases.

The pump motors shall be comply with IEC 60034-30 (2008) efficiency classes and comparable
efficiency level shall be IE3.

E.6.9.4.4.3. Condenser Water Pipes

Condenser water piping shall be seamless black steel to ASTM 53A; Grade B; Type S or ASTM
106 Schedule 40.

282
.Section VII E. Specifications
Marine grade paints shall be applied on all pipes and fittings in condenser water system to prevent
the corrosion due to coastal conditions.

Furthermore, the system shall include with makeup water tank, chemical water treatment plant,
headers, pressure gauges, thermo meters, motorized valves (IP55 for indoor installation and IP65
for outdoor installation), strainers, supports and all necessary accessories required for the complete
installation of the system.

Makeup Water Tank

The contractor shall calculate the capacity of the makeup water tank by considering the evaporation
rate for 3 hours. The tank/s material shall be PVC of FRP.

The makeup water tank shall be located at the same area where the cooling is to be located.

E.6.9.4.5. Air Distribution System

No of zones on each floor level shall be selected based on nature of occupancy type. Supply air
will be provided for each Zone by using AHU and variable air volume air distribution system.
Amount of Air Supplied to each zone and its temperature will be controlled using VAV units.

The system shall include with Localized Air Handling Units (AHUs), Fan Coil Units (FCUs),
supply and return air duct works, Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes, sound attenuator, air
terminals etc.

E.6.9.4.5.1. Air Handling Units (AHUs)

Modular type AHUs shall be installed at each AHU rooms with selected cooling capacities, the
AHUs shall include with return air mixing box pre-filter module, Bag filter module, Cooling Coil
Module, fan module, drain pads etc. (not to be limited stipulated items). The fans shall be
compatible with VSD (if necessary). The configuration and the blow type of AHUs shall be
decided based on the cooling capacity and space allocation. Air handling units shall conform to
AHRI Standard 430-2014.

E.6.9.4.5.2. Fan Coil Units

Fan coil units shall be installed at appropriate locations (Kitchen areas, chiller plant rooms, lift
machine rooms etc.) and the same shall consist with filters, cooling coils, supply air fans, drain
pads etc. (not to be limited stipulated items). Units shall bear AHRI labels certifying conformance
to ANSI/AHRI Standard 440-2008 or Eurovent certification.

E.6.9.4.5.3. Supply/ Return ducts

283
.Section VII E. Specifications
All the duct work shall be fabricated with GI sheet metals and shall be insulated with flexible
elastomeric closed cell thermal insulation (complying with ASTM C534 standard) with thermal
conductivity not more than 0.04 W/m.°C at 25 °C. Supply ducts shall be insulated to thickness of
50mm and return duct 25 mm thickness with density of 450kg/m3.

Duct works shall include for supports, hangers, acoustic lining where necessary, balancing
dampers, volume control dampers, fire dampers, flexible connectors etc. for completion of
installations.

E.6.9.4.5.4.Air terminals

Air terminals (supply/return) shall be fabricated with powder coated sheet steel and shall be
selected to match with the ceiling type.

E.6.9.4.5.5. Sound Attenuators

Sounder attenuators shall be installed at main supply and return air ducts. The size of the attenuators
shall be decided on noise level generated by the AHU and the required noise level of the served
space.

E.6.9.4.5.6. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Boxes

VAV boxes shall be installed at any spaces where individual controlling shall be required,
especially for conference rooms, director’s rooms, etc. VAV boxes shall be consists with following
items but not to limited to the same,

 thermostat, silencer, tubular type air flow meter

The minimum flow rate for the VAV boxes shall be decide based on “ minimum ventilation rates
in breathing zones” stipulated in ASHRAR 16.2.

Unit shall be consisting with factory mounted standalone DDC with actuator to control and monitor
the VAV unit. The controller shall be fully BACnet compliant to integrate the building automation
system (BAS) through the BACnet MS/TP protocol.

E.6.9.4.6. Toilet exhausts air system

All toilets shall be provided with ducted type exhaust systems except for the ground floor toilets at
periphery wall. The system shall consist with ducted exhaust fans, G.I. ducts, disk valves, weather
resistant lovers, inset nets etc.

Ground floor periphery wall shall be provided with wall mounted type exhaust fans with gravity
operated lover shutters, inset net etc.

284
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.6.9.4.7. Ventilation system for Parking Areas

Separate ducted ventilation system including jet fans (where appropriate) shall be installed at the
parking areas at ground floor and mezzanine level. The system shall ensure adequate ventilation
inside the parking area and also to limit harmful CO inside the parking area.

The system shall include following items but not to be limited the same,

 Soffit mounted ducted exhaust Fans, soffit mounted jet fans, G.I. ducts, grills, lovers,
Carbon Monoxide (CO) sensors etc.

The exhaust fan shall be VFD driven and compactible to connect with the building management
system.

CO sensors will be supplied and installed under BMS system.

Any duct work pertaining to car park ventilation system shall be of galvanized sheet steel designed,
fabricated and installed in accordance with relevant ASHRAE standard or approved equivalent.

E.6.9.4.8. Split type air conditioning system

Split type air conditioners shall be installed at required locations. (i.e. Electrical Panel room,
transformer room, fire command center and lift machine room etc.)

It is essential to provide precision AC system for server room areas.

E.6.9.4.9. Active Harmonic Filter

Active Harmonic Filter Panels shall be provided to the chiller plant room and the locations where
the variable frequency driven motors and fan installed such as AHU rooms, etc.

E.6.9.4.10. Kitchen ventilation system

The separate ventilation system at shall be provided for the kitchen areas at second floor. The
system shall incorporate with kitchen hood ventilation system and fresh air supply system.

All the ducting material of kitchen ventilation system shall be of Stainless Steel (S.S) and the total
system shall comply with the ASHRAE standards (Application – Handbook and ASHRAE 154).

Total system shall include items listed below but not to be limited for the same,

 Supply air duct, supply air fans, exhaust hoods with S.S baffle filters/ grease arresting
filters, hood gutters, hood lamps (incandescent of CFL are recommended), lamp guard (S.S)
exhaust air duct, belt driven exhaust fans, chimney etc.

The lux level at the burner height shall be not less than 500 Lux and the hood lamp shall be selected

285
.Section VII E. Specifications
to in order to maintenance that required lux level.

E.6.9.5. Building Management System

Building Automation System (BAS) will be provided incorporating an open protocol system
technology (Lonworks/ Bacnet) in the network methodology and management, programming tools
and data exchange to control the specified HVAC system and the following sub-systems.

 Chiller Management System

 AHU System

 CO2 level Control System for AHU

 Monitoring and Control of Access control system, CCTV system, Potable Water System,
Rain Water Harvesting system, access control system etc.

 Monitoring and control of car park ventilation System.

 Monitoring of Standby Generators

 Zone Lighting Control and Power Monitoring

 Maintenance scheduling

 Monitoring of fire protection and detection System.

 Monitoring and control rain water harvesting system and irrigation system

 Monitoring of Lift Installation

The BAS shall consist of Direct Digital Control (DDC) controllers, Building Controllers
(SUPERVISORY CONTROLLER), Graphical User Interface through standard Web browsers,
sensors, relays, valves, actuators, and other equipment as may be necessary to provide for a
complete and operational control system for the HVAC and other systems.

The supervisory panel and the workstation shall be installed at fire command center at ground floor.

Point List

Sample point list is annexed [Annex E.8 (Mech) – attached separately as Volume 3.2 of Employer’s
Requirement] with the document for each system controller.

E.6.9.6. Elevators and Escalators

Number of lifts provided per building shall depend on the population density of the building above
the ground floor. The calculation and selection of elevators shall be done in accordance with the

286
.Section VII E. Specifications
standards stipulated in the (c.3). The elevator schedule is given bellow.

Table E.32: Schedule of Elevators

Elements Terminal Building Area Railway Track Area

Elevators 14 5
Escalators 2 6

Note: Number of lifts and elevators may be increased as per the detailed design with the
passenger flow, standards and building regulations. The Proposer is anticipated to take
necessary actions

Submit a detailed traffic calculation for the building complex and if there is any changes, the
Contractor shall incorporate the same in the design. (i.e. capacities, speed, shaft sizes, car size etc.)
and shall take necessary actions to update the architectural drawings with revised shaft sizes.

Two number of Car Operating Panels (COP) – at left side & right side of door entrance, shall be
installed at each lift car.

The whole work shall confirm to the following standards stipulated in (c.3) Elevators and
Escalators.

Elevators at a common lobby shall equipped with group controlling system. Emergency backup
facility shall be provided for each elevator for emergency operation in case of power failure.

Escalators (for up and down purposes) shall be installed inside the premises as per the schedule
provided in below.

Furthermore, minimum capacities of the all escalators shall be 1050 persons/min, step width shall
be 1000mm and the speed shall be 0.65.

Energy efficient regenerative type lifts shall be selected with latest code of practices. Lifts and/or
escalators should be with AC Variable Voltage and Variable Frequency (VVVF) motor drive with
sleep mode features.

Central control panel shall be provided for elevator system and the same shall connects with the
Building Management System.

E.6.9.7.Fuel Pumping System

Fuel pump system shall be provided for the location indicated in the architectural drawings and the

287
.Section VII E. Specifications
system shall be compromised with the following items,

 Four (04) Nos underground cylindrical steel storage tanks of 5000 galons capacity suitable
for storing diesel. – Contractor shall verify the given capacity with a proper calculations
and if there is any changes in the capacity, the contractor shall proceed the design with the
revised value.

 Four (04) nos heavy duty type dispensing units installed at the ground level for pumping
diesel

 Inter-connecting pipe lines of galvanized steel, manifolds, valves and fittings for fuel
pumping system.

 Associated electrical cabling and control gear.

E.6.9.7.1. Fuel Storage tanks

Storage tanks shall be designed, fabricated, installed and tested to BS 2594 (1975) or superior
standard for horizontal mild steel welded storage tanks. Flat ended tanks may be supplied, provided
the design conform to ANSI – UL 58. Tank shall be installed inside a reinforced concrete cell. The
space between cell and tank shall be filled with dry sand prior to placing the concrete of the cover
slab. The tanks should be equipped with reliable measures to detect any fuel leakage
instantaneously from the tank. Tank shall have two manholes and be provided with a dial-type float
operated oil level indicator, opening for inserting a dip-stick, air vent, one draw-off pipe with non-
return valve and two filling connections (one for filling from bowser and other for transfer from
large naval craft).

The tank shall be tested for leaks according to the referred standards and according to Engineer’s
approval. On successful completion of the tests, the outer surface shall be blast cleaned to SA 2.5
and two coats of hot bitumen applied, followed by the application of one layer of roofing felt.
Roofing felt joints shall be given a further coat of hot bitumen.

E.6.9.7.2. Fuel piping system

The design, construction and testing of the piping system shall conform to ANSI B 31 (American
National Standard for pressure Piping). Pipe joints shall be either flanged or threaded.

Fuel piping system should have adequate capacity to supply the required flow from storage tanks
to the dispensers. The contractor should submit the corrosion treatment measures for above ground
and underground piping. Flexible joints should be used where necessary.

The pipe line shall be provided with a surge arresting device at no extra cost if found necessary by

288
.Section VII E. Specifications
the Engineer.

E.6.9.7.3. Dispensing Units/Pumps

Dispensing units/pumps shall be of heavy duty type conforming to ANSI – UL 87. The pumps shall
be capable of delivering 3,900 litters / hour. The dispensing pump shall be provided with re-
settable digital type nine-digit register and a non-resettable totalizer running up to at least seven
digits. The dispensing pump shall include an air, duel filter and a pressure regulator at the inlet to
ensure proper operation of the air eliminator. The pump cabinet shall be of stainless steel. The
pumping unit shall be consist with inbuilt printer.

Sufficient length of flexible hose shall be provided with the small pump to be able to reach the
filling point of a small craft berthed alongside. The hose shall be provided with an automatic nozzle.

For larger dispensing pumps, facility shall be provided to connect to the universal coupling of the
ships and sufficient hose length shall be provided.

The inlet to each dispensing pump shall be provided with a gate valve.

Fuel dispenser unit shall be comply with the specifications published by the Ceylon Petroleum
Corporation. (Link - http://ceypetco.gov.lk/fuel-dispensers/)

Table E.33: Parameters of dispensing units/pumps

Parameters Value/ Description

1. Fuel to be pumped Heavy Duty - Diesel
2. Flow Rate Heavy Duty – 65 l/min
3. Volume Preset – Main Display Heavy Duty - > 1 – 999 Litres
4. Capacity of the Electric Motor Heavy Duty - 1 Hp/.75 kW
5. Nozzle Automatic Shut off Nozzle (1” BSPT female
thread preferred) Spout Diameter 24 mm
6. Hose
1.Diameter 25mm (1”)
2.Wall Thickness Minimum 6.0 mm
3. Minimum Length 4m
4. Couplings 1” BSPT (preferred) chrome plated brass swivel
couplings, male thread at one end and female
thread at the other end.

E.6.9.8. Centralized LP Gas Distribution and Detection system

A centralized LP gas distribution system shall be provided for kitchen areas. The cylinder manifold
shall be located at lower ground level and with well-ventilated location. The manifold shall be

289
.Section VII E. Specifications
covered with a cage, fabricated with steel. A dedicated LP gas detection system shall be installed
for the above system.

Cylinder Manifold

The capacity of the bank/ number of LP gas cylinders shall be calculated based on the LP gas
requirement of the kitchen appliance for 14 days. The manifold shall have 02 number of gas banks
(duty/standby), isolation valves, pressure gauges, pig tails, automatic/manual change over, non-
return valves etc.

LP Gas Cylinders

All the cylinders shall be industrial type cylinders with the capacity of 37.5 kg.

Piping system

The pipes shall be of Galvanized Iron and shall be painted with yellow color by indicating the flow
direction. Before the paining, precautions shall be taken to minimize the corrosions.

Pressure Regulation Valves (1st stage & 2nd stage), pressure gauges, isolations valves, no- return
valves etc. shall be installed where necessary. The kitchen appliances shall be connected with piped
system with flexible hose and flexible hose connectors.

Automatic shutoff valves shall be installed inside the cylinder bank area to shut off the LP Gas
supply to the building in case of a fire or detection of leakage of flammable gas.

LP gas detection system

A dedicated conventional panel shall be installed at the security office. The panel shall be
compatible to communicate with Fire Alarm Control Panel and Building Management System
(BMS). Detector and alarm shall be placed according to the standards stipulated in c.4. (i.e the
maximum height of the LP gas detectors shall be 300 mm from finished floor level).

Detectors shall communicate with the main gas panel through monitor modules. The number of
monitor modules shall depend on the number of detection zones and the number of output of each
module.

All the wiring shall be fire rated and the total wiring system shall be complying with Clause
5.9.1.12.

The detection system shall compromise with backup Ups to energize the detectors and alarms in
case of power failure

E.6.9.9. Cold Room – Garbage Collection

290
.Section VII E. Specifications
A cold room shall be provided to store wet garbage and same shall be at lower ground level. The
total volume/ dimension shall be calculated based on the requirements of the local authorities.

The cold room shall be prefabricated walk in type and the same shall maintain the temperature of
4⁰C - 10⁰C and 55% - 65% RH of inside the conditioned space.

A dedicated control penal shall be provided to operate the cold room and the panel shall compatible
to connect with the BMS.

The compressor assembly shall have minimum of 02 nos of compressors (duty/standby) to facilitate
the redundancy of the system. The minimum lux level inside the cold room shall be 250

E.6.10. MECHANICAL WORKS

E.6.10.1. Mechanical Ventilation and Air Conditioning System

 Specialist MVAC contractor shall have at least ten (10) years experience in Supplying,
Installing, Testing, Commissioning and Maintenance of similar type of Air Conditioning
systems in Sri Lanka and having qualified technical staff trained at Chiller plant
manufacturing facility for installation, operation, maintenance & trouble shooting of
modern multi compressor screw type chillers.

 Experience in performing at least one contract of a nature, complexity and value equivalent
to the proposed works over the last 5 years.

 The manufacturer of the equipment shall have at least fifteen (15) years experience in the
Design and Manufacture of similar type air conditioners and make of offered equipment
shall have at least five (05) years proven service record in Sri Lanka.

E.6.10.2. Fire Protection and Detection System

 Specialist FDPS contractor shall have at least ten (10) years experience in Supplying,
Installing, Testing, Commissioning and Maintenance of similar type of Fire Detection and
Protection Systems in Sri Lanka.

 Experience in performing at least one contract of a similar nature, complexity and value
equivalent to the proposed works over the last five (05) years.

 The manufacturer of major equipment shall have at least ten (10) years experience in the
Design and Manufacture of similar type equipment and make of offered equipment shall
have at least five (05) years proven service record in Sri Lanka.

291
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.6.10.3. Lift

 Specialist Lift contractor shall be a reputed local company having experience in planning,
engineering, supplying, installing, testing, commissioning and maintenance of passenger
lifts at least for last five (05) years.

 The manufacturer of the Lifts shall have at least fifteen (15) years experience in the design
and manufacture of similar type Lifts.

 The make of Lifts offered shall have satisfactory service record in Sri Lanka at least for last
ten (10) years.

 At least 10 nos of lifts of similar model shall be in service at present in Sri Lanka

E.6.10.4. IBMS (Integrated Building Management / Automation System)

 Specialist BMS contractor shall have at least ten (10) years experience in Supplying,
Installing, Testing, Commissioning and Maintenance of similar type of BMS systems in Sri
Lanka and having qualified technical staff trained at manufacturing facility for installation,
operation, maintenance & trouble shooting of the proposed BMS system.

 Experience in performing at least one contract of a nature, complexity and value equivalent
to the proposed works over the last 5 years.

Hardware and Software Component Manufacturer Qualifications

 The manufacturer of the hardware and software components must be primarily engaged in
the manufacture of LONWORKS/BACNET based systems and must have been so for a
minimum of fifteen (15) years.

 The manufacturer of the hardware and software components shall have a technical support
group accessible via a toll free number that is staffed with qualified personnel, capable of
providing instruction and technical support service for networked control systems.

 A copy of certified and Valid Contact Agreement as local agent for Supply, Engineering,
Testing and Commission on behalf of Manufacture shall be furnished with the bidding
documents.

 Specialist BMS contractor (Who is the local representative for the proposed BMS) shall
have experience in Installation, Testing and Commissioning of similar type and magnitude
of BMS/BAS.

 The system shall be installed by competent mechanics regularly employed by the

292
.Section VII E. Specifications
manufacturers authorized representative having proven local experience with full
responsibility for proper operation of the BMS system, including debugging and calibration
of each component of the entire system.

E.7. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY WORK

E.7.1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION

The KMTT is expected to operate using modern technology for all aspects of bus operations,
passenger processing and information systems as well as terminal management. The Bus
Management System (BMS) already developed for the Transition Arrangement deployed since
2019 is being further developed under the project. The ICT work described in this section is
intended to provide the fixed infrastructure required to support the overall functioning of the
terminal using smart technology.

The Bus Management System (BMS) in operation at the Bogambara Terminal supporting the bus
trnsistion operations since 2019 is being further developed as a site-specific modern state-of-the-
art Operating System (OS) that integrates a Bus Operation Control Centre (OCC) with buses,
passengers, timekeepers, bus owners, bus crew and route supervisors including ticket checkers as
shown earlier:

E.7.1.1. Cable Insulation

a. Either wall embedded PVC insulation or Surface mounted casings for indoor
cabling.

293
.Section VII E. Specifications
b. Outdoor insulations shall be done accordance to IP 66 with galvanized metal
casings.

E.7.1.2. Grounding (Earthing)

a. Indoor ICT and Security systems shall connect to the building grounding grid.

b. Outdoor units shall have independent grounding/lightning protection solutions.

c. Earth resistance must be maintained less than 5Ώ.

E.7.1.3. Product Selection

a. All the brands/makes shall have minimum of three (03) years‟ service history
in Sri Lanka.

b. RoHS compliance.

c. Availability of either a local office or a local registered agent of the manufacturer.

d. Local office or local agent shall have a service history in the related field which
is not less than three (03) years.

e. Availability of trained and qualified staff locally to maintain the system.

E.7.2. DATA NETWORK AND TELEPHONE NETWORK SYSTEMS.

E.7.2.1. System Description

a. Structured Cabling System according to the ISO/IEC 11801 standard. Color

code standard shall be TIA 568B.

b. Cables which are going to use should be a LSZH cables.

c. An IP PABX System should be installed to cater the telephone requirement with all
the necessary accessories.

d. MDF for Telephone system should be fixed in the Control Center for terminal
Operation

e. Systems or in the room provided at the implementation stage.

f. A Local Area Network (LAN) System with high availability should be designed
with servers, database systems, switches and other required accessories.

g. The terminal operating system for KMTT shall be hosted in an outsourced

Tier 3 compliant data center on a cloud – hosting model.

294
.Section VII E. Specifications
h. When ELV cables and electrical cables are sharing the same trench/trunk
path, the contractor should be responsible to maintain zero level („0‟) EMI
according to ANSI/TIA-569.C standard.

E.7.2.2. Performance and Requirements

a. The system provided shall use hierarchical star topology utilizing Category 6 copper
cable in the horizontal subsystem and fiber optic cables in the backbone. Fiber
optics shall be Single Mode and Multimode (as necessary) while maintaining the initial
uplink bandwidth of 10 Gbps. There should be redundant uplinks for each switch in the
network.

b. All data switches shall have 10/100/1000 Mbps ports and 10G fiber uplink
ports populated with SFP fiber Modules.

c. Cables shall be drawn from network rack units in each floor to the nearest consolidation
box or to the nearest walls via cable trays, conduits or under appropriate trunking system
which is accepted by the engineer.

d. When ELV cables and electrical cables are sharing the same trench/trunk path,
the contractor should be responsible to maintain zero level („0‟) EMI according
to ANSI/TIA-569.C standard.

E.7.2.3. Construction Requirements

a. The passive components including Fiber pigtails, Optical Fiber patch panels, copper
patch panels, patch leads, Fiber Optic Cables, multi core voice cables shall be in same
brand and which will be approved by the client to achieve 25 years system warranty.

b. The contractor shall be capable of providing end to end Physical Infrastructure

Solution for all requirements and shall not be restricted only to cabling / connectivity
products or Enclosures etc.

c. All equipment and materials shall be compatible with all applicable Safety and
Protection Constraints.

d. All equipment and fittings shall be suitable for their intended purpose and
environment, e.g. aggressive environment, water tight, ambient temperature and
humidity, vandal resistant, etc.

Note: Active equipment will be purchase under provisional sum indicated in price schedule
in a later stage and the specification should be match with the required context at that stage.

295
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.7.3. CCTV / IP SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

E.7.3.1. System Description

a. CCTV/IPSS shall be completely an IP based system.

b. Cameras must use PoE power. Additional power should be provided if required (eg.
PTZ cameras).

c. This system shall be used for monitoring all public areas, parking lots, entrances
(Number Plate recognition cameras also should be include for the entrances and bus
parking lots), etc..

d. System shall provide 24x7 live monitoring with full HD resolution and 25fps.

e. The system shall have at least 30 days recording for all cameras with full HD resolution
and 25 fps with RAID 5.

f. System shall provide 24x7 live monitoring.

g. A complete Video Wall with Operator Workstation shall be installed inside the Security
Room, work stations should be provided as monitoring stations to required areas with
all required accessories and equipment for Live Views, Playback Views and to control
all CCTV Cameras in the system.

h. advanced video analytics features, should be available to use as required. (Eg. Facial
Recognition, etc..)

E.7.3.2. Performance and Requirements General

a. Video transmission shall be mainly through a combination of CAT6/RJ45 and optical

fiber cables.

b. Cameras shall sense the objects using IR in low light conditions (0 lux). The camera
shall have IR filter which will switch from colour to monochrome automatically
by either sensing the illumination level or via the alarm input.

c. The system shall be provided weatherproof outdoor IP cameras with housings

and mountings.

d. All outdoor cameras shall be followed IP-66 standard and shall be with vandal
proof housing.

e. The System shall have proper Lightning protection.

296
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.7.3.2.1. Video Management Software (VMS)

a. VMS software shall be compatible with cameras and other equipment. VMS shall
be a highly scalable, enterprise level software solution. It must offer a complete Video
Surveillance solution that shall be scalable.

b. VMS shall have the capacity of handling present design and future expansions.

c. Video management software shall offer both video stream management and video
storage management. Recording frame rate and resolution in respect of individual
channel shall be programmable.

d. The system shall have friendly graphical user interface and own media player to view
the recorded video.

e. VMS shall have a navigation panel to allow the user to select the required camera.

f. VMS shall provide continuous recording, manual recording, auto recording,

event recording and motion recording.

g. The Software shall resume recording automatically after reboot or network re-
connection.

h. For each camera set up bit rate, frame rate and resolution shall be independent from
other cameras in the system. Altering the setting of a single camera shall not affect the
settings of other cameras.

i. The Software shall provide electronic map, in which user shall be able to view video
by double click mouse on the camera icon on the map and also support Alarm video
creation and snapshot creation.

j. Video Management Software shall be compatible with H.264, M-JPEG or

MPEG-4 encoding.

k. VMS shall allow live, playback viewing modes of cameras. And VMS Shall have
facilities for play, forward, rewind, pause along with fast forward and rewind for
reviewing the recorded videos.

l. Shall have Client-Server architecture with different authentication levels and groups. m.
VMS shall allow the control of PTZ cameras with joystick.

m. The software shall support searching as per camera, event and date/time. Shall have
Auto complete drop-down list facility for easy search.

297
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.7.3.2.2. Network Video Recorder (NVR) / Storage server

a. The NVR server shall have adequate storage capacity to make continuous recording of
all cameras with Full HD resolution and 25 frames per second (fps) for at least 30 days.

b. Necessary number of hard disk drives having at least RAID-Level 5 storages shall
be provided and it shall be full hardware implementation with a separate RAID
controller.

c. NVR server shall have adequate performances (RAM capacity, processor speed and
etc.) to handle above situations and provide proper functionality.

E.7.3.2.3. Workstations

a. The workstation shall include client software or web interface and shall provide full
access to operations through a user-friendly and highly intuitive graphical user interface.

b. Interface shall use drag-and-drop operations, context menus, and tool tips to enable
interactions. The PC workstation shall have sound, graphics, color, and on-screen
messages to provide ongoing feedback about user activity and system status, and it shall
have on- screen PTZ control and device property control.

c. Allow administrators to configure devices, set up users, adjust network settings, and
create recording schedules. Permission to access functions and all other system services
shall be configured according to access level of user.

d. The workstation shall have advanced search capabilities, event logging, and alarm
interface displays.

E.7.3.3. Construction Requirements

a. All equipment and fittings shall comply with BS, IEC and RoHS regulations.

b. All equipment and fittings shall be compatible with all applicable Safety and
Protection Constraints.

c. All CCTV/IPSS equipment installed indoors and outdoors shall be properly grounded
and surge protected.

d. All the cameras and Video Management Software shall be compatible with H.264
and MJPEG encoding.

e. All outdoor cameras shall be in IP-66 and vandal proof. All outdoor items for cameras
like Junction Boxes, Power Supply, and Media Convertors etc. shall be in water poof

298
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.7.3.4. Control System

a. The IP surveillance System shall allow event based, motion based, alarms schedule
based, continuous, time based and camera wise recording with different speeds (fps)
and different resolutions for each camera.

b. It shall also be possible to search and replay the recorded images on date, time and
camera- wise. It shall provide onscreen controls for remote operation of PTZ cameras.

c. CCTV/IPSS shall be on a hierarchical administrator level. There shall be minimum

3 hierarchical levels of security for providing user level log in.

d. Video management software shall offer both video stream management and video
storage management. Recording frame rate and resolution in respect of individual
channel shall be programmable.

e. VMS shall allow live, playback viewing modes of cameras. And VMS Shall have
facilities for play, forward, rewind, pause along with fast forward and rewind for
reviewing the recorded videos.

f. VMS shall allow the control of PTZ cameras with joystick.

g. The software shall support searching as per camera, event and date/time.

h. Other features,

i. VMS should be user friendly and customer configurable

ii. Recording format should be an open standard protocol which allows export
and playback on open source video playback software.

E.7.3.5. Electrical Works

a. Electrical installations shall comply with General Electrical Work Specification at site.

b. The power supply to any CCTV camera/PTZ, Switches, Servers, Display panels
and other components of system shall be through a UPS.

c. If any equipment operates on any voltage other than the standard supply voltage and
supply frequency, necessary conversion/correction device of approved make shall be
supplied along with the equipment.

Note: Active equipment will be purchase under provisional sum indicated in price schedule
in a later stage and the specification should be match with the required context at that stage.

299
.Section VII E. Specifications
E.7.4. PUBLIC ADDRESS AND PIPE MUSIC SYSTEM (PAPMS)

E.7.4.1. System Description

a. Mainly PAPMS is used for three functions.

i. Emergency broadcasting

ii. Public Address System

iii. Pipe music System

E.7.4.1.1. Emergency Broadcasting

When an emergency situation has occurred, the system shall be used for broadcasting
necessary announcements to evacuate the area immediately.

E.7.4.1.2. Public Address System

PAPMS shall allow public announcements through via installed microphones. Prerecorded
messages shall be broadcast automatically and manually.

E.7.4.1.3. Pipe Music System.

In ordinary situation, speakers play background music. Administrator shall be Able to select BGM
source which may CD/DVD Player, FM/AM tuner.

b. An Emergency Override Announcement Facility shall be provided to the entire BGM

System.

E.7.4.2. Performance and Requirements

E.7.4.2.1. General

a. PAPMS System shall be constituted of the following basic functions.

i. Sound amplification and directing.

ii. Automatic broadcasting of emergency messages

iii. Digital Signal Processor (including Equalizer and Filter) for each output.

b. The Design and installation of the fully Digital PAS shall ensure that the System
is capable of future expansion.

c. The Public Address System shall be used for broadcasting fire evacuation
messages.Therefore, all the cables and speakers related to the Public Address System

300
.Section VII E. Specifications
should be fire rated and the head end equipment shall be complied with EVAC.

E.7.4.2.2. Announcement priority

a. Emergency announcements shall have priority over any announcement.

b. PA System shall be capable of delivering automatic pre-recorded evacuation messages

in case of Fire or dangerous operational conditions.

E.7.4.2.3. Background music interface

System shall provide background music interface to system for an analog audio signal from the
background music source.

BGM Source shall be shall support MP3 music files in removable disks, SD Cards, DAB digital
broadcasting's and FM tuners.

E.7.4.2.4. In case of fire

When a fire is triggered, PA system shall send automatic emergency messages which are stored
in the system, to appropriate zone/s. System shall use three wire system from the amplifier to
volume control. If the volume control is switched off, system must by pass the emergency messages
to the speakers.

E.7.4.3.Construction Requirements

a. The entire system with all component, equipment and materials including
microphones, speakers, controls, housings and equipment shall be supplied by the
contractor with the approval of the Engineer.

b. All equipment and materials shall be compatible with all applicable safety and
protection constraints.

c. All equipment and fittings shall be suitable for their intended purpose and
environment e.g. water tightness, ambient temperature and humidity, vandal resistant,
etc.

d. All equipment of this System installed outdoors shall be protected by Voltage

surge protection.

E.7.4.4. Interface works

a. The PA system shall be connected with fire detections system.

b. An optional programmable interface shall be available providing an OPC interface to

301
.Section VII E. Specifications
link the system with an integrated building management system. The interface shall
provide system status information and allow a broadcast control so far as acceptable
by the applied voice alarm standards.

Note: Active equipment will be purchased in a later stage and the specification should be
matched with the required context at that stage. List of proposed items should be mentioned
in detail under provisional sum. Sufficient pricing should be included with provision for
those items under the provisional sum mentioned for each system.

E.7.5. PARKING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E.7.5.1 Scope

a. Entry Ticket Dispenser with Automatic Boom Barrier for both car parking and bus
parking areas

b. Exit Ticket Reader with automatic Boom Barrier for both car and bus parking areas

c. PMS Main server should be in the server room.

d. PMS shall share same network equipment with Local Area Network (Cabling, Switches,
Racks, UPS etc.)

e. PMS system shall have separate VLANs.

f. PMS shall available for all entrances and exists to the internal car parks in the building.

E.7.5.2 Parking Management System Server Features

a. Car park Guidance System

b. Shows real time parking spaces availability digitally.

c. Automated Alerts

d. Summarized reports on daily/weekly/monthly basis

i. Current parking Utilization by Zone

ii. Parking Utilization Summary by Zone by Date

iii. Parking utilization Details by Zone by day, week, month, year

302
.Section VII E. Specifications
iv. Current Overstay Violations by Zone

v. Overstay Violation by Zone by date

vi. Average time bays are occupied by day, week, month, year

vii. Bay stay reporting

viii. Sensor Failures

e. Various Statistics reports

Note: Active equipment will be purchased under provisional sum indicated in price schedule
in a later stage and the specification should be matched with the required context at that
stage. It should have connectivity to the data network backbone.

E.7.6. DOOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (DACS)

E.7.6.1. System Description

a. This system shall be used for monitoring, all Entrance doors to office areas.

b. DACS shall be completely an IP based system and this system shall physically
independent with Data and Voice LAN, but same network with CCTV IP
Surveillance System.

c. The DACS shall be integrated with other systems such as CCTV/IP Surveillance
System, Fire Detection System through Building Management System (BMS) with
related protocols and particular devices.

d. DACS shall be capable of controlling access control equipment such as smart card
readers etc.

e. All readers shall be intelligent readers which can be used as standalone if necessary.

f. DACS shall have capable of providing attendance of all registered employees for
administration purposes.

g. There shall be monitoring workstations.

h. The system capable to send an alert automatically to DACS administration workstation

when someone breaks the Emergency Exit Device.

i. There shall be a DACS primary server with failover server including dual network
interfaces.

j. Entrances and Exits of Each floor shall be controlled by DAC System.

303
.Section VII E. Specifications
k. DACS software shall be capable of changing Fail safe or Fail secure according
to the security situation. (Fail-safe locks and strikes require power to lock. When
power is interrupted by an access control or power outage the door will unlock. Fail-
secure locks and strikes require power to unlock. When energized by use of an access
control the door unlocks)

l. The Door Access Control System shall comply with UL 294 and BS All readers
shall be intelligent readers which can be used as standalone if necessary.

E.7.6.2. Performance and Requirements

E.7.6.2.1. Door Access Control System Software Requirements

a. There shall be no limitations on the number of PC workstations/thin clients, readers and

alarm inputs.

b. Users who have attempted more than 3 times to check in/out shall be alert to the DACS
Administration workstation.

c. The software shall have the ability to take scheduled automatic database backups
and maintenance. A searching function to trace user details and to check logs of
particular user or a reader.

d. The searching function shall include querying according to users, doors, day, time and
section (zone).

e. The system shall record and store at least one-month transactions.

f. System shall be supplied from emergency power to eliminate system crash from
power failure.

g. The software shall have the ability to produce the following report types: alarms
and alert reports, user reports, hardware and software configuration, setting changes,
access level reports, employee time & attendance reports.

h. DACS capable of giving attendance of all registered employees. i) The reports shall
be available in PDF and MS Excel formats.

i. Report filters must be convenient and user friendly: allow operator preview user
photos, content of access levels, hardware settings and time zone configuration.

j. The software shall have the ability to divide the building in to any number of zones.

k. The software shall support to add required number of building floor plans (not less than

304
.Section VII E. Specifications
25).

l. The software shall support “full-screen” mode that would take up 100% of the

m. monitor area.

n. All card activation and user accessibility changes shall be sent to

administrator immediately after the changes were made.

o. DACS software shall have Auto complete drop-down list facility for easy

p. search.

q. The software shall use an industry standard latest database engine. q) The software
shall be available in English language.

r. The software shall have a user-friendly graphical user interface (GUI).

s. In order to reduce the amount of work done by an operator, the software shall
incorporate an option to copy objects: users, doors, floor plans, time schedules,
access levels.

E.7.6.2.2. Particular Requirements

a. Fingerprint Reader shall have the fingerprint sensor, PIN code key pad and card detector
sensor.

b. Keypads shall be mechanically designed for heavy duty and keypad shall not be erased
on heavy use.

c. Fingerprint Reader must have the following three authentication modes.

i. Smart Card only

ii. Fingerprint and PIN

iii. Fingerprint, PIN and Smart Card based Access

iv. If IP readers compatible with Near Field Communication (NFC) it should follow
ISO/IEC 18092 and ISO/IEC 21481 standards.

Entry/ Exit Reader (Contactless card)

a. One-to-many verification shall less than two (2) second (with the database of 10,000
users).

b. If readers compatible with Near Field Communication (NFC) it should follow ISO/IEC

305
.Section VII E. Specifications
18092 and ISO/IEC 21481 standards.

Door Access Controller

Controller is not a mandatory component for the Door Access Control system and it shall be used
if readers are not intelligent or the contractor suggests a system with controllers.

a. There shall be a controller for each door.

b. If IP Controllers compatible with near field Communication (NFC) it should follow

ISO/IEC 18092 and ISO/IEC 21481 standards.

Administration Workstation

a. Administrators and building entrance receptions have different levels of access

privileges for DACS.

b. Workstations shall have finger scanner and digital camera with camera stand and a
flasher.

c. Administration workstations shall include all related software with licenses.

Access Control Cards

a. Card Technology: Contactless smart card (Standard ISO/IEC14443 - 13.56 MHz).

b. Encryption Technology: Triple-DES/ 128bit AES encryption or higher.

c. Supported Card: iCLASS, MIFARE DESFire EV1/ NFC compliant smart card.

d. Card Type/ Physical Characteristics: Composite PVC cards (Standard ISO/IEC 7810
(85.60 × 53.98 mm))

e. Minimum erasable programmable read only memory (EPROM) shall be 4 kB.

Door Access Control Server Features

a. Time attendance management system

b. Visitor management

c. Programmable zoning feature

d. Card validity configuration

e. Access mode changes (day/night/ holiday/immanency)

f. Critical Area Control

g. Back up & data protect system

306
.Section VII E. Specifications
h. Support when reader scaling Up

Integration with fire Detection System

According to the fire signal (address or zone), access control system shall release low security level
doors which are in activated fire area.

Electrical Supply

a. Electrical supply shall comply with General Electrical Work Specification.

b. All DACS switches shall be connected to the Uninterrupted power Supply (UPS). c) If
PoE or PoE+ not sufficient for any device or equipment, additional UPS systems

c. and UPS wiring shall be supplied and installed by the contractor. UPS Wiring shall
comply with electrical wiring standards and minimum backup duration shall be 1 hour.

Note: Active equipment will be purchase under provisional sum indicated in price schedule
in a later stage and the specification should be match with the required context at that stage.

E.7.7. VEHICLE (BUS) TRACKING SYSTEM

E.7.7.1. System Description

The software for Vehicle (Bus) Tracking has been developed locally under the project as an
integral component of the Bus Management System and continues to be updated. The active
equipment to be fitted on buses has been purchased and is currently operational and will be
updated/replaced at a later stage to fit the requirements of the updated specifications to be issued
at that stage.

The schematic of the system architecture of the BMS is shown below. The Vehicle Tracking
System is in-built under into the BMS and provides a direct input to the Terminal Management
System (TMS). For this purpose, the GPS devices to be procured under this item, should be
mounted on the buses and their location coordinates digitally fed directly to the TMS server
through an API link.

As shown above the BMS integrates multiple devices (GPS (VTS), ETM, IOT sensors and
mobile phones). It has been developed to work with large-scale transport agencies having state
of the art features summarized below:

• Integrated System of Bus Management, GPS, Document Control systems & ERP etc.

• Open-Source Technology and availability of source code

• The availability of database together with its design, and ability to access the da-tabase

307
.Section VII E. Specifications
directly or through API

• Incorporation of Mobile technology and mobile Apps

• Modelled on Global Bus Operating Features

• Customized to fit single bus ownership and SLTB (a unique feature)

• Customized to work on single platform for different operators/regulators

• Expandable to provide passenger and operator added features

• Functions and outputs to be easily customized for each operator

• Real time operations features

• Big data analytics feature for improved planning

• Customized reporting formats

The Operational Control Centre (OCC) which uses the BMS performs the following functions
connecting around 2,000 buses at present.

• Maintaining data base of bus routes, owners, buses and other operating details

• Making approved changes to bus ownership, routes and other approved operating
changes

• Providing security features for log entries

• Providing on the job training to all personnel using software

• Regular (monthly) updating of software version developments

• Monitoring compliance of Timetables using GPS and reporting compliance levels for
buses and routes on a weekly basis

• Monitoring travel speeds and timetable compliance using GPS feed

• Providing daily summary of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) of operating statistics

by route such as actual performance % with scheduled

• Providing dashboard for below par operations

• Carry out comparative analysis between buses, routes etc. to study variations

308
.Section VII E. Specifications
• Prepare weekly and monthly reports on underperforming performing buses

• Aiding the selection of best performing bus crews

• Storing of all data on cloud based secure environments

• Enabling terminal operations and performance reporting

E.7.7.2. Performance and Requirements

The required cabling should be provided within the KMTT for networking all the operational
and passenger locations within the terminal area, ticketing areas, loading gates, and platforms,
bus operator offices and include the bus parking area and entrances as per clients/system
developers requirements. It should enable interconnectivity to the data network backbone.

The following hardware equipment would be required for purchase to connect the Bus Tracking
System in operation and being further developed. All devices should be supplied, fixed (where
necessary) and maintained under full warranty with parts for a period of three years. The response
time for equipment attention should not exceed two hours during all hours of bus operations, with
replacements provided when repairs are deemed to take more than two hours.

The supplier shall facilitate the direct transfer of all digital data as maybe specified by the client
directly to the client server without any fee or restriction both during the maintenance/ warranty
period and thereafter even without a contract. The devices should be connected to the available on-
board power or fixed power source as is the case and the required fixtures provided both off-board
and on board each bus as the case maybe.

1. 2,000 Nos of a combined device that can function both as a GPS device as well as an Electronic
Ticket Machine that has feature for both carry on or being fixed on-board buses using the KMTT.
These devices should have capacity to print a ticket and transmit the data after each bus stop to the
main BMS server to be read through an API. The location data should be transferable every 15
seconds and adjustable as required.

A. GPS Specification of Combined Device (to be upgraded to industry standard at time

of calling for bids to ensure technology upgrades are observed)

(1) (2) (3)

Feature Required Specification Remarks

A. Hardware Specification

Make

309
.Section VII E.
Specifications
Teltonika or any other
compatible brand
Year of
Manufacturing Within last two years
Maximum to be 100mm
length, 100mm width and
Dimensions 40mm height
Weight To be less than 300g

Mobile data communication

Network facility shall be compatible
system of Sri Lanka
Band 850/900/1800/1900/2100Mhz
Support GNSS
systems Please Specify
GPS Sensitivity -159dBm or better

GPS Accuracy Less than 10m

GPS Start time Start time maximum 60s

Voltage 12V-24V (preferred) or 12V-

36V
Chargeable 3.7V at least
Backup battery 500mAh, The back-up battery should keep the
Polymer Lithium battery unit working for 2 hours minimum
Storage Temp. 0°C to +70°C

Inside buses, behind the

dashboard of buses of Sri
Lanka, buses with non-air
conditioning and air
Working environment conditioninig
B. ETM Specification of combined device (to be upgraded to industry standard at
time of calling for bids to ensure technology upgrades are observed)

Purchaser’s Requirement
Seri Parameter Specifications Bidders offer
al A. Hardware Specifications
No.
1. Product Please Specify
2. Make/Brand Telpo, Axionent or any other compatible brand
3. Model Number Please Specify
4. Country of Origin Please Specify
5. Year of
Within last two years
Manufacturing
6. Manufacturing
Dimensions Please Specify
7. Weight To be less than 200g (Without Paper Roll)
8. Processor 1GHz Quad core CPU or Better Minimum to support multi-
threading feature

310
.Section VII E.
Specifications
9. RAM 1 GB (minimum) or Better Minimum to support multi-
threading feature
10. Flash Memory 8 GB (minimum) or Better Minimum to support multi-
threading feature
11. Extendable Minimum 16GB I think 2 GB minimum is
Memory - SD/ enough
Micro SD card
interface
12. Display 4.5” WVGA 850x480 IPS or Better increase in screen size will
increase battery
consumption and also ETM
unit will be more expensive
13. Touch Screen Industrial grade, Capacitive Multi-point touch Should be optional
Display panel
14. Camera 5MP or Better Should be optional
15. Operating System Android / Linux / Windows
16. Satellite GPS/GLONASS/BDS
Positioning
17. Keypad Minimum 10 alphanumeric keys, 7 function
keys
18. Built-in printer High speed thermal printer 57 mm (32
characters per line). Minimum print speed 18
lines/sec, easy paper roll loading. Should
support minimum 15-meter length 55 GSM
thermal paper roll (30 mm diameter)
19. SAM slots Minimum 3 SAM slots, fully compliant with
ISO 7816, supports PPS protocol
20. External (mobile) GSM - 850 / 900 / 1800 / 1900
21. communication
Battery Rechargeable
HSDPA - 850and Replaceable
/900 battery 3.7v,
/ 1900 / 2100 Over-charge / over-voltage
4500mAh or better / over-current protection.
LTE - 1(2100), 3(1800), 8(900),
Easily removable /
replaceable.
22. Security Should support encryption standards including Rather than say battery
3DES and AES capacity shall we mention
23. Contactless Smart Fully compliant with ISO14443, Type A Type the following:
Card Reader B. in compliance with qPBOC L1& L2 Should be able to perform
certification standard at least 1500 transactions
24. Audio (optional) Audio Beeper (optional) (tickets) once fully
25. PC Interface USB or Serial charged. Approximate 500
26. Host PC Windows/ Linux recharge cycles.
27. Operating
AccessoriesSystem Shoulder carry bag and hand strap
28. (optional)
Operating AC charger
Temp (working
0°C~50°C; from 160
humidity V to 250
10%~90% V)
(non-
Environment Memory Card – minimum 2 GB
condensing)
One similar extra battery
29. Extra Features Real time clock, may be powered from a
separate battery, ability to configure two-level
authorization facility, online synchronization
ability
30. Offline printable Fare table, No. of passengers for the journey,
reports total collection, duplicate ticket with an
indication to mark it as “duplicate” (optional),
revenue separation between luggage and
passenger

311
.Section VII E.
Specifications
31. Contents to be Route, Start and End Stations, Ticket Details
printed on the of the ticket (Full, Half, Group, Concession,
ticket Free Passes, Luggage) Fare, Card No., Balance
amount (in case of offline stored value card)
time of issue, bus identifier, conductor
identifier, discounts or concessions, bus turn, a
short message to the passenger (optional),
Customer Service Number Etc..
32. Trip Summary Trip summary report should be made available
Report to each owner of POS machine (bus owner)
via password. The trip summary report should
include "section by section" information of
issued tickets and revenue in each section.
33. List of tickets  Full tickets
issued  Half tickets
 Group tickets
 Concession tickets
 Free Passes
 Luggage tickets
34. Data Transaction level POS data should be made
available to the Operations Control Center and
Data formats must be compatible with SAMs
provided by Acquirers and the Bus
Management System(BMS)
35. Multi Threading Required
36. Feature
Operational A unique user ID and PIN will be issued to
Details each conductor to login into ETM application.
Only after successful login, conductor will be
able to start duty/trip as per the duty allocated

37. It shall be able to manage Route Data, Fare

Matrix and Fare Rules, and downloading the
same from the backend
38. During ticketing, the number of total
passengers, battery level and other relevant
information will be available on ETM ticketing
screen for conductor convenience
39. System will support over-the-air (OTA) master
data updates
40. Capable of reading/writing contactless smart
cards (RFID/NFC based)
41. Quick printing and issuing of paper tickets with
minimum clicks
42. Generation of daily collection report, smart card
/ cash ticket issue report, inspection report,
collection summary at any point of time

43. Friendly, interactive and fast application to

minimize the operation time for issue of tickets

312
.Section VII E.
Specifications
44. The ticketing data from ETM application will
be transferred from ETM device to backend on
real time basis. In case of non-availability of
GPRS network, the ticketing data will be stored
in ETM’s memory and transferred later to
backend whenever connectivity is established.
45. Provision to manually extract transaction data
from ETMs using cable interface, in case the
data is not communicated to central server due
to problem in communication or ETM device
46. The comprehensive dashboard of ETM
application software interface will be available
at Operations Control Centre for live
monitoring of overall performance of the ETM
system such as total number of deployed
ETMs, details up to last ticket issued, total
revenue collected up to the time, etc.
47. Provide for issuance of tickets through
Electronic Ticketing Machines, as per the fare
rules of the operator
48. For fare payment on ETMs, payment facility
using either cash or post-paid transport NFC
based smart cards should be supported
49. Facility to update fare revisions quickly (push
and pull capability)
50. Minimum number of keystrokes by conductor
to switch from Card ticket to Cash ticket and
vice versa
51. Specify minimum time taken to issue a ticket
(from tapping of the card to complete printing
of a ticket
52. Provision of additional battery and mobile
charging facility in the bus
53. Adequate number of service locations within
the region
54. Availability of consumable items of the ticket
machine (paper roll, head, etc.)
55. 3 year on site comprehensive warranty. Annual
2. 5
Maintenance for 4th, 5th and 6th year.
56. Quick administrative mechanism in case of a
lost or stolen ticket machine
57. Length of Paper roll/ number of tickets per
paper roll
nos. outdoor CCTV cameras to be mounted at key gateways to the KMTT to identify arriving
and/or departing buses with streaming video and wi-fi connections including night vision and high
resolution for enable number recognition software to be used.

05 Video surveillance Outdoor camera specification

nos through CCTV - at
junctions Camera Shape: cylindrical / bullet or box

313
.Section VII E.
Specifications
Construction Material: Should be composed of metal with
a weather proof rating of IP66 or higher
Resolution Format: 2 MP or better
Lens: 2.8 ~ 6 mm
Angle of view: 80 to 90 degrees
Voltage: 12 V DC
Weight: less than 1000 g
Operating Temperature: 0 ~ 60 oC
Operating Humidity: < 95%
Video Output connection: BNC connector

NVR specification

Network connection: wired or wireless (preferred)

Operating System: Window / Linux
Video Inputs: 16 or higher
Input bandwidth: up to 320 Mbps
Output bandwidth: up to 320 Mbps
Other Connections: USB 2.0, USB 3.0
Operating Temperature: 0 ~ 60 oC
Weight: Less than 3kg
Warranty: 2 or more years
Dimensions: Around 450mm * 300mm * 60mm

Powering and networking method

Power supply for cameras: 12V DC and 10A

Networking: Ethernet cables to connect cameras to NVR or
Wi-Fi routers can be used to connect cameras to NVR,
HDMI or VGA cables to connect NVR to Displays/Monitors

Recommended brand for the products

Hikvision, Axis or equivalent

3. 6,000 nos personal digital identity cards to be issued to bus crew to enable login to on-board
GPS/ETM device or entry to KMTT facilities and other facilities or activity where bus crew
credentials are deemed necessary. Such identity cards should be readable by the KMTT door access
control system and parking control system described above.

6000 Digital IDs for Drivers Digital ID size: CR79 or CR80 (Preferred)
nos and Conductors
Type: Organizational Digital ID protected with passwords,
PINs or security tokens.

Recommended brand for the products:

Any authorized company that provides secured service.

4. 2 nos blade type computer servers with high processing power to provide server room facility
together with the required air-conditioning facilities server, rack and power systems including UPS

314
.Section VII E.
Specifications
systems for 60 minutes. Minimum specification is Rack mountable, 1 x Intel Xeon- E5- 24xx v2
Series or better processor, Processor speed of 2.4GHz, 6 or higher Processor cores, 15 MB or
higher/Processor L3 Cache, 1333MHz RAM Speed, 64GB RDIMMs with ECC RAM installed, Up
to 128 GB RAM Expandability, 16X DVD ROM Optical Drive, 6 x SFF Hot-Plug SAS HDDs 6G
10K, 1000GB or higher, Minimum 8 SFF HDD’s (All cages should be installed with cage blank
covers) Hard Drive Cage, Support RAID Level 0/0+1/1/5 With 256MB of Flash Backed Write
Cache Array Controller, Minimum 4 x 10/100/1000Base T Network Interfaces, Minimum 4 (2
front, 2 back) USB Ports, Dedicated remote administration port (NIC) with server console access
Remote Management, Dual Redundant power supplies (2) 240 V, 50/60 Hz Power supply, Full
Redundant System Fans, 2 PCIe Expansion slot, Rack mounting kit, Cable management arm,
Power and Network Cables, 3 years comprehensive on-site manufacturer authorized warranty
(including labor, parts and configuration support). Replacement backup server with same or better
configurations need to be provided during the repairs.

5. 4,000 nos. CCTV cameras to be fitted on-board 2,000 buses as required, with on-board data
recording devices adequate for 36 hours operation, with facility for upload in KMTT terminal when
wi-fi connections are available, including required SIM cards for en-route transmission both as still
images as well as streaming video if so required.

4000 Video surveillance Specification of the camera

nos through CCTV - Inside
buses Camera Shape: cylindrical / bullet or box or dome
Construction Material: metal or plastic with a
weatherproof rating of IP66 or higher
Resolution Format: 2 MP or better
Lens: 2.8 ~ 6 mm
Angle of view: 80 to 90 degrees
Voltage: 12 V DC
Weight: less than 800 g
Operating Temperature o C: 0 ~ +60 C
Operating Humidity %: < 95
Video Output connection: BNC connector

Networking method: Ethernet cables to connect cameras to

NVR or Wi-Fi routers can be used to connect cameras to
NVR

Storage required: 4GB or higher

Video back up and server details: The recorded footage

should be transferred to the data servers at terminals or
stations through automatic Wi-Fi connections

Recommended brand for the products

Hikvision or equivalent

315
.Section VII E.
Specifications

E.7.8. PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM

E.7.8.1. System Description

The software for Passenger Information Displays is being developed locally under the project as
an integral component of the Passenger Information Display System currently operational within
the terminal area which will continue to be updated as required to provide commuters with on-
route information in real-time.

E.7.8.2. Performance and Requirements

The active equipment should fit the requirements of the updated specifications to be issued at that
stage. Cabling should be provided for networking the indoor Passenger Information Displays to be
located within the KMTT areas and outdoor Passenger Information Displays to be located for each
of the bus platforms within the KMTT and for selected bus halts located within the Kandy city, as
per clients/system developers’ requirements. It should enable interconnectivity to the data network
backbone. The requirements are as follows:

1. 9 nos of outdoor LED Passenger Information Displays for selected bus halts located within
the Kandy city having a display size of between 55-65 inches diagonal measurement
depending on the site location.
2. 2 nos of indoor LED Passenger Information Displays for two locations within the KMTT
areas as may be decided once the design is finalised having a display size of 150 inches
diagonal measurement.
3. 6 nos of indoor LED Passenger Information Displays for within the KMTT areas as may be
decided once the design is finalised having a display size of 100 inches diagonal
measurement.
4. 42 nos outdoor LED Passenger Information Displays for each of the bus platforms within
the KMTT as may be decided once the design is finalised having a display size of 42
inches diagonal measurement.

All devices including connecting fixtures should be supplied, fixed (where necessary) and
maintained under full warranty with parts for a period of three years. The supplier shall facilitate
the direct transfer of all digital data as maybe specified by the client directly to the client server
without any fee or restriction both during the maintenance/ warranty period and thereafter even

316
.Section VII E.
Specifications
without a contract.

The following features would be required to connect the Passenger Information Displays being
assembled.

1. Display Sizes

Display Type Quantity Display Size (Diagonal Measurement)

Outdoor Monochromatic LED 09 55”-65”
SMD amber Passenger
Information Displays 42 42”

Indoor Color LED Passenger 02 150”

Information Displays 06 100”

2. Specifications of Displays

Outdoor Monochromatic
Indoor Color LED
LED SMD amber
Specification / Display Type Passenger Information
Passenger Information
Displays
Displays
Resolution of single LED
Minimum 32x32 Minimum 16x32
module (pix*)
Pixel pitch (mm) 4 6
Luminance (nits) 4500 or Higher 4000 or higher
Number of rows Customized Customized
IP protection IP54/ IP65 IP22/ IP54/ IP65
Temperature (0C) -250/+500 -250/+500
MTBF (h) 100000 100000
Vac supply 220-240 V 50Hz 220-240 V 50Hz
Anti-vandalism  
Brightness sensor  
Glass break sensor  
Case opening sensor  
Shock sensor  
Anti-reflective glass  
Control system DVI, HDMI, LAN, Serial DVI, HDMI, LAN, Serial

317
.Section VII E.
Specifications
Total size (mm) As defined in table above As defined in table above
3. Structural Requirement of Connections

Depending on the mounting location and display size, supplier has to provide the mounting
arrangement (as illustrated below) such that display can be pulled out easily for maintenance.

Typical Wall Bracket (with swivel and articulating tilt arm) – Fits displays up to 55”

318
.Section VII E.
Specifications
Typical Ceiling Mount Bracket – Fits Displays of 32”- 65”

Recommended Brands -Displays shall be of reputed make such as SAMSUNG, TOSHIBA, SONY,
PANASONIC, LG.

E.7.9. ELECTRONIC TICKETING SYSTEM

E.7.9.1. System Description

The software for Electronic Ticketing System has been developed locally under the project as an
integral component of the Bus Management System, and is currently operational and continues to
be updated. The active equipment to be fitted on/issued to buses has been purchased and is
operational. The same system should be extended to the ticketing counters and passenger boarding
gates to fit the updated specifications to be issued at that stage.

E.7.9.2. Performance and Requirements

Cabling should be provided within the KMTT for networking all the ticketing locations within the
terminal area, including the ticketing counters, loading gates, and platforms. It should enable
interconnectivity to the data network backbone.

319
.Section VII E.
Specifications
The following hardware equipment would be required for purchase to connect the Electronic
Ticketing System being developed. All devices should be supplied, fixed (where necessary) and
maintained under full warranty with parts for a period of three years. The response time for
equipment attention should not exceed two hours during all hours of bus operations, with
replacements provided when repairs are deemed to take more than two hours.

The supplier shall facilitate the direct transfer of all digital data as maybe specified by the client
directly to the client server without any fee or restriction both during the maintenance/ warranty
period and thereafter even without a contract. The devices should be connected to the available on-
board power or fixed power source as is the case and the required fixtures provided both off-board
and on board each bus as the case maybe.

1. 10 nos electronic ticketing POS machines to be made available at two each to the
ticketing booths in the main terminal lobby areas

10 Equipping Ticketing Computer specification

nos Counters
Operating System: Windows/ Linux/Android
Processor: 1GHz Quad core CPU or higher
RAM: 1 GB (minimum to support multi-threading feature)
or higher
Flash Memory: 4 GB (minimum to support multi-threading
feature) or higher
Extendable Memory: Minimum 2GB
Operating Environment: Temp 0°C~50°C; humidity
10%~95%
PC Interface: USB or Serial

Ticket printer specification

Built-in printer: High speed thermal printer 57 mm (32

characters per line). Minimum print speed 18 lines/sec, easy
paper roll loading. Should support minimum 15-meter length
55 GSM thermal paper roll (30 mm diameter)
Offline printable reports: Fare table, No. of passengers for
the journey, total collection, duplicate ticket with an
indication to mark it as “duplicate” (optional), revenue
separation between luggage and passenger
Contents to be printed on the ticket: Route, Start and End
Stations, Ticket Details of the ticket (Full, Half, Group,
Concession, Free Passes, Luggage) Fare, Card No., Balance
amount (in case of offline stored value card) time of issue,
bus identifier, conductor identifier, discounts or concessions,
bus turn, a short message to the passenger (optional),
Customer Service Number etc.
Trip Summary Report: Trip summary report should be
made available to each owner of POS machine (bus owner)
via password. The trip summary report should include
"section by section" information of issued tickets and
revenue in each section.

320
.Section VII E.
Specifications
List of tickets issued: Full tickets, Half tickets, Group
tickets, Concession tickets, Free Passes, Luggage tickets

Requirement from the other service

Battery: Rechargeable and Replaceable battery, 4500mAh

or higher
Display: 4.5” WVGA 850x480 IPS or Better
Satellite Positioning: GPS/GLONASS/BDS
SAM slots: Minimum 3 SAM slots, fully compliant with
ISO 7816, supports PPS protocol
External (mobile) communication:
GSM - 850 / 900 / 1800 / 1900
HSDPA - 850 /900 / 1900 / 2100
LTE - 1(2100), 3(1800), 8(900)
Security: Should support encryption standards including
3DES and AES
Contactless Smart Card Reader: Fully compliant with
ISO14443, Type A Type B. in compliance with qPBOC L1&
L2 certification standard

Recommended brand for the products

Telpo, Axionent or any other compatible brand

2. 27 nos electronic ticketing POS machines to be made available at each of the passenger
loading bays for the regular platforms (other than the touch and go platforms)

02 Ticket machines for POS Machine Dimensions: Height 300mm, Width 300mm
Gates at accessible height from the ground level for any passenger

Display information details

Dimensions: 10-inch
Type: LCD touch display
Keypad: Minimum 10 alphanumeric keys, 7 function keys

Specifications

Processor: 1GHz Quad core CPU or higher

RAM: 1 GB or higher
Flash Memory: 4 GB or higher
Extendable Memory: Minimum 2GB
Built-in printer: High speed thermal printer 57 mm (32
characters per line). Minimum print speed 18 lines/sec, easy
paper roll loading. Should support minimum 15-meter length
55 GSM thermal paper roll (30 mm diameter)
Operating Environment: Temp 0°C~50°C; humidity
10%~95%

Requirement from the other service

321
.Section VII E.
Specifications

Power Adaptor: with surge protection and operating range

100 to 240V input.
Battery: Rechargeable and Replaceable battery, 4500mAh
or higher
Security: Should support encryption standards including
3DES and AES
Contactless Smart Card Reader: Fully compliant with
ISO14443, Type A Type B. in compliance with qPBOC L1&
L2 certification standard

Recommended brand for the products

Telpo, Axionent or any other compatible brand

E.7.10. COMPUTERS FOR TERMINAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E.7.10.1. System Description

The software for Terminal Management System is being developed locally under the project as
an integral component of the Bus Management System. The equipment is required to be fixed to
the Operational Control Centre of the KMTT with the updated specifications to be issued at that
stage.

E.7.10.2. Performance and Requirements

Cabling should be provided within the KMTT for networking all the operational and passenger
locations within the terminal area, ticketing areas, loading gates, and platforms, bus operator offices
and include the bus parking area, bus entry and exit locations and passenger entrances as per
clients/system developers’ requirements. It should enable interconnectivity to the data network
backbone.

The following hardware equipment would be required for purchase to connect the Terminal
Management System being developed. All devices should be supplied, fixed (where necessary)
and maintained under full warranty with parts for a period of three years. The response time for
equipment attention should not exceed two hours during all hours of bus operations, with
replacements provided when repairs are deemed to take more than two hours.

The supplier shall facilitate the direct transfer of all digital data as maybe specified by the client
directly to the client server without any fee or restriction both during the maintenance/ warranty
period and thereafter even without a contract.

1. 55 nos laptops from i7 11th Gen or better version available at that time, with 240GB SSD
drive, 8GB Memory, latest Windows operating system, Microsoft office software.

322
.Section VII E.
Specifications

E.7.11. LED WALL DISPLAYS FOR TERMINAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E.7.11.1. System Description

The software for Terminal Management System is being developed locally under the project as an
integral component of the Bus Management System. The equipment is required to be fixed to the
Operational Control Centre of the KMTT with the updated specifications to be issued at that stage.

E.7.11.2. Performance and Requirements

Cabling should be provided within the KMTT for networking all the operational and passenger
locations within the terminal area, ticketing areas, loading gates, and platforms, bus operator offices
and include the bus parking area, bus entry and exit locations and passenger entrances as per
clients/system developers’ requirements. It should enable interconnectivity to the data network
backbone.

The following hardware equipment would be required to purchase for the Terminal Management
System being developed. All devices should be supplied, fixed (where necessary) and maintained
under full warranty with parts for a period of three years. The response time for equipment attention
should not exceed two hours during all hours of bus operations, with replacements provided when
repairs are deemed to take more than two hours.

The supplier shall facilitate the direct transfer of all digital data as maybe specified by the client
directly to the client server without any fee or restriction both during the maintenance/ warranty
period and thereafter even without a contract.

1. 2 nos LED based video walls for Operational Control Centre in KMTT with a display
of 75 inches diagonal measurement.

2. 2 nos CCTV wall fixed operations monitors with a display of 55 inches diagonal
measurement.

a. Display Sizes

Display Size
Display Type Quantity (Diagonal
Measurement)
LED based video wall for OCC 02 75”
LED Display for CCTV
02 55-65”
monitoring in OCC

323
.Section VII E.
Specifications

b. Specifications of Displays

Indoor Color LED

Specification / Display Type Passenger Information
Displays
Resolution of single LED
Minimum 64x84
module (pix*)
Pixel pitch (mm) 4
Luminance (nits) 4500 or Higher
Number of rows Customized
IP protection IP54/ IP65
Temperature (0C) -250/+500
MTBF (h) 100000
Vac supply 220-240 V 50Hz
Anti-vandalism 
Brightness sensor 
Glass break sensor 
Case opening sensor 
Shock sensor 
Anti-reflective glass 
Control system DVI, HDMI, LAN, Serial
Total size (mm) As defined in table above

E.7.12. PRINTERS FOR TERMINAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

E.7.12.1. System Description

The printer is needed under the project as an integral component of the Terminal Management
System. The equipment is required to be fixed to the Operational Control Centre of the KMTT with
the updated specifications to be issued at that stage.

E.7.12.2. Performance and Requirements

The active equipment should fit the requirements of the updated specifications to be issued at that
stage. It should enable interconnectivity to the data network backbone.

All devices including connecting fixtures should be supplied, fixed (where necessary) and

324
.Section VII E.
Specifications
maintained under full warranty with parts for a period of three years. The supplier shall facilitate
the direct transfer of all digital data as maybe specified by the client directly to the client server
without any fee or restriction both during the maintenance/ warranty period and thereafter even
without a contract. The following features would be required for purchasing the printers.

1. Printer Specifications

Specification / Printer Type Black and White Printers Colour Printers

Quantity 05 03
Printing technology Laser Laser
Paper trays 02 02
Paper size supported A4, Legal, Letter A4, Legal, Letter
Printing speed up to 25/30 ppm up to 25/30 ppm
Print quality (dpi) Up to 600 x 600 Up to 600 x 600
Duplex printing Yes Yes
Both Wired & Wireless
Yes Yes
Connectivity
50 sheets or more 50 sheets or more
multipurpose, multipurpose,
Paper handling 250 sheets or more input 250 sheets or more input
tray, tray,
150 sheets or more output 150 sheets or more output
tray tray
220 – 240V (±10%) 220 – 240V (±10%)
Power requirement
50 / 60Hz (±2Hz) 50 / 60Hz (±2Hz)
Functions Print Print, Copy, Scan, Email

2. Recommended Brands

Printers shall be of reputed make such as CANON, HP, TOSHIBA.

E.8. INTERNAL ROADS AND PARKING AREA

E.8.1. GENERAL R E Q U I R E M E N T S

This chapter shall be demarcated on the general requirements and specifications to be followed by
design proposer, in design, construction, testing and maintenance during defect liability for internal
roads and parking area developments.

325
.Section VII E.
Specifications
Scope of the works defined as per Section B and Functional Requirements of KMTT as given in

Section 04 and Design Goals & Objectives, Key Design Concepts to be considered in design
construction of internal road and parking areas. KMTT facility requirements are given under the
Section 05, accordingly parking Bays and overall scope of work to be considered in
developments by Proposer.

E.8.1.1. Conceptual Design

Based on studies, traffic modeling’s, investigations and surveys undertaken previously, the
Employer has arrived at certain design concepts for the various components constituting the
project, as per the attached Architectural conceptual drawings submit herewith.

In the designs and constructions, the Employer requirements shall be done by the Project
Proposer to conform to certain technical standards and specifications. These standards and
specifications are referred to in this volume under technical requirements.

E.8.1.2. Observed Design Constraints

As given in Sub-section 7.2.11 of Section B, amendments to be done on the KMTT Design

Development architectural design. Comments are noted under the subtitle for Roads. Accordingly,
the proposer to be taken necessary design measures to avoid such noted design issues.

E.8.1.3. Proposer's Preliminarily Design

The Project Proposer in his proposal shall provide a preliminarily design that would closely match
the conceptual design and the Design Development of the Employer at the evaluation stage. This
shall be true for all the component of the project with avoiding of identified design issues and
constrains.

E.8.1.4. Design Standards

In particular in regard to road construction, the design shall conform to the specifications for:

 Geometric Design Standards of Roads 1998 issued by Road Development Authority

(GSDR 1998)

 Traffic Signs and Markings – Local Markings and Signs (Gazette Publication Document

No. 1940/21 dated 12th Nov 2015)

 Technical Specifications – “Standard Specifications for construction and maintenance

of roads and bridges, ICTAD publication No. SCA/5, Second Edition June 2009.

326
.Section VII E.
Specifications
The design elements which are not addressed in the local codes are derived from other international
standards which are listed below:

 AASHTO (American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials) Paveme

Design guide 1993

 Design Manual for Roads and Bridges (DMRB) (British Standards)

 American Association of State Highway and Transport Officials - AASHTO (Policy on

Geometric Design of Highways and Streets)

 Overseas Road Note 31

 Austroads - Design Guidlines

E.8.1.5. Design Criteria

Vehicular movements of the proposed Terminal building, Parking building and ground roads to be
designed to proposed design vehicle in line with all the design features such as horizontal geometry,
vertical alignments, Cross sectional elements, pavement features. The elements to be satisfied the
design standards and tabulated Table E. 22: Design Criteria respectively.

In consideration of ground roads, terminal area and parking areas, all road movements of in and
out from these Access roads to be facilitated to avoid the conflicts of right turn movements and the
geometry to be met to design standards to have smooth circulation of the traffic hence special
attention to be given in designing of the horizontal geometry.

Since the bus parking areas is at the First-floor level of the Parking building, smooth reaching,
turning and exit from bus parking area to be considered as prime requirement, hence relevant design
features such as gradient, cross-sectional width, turning paths, clear heights to be evaluated.

There are four different bus bays as Touch and Go, Boarding and Alighting, Layover Parking,
Operation & Maintenance proposed as Bus route operational changes through infrastructure
modification within the terminal. The Proposer to be considered all the vehicular turning paths in
parking, turning, reversing movements with respect to design standards and smooth traffic flow to
be considered via the functioning in minimum disturbance to other vehicular lanes.

The following design criteria to be adopted in design of various design element by the project
proposer. The detailed design report on pavement design and geometric design to be submitted
during detailed designs.

Table E.34: Design Criteria

327
.Section VII E.
Specifications

No Item Units Design Value

01 Design speed Km/h 20
02 Minimum Vertical clearance m 5.2
03 Stopping Site Distance (SSD) m 20
04 Cross sectional elements
a. Carriage width m 3.5
b. Normal Cross slope of the Carriageway % 2.5
c. Cross slope of the outer shoulder % 2.5
d. Maximum Cross slope (Maximum Super Elevation) % 2.5
05 Horizontal Elements
Minimum Circular Curve Radius m 19
06 a. Maximum Gradient % +/- 5%
b. Minimum Gradient (Drainage Gradient) % +/- 0.3%
c. Minimum K value for Crest Curves 1
d. Minimum K value for Sag Curves 3

Gradient of the walkway should not be steeper than 1:12. Provision of barrier free facilities, such
as dropped kerb at grade crossing point, tactile pavement etc for people with disabilities shall be
designed.

E.8.1.6. Pavement Design and Finishing of Road pavements

A flexible pavement shall be adopted for driveways, First Floor bus parking area and existing road
widenings, Refer the finishing schedule of Architectural drawings in identifying the type of paving
finish requirement.

Pedestrian Pathways /Pavement and Ground floor Bus parking bays, Car parking areas and Three-
wheel parking area shall be Cement Concrete Block Pavers in line with the drawings and the
specifications. Designer to be given appropriate proposal for separation areas with the different
background finishes for easy eye-catching in identifications. Appropriate kerb types to be used as
standard, drop kerbs, dropper kerbs ,etc.

For the existing roads widening, Pavement design has to be carried out considering the following
factors:

 CBR testing results

 Total traffic loads; - proceed traffic from the development traffic

328
.Section VII E.
Specifications
 Design Life (20 years)

E.8.1.7. Road storm water Drainage within KMTT and Road Corridors

The Project Proposer shall design with appropriate cross slopes in designing of road storm water
drainage system within the KMTT – Road premises. In Bus Parking areas and other Road
corridors, Ramps to be manage the surface runoff and perennial discharge in conformity with
the storm water discharge arrangements.

Where road areas in open to sky areas, such to be not ponded and proper road storm water drainage
design to be submitted.

E.8.1.8. Pedestrian movements

Pedestrian movements to be discourage through the driveways by the design itself, hence necessary
design features to be introduce to encourage the pedestrians to use the vertical cores to reach their
destinated parking location through the terminal passages.

E.8.1.9. Road Lighting

Adequate road lighting shall be provided for all roads and walkways to ensure safe driving and
walking, which shall be covered under Electrical design scope.

E.8.1.10. Technical Standards and Specifications

The d e s i g n shall conform to the stated technical standards and specifications However, if the
Contractor is proposing to adopt other standards and specifications, he shall prove them to be
superior or equivalent to the stated standards and specifications.

Further, the Contractor shall at all times abide with the existing rules and regulations
applicable to Sri Lanka.

E.8.1.11. Data Information and Drawings

To facilitate the Project Proposer's preliminary design, information from studies,

investigations and surveys undertaken previously by the Employer will be provided as
indicated in the Employer’s requirement. The Project Proposer shall be responsible for interpreting
t h e s e information and data for himself, if necessary, further inquiries/studies with can be carried
out to satisfy himself and to prepare his proposal comprehensively.

E.8.1.12. Establishment of Reference Benchmarks and Grid Reference Point

Contractor shall proceed the Work with the established bench marks and grid reference points.
Details of Control points is available in the topographical survey details.

329
.Section VII E.
Specifications
E.8.1.13. Traffic Management System

Proposer shall arrange interim arrangements during the KMTT construction period to facilitate
the users to access for the services located at the site such as SLTB fuel station, Telecom and
Electricity to use and service the installations, as per the contract. The proposer shall have to
obtain the prior approval for the method statements of traffic management before
commencement the work.

Proposer shall give provisional sum for Traffic Management, Safety Control and Temporary
Diversion of Traffic, including provision of general traffic management plan, diversions and
provision of traffic control personals in required nos. necessary for transporting debris out of the
Site and machinery transport as directed by the Engineer. This shall Include maintaining of
Access Roads and internal roads without any muddy condition throughout the contract period.

Also note the Table A.01: The Employer‟s Environmental Management Plan of Annex A under
the followings themes which are reference to the Traffic management

1.24 Traffic Safety Among the Community

1.25 Planning of Temporary Traffic Arrangements

2.15 Disruption to Users

2.15.1 Traffic Jams and Congestion

E.8.1.14. Transport Management

Re-routing and Re-location of the busses have already been carried out. The initial Management
for commissioning of the new terminal is to be handled by the Proposer with Employer. Cost of
the activity including the removal of temporary location used for bus operation has to be
demolished and removed as per direction of Engineer. It is proposed a provisional sun Item for
these works.

E.8.1.15. Road Markers and Road Signage

The Proposer shall provide appropriate road markers and sign boards to all road furniture items
and other structures at appropriate locations along new permanent roads, Passenger Terminal
Building, Parking Building for bus turning and Parking, Ramps,etc. He shall also erect warning
boards at appropriate locations as per given design standards.

Road marking and road signage with reflective road marking paint approved colour and quality as
per the Gazette note (2015) dated 12.11.2015.

330
.Section VII E.
Specifications
E.8.2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

E.8.2.1. Road Construction

E.8.2.1.1 Site clearing

The work shall include the clearing and grubbing necessary for the work, disposal of the all cleared
material, back filling of holes and depressions caused by removal of stumps, removal of Fences,
removal of existing structures, Demolition & removal of Existing Asphalt etc. & waste remove
from the site as instructed by the Engineer. Work to be confirm to confirming to standard
specifications of SCA/05.

E.8.2.1.2 Utility Relocation

The work shall include the assist the utility agencies and relocation of the utility service as per the
requirements of the utility service agency and the road agency.

E.8.2.1.3 Earth works

The work shall include the Roadway Excavation and preparation of subgrade in cut area as per
SCA 05 - Clause 300. Work to be include classification of soil as the soil suitable for filling, Hard
rock, soft rock, boulders, unsuitable soil, road pavement excavation, Subgrade replacement. Also
work shall be include the preparation of subgrade in cut areas to the accepted tests and standards.
Disposal of excavated material off site and dump to an approved land, all as directed by the
Engineer. Rate shall include for loading, unloading, levelling the soil and all machine hire chargers
and operating cost etc.

E.8.2.1.4. Embankment Construction on Soft Ground Areas

It shall be the responsibility of t h e Project Proposer to identify soft ground stretches their
respective extend from visual inspection and soil investigation reports, where later
construction of embankment of roads was required.

The Project Proposer is required to study all available and obtainable data characterize the sub
surface stratification from the longitudinal and cross section mappings of the soil investigation
reports and propose design for typical embankment construction on soft ground areas
confirming to standard specifications of SCA/05

The Proposer shall give the method statement preliminary drawings and detail engineering
design for such identified areas.

E.8.2.2. Reconstruction of Existing Road Bases

331
.Section VII E.
Specifications
The proposer shall prov ide the design options for improve base failure sections with identified
sections on existing base sections.

E.8.2.3. Pavement layers

All road pavement material and thickness of pavement layers to be as per the approved pavement
designs and construction requirements to be confirm to the standard specifications of SCA/05.

E.8.2.4. Sub-Surface Design

It shall be the responsibility of the Project Proposer to identify stretches and their respective extend
for sub surface drainage required from visual inspection and soil investigation reports. The
proposer shall give the method statement and preliminary drawings and detail engineering design
for such identified areas.

E.8.2.5. Cross Drainage v i a . Hume Pipes and Culverts

Where the discharge of drains and any other drainage paths shall cross the road suitable cross
drainage structures of Hume pipe culverts or RCC box culverts shall be constructed. All designs
and constructions shall conform to British Standards.

E.8.2.6. R o a d Finish on First Floor for bus turning and Parking Area

The Road parking building for bus turning and Parking area is open to sky, Structural slab to
be water proofed as per Structural design details and specifications. The road Asphalt binder shall
be laid on waterproofed, sound structural surfacing. The detailed design of the pavement cross
section shall to be submitted by the Proposer.

E.8.2.7. Road storm Drainage within KMTT and Road Corridors

The Project Proposer shall design a drainage system within the KMTT – Road for Bus Turning
and Parking and other Road corridors, Ramps to manage the surface runoff and perennial
discharge in conformity of environmental migratory measures without ponding areas, with respect
to Drainage System Design Guidelines, Road Development Authority.

E.8.2.8. Detailed Design

The design of the Work shall be based on the Contractor‟s agreed technical proposals, including
any modifications agreed to prior to contract award. No variations to the details in the agreed
technical proposal shall be permitted, except with the specific written authority of the Engineer.
No such permission should be anticipated by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit the
following information for review:General Design Information - this shall incorporate an
augmentation of information provided in the agreed technical proposal as appropriate.

332
.Section VII E.
Specifications

E.8.2.9. Preliminary and Final Reports and Drawings of Road Work

The Contractor shall submit preliminary design reports and drawings incorporating all submissions
and including all necessary provisions for services of roads and other structures early in the
design stage. The Contractor shall submit a final design report after the Engineer approves the
preliminary design. This shall be based on the preliminary design report/drawings and contain any
necessary updated or augmented information.

E.8.2.10. General Design Parameters and Criteria

The design criteria stated in this section is given for the information of the Proposer (and, once
procured; the Contractor). Designs incorporating criteria outside the stated ranges will not be
accepted by the Engineer, unless the Proposer (and, once procured; the Contractor) provides
sufficient information to satisfy the Engineer that his design will meet the Employer‟s
Requirements in all respects. Regardless of the information provided in this Section and the
acceptance by the Engineer of his design the Proposer (and, once procured; the Contractor) shall
be solely responsible for designing and constructing the structure and associated facilities that meet
the specified requirements and fulfil all the Empolyer’s Requirements.

The Contractor shall undertake at his own expense, any additional tests (geotechnical investigation
or any other) as may be necessary during the design for him to design the works, providing
supporting information to validate his design assumptions. A copy of the results of all such
investigations shall be provide to the Engineer.

E.8.3. WORK REQUIREMENTS

E.8.3.1. Standard Specifications

Refer to Standard Specifications for construction and maintenance of roads and bridges, Second
Edition June 2009, Published by the Institute of Construction Training and Development (ICTAD)

E.8.3.2. Particular Specifications

The Particular Specifications are an amplification of the Standard Specifications for Construction
and Maintenance of Roads and Bridges, Second Edition June 2009, published by the Institute of
Construction Training and Development (ICTAD) and contain provisions in respect of items of
work not covered by or at variance with the Standard Specifications.Where there is any ambiguity
or discrepancy between the Particular Specifications and the Standard Specifications, the
requirements of Particular Specifications shall. Prevail. Where BS tests are stipulated in the

333
.Section VII E.
Specifications
Specifications, the equivalent ASTM or AASHTO test method may be substituted with the
approval of the Engineer. Only additional clauses and clauses which have been deleted,
modified or substituted in the Standard Specifications have been detailed in the Particular
Specifications. Any reference to Sections/tables if not detailed in Particular Specifications refers
to the relevant section or table in standard specifications.

Clause numbers herein correspond with the numbers of related articles, if any, in the Standard
Specifications.

The abbreviations ·AASHTO, ASTM, BS and SLS shall considered to have the following meaning:

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials

BS British Standard·

SLS Sri Lanka Standard

400. SUB BASES, BASES AND SHOULDER

401.4 Construction Requirements

(a) Preliminaries (add at the end of this sub section)

Where a sub base is to be laid over an existing pavement, the existing pavement shall be fully
scarified to enable the existing bituminous layer and aggregate greater than 100mm in size to be
removed. In removing the bituminous layer the Proposer" shall ensure that as much of the
adhering existing aggregate as possible is dislodged and left remaining to be mixed with the
sub base to be added Where instructed by the Engineer, existing material considered of poor
quality shall be removed and disposed of. Extra sub base material shall then be added to the
existing pavement material and thoroughly mixed either in place or alongside the area to
be strengthened.

412 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS Add New Clause

412.1 General

Interlocking concrete paving blocks shall comply with the requirements specified herein.
Interlocking Concrete paving blocks shall be earth colored precast paving blocks from approved
manufacturers.

The project contractor shall provide a 10-year performance guarantee for the paving blocks against
de-lamination and color fading in the Sri Lankan environment. The 10-year guarantee shall be back-

334
.Section VII E.
Specifications
to-back from the concrete paving block manufacturer.

412.2 Constituent Materials Specifications

Refer SLS 1425 Part 1: 2011 - Specification for concrete paving blocks Part 1: requirements

412.3 Shape and dimensions

Refer SLS 1425 Part 1: 2011 - Specification for concrete paving blocks Part 1: requirements

412.4 Visual aspects

Refer SLS 1425 Part 1: 2011 - Specification for concrete paving blocks Part 1: requirements

412.5 Physical and mechanical properties

Refer SLS 1425 Part 1: 2011 - Specification for concrete paving blocks Part 1: requirements

412.5 Sampling

Refer SLS 1425 Part 1: 2011 - Specification for concrete paving blocks Part 1: requirements

412.7 Criteria for Conformity

Refer SLS 1425 Part 1: 2011 - Specification for concrete paving blocks Part 1: requirements

412.6 Installation of Interlocking Concrete Paving Blocks

Laying of interlocking concrete paving blocks shall be in accordance with the following steps
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer:

a) The Contractor shall take samples of the existing subgrade area, Soil Information, of these
Standard Specifications. If the existing subgrade meets the requirements it shall remain in place.
All low areas shall be raised by filling with compacted borrow material.

b) Levelling of the natural ground surface shall be done, Testing Levels and Evenness of
Surface, of these Standard Specifications, and to the proposed grades and slopes. Objectionable
material and unsuitable soil shall be removed from the site and disposed of in compliance with
Standard specifications, Disposal of Excavated Materials and Surplus Materials, of these
Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish borrow material (load bearing) complying
these Standard Specifications. All borrow materials shall be placed and compacted in compliance
these Standard Specifications.

c) For vehicular pavers, on bus circulation to be concerned as Heavy Duty and the compressive
strength to be 50 N/mm2. For medium duty areas, vehicular pavers shall be compressive strength
of be 30 N/mm2, place soil sub base complying with these Standard Specifications and drawings,

335
.Section VII E.
Specifications
on the prepared subgrade and to be compacted to the finished grade. The compacted surface shall
be at proper cross section, smooth, dense, and free of compaction planes, ridges or loose material.
During the compaction operations, shaping will be required to obtain the required surface and
cross-section. During shaping operations, it may be necessary to lightly scarify and broom-drag
the surface in order to remove ridges or depressions in excess of the permitted tolerance.

The resulting surface shall then be rolled with a smooth steel-wheel roller, weighing not less than
ten tons, or pneumatic tire rollers, or both. The final rolling shall be done by a smooth steel- wheel
roller. Several applications of water may be required to keep the surface at the proper moisture
content, as ordered by the Engineer, during the finishing operation. Water shall be applied by the
pressure spray bar method Standard Specifications.

Compaction and finishing shall be done in such a manner as to produce a smooth, dense surface,
Free of surface compaction planes, cracks, ridges or loose Material. Immediately after rolling,
the surface of the course shall be tested for trueness, transversely and longitudinally.

The finished surface of the course shall comply with Standard Specifications. Surface finishing
shall be completed in daylight hours. Any portion of this course which has a density less than
that specified shall be corrected or removed and replaced to its full depth to meet the
requirements of the Standard Specifications, at the Contractor's expense.

The Contractor shall be required to maintain the aggregate in accordance with these Standard
Specifications, and in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer from the time he first starts work
until all work has been completed and accepted.

d) Place 5cm of bedding fine aggregate complying with the requirements of Passing limits (BS

882: 1992) specified in Table below:

Sieve Size Standard. Standard.

(mm) Min.% Finer Max.% Finer
10 100 100
5 89 100
2.36 60 100
1.18 30 100
0.600 15 100
0.300 5 70
0.150 0 15
The bedding sand shall be uniformly mixed over the compacted subgrade for pedestrian areas, or

336
.Section VII E.
Specifications
over the aggregate base for vehicular areas, or on top of RCC slabs and screed uniformly to
grade 10 to 15mm higher than required, utilizing temporary templates complying with these
Standard Specifications.

e) Place the interlocking pavers in the pattern the Engineer has selected as close together as
possible such that the spaces of the joints are between 3mm and 5mm. It is important that the spaces
be consistent so that the pattern will remain constant.

f) Any necessary cutting of concrete paving blocks or flagstones shall be done with a mechanical
block splitter or a purpose-built proprietary diamond saw. In all such situations, only cut paving
units with true, even and undamaged edges shall be laid. Cut paving with ragged edges and
producing voids shall not be installed. Cut pieces to be laid shall not be less than 30% of a full
paving unit and where necessary the cut shall be shared uniformly with the next complete
unit.

g) Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps, alignment and squareness shall be checked
after laying the first three rows of blocks and thereafter at regular intervals. If joints begin to
open the blocks shall be knocked together using a hide mallet.

h) After each 20m² or such area that has been agreed with the Engineer, has been laid the blocks
shall be compacted to the required levels using a plate vibrator.

i) Tamp down on rubber pad and level the interlocking concrete paving blocks (now 10 to 15mm
higher than required) with a mechanical plate vibrator equipped with a rubber pad on the tamping
face (to minimize damage to the finished surface and appearance of the paving blocks), until pavers
are uniformly level, true to grade and free of any movement. The mechanical plate vibrator shall
have a plate area of 0.20 to 0.35m² and have a compaction force of 12-24 KN and a frequency of
approximately 75 to 100 Hz.

j) No paving shall be left un compacted overnight except for the 1m strip at the temporary
unrestrained edge.

k) The Contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating various patterns to the Engineer for review
and approval. No interlocking concrete paving blocks shall be fabricated and delivered before a
specific pat- tern has been approved.

412.7 Acceptance

Upon completion, the finished surface level, shall be within 5mm of the design level and the
maximum deviation within the compacted surface, measured by a 3m straight edge shall not exceed
3mm. The level of any two adjacent blocks shall not differ by more than 1mm. Any are- as of

337
.Section VII E.
Specifications
paving which do not comply with these tolerances shall be removed, the sand laying course
adjusted and the paving blocks re-laid to the correct levels.

SURFACE APPLICATIONS, SURFACE DRESSINGS AND SURFACINGS

506 Asphaltic Concrete Surfacing

506.3 Mix Requirements

a. Combined Grading of Aggregate and Binder Content Include.

Particular Applications

The grading requirements for the combined aggregate and the binder content shall be as given in
Table 506-1. For the Wearing Courses Type 1 is recommended in conformity with the design of
pavement. However, the Contractor may select the most suitable mix according to the site
conditions and layer thickness required for his constructions. The selection of the optimum mix
and trial mixes shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and carried out in his presence.

The sieve sizes used herein are of ASTM designation. However, equivalent BS sizes as given in

Table 107-1 of Section 107 herein may be used with the prior approval of the Engineer.

338
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

F. DOCUMENTS AND DETAILS EXPECTED WITH THE

PROPOSAL AND AFTER AWARDING OF THE
CONTRACT

339
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

F.1. ARCHITECTURAL

Design approach of architectural design shall include information that will be considered in
designing the building and other structures using the architectural design given in the Design
Development Report and addressing issues identified in ER. It shall be submitted by the Proposer
at Proposal submission stage. The Proposer shall clearly understand all the important aspects of
the Project in setting up his Design Approach. The submission shall cover the requirement
specified in this document in minimal.

The evaluation will be done considering the completeness and clarity of the design approach
proposed and details submitted, which should sufficiently demonstrate the Proposer‟s
understanding and capability of carrying out the Design and Build scope of this project. Proposer
will be qualified based on the content of the design approach which shall cover but not limited to
all the technical requirements given in the ER.

F.1.1. SUBMISSION OF CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL (BEFORE AWARD OF

CONTRACT)

F.1.1.1. Design and Technical Proposal- Preliminary Architectural Design

Contractor’s Preliminary architectural design proposal shall consist of the following;

1. All architectural drawings shall be checked and signed by the Principal Architect and
submitted in duplicate. In addition to the list of hard copies given below, CD contains soft
copies of all the preliminary design proposal drawings shall be submitted for design
review.

2. Document describing the design intent, design concept, proposed development, planning
concerns, zoning of major spaces vertically and horizontally, environmental concerns,
energy efficiency, material and finishes, furniture , interior decoration, furnishing,
systems, facilities, security features, other features etc., pertaining to the scope of work
shall be submitted. Any modification, deviation etc., from the Employers’ Requirement
shall be clearly noted in this report. Copies of preliminary planning security clearances
obtained for the proposed development also shall be enclosed.

3. Site plan showing access roads, boundaries and foot prints of all proposed building
structures. (recommended scale 1:500)

4. Floor plans of all floors showing dimensions, areas, general arrangements of activity areas
with labeling, doors and windows, levels etc., Demarcation of different areas of KMMIT

340
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

office areas and other activity areas with floor areas should be clearly indicated in color.
(Recommended scale 1:200)

5. Minimum of four sections taken through building indicating spaces, heights, floors,
ceilings. (Recommended scale 1:200)

6. All four elevations of the building. (Recommended scale 1:200)

7. Color exterior 3D views of the building (bird’s eye views and views taken at eye level
showing the design are preferred)

8. Separate key floor plans in color showing different types of floor, walls and ceiling finishes
proposed in the design proposal. Elevations labeling exterior finishes of the building.
Photographic expressions /references shall be given for all types of the finishes and
materials.

9. Basic Landscape layouts showing general outline of different types of foliage , paved areas,
water bodies etc.,

10. General descriptions / details of glazed areas, doors and windows and schedule of doors
and windows.

11. General descriptions of handrails, signage and other items coming under interior designs.

12. Photographic references of all finishes, fittings and accessories.

13. summary of total floor area based on KMMIT areas , rentable areas, common areas,
technical rooms etc.,

14. Comparison of the floor areas given under the “Space Requirement”, “ Design Brief” and
“As per Design Proposal”.

F.1.2.CONTRACTOR’S DOCUMENTS (AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT)

F.1.2.1. Review the Preliminary Design proposal

The architectural review is done by the employer’s architectural consultant. The contactor is
required to proceed the schematic architectural drawings according to the given comments by the
reviewer. All architectural drawings or requested parts by the reviewer listed out under preliminary
design proposal (drawn to the scale of 1:200) have to be submitted by the contractor in this review
period.

The Contractor shall get the approval by Employer for the final architectural preliminary design
proposal.

341
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

F.1.2.2. Detailed Architectural Designs

After finalization and approval of the preliminary design proposal, Contactor is required to
proceed with detailed architectural designs and prepare architectural drawings accordingly. All
architectural drawings shall be checked and signed by the Principal Architect.

1. All Detail drawings listed out under preliminary design proposal drawn to the scale of
1:100

2. Detail drawings of doors and windows.

3. Detail drawings of stairways , handrails, toilets etc.,

4. Schedule of finishes , details, layout plans showing different types of finishes

5. Floor and wall tiling layouts.

6. Furniture layouts.

7. Reflected ceiling layouts

8. Details of special features.

9. Color 3D views of exterior and interior spaces

10. 3D animation to explain the design.

11. Detail model to a scale of 1:200(with the immediate context)

12. Detailed Building information model (BIM)-Auto Desk Revit, The minimum level of
detail (LOD) 350 (include interfaces, supports and connections with other building
component showing one system interacts with the other building systems).

13. Sample boards/product details to obtain approval of the Employer for fittings, accessories
and finishing materials.

14. Any other drawings, details and information required for Employer /Consultant approvals
and construction purposes.

15. Sample boards for finishing material, finishes color schemes etc., to obtain approval from
the Employer/Consultant.

The architectural review is done by the employer’s architectural consultant. The contactor is
required to proceed the schematic architectural drawings according to the given comments by the
reviewer All architectural detail drawings or requested parts by the reviewer listed out under
detailed architectural design proposal (drawn to the scale of 1:100) have to be submitted by the

342
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

contractor in this review period.

The Contractor shall get the approval by Employer for the final architectural detailed design
proposal.

After finalization of detailed architectural design drawings, contractor is expected to prepare the
architectural drawings and details required for construction purposes. The architectural review is
done by the employer’s architectural consultant. The contactor is required to proceed the
architectural construction drawings according to the given comments by the reviewer. All
architectural construction drawings or requested parts by the reviewer (drawn to the scale of 1:100)
have to be submitted by the contractor in this review period.

Further the contractor shall prepare shop drawings and coordination drawings required for the
construction. The architectural review is done by the employer’s architectural consultant. The
contactor is required to proceed the architectural shop drawings according to the given comments
by the reviewer as well as to obtain approval from the reviewer.

Contractor shall make provision in his financial proposal to produce “Mockups” for the interior
spaces and landscaping works.

F.2. STRUCTURAL

F.2.1.DOCUMENTS TO BE INCORPORATED IN THE PROPOSAL AT THE BIDDING

STAGE (DESIGN APPROACH)\

Design approach shall include information that will be considered in designing the building and
other structures. It shall be submitted by the Proposer at Proposal submission stage. The Proposer
shall clearly understand all the important aspects of the Project in setting up his Design Approach.
The submission shall cover the requirement specified in this document in minimal.

The evaluation will be done considering the completeness and clarity of the design approach
proposed and details submitted, which should sufficiently demonstrate the Proposer‟s
understanding and capability of carrying out the Design and Build scope of this project. Proposer
will be qualified based on the content of the design approach which shall cover but not limited to
all the technical requirements given in the ER.

Design approach shall be include following key information/details.

343
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

F.2.2. STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA

Explanation shall be included with methodologies/ procedures on the buildings & structures design
under vertical and horizontal loads, determination of most suitable structural form in resisting the
loads, steps and procedures for adopting most suitable foundation systems, technical approaches
to be used for super structure designs & retaining structures, fire resistance & to achieve all
necessary durability conditions. It shall further explain any other special considerations to be
adopted in the structural design stage for satisfying Employers Requirements specified in this
document.

Proposer shall explain the design philosophy with reference to the structural loads evaluation,
structural analysis, design & detailing procedure expected to be adopted for buildings & other
structures. He should clearly mention relevant design parameters, design standards, specifications
and references that will be used in the design. Further design criteria shall include basic
methodologies / approaches or alternative arrangements that would be proposed to address the
highlighted constraints in the design. A precise details on structural analysis software, design
software with its version / release shall be specified if Proposer is expected to use such software
programs in structural analysis, design and in detailing.

F.3. ELECTRICAL

F.3.1. SUBMISSION OF CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL (ALONG WITH THE

PROPOSAL)

F.3.1.1.

Following document shall be submitted by the Proposer along with the proposal. All
drawings shall be in A1 size

1. Qualification information of the contractor‟s design team with CVs and consent letters
(if applicable).

2. Electrical power distribution system design concept (in report format).

3. Statement of compliance for the standards/regulations and guidelines stipulated in the

Employer‟s Requirement.

4. Preliminary level electrical load estimation (maximum demand) of the building.

Verification of estimated loads is required - building wise loads, floor wise loads
(lighting, small power and other) and major loads etc.

344
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

5. Proposed location for CEB Substation.

6. Proposed Main Electrical Power Distribution System Schematic Diagram including

Medium Voltage (MV) (if the power s st m contains a M V system) , Standby power
and Low Voltage (LV) within the premises and design calculations for major
equipment selection.

7. Proposed Equipment Arrangements for Transformer Room (if the power system
contains a MV system) , and Generator Room.

8. Proposed cable trench arrangement of the entire premises.

9. Proposed Emergency power supply system (calculations, layouts).

10. Main cable/bus trunking system and circuit breaker selection calculations (up to the FDB
level).

11. Lighting arrangement (indoor and outdoor) with switching locations with software
simulation files and proposal for the lighting control systems associated with green aspects.

12. Socket outlet and industrial socket arrangements.

13. Floor distribution system (layout for the panel room/panel location arrangement, cable
management system, areas covered under each DB/CU).

14. General drawings for the proposed Lightning Protection System (Air termination
system, down conductor system and earth termination system).

15. Schematic diagrams for the proposed solar PV system, design calculations, technical
details of equipment and test certificates of major items (module & inverter).

16. Maintenance strategy for the electrical distribution system of the building after the
Contractor‟s defects liability period, draft documents for maintenance agreements.

17. List of spare parts, tools and consumables to be submitted at the handing over.

345
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

F.3.2. SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS AFTER THE AWARD OF THE CONTRACT

F.3.2.1.

Following document shall be submitted by the selected contractor for the prior approval of the
Engineer before the construction. All drawings shall be in A1 size and submitted in 03 set of copies
and one set of soft copy in a CD (consists of PDF version)

1. Detailed calculations for feeder cable & protective conductor selection, fault level
calculations and selection of protection devices.

2. Detailed schematic diagram of the complete electrical power distribution system (MV
(if applicable) & LV).

3. Single line diagrams for all type of Distribution Boards/Consumer Units.

4. Detailed lighting designs with manual calculations/software simulations and lighting

layout for the complete building.

5. Detailed small power arrangement drawings for the complete building.

6. Detailed drawings for the proposed Lightning Protection System with detailed
calculations including risk analysis.

7. Detailed drawings for the proposed Solar PV System with detailed calculations and the
design of the mounting structure.

8. List of offered makes, brands for all main equipment (as specified in the list of
recommended manufacturers) with their country of manufacture.

9. Manufacturing experience of the each product manufacturer (as specified under

technical requirements).

10. Experience of the local agent in the projects of similar nature for all major
equipment (details of projects of last five years shall be submitted).

11. Type test certificates for Medium Voltage (MV) switchgears, MV 11kV power cables,
Dry type transformers. (if the power s yste m contains a MV s ystem )

12. Type test certificates for Low Voltage (LV) switchgears, circuit breakers, Solar PV
modules, Inverters and all other equipment as specified under technical
requirements.

13. ISO certificates for Medium Voltage (MV) switchgears, MV 11kV power cables, Dry
type transformers ) (if the power system contains a MV system), Low Voltage (LV)

346
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

switchgears, circuit breakers, Solar PV modules, Inverters, UPS system and all other
equipment as specified under technical requirements.

F.3.2.2.

Following documents shall be submitted by the contractor for the prior approval of the Engineer
during the Construction. All drawings shall be in A1 size and submitted in 03 set of copies and
one set of soft copy in a CD (consists of PDF version)

1. Detailed construction drawings shall be made available for the approval of Engineer prior
to start the works.

2. Conduit layouts (where applicable).

3. Shop drawings for the underground cable laying, MV switchgears, transformer

arrangements (if the power system contains a MV system), LV switchgears, standby power
system, UPS systems, lighting control systems, cable management systems, solar PV
systems and lightning protection system.

4. Ceiling coordination drawings with all services.

5. Prior approval shall be obtained from the Engineer for all materials, fittings and
accessories. Submission shall be made with actual samples (where applicable), technical
literature, shop drawings, production details such as country of manufacture, Brand names
etc.

6. Test certificates before importing/purchasing the items as specified under technical

requirements.

7. Required documents to be incorporated to obtain the green rating certification (If

required).

F.3.2.3.

Following documents shall be submitted by the contractor at the handing over. All drawings shall
be in A1 size and submitted in 03 set of copies and one set of soft copy in a CD (consists of PDF
version)

1. As-built drawings - After completion of the project, the contractor shall handover 03 sets
of A-1 size hard copies and one set of soft copy in a CD (consists of PDF version) of As-
built drawings to cover the entire electrical installation incorporating all the changes and
revisions.

347
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

2. Operation and maintenance manuals and relevant technical catalogues of equipment

installed in the building shall be handed over in triplicate.

3. Warranty certificates.

4. Complete set of test certificates including all system testing & commissioning
reports, factory acceptance test (FAT) reports and Chartered Engineer‟s Test
Reports etc.

F.4. WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINAGE

F.4.1. SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS ALONG WITH THE PROPOSAL

F.4.1.1.

Following document shall be submitted by the bidder along with the bid. All drawings shall be in
A4, A3 or A2 size.

1. Information related to Qualification of the contractor’s design team with CVs and letters
of acceptance (if applicable)

2. History of similar nature of projects undertaken by the bidder, including copy of awarding
and completion letters for the proof

3. Water supply, Wastewater disposal `and storm water disposal design concept according to
site condition and nature of the project including storage and treatment facilities

4. Estimated tentative water requirement (Preliminary demand) and discharge load for
different activities such as building drainage (sewage & wastewater load) and safety
purposes etc.

5. Proposed water supply system (portable and harvested rainwater distribution network) –
including; design calculations, equipment and material specifications, schematic and
preliminary drawings etc.

6. Proposed wastewater disposal system (internal and external up to KCWM connection) –

supported with design calculations, equipment and material specifications, schematic and
preliminary drawings etc.

7. Proposed storm water disposal system (internal and external) – design calculations,
equipment and material specifications, schematic and preliminary drawings etc.

348
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

8. Proposal for development of “Meda Ela’ – preliminary design calculations, equipment

and material specifications, schematic and preliminary drawings etc.

9. Proposed rainwater harvesting system - design calculations, filtration systems, equipment

and material specifications, schematic & preliminary drawings etc.

10. Proposed solid waste disposal system- design calculations, space allocation etc.

F.4.2.SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS AFTER THE AWARD OF THE CONTRACT

F.4.2.1.

Following document shall be submitted by the selected contractor for the prior approval of the
Engineer before execution of construction (during detailed design). All drawings shall be in A1 or
A2 size and submitted in 03 set of copies and one set of soft copy in a CD.

1. Detailed calculation for pipe sizing in water supply and distribution networks (pressure
flow) to suit delivery at the maximum peak demand during the day

2. Detailed calculation for pipe sizing for sewage and wastewater drainage networks (gravity
flow) to cater during the maximum peak flow during the day

3. Schematic diagrams of water supply system, sewage & wastewater disposal system and
storm water disposal system.

4. Detailed drawings for water supply, building drainage, rainwater harvesting and disposal
system, both internal and external.

5. List of all materials and equipment including specifications of offered makes, brands with
country of manufacture, local agent, warranty period, manufacturing experience, after sales
service warranty etc.

6. Coordination drawings for underground utilities such as; water supply, wastewater
disposal, storm water disposal, other services, structural elements, landscaping etc., to
support foundation and ground floor construction

7. Coordination drawings of upper floors where lateral water supply, wastewater and storm
water pipes interfere with other services viz., architectural features and structural elements.

8. Documents required for obtaining expected green rating (detailed calculations, drawings,
specifications and software simulations etc.) shall be furnished.

349
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

9. Detail design drawings and calculations for development of “Meda Ela’

10. Detailed report and drawings for solid waste management system shall be produced

11. Preliminary method statement for all the major activities shall be submitted.

F.4.2.2.

Following documents shall be submitted by the contractor for the prior approval of the Engineer
during the Construction. All drawings shall be in A1 or A2 size and submitted in 03 set of copies
and one set of soft copy in a CD.

1. Detailed construction drawings shall be made available for the approval of Engineer prior
to start the works.

2. Shop drawings for all pipe works, layout drawings for wastewater and storm water
drainage in ground floor and upper floors

3. Prior approval shall be obtained from the Engineer for all materials, fittings and
accessories. Submission shall be made with actual samples (where applicable), technical
literature, shop drawings, production details such as country of manufacture, Brand names
etc.

4. Test certificates before importing/purchasing the items as specified under technical

requirement.

5. Preliminary operation and maintenance manual before commence testing and

commissioning.

6. Detailed method statement for all activities.

F.4.2.3.

Following documents shall be submitted by the contractor at the handing over. All drawings shall
be in A1 size and submitted in 03 set of copies and one set of soft copy in a CD (consists of PDF
version)

1. As-built drawings - After completion of the project, the contractor shall handover 03 sets
of A-1 size hard copies and one set of soft copy in a CD(consists of PDF version) of As-
built drawings to cover the entire plumbing installation incorporating all the changes and
revisions.

2. Operation and maintenance manuals and relevant technical catalogues of equipment

installed in the building shall be handed over in triplicate.

350
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

3. Complete set of test certificates including all system testing & commissioning reports etc.

4. Certificates of warranties for all appliances, pumps waterproofing systems etc.

5. Detail of local agent for all the materials, fittings, machineries, accessories etc.

F.5. MECHANICAL

F.5.1. SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS ALONG WITH THE PROPOSAL

F.5.1.1. Submission of Documents and Drawings with the Proposal

Preliminary Technical Proposal for all Mechanical systems shall be consisting of followings;

 Design Concept

 Design Criteria, Calculation and Summary.

 Schematic deign drawings in both Soft (AutoCAD) and Hard (A2 Size) formats

 Floor layout drawings indicating all spaces for the Mechanical system such as Chiller plant
room locations, Fire pump room, AHU room, Mechanical shafts, Lift machine rooms, etc.)

 Sectional & Elevations drawings as necessary

 Equipment Selection criteria including electrical power requirements, water requirement

etc.

 Make/ Brand of Proposed Equipment.

 Proposed Maintenance Agreements for each Mechanical systems.

F.5.1.1.1. Air Conditioning and Ventilation System

The following information shall be submitted with the technical proposal for Air Conditioning and
Ventilation system.

 Design Concept report

 Schematic drawings, Zoning strategies, etc.

 Cooling load calculation report generated by reputed licensed HVAC software.

 Major Equipment Selections: Chiller capacities, Pump capacities, AHUs, Cooling towers
etc.

 Floor layout drawings indicating single line duct & pipe paths, with dimensions, equipment
locations, chiller plant room size, AHU room sizes, Mechanical shaft sizes, etc.

351
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

F.5.1.1.2. Fire Protection and Detection System

The following information shall be submitted with the technical proposal for Fire Protection and
Detection system.

 Design Concept report together with Schematic drawings, Zoning strategies, etc.

 Design calculations: Sprinkler system and Wet riser system, Detection control panel
selection calculation, etc.

 Required Fire water sump capacity

 Major Equipment Selections: Pump capacities, Detection Control Panels, etc.

 Floor layout drawings indicating Fire pump rooms, equipment locations, etc.

F.5.1.1.3. Elevator and Escalator System

The following information shall be submitted with the technical proposal for Elevator and
Escalator system.

 Traffic calculation report

 Schematic drawings together with Zoning strategies and indicating pit and overhead
heights

 Major Equipment Selections : No of Passenger and Fire Lifts, No of Escalators

 Floor Layout drawings indicating Lift shaft sizes, lifts Machine room sizes and Escalators.

F.5.1.1.4. Building Management System

The following information shall be submitted with the technical proposal for Building
Management system.

 Design Concept report

 Schematic Drawings/ BMS architecture diagram

 Point Lists (Schedules)

 Major Equipment Selections

352
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

F.5.1.1.5. Fuel Pumping System

The following information shall be submitted with the technical proposal for Fuel Pumping
System

 Design Concept report together with Schematic drawings, special safety requirements etc.

 Calculations: Verify the adequacy of fuel sump capacities.

 Major Equipment Selections: Verify required dispenser units, capacity of dispenser pumps
etc.

 Floor Layout drawings indicating sump and dispenser units locations, piping arrangement
etc.

F.5.1.1.6. Centralized LP Gas Distribution and Detection system

The following information shall be submitted with the Preliminary technical proposal for
Centralized LP Gas Distribution and Detection system

 Design Concept report together with Schematic drawings, special safety requirements, etc.

 Design calculations: Gas bank sizing

 Floor layout drawings indicating location of gas bank, gas outlet locations and location of
detector points.

Table F.1: Documents and Details Expected With the Proposal

Mechanical Drawing Type Drawing Title/ Location ** Required Details

System
Schematic Drawing Chilled Water Distribution General arrangement
System of the system,
Air Conditioning and Ventilation System

Equipment Locations
etc
Smoke Extraction System
Floor Layout Under Pass Level Terminal Single line duct &
Drawings Building, pipe paths, with
Ground Floor Parking dimensions,
Building, equipment locations
First Floor Sky etc.
Second Floor Walk,
Fuel
Roof Top Level Station
Plant Room Chiller Plant Rooms Chiller plant room
Drawings size, AHU room

353
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

Mechanical Drawing Type Drawing Title/ Location ** Required Details

System
AHU Rooms sizes, Mechanical
shaft sizes, etc.
General arrangement
Cooling Tower Area of the plant room
including required
dimensions etc.
Schematic Drawing Fire Protection System General arrangement
of the system,
Fire Detection System
Equipment Locations
Inert Gas System etc.
Fire Detection and Protection System

Water Mist System

Kitchen Suppression System
Floor Layout Under Pass Level Terminal Single line pipe paths,
Drawings Building, with dimensions,
Ground Floor
Parking equipment locations
First Floor Building, etc.
Second Floor Sky
Walk,
Roof Top Level Fuel
Station
Plant Room Fire Pump Room Fire Pump Room size,
Drawings general arrangement
of the pump room
with required
dimensions etc.
Schematic Drawing Elevators and Escalators Zoning strategies and
Elevator and System Escalator

indicating pit and

overhead heights etc.
Floor Layout Elevators and Escalators Lift shaft sizes, floor
levels, required
openings and
arrangement of
Escalators etc.
Plant Room Lift Machine Rooms Lifts Machine room
Drawings sizes and
arrangements etc.
Schematic Drawing Connectivity between Location of DDCs,
Management
Building

management Level and BMS workstation,

System

Automation Level supervisory panels,

connectivity wirings
etc.
Schematic Drawing Fuel Piping System General arrangement
ing
mp

ste
Fu

Pu

Sy

m
el

of the system,

354
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

Mechanical Drawing Type Drawing Title/ Location ** Required Details

System
location of equipment
etc.
Floor Layout Fuel Station Sump and dispenser
Drawings. units locations, piping
arrangement etc

Schematic Drawing Gas Distribution System General arrangement

Centralized LP Gas Distribution

of the system,
Floor Layout Gas Detection System
location of equipment
and Detection system

Drawings.
etc.

Floor layout Gas Bank Location Location of gas bank

drawings and general
arrangement etc.
Kitchen Area Gas outlet locations
and location of
detector points etc.

** Note: No. of floors and architectural arrangement can be varied. Services shall be provided as
per the finalized architectural arrangements.

F.5.2. SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS & DRAWINGS AFTER THE AWARD OF THE

CONTRACT

The Contractor shall make and furnish three copies of each of the followings for the approval of
Engineer but not be limited to those,

 Schematic drawings

 Design drawings

 Material Submittals

 Samples of Materials

 Design Calculations

 Analysis

 Shop Drawings (Working Drawings) and Coordination Drawings

 Detail Drawings

 Schematic & Interconnection Diagrams

355
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

 Method statements

 Certificate of Compliance/Test Reports Electrical Control Diagrams

 Testing and commissioning sheets formats.

F.5.2.1. Material Submittals

Material submittals shall include,

 Test reports and quality certificates

 Warranty /Guaranty period

 Selection data

 Capacity and electrical data

 Dimensional and schematics drawings

 Assembling and dismantling data

 Project references

 Other relevant information to determine the adequacy and suitability of the equipment for
the proposed systems

F.5.2.2. Selection Data

Selection data shall consist of engineering selection details/Tables provided by the manufacturer
for the performances and all other related required details (acoustics data etc.).

 Contractor shall indicate in these details/Tables, the items/Model selected and their
designation.

 It shall be made quite clear as to which factors have been taken into account by the
manufacturer to correct the listed gross capacity into the net capacity required, due to
extreme outside temperature, altitude, enthalpy of entering and leaving air, fan required,
fan static pressure, fan RPM, fan motor and temperature differential between supply air
entering and return air leaving the room.

F.5.2.3. Shop Drawings

Shop drawings of all systems, sub systems electrical circuit and wiring diagram and any other
drawings necessary for fabrication and installation of the system shall be supplied to the Engineer

356
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

to determine the adequacy and suitability of the layouts of the proposed air conditioning &
ventilation system. In addition contractor shall submit and obtain necessary approvals for
coordination drawings, wherever required.

F.5.2.4. Samples

Samples of all materials to be supplied under the proposed Work such as pipes, insulating materials
and multiple fittings such as valves, strainers, electric components shall be supplied to the
Engineer for approval. Such samples shall be kept with the Engineer until completion of the works
and same will be released to the contractor on completion of Work. The items of supplies used for
the project shall be equal to the approved sample. Operation and maintenance manuals shall
consist of, but not necessarily be limited to the,

 Detailed diagrams of the all plant and equipment supplied, including, electrical supply,
ducting, piping, valve arrangements, etc.

 Instructions of the regular maintenance of the equipment

 Frequency of lubrication and specifications of the lubricants recommended shall also be

provided.

 All manuals should be printed, and ring bound with hard cover.

 A schedule which may be in the form of a material list giving all particulars together with
ordering references of all replaceable parts for all the equipment which will be supplied

As Built Drawings

 On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall prepare a set of As-built Drawings
incorporating all changes made to the original design and drawings, which shall represent
an accurate description of the installed systems.

 These drawings shall be bound with covers in to an album and handed over to the Engineer

F.5.3. SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS & DRAWINGS DURING THE HANDING OVER

– HANDING OVER DOCUMENT

The final handing over documents to be submitted by the Contractor on completion of the
installation shall comprise the following:

 Maintenance and Operation Manuals (5 Copies)

 Commissioning Sheets (5 Copies)

357
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

 Test Reports (5 Copies)

 As Built Drawings (5 Copies and 5 soft copies in CD)

 Guarantee/ Warranty certificates (5 Copies)

 A building owner's manual. (5 Copies)

 A building user's guide (5 Copies)

 A construction stage report (5 Copies)

The all documents shall be bound with covers on to an album and handed over to the engineer.

F.6. ROADS

F.6.1.SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS AFTER THE AWARD OF THE

CONTRACT

F.6.1.1.

Following documents shall be submitted by the contractor for the prior approval of the engineer
during the Construction. All drawings shall be in A1 size and submitted in 03 set of copies
and one set of soft copy in a CD (consists of CAD versions and PDF version)

 Road Layout Plan

 Plan Profile details
 Setting out details
 Typical Road Cross Sections
 Bus Route with bus-stop locations
 Road signs and markings
 Standard Details
 Road pavement details
 Road storm water drainage details
 Road finish levels including setting out details of Road edges/ drain Edges /center
medians etc. should be provided
F.6.1.2.

Geometric design reports and Pavement detail design report to be submitted.

358
Section VII F. Documents & Details Expected with the Proposal &after awardng of the Contract

359
360